Number: LIBRARY Trinity College Durham, N. C. Digitized by the Internet Archive in 2016 with funding from Duke University Libraries https://archive.org/details/collegealgebrafo01bows S3 ; ,»« v m# ’ Vr vjt^f . >'• X^'- , ’ |l' Jbit.l BOWSER’S MATHEMATICS ACADEMIC ALGEBRA. With numerous Examples. COLLEGE ALGEBRA. With numerous Examples. PLANE AND SOLID GEOMETRY. With numerous Exer- cises. AN ELEMENTARY TREATISE ON ANALYTIC GEOMETRY, embracing Plane Geonietrj-, and an Introduction to Geometry of Three Dimensions. AN ELEMENTARY TREATISE ON THE DIFFERENTIAL AND INTEGRAL CALCULUS. With numerous Ex- amples. AN ELEMENTARY TREATISE ON ANALYTIC MECHANICS. With numerous Examples. AN ELEMENTARY TREATISE ON HYDROMECHANICS. With numerous Examples. COLLEGE ALGEBRA, FOR THE USE OF ACADEMIES, COLLEGES, AND SCIENTIFIC SCHOOLS. WITH NUMEROUS EXAMPLES. BY EDWARD A. BjOWSER, LL.D., PROFESSOR OF MATHEMATICS AND ENGINEERING IN RDTGERS COLLEGE. FIFTH EDITION. b~ H 7 9 BOSTON, U.S.A.: D. C. HEATH & CO., PUBLISHERS. 1894. Copyright, 1888, By E, a. bowser. \ ISTortnooS Iptcss; Berwick & Smith, Boston, U.S.A. i )'! "^,0 E 5 PREFACE. The present work is designed as a test-book for Acade- mies, Colleges, and Scientific Schools. The book is com- plete in itself ; it begins at the beginning of the subject ; and the full treatment of the earlier parts renders it unnecessary that students who use it shall have previously studied a more elementary Algebra. The aim has been to explain the principles in as concise and simple a manner as was consistent with clearness and careful accuracy, and to discuss all the elementary parts of the subject as completely as possible within the limits of a single volume. Copious illustrations have been given to make the work intelligible and interesting to young students ; and numerous explanatory notes have been all along inserted, to guard the pupil against the errors to which experience shows he is liable. Sturm’s theorem has been omitted, because it has no application in the usual course of mathe- matical study, and because the mental power of the student can be spent more profitably on other branches of mathe- matics. In the earlier chapters, some of the most interesting practical applications of the subject have been introduced. Thus, a chapter on easy equations and problems precedes the chapters on Factoring and Fractions. By this course the beginner soon becomes acquainted with the ordinary Alge- braic processes without encountering too many difficulties : and he is at the same time deriving the pleasure which a 7 9 V vi PREFACE. student always feels in using his knowledge to some practical end. Throughout the book are numerous examples fully worked out, to illustrate the most useful applications of important rules, and to exhibit the best methods of arranging the work. No principle is well learned by a pupil and thoroughly fixed in his mind till he can use it. For this purpose a very large number of examples is given at the ends of the chapters. These examples have been selected and arranged so as to illustrate and enforce every part of the subject. Each set has been carefully graded, commencing with some which are veiy easy, and proceeding to others which are more difficult. Complicated examples have been excluded, because they consume time and energy which may be otherwise spent more profitably. The numerous examples are given for the convenience of the teacher, that he may have, year by year, in using the book, a sufficient variety from which to select, and so avoid routine, rather than to require any one pupil to do them all. In preparing this work I have consulted the writings of some of the best authors. The chief sources from which I have derived assistance are the Treatises of Wood, De Morgan, Serret, Hind, Young, Todhunter, Colenzo, Hall and Knight, Smith, Chrystal, .and Whitworth. It remains for me to express my thanks to those of my friends who have kindly assisted me in reading and correct- ing the proof-sheets and verifying copy. My especial thanks are due to my old pupil. Prof. R. W. Prentiss of the Nautical Almanac Office, for reading the MS., and for valuable suggestions. Rutgers College, New Brunswick, N.J., May, 188S. E. A. B. TABLE OF CONTENTS. CHAPTER I. FIRST PRINCIPLES. ART. PAGE 1. Quantity and its Measure 1 2. Number 1 3. Mathematics 2 4. Algebra 2 0 . Algebraic Symbols 2 6. Symbols of Quantity 2 7. Symbols of Operation 3 8. The Sign of Addition 3 9. The Sign of Subtraction 3 10. The Sign of Multiplication 4 11. The Sign of Division 5 12. The Exponential Sign 6 13. The Radical Sign 7 14. Symbols of Relation 7 15. Symbols of Abbreviation 8 16. Algebraic Expressions 9 17. Factor — Coefficient 11 18. A Term, its Dimensions, and Degree — Homogeneous ... 12 19. Simple and Compound Expressions 13 20. Positive and Negative Quantities 13 21. Additions and Multiplications Made in any Order .... 17 22. Suggestions for the Student in Solving Examples .... 18 Examples 18 CHAPTER IT. ADDITION. 23. Addition — Algebraic Sum 21 24. To Add Terms which are Like and have Like Signs ... 21 25. To Add Terms which are Like, but have Unlike Signs . . 22 26. To Add Terms which are not all Like Terms 22 27. Remarks on Addition 23 Examples 24 vii VIU CONTENTS. CHAPTER III. SUBTRACTION. ART. PAGE 28. Subtraction — Algebraic Difference . . ' 20 29. Rule for Algebraic Subtraction 26 30. Remarks on Addition and Subtraction 29 •31. The Use of Parentheses .30 32. Plus Sign before the Parenthesis 31 33. Minus Sign before the Parenthesis 31 34. Compound Parentheses 32 Examples 33 CHAPTER IV. MULTIPLICATION. 35. Multiplication .38 36. Rule of Signs 38 37. The Multiplication of Monomials 41 38. To Multiply a Polynomial by a Monomial 42 39. Multiplication of a Polynomial by a Polynomial 4;l 40. Multiplication by Inspection 48 41. Special Forms of Multiplication — Formulte 49 42. Important Results in Multiplication 53 43. Results of Multiplying Algebraic Expressions 54 Examples 55 CHAPTER V. DIVISION. 44. Division 58 45. The Division of one Monomial by Another 58 40. The Rule of Signs 60 47. To Divide a Polynomial by a Monomial ........ 61 48. To Divide one Polynomial by Another 61 49. Division with the Aid of Parentheses 67 50. Where the Division cannot be Exactly Performed .... 67 51. Important Examples in Division 68 Examples 69 CONTENTS. IX CHAPTER VI. SIMPLE EQUATIONS OF ONE UNKNOWN QUANTITY. IkRT. PAGE .52. Equations — Identical Equations 5.3. Equation of Condition — Unknown Quantity .54. Axioms 55. Clearing of Fractions 56. Transposition 57. Solution of Simple Equations with one Unknown Quantity . 58. Fractional Equations 59. To Solve Equations whose Coefficients are Decimals . . . 60. Literal Equations 61. Problems Leading to Simple Equations Examples 72 72 73 74 75 76 79 81 81 83 89 CHAPTER VII. FACTORING — GREATEST COMMON DIVISOR LEAST COMMON ' MULTIPLE. 62. Definitions 96 63. When All the Terms Have one Common Factor 96 64. Expressions Containing Four Terms 97 65. To Factor a Trinomial of the Form ax h .... 99 66. To Factor a Trinomial of the Form ax^ + 5x + c . . . . 101 67. To Factor the Difference of Two Squares 104 68. When One or Both of the Squares is a Compound Expression 105 69. Compound Quantities as the Difference of Two Squares . . 106 70. To Factor the Sum or the Difference of Two Cubes . . . 107 71. Miscellaneous Cases of Resolution into Factors 107 Examples 108 GREATEST COMMON DIVISOR. 72. Definitions Ill 73. Monomials, and Polynomials which can be Easily Factored . Ill 74. Expressions which cannot be Easily Factored 113 Examples 115 X CONTENTS. LEAST COMMON MULTIPLE. ART. PAGE 75. Definitions 120 70. Monomials, and Polynomials which can he Easily Factored . 121 77. Expressions which cannot he Easily Factored 123 Examples 125 CHAPTER VIII. FRACTIONS. 78. A Fraction — Entire and Mixed Quantities 128 79. To Reduce a Fraction to its Lowest Terms 129 80. To Reduce a Mixed Quantity to the Form of a Fraction . . 132 81. d'o Reduce a Fraction to an Entire or Mixed Quantity . . . 133 82. To Reduce Fractions to their Least Common Denominator . i:34 83. Rule of Signs in Fractions 135 84. Addition and Subtraction of Fractions 1.38 85. To Multiply a Fraction by an Integer 144 86. To Divide a Fraction by an Integer 144 87. To Multiply Fractions 145 88. To Divide Fractions 147 89. Complex Fractions 148 90. A Single Fraction Expressed as a Group of Fractions . . . 151 Examples 152 CHAPTER IX. HARDER SIMPLE EQUATIONS OF ONE UNKNOWN QUANTITY. 91. .Solution of Harder Equations 157 92. Harder Problems Leading to Simple Equations 161 Examples 170 CHAPTER X. SIMULT.YNEOUS SIMPLE EQUATIONS OF TIVO OR MORE UNKNOWN QUANTITIES. 93. Simultaneous Equations of Two Hukiiown Quantities . . 179 94. Elimination 181 95. Elimination by Addition or Subtraction 181 CONTENTS. xi ART. PAGE 96. Elimination by Substitution 185 97. Elimination by Comparison 186 98. Fractional Simultaneous Equations 188 99. Literal Simultaneous Equations 189 100. Simultaneous Equations with Three Unknown Quantities . 191 101. Problems Leading to Simultaneous Equations 196 Examples 202 CHAPTER XI. INDETERMINATE PROBLEMS DISCUSSION OF PROBLEMS — • INEQUALITIES. 102. Indeterminate Equations — Impossible Problems .... 211 103. Discussion of Problems — Negative Results 213 104. Interpretation of the Forms, — , — , - 216 0 00 0 105. Problem of the Couriers 218 INEQUALITIES. 106. Inequalities 221 Examples 225 CHAPTER XII. INVOLUTION AND EVOLUTION. 107. Involution 227 108. Involution of Powers of Monomials 227 109. Involution of Binomials 229 110. Involution of Polynomials 230 EVOLUTION. 111. Evolution — Evolution of Monomials 2.32 112. Square Root of a Polynomial 234 113. Square Root of Arithmetic Numbers 238 114. Square Root of a Decimal 240 115. Cube Root of a Polynomial 243 116. Cube Root of Arithmetic Numbers 246 116a. Cube Root of a Decimal 248 Examples 250 CONTENTS. xii CHAPTER XIII. THE THEORY OF EXPONENTS SURDS. ART. PAGB 117. Exponents that are Positive Integers 253 118. Fractional Exponents 2o? 119. Negative Exponents 2.5a 120. To Prove that (a™)” = a“’‘ is True for All Values of m and n 2-57 121. To Prove that (a5)" = for Any Value of n 2.58 SURDS (radicals). 122. Surds — Definitions 261 123. To Reduce a Rational Quantity to a Surd Form 262 124. To Introduce the Coefficient Under the Radical Sign . . . 262 125. To Reduce an Entire to a Mixed Surd 262 126. Reduction of Surds to Equivalent Surds 263 127. Addition and Subtraction of Surds 264 128. Multiplication of Siuds 265 129. To Rationalize the Denominator of a Fraction 267 130. Division of Surds 268 131. Binomial Surds — Important Propositions 269 132. Square Root of a Binomial Surd 270 133. Equations Involving Surds 272 Examples 273 CHAPTER XIV. QUADRATIC EQUATIONS OP ONE UNKNOAVN QUANTITY. 1.34. Quadratic Equations 280 135. Pure Quadratic Equations 280 1.36. Affected Quadratic Equations 282 137. Condition for Equal Roots 286 138. Hindoo Method of Completing the Square 288 139. Solving a Quadratic by Factoring 290 140. To Form a Quadratic when the Roots are Given 292 141. Equations Having Imaginary Roots 2f*4 142. Equations of Higher Degree than the Second 295 143. Solutions by Factoring 298 144. Problems Leading to Quadratic Equations 300 Examples 303 CONTENTS. xiii CHAPTER XV. SIMULTANEOUS QUADRATIC EQUATIONS. ART. PAGE 14.5. Simultaneous Quadratic Equations 311 146. When Oue of the Equations is of the First Degree . . . .311 147. Equations of the Form x ± y = a, and xy = b 312 148. When the Equations Contain a Common Algebraic Factor . 314 149. Homogeneous Equations of the Second Degree 316 150. When the T^yo Equations are Symmetrical 318 151. Special Methods 319 152. Quadratic Equations with Three Unknown Quantities . . 321 153. Problems Leading to Simultaneous Quadratic Equations . .321 Examples 324 CHAPTER XVI. RATIO PROPORTION VARIATION. 1.54. Ratio — Definitions 331 155. Properties of Ratios 333 PROPORTION. 156. Definitions 3.36 157. Properties of Proportions 337 VARIATION. 158. Definition • 342 1.59. Different Cases of Variation 343 160. Propositions in Variation 344 Examples 348 CHAPTER X^HI. ARITHMETIC, GEOMETRIC, AND HARJIONIC PROGRESSIONS. ARITHMETIC PROGRESSION. 161. Definitions — Eormulie .3.53 162. Arithmetic Mean 356 XIV CONTENTS. GEOMETRIC PROGRESSION. ART. PAGE 163. Definition — Formuloe . 3,59 164. Geometric Mean 361 165. The Sum of an Infinite Number of Terms 362 166. Value of a Repeating Decimal 364 HARMONIC PROGRESSION. 167. Definition .365 168. Plarmonic Mean 366 169. Relation between the Different Means 368 Examples 369 CHAPTER XVIII. .MATHEMATICAL INDUCTION CONTINUED FRACTIONS PERMUTATIONS AND COMBINATIONS. 170. Mathematical Induction — General Proofs of Theorems . . 374 CONTINUED FRACTIONS. 171. Definition .376 172. To Convert a Given Fraction into a Continued Fraction . . 376 173. The Convergents are Alternately too Great and too Small . 377 174. Law of Formation of the Successive Convergents .... 378 175. Difference between Two Consecutive Convergents .... 379 176. Limit of Error in Taking any Convergent 380 177. Approximate Value of a Quadratic Surd 383 178. Periodic Continued Fractions 384 PERJIIITATIONS AND COMBINATIONS. 179. Definitions 385 180. The Number of Permutations 386 181. The Number of Combinations 388 182. To Divide m + n Things into Two Classes 390 183. Permutations of 11 Things not all Different 391 Examples 392 CONTENTS. XV CHAPTER XIX. INDETERMINATE COEFFICIENTS PARTIAL FRACTIONS - BINOMIAL THEOREM. AKT. PAGE 184. Definitions 396 185. Indeterminate Coefficients 396 186. Development by Indeterminate Coefficients 397 PARTIAL FRACTIONS. 187. Partial Fractions. Case 1 401 188. Partial Fractions. Case II . 402 189. Partial Fractions. Case III. 403 BINOMIAL THEOREM. 190. Positive Integral Exponent 405 191. The or General Term of the Expansion ....... 408 192. Any Exponent 409 Examples 413 CHAPTER XX. SUMMATION OF SERIES, RECURRING SERIES. 193. Definition 416 194. The Scale of Relation being Given, to Find Any Term . . 417 195. To Find the Sum of n Terms of a Recurring Series .... 418 196. Series Summed by Means of Other Series 419 METHOD OF DIFFERENCES. 197. Definition — To Find Any Term of a Series 421 198. To Find the Sum of n Terms of Any Series . . . . . . 422 199. Piles of Cannon-Balls , 424 200. Interpolation 426 201. Reversion of Series 427 Examples 428 XVI CONTENTS. CHAPTER XXI. LOGARITHMS EXPONENTIAL AND LOGARITHMIC SERIES INTEREST AND ANNUITIES. LOGARITHMS. ART. PAGE 202. Definitions 43-3 203. Properties of Logaritlims 434 204. Comparison of Two Systems of Logarithms 4-36 205. Common System of Logarithms 437 206. Table of Logarithms 439 207. Exponential Equations 442 EXPONENTIAL AND LOGARITHMIC SERIES. 208. Exponential Series 443 209. Logarithmic Series 444 210. Computation of Logarithms 445 INTEREST AND ANTsMTTIES. 211. Simple Interest 447 212. Present Value and Discount 448 213. Compound Interest 449 214. Present Value and Discount 450 215. Annuities 452 216. The Amount of an Annuity 452 217. The Present Value of an Annuity 453 218. The Present Value of a Deferred Annuity 454 Examples 456 CHAPTER XXII. IMAGINARY QUANTITIES INDETERMINATE EQUATIONS — ^ THEORY OF NUMBERS. IMAGINARY QUANTITIES. 219. Definitions 460 220. Fundamental Principles 461 221. Geometric Meaning of the Imaginary Unit ...... 462 INDETERMINATE EQUATIONS. 222. Indeterminate Equations • . 464 CONTENTS. XVH THEORY OF NUMBERS. ART. PAGE 223. Scales of Notation 468 224. To Express a Whole Number in Any Proposed Scale . . . 470 225. Properties of Numbers in the Common System 472 226. Theorems in Relation to Numbers 474 Examples 47S CHAPTER XXIII. PROBABILITY (cHANCe). 227. Definition 481 228. Simple Events 483 229. Compoimd Events 485 230. Mutually Exclusive Events 488 231. Expectation 492 232. General Problem 492 Examples 494 CHAPTER XXIV. THEORY OF EQUATIONS. 233. General Equation of the Degree 497 234. Divisibility of Equations 498 235. Number of Roots 499 236. Relations between Coefficients and Roots 500 237. Fractional Roots 502 238. Imaginary Roots 502 239. Descartes’ Rule of Signs 503 240. Derived Functions 505 241. Equal Roots 507 TRANSFORMATION OF EQUATIONS. 242. Equation with Roots of Sign opposite those of f{x) = 0 . . 509 243. Equation with Roots Multiples of those of f(x) =0 ... 510 244. Equation with Roots Reciprocals of those of f(x) = 0 . . . 511 245. Equation with Roots Squares of those of f(x) = 0 . . . . 511 246. Equation with Roots Less than those of f[x) = 0 . . . . 512 247. Horner’s Method of Synthetic Division 513 248. Removal of Any Given Term 515 XVlll CONTENTS. LIMITS OF THE REAL ROOTS OF AN EQUATION. AET. PAGE 249. Definition .515 250. Superior Limit 516 251. Inferior Limit 51" 252. Limits between which the Roots separately Lie 518 Examples 519 CHAPTER XXV. SOLUTION OF HIGHER NUMERICAL EQUATIONS. 25.3. Commensurable Roots .523 254. Reciprocal Equations 525 2.55. Binomial Equations 527 2.56. Cardan’s Solution of a Cubic Equation 529 257. Incommensurable Roots .532 258. Horner’s Method of Approximation 532 259. Newton’s Method of Approximation .536 260. Approximation by Double Position 537 Examples 539 ALGEBRA CHAPTER I. FIRST PRINCIPLES. 1. Quantity and its Measure. — Quantity is any thing that is capable of increase, diminution, and measure- ment ; as time, space, motion, weight, and area. To measure a quantity is to find how many times it con- tains another quantity of the same kind, taken as a standard of comparison. This standard is called a unit. For example, if we wish to determine the quantity of a weifjht, we must take a unit ofioeifjht, such as a pound, or an ounce, and observe how many times it is contained in the quantity to be measured. If we wish to measure area, we must take a. unit of area, as a square foot, square yard, or acre, and see how many times it is contained in the area to be measured. So also, if we wish to measure the value of a sum of money, or any portion of time, we must take a unit of value, as a dollar or a sovereign, or a unit of time, as a day or a year, and see how many times it is contained in the quantity to be measured. 2. Number. — -The relation between any quantity and its unit is always expressed by a number ; a number therefore simply shows hoiv many times anj' quantity to be measured contains another quantity, arbitrarily assumed as the unit. All quantities, therefore, can be expressed by numbers. All numbers are concrete or abstract. A Concrete yumber is one in which the kind of quantity which it measures is expressed or understood ; as G books, 10 men, 4 days. 1 2 MATHEMATICS. — ALGEBRA. An Abstract Number is one in which the kind of quantity which it measures is not expressed ; as 6, 10, 4. The word quantity is often used with the same meaning as number. iSTumheis may be either whole or fractional. The word integer is often used instead of whole number. 3. Mathematics. — Mathematics is the science which treats of the measurement and relations of quantities. It is divided into two parts, Pure Mathematics and Mixed Mathematics. Pure Mathematics consists of the four branches, Algebra., Geometry., and Calculus. Mixed Mcdhematics is the application of Pure Mathematics to the Mechanic Arts. 4. Algebra. — ■ Algebra is that branch of Mathematics in which we reason about numbers b}’ means of symbols. The diTerent symbols used represent the numbers themselves, the manner in which they are related to one another, and the operations performed on them. In Arithmetic, numbers are represented by ten characters, called figures, which are variously combined according to certain rules, and which have but one single definite value. In Algebra, on the contrary, numbers are represented either by figures, as in Arithmetic, or by symbols which may have any value we choose to assign to them. 5. Algebraic Symbols. — The symbols emplo 3 'ed in Algelira are of four kinds : symbols of quantity, symbols of operation, symbols of relation, and svunbols of abbreviation. 6. Symbols of Quantity. — The sy7nbols of quantity may be any characters whatever, but those that are most commonh’ used are figures and the letters of the alphabet ; and as in the simplest mathematical problems there ara certain quantities given, in order to determine other quan- tities which are unknown, it is usual to represent the known quantities b}’ figures and b}' the first letters of the alphabet, a, b. c. etc. ; a', b'. c'. etc., read o jjrfme, b pi'ime. c p7-ime, etc. ; c(j, Jj, tq, etc., read a one, b one. c one. etc. ; while the SYMBOLS OF OPERATION. 3 unknown quantities are represented by the final letters of the alphabet, v, rc, y, 2 :, a;', y\ /, etc. Knoion Quantities are those whose values are given. Unknown Quantities are those whose values are required. Since all quantities can be expressed by numbers (Art. 2), it is only these numbers with which we are concerned, and the symbols of quantity, whether figures or letters, alwavs represent numbers. In Arithmetic a character has but one definite and invariable value, while in Algebra a symbol may stand for any quantity we choose to assign to it (Art. 4); but while there is no restriction as to the numerical values a symbol may represent, it is understood that in the same piece of work it keeps the same value throughout. Thus, when we say “ let a = 2,” we do not mean that a must have the value 2 always, but only in the particular example we are considering. Also, we may operate with symbols without assigning to them any particular value at all; and it is with such operations that Algebra is chiefly concerned. 7. Symbols of Operation. — The symbols of operation are the same in Algebra as in Arithmetic, or in any other branch of Mathematics, and are the following : 8. The Sign of Addition, +, is called plus. 'When placed before a number it denotes that the number is to be added. Thus, 6+3, read 6 pilus 3, means that 3 is to be added to 6 ; a + 6, read a p)lus 6, denotes that the number represented by b is to be added to the number represented by a ; or, more briefly, it denotes that b is to be added to a. If a represent 8, and b represent 5, then a + 6 represents 13. Similarly o + 6 + c, read a plus b joins c, denotes that we are to add & to a, and then add c to the result. 9. The Sign of Subtraction, — , is called minus. When placed before a number it denotes that the number is to be subtracted. Thus, a — b, read a mimis &, denotes that the number represented bj’ b is to be subtracted from the number represented by a ; or, more briefly, that b is to be subtracted from a. If a represent 8, and b represent 5, then a — b represents 3. 4 THE SIGN OF MULTIPLICATION. Similarly a — 5 — c, read a minus h minus c, denotes that we are to subtract h from a, and then subtract c from the result. If neither + nor — stands before a quantity, + is alwa}’s understood ; thus a means + a. Quantities which have the same sign, either + or — , are said to have like signs. Thus, + a and + b ho.ve like signs, also — a and — b ; but + a and — b have unlike signs. Note. — Although there are many signs used in Algebra, when the sign of a quantity is spoken of, it means the + or — sign which is prefixed to it; and when we speak of changing the signs of an expres- sion, it means that we are to change -j- to — and — to -|- wherever they occur. The sign ~ is sometimes used to denote the difference of two numbers when it is not known which of them is the greater. Thus, o ~ denotes the difference of the numbers represented by a and 6; and is equal to a — h, or b — a, according as a is greater or less than b; but this symbol ~ is very rarely required. 10. The Sign of Multiplication, x , is read into, or times, or multiplied by. AVhea placed between two numbers it denotes that they are to be multiplied together. Thus, a X b, read a into b, denotes that the number represented by a is to be multiplied by the number represented b}' b, or, more briefly, that a is to be multiplied by b, or that the two are to be multiplied together. The numbers to be multiplied together are called factors, and the result of the multiplica- tion is called a product. Thus 5, a, and b are the factors of the product b X a X b. If a represent 8, and b repre- sent 4, then a X b represents 32 ; a and b are the factors of the product a X b, or 8 and 4 are the factors of 32. Simi- larly a X b X c denotes the product of the numbers a, b, and c. If a represent 6, b represent 8. and c represent 10, then a X b X c represents 480, and b X a X b X c repre- sents 2400. Sometimes a pomf is used instead of the sign X ; or. still more commonly, one number is placed close after the other THE SIGN OF DIVISION. 5 without any sign between them. Thus, a X b, a-b, and ab all mean the same thing, viz., the product of a and b ; also, a X b X c, or a ■ b • c, ov abc, denotes the product of the numbers a, b, and c. If a, b, aud c represent 2, 5, and 10 respectively, then abc represents 100. If one factor of a product is equal to 0, the whole product must be equal to 0, tuhatever values the other factors may have. A factor 0 is sometimes called a “zero factor.” * The sign of multiplication must not be omitted when num- bers are expressed in the ordinary way by figures. Thus 23 cannot be used to represent the product of 2 and 3, because 23 is used to mean the number twenty-three. Nor can the product of 2 aud 3 be represented bv 2.3, because 2.3 is used to mean tioo and three-tenths. We must therefore represent the product of 2 aud 3 by placing the sign of multiplication between them, as follows : 2 X 3. When the numbers to be multiplied together are repi’esented by letters, or by letters and a figure, it is usual to omit the sign of multiplication for the sake of brevity, and write them in succession close to each other ; thus, the product of the numbers 7, o, &, c, and d would be written labcd, instead Ox 7 X a X b X c X d, or 7 • a ■ b ■ c • d., and would have the same meaning. 11. The Sign of Division, is read divided by, or simply by. When placed between two numbers, it denotes that the number which precedes it is to be divided by the number which follows it. Thus, a -h b, read a divided by b, or a by b, denotes that the number represented by a is to be divided by the number represented by 6, or, more briefly, that a is to be divided by b. If a represent 8, and b repre- sent 2, then a -=- & represents 4. Most frequentl}’, to express division, the number to be divided is placed over the other * It is a common mistake of beginners to say that an Algebraic expression like a X 0 or 0 X rt is equal to a, by supposing it to mean a not multiplied at all ; whereas a X 0 or 0 X « signifies 0 taken a limes, or a taken 0 times, and is therefore equal 6 THE EXPONENTIAL SIGN. with a horizontal line between them, in the manner of a fraction in Arithmetic. Thus, - is used instead ot a At h, h and has the same meaning. Also, the sign of division ma}' be replaced by a vertical line, straight or curved. Thus, a|6, or b)a is used instead of a a- b, and has the same meaning. Note. — It is important for the student to notice the order of the operations in such expressions as a + x c and a — h -p c. The former means that h is first to be multiplied by c, and the result added to a. The latter means that b is first to be divided by c, and the result subtracted from a. 12. The Exponential Sign. — This sign is a small fig- ure or letter written at the right of and above a number to show how many times the number is taken as a factor, and is called an exponent. Thus, cr is used to denote a X «. or that a is taken twice as a factor ; o® is used to denote a x a X a, or that a is taken three times as a factor ; cd is used to denote a x o X a x a, or that a is taken four times as a factor; and rt" is used to denote a X a X a X a. etc., to 11 factors, or that a is taken n times as a factor. .Similarh’ is used to denote aabbbbcddd, and la^cd- is used for laaacdd. If a factor be multiplied by itself any number of times the product is called a power of that factor. Thus, a X a is called the second power of a, and is written a-; a X c( X n is called the third power of a, and is written o®; « X n X a X a is called the fourth power of a, aud is written a*; and so on. Similarly aaabbc is called the product of the third power of a, the second power of &, and c, and is written cdb'-c. The second power of a, i.e., cr, is usually read a to the second jiotver, or a square. The third power of a. i.e., n®, is usuallj’ read a to the third poioer, or a cube. There are no such words in use for the higher powers ; the foui th power of a, i.e., a^ is usually read a to the fourth power. THE RADICAL SIGN — SYMBOLS OF RELATION. 7 or briefly, a fourth power ; and so on. AVhen the exponent is unity it is omitted. Thus we do not write a^, but simply a, which is the same as a^, and means a to the first poioer. 13. The Radical Sign, V . — A root of a quantity is a factor, which, multiplied by itself a certain number of times, will produce the given quantity. The square root of a quantity is that quantity wliose square or second power is equal to the given quantity. Thus the square root of 16 is 4, because 4- is equal to 16 ; the square root of ie a, of 81 is 9. The square root of a is denoted b}' or more simply \fa. Similarly the cube, fourth, fifth, etc., root of any quantity is that quantity whose third, fourth, fifth, etc., power is ecpial to the given quantity. The roots are denoted by the symbols y , V ? V i etc. ; thus, ^27a® denotes the cube root of 21a^, which is 3a, j)ecause 3a to the third power is 27a^. Similarly ^^32 is 2. The small figure placed on the left side of the symbol is called the bidex of the root. Thus 2 is the index of the square root, 3 of the cube root, 4 of the fourth root, and so on ; the index, however, is generally omitted in denoting the square root ; thus \/a is written instead of pa. The symliol V is sometimes called the radical sign. When this sign with the proper index on the left side of it is placed over a quantity it denotes that some root of the quantity is to be extracted. 14. Symbols of Relation. — The symbols of relation are the following : The sign of equality, =, is read equals, or is equal to. AVhen placed between two numbers, it denotes that they are equal to each other. Thus a — b, read a equals b, or a is equal to b, denotes that the number represented by a is equal to the number represented by b ; or, more briefly, that a equals b. And a + b = c denotes that the sum of the 8 SYMBOLS OF ABBREVIATION. numbers a and h is equal to the number c ; so that if a represent 8 and h represent 4, then c must represent 12. The signs of inequality., > and <, are read is greater than, and is less than, respectively. When either is placed between two numbers it denotes that they are unequal to eacli other, the opening of the angle in both cases being turned towards the greater number. Thus a > b, read a, is greater than h, denotes that the number a is greater than the numl^er b, and b < a, read b is less than a, denotes that the number b is less than the number a. The sign of ratio, : , is read is to or to. When placed between two numbers it denotes their ratio. Thus a : b, read a is to b, or the ratio of a to b, denotes the ratio of the number a to the number b. A proportion, or two equal ratios, is expressed l)y writing the sign = or the sign : : between two equal ratios. Thus a : b — c : d, or a : b : : c : d, read a is to b as c is to d, or the ratio of a to b equals the ratio of c to d. The sign of variation, a , is read varies as. When placed between two numbers it denotes that the}’ increase and decrease together, in the same ratio. Thus x a y, read x varies as y, denotes that x and y increase and decrease together. 15. Symbols of Abbreviation. — The symbols of abbre- viation are the following : The signs of deduction, .-. is read hence or therefore, and •.■ is read since or because. The signs of aggregcdion are the bar \ , the parenthesis ( ), the bracket [ ] , the brace ^ \ , and the vincidum . These are emploA cd to connect two or more numbers which are to be treated as if they formed one number. Thus, suppose we have to denote that the sum of a and b is to be multiplied by c; we denote it thus (a + h) X c or 4- X c, or simpl}' (n + 6) c or \a b\ c; here we mean that the tvhole of a + & is to be multiplied by c. If we omit the ALGEBRAIC EXPRESSIONS. 9 parenthesis, or brace, we have a + 6c, and this denotes that 6 only is to be multiplied by c and the result added to a. Also (a + 6 + c) X (d + e) denotes that the result expressed by a + 6 + c is to be multiplied by the result ex- pressed by d + e. This ma}’ also be denoted simpl}- thus (a -|- 6 -f c) (d -f- e), just as a x 6 is shortened into g 6. If we omit the parenthesis we have a + 6 + cd -f- e, and this denotes that c only is to be multiplied b3’ d only, and the result added to a + 6 + e. Also V (a + 6 + c) denotes that we are to obtain the result expressed by a + 6 + c, and then take the square root of this result. Also (a6)^ denotes ah X ab ; and («6)® denotes abxabx ab. Also (a -f- 6 4- c) H- (d + e) denotes that the result ex- pressed by a -b 6 + c is to be divided b}' the result expressed by d e. This maj" also be expressed by the bracket thus [a -f- 6 -t- c] H- [d -b e] , or the brace ^a + 6-bc^-^-jd-be^, , a "b 6 ~b c or the vinculum a -4- 6 -b c d -b e, or 5 — ; , where ' ' ’ d -f e ’ the line between the numerator and denominator acts as a vinculum. The signs of continuation are dots , or dashes ■ , and are read and so on. 16. Algebraic Expressions. — The four kinds of sym- bols which have been explained are called Algebraic symbols (Art. 5). Any collection of Algebraic sjunbols is called an Algebraic expression, or briefly, an expression. Thus 4a -b 56 — c -b X is an expression ; 36 -b 4c is the Alge- braic expression for 3 times the number 6 increased b}’ 4 times the number c. The numerical value of an expression is the number obtained by giving a particular value to each letter, and then performing the operations indicated. We shall now give some examples in finding the numerical values of expressions, as an exercise in the use of the symbols which have been explained. 10 EXAMPLES. EXAMPLES. If a = 1, 6 = 2, c = 3, d = 4, e = 5, find the numerical values of the following expressions : 1. 9a + + 3c — 2d. Here we have 9a + 26 + 3c — 2cZ = 9x14-2x2 + 3x3 — 2x4 = 9 + 4 + 9- 8 = 14 Ans. 2. 7ae + 36c + 9d. Here we have Toe + 36c + 9d = 7x1X0 + 3x2x3 + 9x4 = 89 Ans. 3. ahcd + ahce + ahde + acde + bcde. Has. 274. . 4ac , 86c bed „ b d e ^ ede obed bade ab ae be If a = 1, 6 = 3, c = 5, and d = 0, find the numerical values of the following : 6. + 26" + 3c'- + 4d-. Has. 94. 7. a* - 40^6 + Ga-6'- - 4a6^ + 6h 1C. Q 12a® — b- , 2c- a + b- + c® r 3a'“ a + b- 56® If a = 1, b = 2, c = 3, d — 0 , and e = 8, find the numerical values of the following : 9. b-{a~ + e'® — c~). Ans. 224. 10. s/1^2b + 4d + 5e). 8. 11. (a® + b- + c'-) (e‘® — d- — c'-). 420. 12. e- ^V^(e + l)+2< + (e-'ye)vA(e-4). 15. 13. Find the value of x- — 2x — 9 when x = 5. Explanation. — If a; = any number, as for example, 5, then (which = X - x) = 5a;, .x® (which = x -x-) = oa:^, .H (which =x - x^) — ox®, etc. Hence examples like 13 may be solved as follows: Explaxatiox. X- — 2.x — 9 when x = 5. x- =z ox X® = ox 5x — 2x = 3x 3x = 15 3x - 9 = 15 — 9 = 6. 3x = 15 6 = result. FACTOR — COEFFICIENT. 11 14, Find the value of a:®— oOa;'*— 49a;®— lOOa:^— 101a: — 50, when X - - 51 . These examples may be conveniently solved as follows: X® — 50x* — 49x® — lOOx- — lOlx — 50 51 + 61 + 51 + 102 + 102 + 51 + x'* + 2x® + 2x2+ x+ 1 result is 1. 15. Find the value of a;^ — llx® — 11a;® — 11a; — 11 for X = 12. Ans. 1. 16. Find the value of x* — 8x^ — 19x^ — 9x — 8 for X = 10. Ans. 2 17, Factor — CoeSBcient. — When two or more num- bers are multiplied together the result is called the product, and each of the numbers multiplied together to form the product is called a factor of the product (Art. 10). Thus, 3x4x5 = 60, and each of the numbers 3, 4, and 5 is a factor of the product 60. Factors expressed by letters are called literal factors ; factors expressed by figures are called numerical factors. Thus, in the product 4a5, 4 is called a numerical factor, while a and b are called literal factors. The proof is given in Arithmetic that it is immaterial in what order the factors of a product are written ; it is usual, however, to arrange them in alphabetic order. The numerical factor is called the coefficient of the remain- ing factors. Thus in the expression 4a6, 4 is the coefficient., and denotes that ab is taken 4 times. But it is sometimes convenient to consider any factor, or factors, of a product as the coefficient of the remaining factors. Thus, in the prodnct 5a6c, 5a may be appropriately called the coefficient of be, or 5o5 the coefficient of c. The coefficient is called numerical or literal, according as it is a number, or one or more letters. Thus, in the quantities 5.'c and mx, 5 is a numerical and m a literal coefficient. When no numerical coefficient is expressed, 1 is always understood. Thus, a is the same as la. A coefficient placed before any parenthesis indicates that 12 A TERM, ITS DIMENSIONS, AND DEGREE. every term of the expression within the parenthesis is to be multiplied by that coefficient. Care must be taken to distinguish between a coefficient and an exponent. Thus 4a means four times a, or a + o + o, + n ; here 4 is a coefficient. But a* means a times a times a times a, or a X a X a X a, or aaaa (Art. 12). That is, if a = 4, 4a = 4 X a = 4 X 4 = 16, but a^ = axaxaxa = 4x4x4x4 = 256. 18. A Term, its Dimensions, and Degree — Homo- geneous — Similar. — A term is an Algebraic expression in which no two of the parts are connected b}’ the sign of addition or subtraction. Thus 4«, ocrbc, and ixy oab are terms. 2a, 4c'\Z, and —ba^cl are the terms of the expression 2a + 4cAZ — oahl. Each of the literal factors of a term is called a dimension of the term, and the number of the literal factors or dimensions is called the decree of the term. Thus d-bh or aabbbc is said to be of six dimensions or of the sixth degree, because it contains six literal factors, viz., a twice, b three times, and c once. A numerical coefficient is not counted ; thus a-5® and 5a"5® are of the same degree, i.e., the fifth degree, since there are five literal factors, viz., a twice and b three times. It is clear that the degree of a term, or the number of its dimensions, is the sum of the exponents of its litercd factors, provided wm remember that if no exponent be expressed 1 must be understood (Art. 12). Thus aW' is of the ninth degree, since 3 -f- 4 + 2 = 9. Terms are homogeneous when they are of the same degree. Thus a%, a-b'-, 3ab^, are homogeneous. Terms are similar or like when they have the same literal part, i.e., when they have the same letters and the coire- sponding letters affected with the same exponents. Other- wise they are said to l^e unlike. Thus, tiie terms oa^b~, 5a®6'% and — a®5'- are similar, or like; but the terms a~b and SIMPLE AND COMPOUND EXPRESSIONS. 13 aV are unlike., since, although the letters are the same, they are not raised to the same power. 19. Simple and Compound Expressions. — A simple expression consists of only one term, as bab, and is called a monomial. A compound expression consists of two or more terms, and is called a polynomial, or multinomial. A binomial is a polynomial of two terms. Thus, ci6'^ + 2ac is a binomial. A trinomicd is a polynomial of three terms. Thus, a + 6 — c is a trinomial. A polynomial is said to be homogeneous when all its terms are of the same degree. Thus bab^ + Id-b + W is homo- geneous, for each term is of the third degree. When a polynomial consists of several terms of different degrees, the degree of the polynomial is that of its highest term. A polynomial is said to be arranged according to the powers of any letter it contains when the exponents of that letter occur in the order of their magnitudes, eitlier increasing or decreasing. Thus, a'’ + 4a% + 6a'"6^ -[- 4«5^ is arranged according to the descending powers of a, and 4a6® -|- Ga'-6^ + + a} is arranged according to the ascending powers of a. The reciprocal of a number is 1 divided by that number. Thus, the reciprocal of a is -. If the product of two num- a hers is 1, each number is the reciprocal of the other. 20. Positive and Negative Quantities. — In Arith- metic we deal with numbers connected by the signs -|- and — , and in finding the value of an expression such as 1+3 — 2 + 4 we understand that the numbers to which the sign + is prefixed are additive, and those to which the sign — is prefixed are subtractive, while the first term, 1, to which no sign is prefixed, is counted among the additive terms. The same thing is true in Algebra ; thus in the 14 POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE QUANTITIES. expression 5a + 76 — 3c — 2d we understand the symbols 5a and 76 to be additive, while 3c and 2d are subtractive. But in Arithmetic the sum of the additive terms is alwa}’s greater than the sum of the subtractive terms, i.e., we are always required to subtract a smaller number from a greater ; if the reverse were the case the result would have no Arith- metic meaning, i.e., we could not in Arithmetic subtract a greater number from a smaller. In Algebra, however, not only may the sum of the subtractive terms exceed that of the additive, but a subtractive term may stand alone, and j'et have a meaning quite intelligible. It is therefore usual to divide all Algebraic quantities into jiositive quantities and negative quantities, according as they are preceded by the sign + or the sign — ; and this is quite irrespective of any actual process of addition and subtraction. Illustration (1) Suppose a ship were to start from the equator and sail northward 100 miles and then southward 80 miles, the Algebraic statement would be 100 - 80 = -f -20. Here the positive sign of the result indicates that the ship is 20 miles north of the equator. But if the ship first sailed 80 miles northward and then southward 100 miles, the Alge- braic statement would be 80 - 100 = -20. Here the negative sign of the result indicates that the ship is 20 miles south of the equator. (2) vSuppose a man were to gain $40 and then lose $36. his total gain would be $4. But if he first gained $36 and then lost $40, he sustained a loss of $4. The corresponding Algebraic statements would be $40 - $36 = +$4, $36 - $40 - -$4. Here the negative quantity in the second case is interpreted as a debt, i.e., a sum of money opposite in character to the POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE QUANTITIES. 15 positive qiiantitj^ or gain in the first case. In Arithmetic we would call it a debt or loss of $4. In Algebra we make the equivalent statement that it is a gain of — $4. (3) Suppose a man starts at a certain point and walks 100 yards to the right in a straight line, and then walks back 70 yards, he will be 30 j'ards to the right of his starting point. If he first walks from the same point 70 yards to the right and then walks back 70 yards, he will be at the point from which he started. But if he first walks to the right 70 yards and then walks back 100 yards, he will be 30 yards to the left of his starting point. The corresponding Algebraic statements are 100 yards — 70 yards = 30 yards 70 “ — 70 “ = 0 “ 70 “ - 100 “ = -30 “ . Here we see that the negative sign may be taken as indi- cating a reversal of direction. In Arithmetic we would say the man was 30 yards to the left of his starting point. lu Algebra we say he was —30 yards to the right of his start- ing point. There are numerous instances like the preceding in which it is con- venient for us to be able to represent not only the magnitude but the nature or quality of the things about which we are reasoning. As in the preceding cases, in a question of position we may liave to distin- guish a distance measured to tlie north of the equator from a distance measured to the south of it; or a distance measured to the right of a certain starting i^oint from a distance measured to the left of it; or we may have to distinguish a sum of money gained from a sum of money lost ; and so on. Tliese pairs of related quantities the Alge- braist distinguishes by means of the signs -f and — Thus if the things to be distinguished are gain and loss, he may denote by 4 or -|-4 a gain, and then he will denote by —4 a loss of the same extent. In this way we can conceive the possibility of the independent existence of negative quantities. The signs -f and — , therefore, are used to Indicate the nature of quantities as positive or negative, as well as to indicate addition and subtraction (Arts. 8 and 9). In Arithmetic we are concerned only with the numbers Avhich begin at 0 and are represented by the symbols 0, 1, 16 POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE QUANTITIES. 2, 3, 4, etc. without limit, and intermediate fractious. But the quantities which we usually measure by numbers in Alge- bra do not really begin at any point, but extend in opposite directions without limit. In order therefore to measure such quantities on a uniform system, the symbols of Algebra are considered as increasing from 0 in two opposite directions ; i.e., besides the s3'mbols used in Arithmetic, we consider another set —1, —2, —3, —4, etc. without limit, and inter- mediate fractions. Sjunbols in one direction are preceded by the sign +, and are called positive; and those in the other direction are preceded by the sign — , and are called negative. Symbols without a sign prefixed are considered to have + prefixed. These two sets of symbols may be illustrated as follows : ... — 8 , - 7 , — 6 , — 5 , — 4 , — 3 , - 2 , - 1 , 0 , + 1 , 4 - 2 , 4 - 3 , 4 - 4 , 4 - 5 , 4 - 6 , 4 - 7 , 4 - 8 , .. . 1 I I I I ! ] I I I I r I I I I I I the positive being those in the right direction from zero, and the negative those in the left direction from the same point. Thus, if 4 represent a distance of 4 miles measured to the right of a certain point, —4 will represent a distance of 4 miles measured to the left of the same point. If 4-4 represent 4 degrees above zero, —4 will represent 4 degrees below zero. If 4-4 represent 4 years after Christ, —4 will represent 4 years before Christ. If 4-4 represent a fall of four feet, —4 will represent a rise of 4 feet. If 4-4 represent a gain of -S4, —4 will represent a loss of §4. In general, when we have to consider quantities the exact reverse of each other in their nature or quality, we may regard the quantities of either quality as positive, and those of the opposite quality as negative. It matters not which quality we take as the positive one so long as we take the opposite one as negative; but having assumed at the commencement of an investigation a certain quality as positive, the important point is to use it uniformly and consistently throughout. The absolute value of any quantity is the number repre- sented by this quantit}' taken independeuth’ of the sign which precedes the number. Thus, 3 and —3 have the same absolute value. MULTIPLICATIONS IN ANY ORDER. 17 Negative quantities are often spoken of as less than zero. For example, if a man’s debts exceed his assets by Sd, it is said that “he is worth $4 less than nothing.” In the language of Algebra it would be said “ he is worth — S4.” A negative number is said to be Algebraically greater than another when it is numerically less, or when it has the smaller absolute value. Thus —3 > —6, since —3 is only 3 less than 0 while —6 is 6 less than 0, or as a person who owes $3 is better off than one who owes 86 ; or in the case of the thermometer, when the mercury is at 10° below 0 (marked — 10°) at one hour, and at —5° at another hour, the temperature is said to be increasing; i.e., — 5° > —10°. Also, in Algebra, zero is greater than any negative quantity, as a man who has no property or debt is considered better off than one who is in debt. Thus it is easy to see that in the series on page 16 each number is greater by unity than the one immediately to the left of it. 21. Additions and Multiplications may be Made in any Order. — (1) When a number of terms are con- nected by the signs -f- and — , the value of the result is the same in whatever order the terms are taken ; thus 6-1-5 and 5-1-6 give the same result viz., 11 ; and so also a + b and 6 -|- a give the same result, viz., the sum of the num- bers whieh are represented by a and b. AYe may express this fact Algebraicall}' thus, a -|- 6 — 6 -|- a. Similarly a — b-\-c = a + C — b, for in the first of the two express sions b is taken from a, and c added to the result ; in the second c is added to a, and b taken from the result. Similar reasoning applies to all Algebraic expressions. Hence we may write the terms of an expression in any order we please, provided each has its proper sign. Thus it appears that a — b may be written in the equiva- lent form — b + a. As an illustration we may suppose that a repi’esents a gain of a pounds, and —5a loss of 5 pounds ; it is clearly immaterial whether the gain precedes the loss, or the loss precedes the sain. 18 SUGGESTIONS FOE THE STUDENT. (2) When one number, whether integral or fractional, is multiplied by a second, the result is the same as when the second is multiplied by the first. The proof for whole numbers is as follows ; Write down a rows of units, putting h units in each row, thus : 1 1 1 I I in a row, I I 1 1 I a rows. Then counting by rows there will be h units in a row repeated a times, i.e., b x a units. Counting by columns there will be a units in a column repeated b times, i.e., a x b units. ba = ab. These two laws are together called the Commutative Laic, or Laio of Commutation. 22. Suggestions for the Student in Solving Ex- amples. — In solving examples the student should clearl}’ explain how each step follows from the one before it ; for this purpose short verbal explanations are often necessaiy. The sign “ = ” should never be used except to connect quantities which are equal. Beginners should be particularly careful not to employ the sign of equalit}’ in any vague and inexact sense. The signs of equality, in the several steps of the work, should be placed one under the other, unless the expressions are very short. In elementary work too much importance cannot be at- tached to neatness of style and arrangement. The beginner should remember that neatness is in itself conducive to accuracy. EXAMPLES. Find the numerical value of the following expressions, when a = 1, 6 = 2, c = 3, d = -4, and e — 5. 1 . aP’ b‘^ + c^ + d- e^. 2. abc- + bcd^ — ded^. 2. e* + + 6" - 4e»6 - 4eh». urlns. 55. 94. 81. 4 . 5. 6 . 7. EXAMPLES. 19 6V fZe _ 32 4a 6^ alws. 12. 8a® + 35® 4c® + 66® c® + cZ* a® 4- 6® c® — 6® e® 15. a^ + 4a®6 + 6a®6® 4- 4a6® 4- b* 3. a® 4- 3a®6 4- 3ab- 4- 6® ¥ 4-d' 7.2 1 ^72 7.^7* 6. b~ + ri' — bd 8. (a + b) (b + c) — (b c) (c d) + (c + d) (d + e). 43. 9. (a-2b + 3cy-{b-2c + 3d)-+{c-2d + 3ey. 72. 10. \/(4c'^ + od'^ + e). 11. 11. + cZ' + — a^). 7. If a = 8, 6 = 6, c = 1, a; = 9, ?/ = 4, find the value of - v^l) - /(!)■ 14. Find the difference between abx and a + b + x, when a — 5, b = 7 , and x = 12. Ans. 39G. 15. When a = 3, find the difference between and 2a, a® and 3a, a'* and 4a, a® and 5a, a® and 6a. Ans. 3, 18, 69, 228, and 711. 16. Find the value of sVc + 2a\J {2a + b — x) , when a — 8, b = 5, c = 4:, X — 1. Ans. 54. 17. Find the value of (9 — ?/)(a; + 1) + (x + 5) (?/ + 7) — 112, when x = 3 and y = 5. Ans. 0. 18. Find the value of x)f{x^ — 8y) + y\f{x^ + 8y), when a; = 5 and y = 3. Ans. 26. 19. If a = 2, 6 = 3, a; = 6, and y = 5, find the value of VKa+5)‘^2/^ + ^(a+x) (y— 2a) l+^\{y — bya{. Ans. 9. Find the value of 20. X* - 11a;® - lla;" - 13a; + 11 fora; = 12. -1. 21. x^ — x^ — 4x^ — 3a; — 5 for a; = 3. 4. 22. a;® — 3a;^ — 8 for a; = 4. 968. 23. 3x* — 60a;® + 54,r2 -f 60a; + 58 for a; = 19. 115. 20 EXAMPLES. 24. 3a;= - 160x^ + 344x3 yooajs _ igiOa; + 1200 fo( X = 51. Ans. 27. Express the following in Algebraic symbols: •25. Seven times a, pins the third power of 6. 7a + 5®. 26. Six times the cube of a multiplied by the square of h. diminished by the square of c multiplied by the fourth power of d. Ans. Ga^b^ — c^d*. 27. 3 into x minus m times y, divided by m minus n. Ans. (3x — my) -h (m — ?i) . 28. Four times the fourth power of a, diminished by six times the cube of a into the cube of 5, and increased by four times the fourth power of b. Ans. 4a* — Ga^b^ + 45*. 29. Six times the square of divided b^’ a minus b, increased b}' six a into the expression m plus n minus b. Ans. + Ga (m + n — 6). a — b 30. Three times the square root of .r, diminished by y into the expression, the square of x plus the product of x and y plus the square of y, and increased b\- the square root of X into the expression x square plus y square. A71S. 3\/x — y(x- + xy + if) + v/.r(.x- + y‘) - ADDITION — ALGEBRAIC SUM. 21 CHAPTER II. ADDITION. 23. Addition — Algebraic Sum. — Addition in Alge- bra, is the process of finding the Algebraic sum of several quantities. The Algebraic sum of several quantities is their aggregate value, and it is usual to find the simplest e(piivalent expression for it. It is convenient to make three cases in Addition ; (1) when the terms to he added are like (Art. 18), and have like signs; (2) when they are like hnt have unlike signs; and (3) when they are unlike. 24. Case 1. To Add Terms which are Like and have Like Signs. — Let it he required to add Sx-y., 4.^-y, and ~tx-y. Here S.'c-y is x-y taken 8 times, Ax^y is x'^y taken 4 times, and Ix-y is xhj taken 7 times ; therefore x‘^y is taken in all 8 + 4 + 7=19 times, and hence the sum is 19.r’-?/. The truth of this loill he evident to the beginner ivhen he remembers that the three quantities 8 lbs., 4 lbs., and 7 lbs., added together, give 19 lbs. Similarly 12ab + Sab + bab + ab = 21o&. Let it be required to add —Sdb, —lab, and — 9«6. Here —Sab is ab taken —3 times, —lab is ab taken —7 times, and —dab is ab taken —9 times ; therefore ab is taken in all —19 times, and hence the sum is — 19o6. The truth of this loill be evident from the consideration that, if a sum of money be diminished successively by $3, $7, and ^9, it is diminished altogether by $19. Therefore, to add like terms ivhich have the same sign, add the numerical coefficients, prefix the common sign, and annex the common symbols. 22 TO ADD LIKE TERMS WITH UNLIKE SIGNS. For example, Ga + 3a + a + 7a = 17a, and —2ab —lab — 'dab = — 18a5. 25. Case 2. To Add Terms which are Like, but have Unlike Signs. — Let it be required to add 9a and — 4a. Here —4a destroys 4 of the 9 times a, and gives vheu added to it, 5a. This is nsuallj' expressed 1)y saying —4a ivill cancel +4a in the term 9a, and leave -|-5a for the aggre- gate or sum of the two terms. For if 9a denote $9 which a man has in his possession, and —4a denote a debt of §4, then the aggregate value of his money is $5. In like manner if it be required to add 8a, —9a, —a, 3a, 4a, —11a, a, we find the sum of the positive terms to be 16a, and the sum of the negative terms to be —21a; now + lGa will cancel — IGa in the term —21a, which leaves —5a for the aggregate or sum of the terms. Therefore, to add like terms tchicli have not all the same sign, add all the positive numerical coefficients into one sum, and all the negative numerical coefficients into another; take the difference of these tico sums, jirejix the sign of the greater, and annex the common, sumbols. For example 7a — 3a + lla+a— 5a — 2a = 19a — 10a = 9a, and 5ab — 6ab+2ab — lab — 3ab-\--iab=llab — lGab = —oab. We neer'2z., '2x-\-y—'^z. . Ans. 0. 9. — a;+2?/4-32, 3a;— ?/+2z, 2a;+3^— 4a;+42/-)-4z. 10. 4a+35 + 5c, — 2a+35— 8c, a — 5+c. 3r(+55 — 2c. 11. — 15(1 — 196 — 18c, 14a+145+8c, a+55 +9c. — c. 12. 25a — 156+c, 13a— 106+4c, a+206— c. 39a — 56+4c. 13. — IGa — 106+5c, lOa+56+c, 6a+56— c. 5c. In adding together several expressions containing terms with different powers of the same letter, it will be found convenient to arrange all the expressions in ascending or descending powers of that letter (Art. 19). 14. 3xi^+7 — ox^, 2x^—8 — 9x, 4x—2x^+3x". Arranging the terms in the descending powers of .r, we have 3.a:® — 5a;^ + 7 2a;2 -9.a; -8 -2x^ +3.i;2 +4.X' —ox —1 Ans. 15. 2,alf-2W+a\ 8n»+563, 9a"6-2a® 4-a6‘'^. Ans. 36®+3o6“+14a^6d-4a®. It will be observed that this answer is arranged according to descending powers of 6, and ascending powers of a. 16. 2x'^ — 2xy-\-3y-, Ay^-{-oxy—2x^, x^—2xy—Gy-. Ans. x‘^-\-xy-\-y~. 17. a'^— a^+3a, 3a®+4a^+8a, ba^ — Qcv^—lla. Ans. 9a® — 3a‘'^. 18. a;®+3.a:®y+3.x’^®, —3x-y—Gxy‘^—o^, Sx-y+Axy'^. Ans. 3x‘^y-\-xij^. 19. a;®— 2aa;®+a®.a’+n®, a:®+3a.i;®, 2(t®— aa:®— 2a;®. Ans. a®.r+3a®. . 20. 2o6 — Sax- + 2a^x, I2ab + lOa.r® — 6a®.x’, — 8a6 + n.x’® — ocdx. Ans. Go6 — 9a®.a;+7((,r®+aa;®. 21. a’®-t-y^+z®, — 4a;®— 5z®, 8a’®— 7^^+lOz®, Gy* — Gz^. Ans. 5a®. 22. a^ — 4.a®?/4-6.'r®!/®— 4a_?/®+?/, 4.a®^— 12a®y®+ 12.r^® — 4^'*, G.r®^® — 12.a^®+6^^ 4xy^—Ay*, y*. a;'*. 26 SUBTRACTION — ALGEBRAIC DIFFERENCE. CHAPTER III. SUBTRACTION. 28. Subtraction — Algebraic Difference. — Subtrac- tion ill Algebra is tlie process of fiiidiug the difference between two Algebraic quantities. The Algebraic Difference of two quantities is the number of units which must be added to one in order to produce the other. Thus, what is the difference between 2 and G means “ how many units added to 2 will make G ” ? The Difference is sometimes called the liemainder. The Subtrahend is the quantity to be subtracted ; or it is the one from which we measure. Thus, 2 is the subtrahend in the above example. The Minuend is the quantity from which the subtrahend is taken ; or it is the one to whicli we measure. Thus, G is the minuend in the above example. If the minuend is Algebraically greater than the subtra- hend, the difference is positive (Art. 20). If the minuend is Algebraically less than the snbtrahend, the difference is negative. In Arithmetic we cannot subtract a greater number from a less one, because subtraction in Arithmetic means taking a less number from a greater. But in Algebra there is no such restriction, because Algebraic subtraction means finding a difference. 29. Rule for Algebraic Subtraction. — Let distances to the right of the zero point be called positive, and those to the left of the same point be called negative (Figure, Art. 20). Also call measuring toward the right from o?iy point positive, and measuring toward the left from any point negative. RULE FOR ALGEBRAIC SUBTRACTION. 27 Then the difference between 2 and 6 means either hoiv many units must ive measure., and in lohat direction, in order to pass from 2 to 6 or to pass from 6 to 2. In the first case we begin at 2 and measure four units to the right and say 2 from 6 is +4. In the second case we begin at 6 and measure four units to the left and say 6 from 2 is —4. That is, if we subtract 2 from 6 the difference is 4 ; but if we subtract 6 from 2 the difference is —4. Also to find the difference between —1 and +1, we may begin at —1 and measure 2 units to the right and get +2, or we may begin at +1 and measure 2 units to the left and get —2 ; i.e., if we subtract —1 from +1 the difference is +2, but if we subtract +1 from —1 the difference is —2. Similarly the difference between —2 and —7 is —5 or + 0 , according as we measure from —2 toward the left to —7 or from —7 toward the right to —2; i.e., if we subtract —2 from —7 the remainder is —5, but if we sub- tract — 7 from —2 the remainder is -f-5. And also, the difference between —6 and -f-7 is 4-13 or —13 according as we measure from —6 to -f-7 or from -|-7 to — 6 ; i.e., if we subtract —6 from -|-7 the difference is 13, but if we subtract 7 from —6 the difference is —13. Hence we see that the remainder in each case is found by changing the Algebraic sign of the subtrahend, and then adding it Algebraically to the minuend. Otherwise thus. Suppose we have to take 9 -|- 5 from 16 ; the result is the same as if we first take 9 from 16, and then take 5 from the remainder ; that is, the result is denoted b}’ 16-9-5. Thus . 16 - (9 4- 5) = 16 - 9 - 5. Here we enclose 9 -f- 5 in parenthesis in the first expres- sion, because we are to take the whole of 9 4- 5 from 16 (Art. 15). Suppose we have to take 9 — 5 from 16. If we take 9 from 16, we obtain 16 — 9 ; but we have thus taken too much from 16, for we had to take, not 9, but 9 diminished 28 RULE FOR ALGEBRAIC SUBTRACTION. by 5. Hence we must increase the result by 5 ; and thus we obtain 16 — (9 — 5) = 16 — 9 + 5. Similarly, 16 — (6-)-4 — 1) = 16 — 6 — 4 + 1. In like manner suppose we have to subtract h — c from a. If we subtract h from a, we obtain a — b ; but we have thus taken too much from a, for we are required to take, not b, but 5 diminished by c. Hence we must increase the result a — b hy c; and thus we obtain a — (b — c) = a — b + c for the true remainder. Similarly, a — {b c — d) = a — b — c + d. Suppose we have to subtract 6 — c + d — e from a. This is the same thing as subtractiug 6 + d — c — e from a (Art. 21). If we subtract 6 + d from a, we obtain a — b — d; but we have thus taken too much from o, for we were to take, not b + d, but b d diminished by c and e. Hence we must increase the result by c + e, and thus obtain a— (5— c+d — e) = a— &— d+c+e = a— 6+c— d+e. From considering each of these examples, it is evident that subtracting a positive number is the same thing as adding a , 11 equal negative number., and also that subtracting a negative number is the same thing as adding an equal qiositive number. 'riierefore. Algebraic subtraction is equivalent to the Alge- braic addition of a number with the opposite Algebraic sign. Hence for subtraction we have the following Rule. Change the signs of all the terms in the subtrahend, and '.hen add the result to the minuend. EXAMPLES. 1. Let it be required to subtract 3.ii— y+z from 4.r— 3y+2z. Changing the signs of all the terms in the subtrahend, it stands as follows: — 3a; + y — z. Then collecting as in addition, we have 4x — 3y + 2z — 3a: + y — z = a; — 2y + z. EXAMPLES. 29 2. From 3x* + 5x^ — 6a;^ — 7x + 5 take 2x* — 2x^ + 5x^ — 6x — 7. Changing the signs of all the terms in the subtrahend, and proceeding as in addition, we have 3x‘^ + 3x^ — Ga;^ — 7x + 5 — 2x* + 2a;^ — ox- + 6x + 7 a*'* + 7x^ — 1 lx- — a + 1 2 Kem. — The beginner may solve a few examples by actually changing the signs of the subtrahend and going tiirough the operation as fully as we have done in these two exaini^les; but he may gradually accustom himself to perform the subtraction without actually changing the signs, but merely changing them mentally, as in the following examine. 3. From 3ah + 7ac + 2c^ take 3ah — 4ac + 3c^ — cl. Writing the subtrahend under the minuend so that similar terms shall fall in the same column, for convenience (Art. 2G) , we have o 7 i - i t 7 Sail + tac + 2c- bab — 4ac + 3c'-^ — d 3ab + llac — + d Changing the sign of bah from -f to — and adding it to Sab, we have 3ah ; in like manner, changing the sign of — 4«c from — to + and adding it to 7ac, we have llac; also changing the sign of +3c“ from + to — and adding it to 2c'^, we have — c^; changing the sign of —cl and adding it, we have +d. Eveiy example in subtraction may be veiified by adding the remainder to the subtrahend ; the sum will be equal to the minuend. 30. Remarks on Addition and Subtraction. — In Arithmetic addition alwaj’s produces increase and subtrac- tion decrease; but in Algebra addition may produce decrease and subtraction may produce increase. Thus in Algebra we may add —4a to 8a and obtain the Algebraic sum 4a, which is smaller than 8a; or we may subtract —3a from ba and obtain the Algebraic difference 8a, which is larger than bet. 30 EXAMPLES. 1. From Subtract Remainder 2. From Subtract EXAMPLES. + xy — 3?/^ 2x^ 4- 8xy — ly‘^ Zx^ — Ixy + 4?/^ — 2x® — 9a: + 4 2a;^ — 3a;^ + lx — 8 Remainder — x^ — 2a;® + Zx? — 16a; +12 From 3. 15a; + 10^ — I82 subtract 2x — Zy z. ^Ins. 13a; + \Zy — 19z. 4. X — y — z subtract —10a; — 14?/ + 152. .<4?is. 11a; + 13^ — I62. 5. 2ba — 166 — 18c take 4ci — 36 + 15c. Arhs. 2\a — 136 — 33c. 6. yz — zx + xy take —xy yz — zx. 2xy. 7. — 2.a;® — a;'^ — 3a; + 2 take a;® — + 1. yl?is. — 3.r® — x?' — 2x + 1. 8. 4a;^ — Zx + 2 take — 5.c" + Gx — 7. 9a;^ — 9a; + 9. 9. a;® + 1 La;^ + 4 take 8a;^ — 5.a; — 3. a;® + Zx^ + 5x + 7. 10. —8a^x- + 5x^ + 15 take 9aV" — 8.a;® — 5. —lla-x- + \Zx? 4- 20. 11. ^a;® - ^xy - |?/® take -f.?;'- + xy — y-. Ans. 2x- — |.ry —^y-. 12. frr — fa — 1 take — fa^ + a — f. |-a® — fa — f. 13. — fa; + f take i.r — 1 + fa;'-, —fa;- — f.a; + f. 14. |a;'^ — fa.^• take f — fa;'- — faa-. |-.r“ + fc(.r — f. 15. |x® - ^xy^ — y- take \x~y — ^y- — f.cy-. ^?is. f.r® — ^x-y — ^y-. 31. The Use of Parentheses.* — X parenthesis indicates that the terms enclosed within it are to be considered as one quantity (Art. 15). On account of the extensive use which * As the bracket, brace, bar, and vinculum all have the same significance as the parenthesis (Art. 15), the rules for their removal or Introduction are the same. MINUS SIGN BEFORE THE PARENTHESIS. 31 is made of parentheses in Algebra, it is necessary that the student should become acquainted with the rules for their removal or introduction. 32. Plus Sign before the Parenthesis. — When a 2Xirenthesis is preceded by the sign + , the ^larenthesis can be removed loithout snaking any change in the expression within the pmrenthesis. This rule has already been illustrated in Arts. 25 and 2G ; it is in fact the ride for addition. 7 + (12 + 4) means that 12 and 4 are to be added and their sum added to 7. It is clear that 12 and 4 may be added separately or together without altering the result. Thus 7 + (12 + 4) = 7 + 12 + 4 = 23. Also C6 + (5 + c) means that b and c are to be added together and their sum added to a. Thus a + (6 + c) = a + 6 + 0 . 7 + (12 — 4) means that to 7 we are to add the excess of 12 over 4 ; now if we add 12 to 7, we have added 4 too much, and must therefore take 4 from the result. Thus 7 + (12 - 4) = 7 + 12 - 4 = 15. Similarly a + (5 — c) means that to a we are to add b diminished by c. Thus a {b — c) = a -\- b — c. Therefore Conversely ; Any p>art of an expression may be enclosed within a parenthesis and the sign + placed before it, the sign of every term within the parenthesis remaining un- altered. Thus, the expression a — 6 + c — d + e may be written in any of the following ways : «— 5+C+ (— d+e), a— 5+(c— d+e), a + ( — 5+c — d+e), and so on. 33. Minus Sign before the Parenthesis. — When a parenthesis is preceded by the sign — , the parenthesis may be removed if the sign of every term ivithin the piarenthesis be changed. 32 COMPOUND PARENTHESES. Tliis rule has already been illustrated in Art. 29 ; it is in fact the rule for subtraction. The rule is evident, because the sign — before a parenthesis shows that the whole ex- pression within the parenthesis is to be subtracted, and the subtraction is effected by changing the signs of all the terms of the expression to be subtracted. Thus a — (& + c) = C6 — 6 — c. Also a — (h — c) = a — b c. Therefore Conversely ; Any part of an expression may be enclosed within a parenthesis and the sign — placed before it, provided the sign of every term within the parenthesis be changed. The proof of this operation is to clear the paren- thesis introduced, and thus obtain the original expression. Thus a — b-\-cAd — e may be written in the following ways : a — 6+c— (— d+e), a— Z>— (— c — d+e) , a— (6— c— d+e), and so on. 34. Compound Parentheses. — Expressions maj' occur with more than one pair of parentheses ; these parentheses may be removed in succession by the preceding rules. We may either begin with the outside parenthesis and go inward, or begin with the inside parenthesis and go outward. It is usually best to begin with the inside parenthesis. The beginner is recommended always to remove first the inside pair, next the inside of all that remain, and so on. Thus for example ; + — d)|=a+f6-|-c — d^=a-b&-fc — d. o + ^6 — (c — d) ^ = a + — c + d^ = a -1- 6 — c -f d. a — \b + {c — d) I = a — \ b + c — d\ = a — b — c + d. a — \ b — (c — d) \ — a — \b — c + d\ = a — b + c — d. It will be seen in these examples that, to prevent confusion between different pairs of parentheses, we emplo}’ those of different forms; and hence we use, besides the parenthesis, the brace, the bracket, and sometimes the vinculum (Art. 15). COMPOUND PARENTHESES — EXAMPLES. 33 Thus, for example, a — [& -^c -(rf - e - /)□ = a - [5 - \c-{d-e +/) |] = a — [6 — — d + e — /□ = a — [6 — c + d — e + /] Cl — h c — cL G — J". Also a — 2b — [4«. — 6& — ^3a — c + (5a — 25 — 3a — c + 25) — a — 2b — [4a — 65 — ) 3a — c + (5a — 25 — 3a + c — 25) ^ ] = a — 25 — [4a — 65 — ^ 3a — c + 5a — 25 — 3a + c — 25^] = a — 25 — [4a — 65 — 3a + c — 5a + 25 + 3a — c 25] = a — 25 — 4a 4- 65 + 3a — c + 5a — 25 — 3a + c — 25 = 2a, by collecting like terms. EXAMPLES. Simplify the following expressions by removing the paren- theses and collecting like terms. 1. a — (5 — c) -[- a -|- (5 — c) +5— (a+c). Ans. a+b—c. 2. a — [5 + )a — (5 + a) ^]. a. 3. a — [2a — )35 — (4c — 2a)(]. a + 35 — 4c. 4. ^a— (5— c) ( -f )5— (c— o) ^ — )c— (a— 5) 3a—b—c. 5. 2a — (55 +[3c — a]) — (5a— [5+c]). —2a— 45 — 2c. 6. — [a — )5 — (c — o) ^] — [5 — ^c — (a — 5) ^]. 5 — a. 7. x)))-{-{- y)). X — y. 8. —[5a- — (lly — 3x’)] — [5y — (3x — 6y)]. —bx. 9. —[15a- — )14y — (15^ + 12y) — (10a- — 15«)(]. Ans. —25a- + 2y. 10. 8a — )16y — [3a- — (12y — .a) — 8y] + a-^ . lla — 36y. 11. — [a- — ^2: + (a — z) — (z — a-) — — a-]. 2a — 2z. 12. — [a 4- )a — (a — a) — (a 4- a) — a\ — a]. 2a. 13. — [a — )a 4- (i» — a) — (a — a) — a| — 2a]. a. 14. 2a — [2ct — ^2a — (2a — 2a — a)^]. a. 15. 16 - a - [7a - )8a - (9a - 3a - 6a) 16 - 12a. 16. 2a — [3y — )4a- — (by — 6a — 7y)^]. 12a — 15y. 17. 2a-[354-(25-c)-4c + ^2a-(35-c^^)(]. 4c. 18. a— [55— )a— (5c— 2c— 5— 45) 4- 2a — (a — 25 4- c) ^]. Ans. 3a — 2c. 34 EXAMPLES. 19. [ 4 . 7 :^— ^ G.x^— (4.X’ — 1 ) n ~ (s’^+4.i;*+G.x’^4-4.'C + 1 ) . Ans. — 8ar^ — 8a;. When the beginner has had a little practice the number of steps may be considerably diminished ; he may begin at the outside and remove two or more parentheses at once, as follows : 20. a - [2/a + ^3c - 3c6 - (n + &) ^ + 2a - {b + 3o)] = a — 2b — 3c + Sa + a b — 2a + b + 3c = 3a. 21. n — (6 — c) — [a — /> — c — 2 ^ /> + c — 3 (c — a) — d / ] . Ans. 6a + 2b — 2c — 2d. 22. 2x — {3y — Az) — \ 2x — (3y + ‘iz)\ — \3y — (42 + 2x) ^ . Ans. 2x — 3y + 12z. 23. —20 (a — d) + 3(6 — c) — 2[6 + c + d — 3^c + d — 4(d — a)(]. Ans. 4a + b + c. 24. — 4(a + d) + 24(6 — c) — 2[c + d + a — 3^d + a — 4(6 + c)(]. ^l«s. — pOc. 25. 2(36 — 5a) — 7[a — 6^2 — 5(a — 6)^]. Ans. —227a + 2166 + 84. 26. — lO^a — 6[a — (6 — c)] ( + 60^6 — (c + a) —10a. 27. -3^-2[-4(-a)]^ + 5^-2[-2(-a)]^. 4a. 28. -2j-[-(.T - y)]^ + ^-2[-(x - y)](. 0. Note. — The line between the numerator and denominator of a a; - 3 . fraction is a kind of vinculum. Thus ■ is equivalent to — 3). 29. l!„_5(i,-„)|-|{i(6-2)-?[a-|(i,-|) ^Ins. -Vu. — 26. 30. 35 f - 4^) }] + - 2-v). ^)is. 12x — 30y. 31. |||(a - 3) - 8(3 - 0 )} - 1^' - — ^|c — a — |(a — 6) |. -Ins. a — -^^6 + EXAMPLES. 35 Ans. 0. The terms of an expression can be placed in parentheses in various ways (Arts. 32 and 33). Thus, 33. ax — bx + cx — ay + by — cy may be written (ax — bx) + (cx — ay) + (by — cy), or (ax — bx + ca;) — (ay — by + cy), or (ax — ay) — (bx — by) + (ca* — cy). Whenever a factor is common to every term within a parenthesis, it may be placed outside of the parenthesis as a multiplier of the expression within. Thus, 34. ax® + 7 — cx — dx^ — c + 5a — cZx® + 5x^ — 2x = (ax® — dx®) + (bx- — dx^) + (bx — cx — 2x) + (7 — c) = (a — cl)x^ + (b — d)x- + (b — c — 2)x + (7 — c). In this result, (a — d), (b — d), (b — c — 2) are regarded as the coefficients of x®, x^, and x, respectively (Art. 17). Hence we have here placed together in parentheses the coefficients of the different powers of x so as to have the sign -f- before each parenthesis. 35. — a^x — 7a + cry + 3 — 2x — a5 = — (a®x — a‘‘y) — (7a + ab) — (2x — 3) = — (x — y)a^ — (7 + b)a — (2x — 3). We have here placed together in parentheses the coeffi- cients of the different powers of a so as to have the sign — before each parenthesis. In the following four examples place together in paren- theses the coefficients of the different powers of x so that the sign -f- will be before all the parentheses. 36. ax* -j- bx^ + 5 -T 2bx — 5x^ -f- 2.x^ — 3x. Ans. (a 2)x^ 4- (5 — 5)x^ + (2b — 3).x -|- 5. 37. 35x^ — 7 — 2x -f- ab + 5ax® -f cx — 4x^ — 5x®. Ans. (5a — 5)x® + (36 — 4)x^ -t- (c — 2)x -t- ab — 7. 38. 2 — 7x® -|- 5ax^ — 2cx + 9c(x® + 7x — 3x^. Ans. (9a — 7)x® -f (5a — 3)x^ 4- (7 — 2c)x -f- 2. 36 EXAMPLES. 39. 2cx® — ^ahx + 4fZa; — 36x‘‘ — Alls. (2c — a^)x^ + (1 — ^h)x* + (4cZ — 5ah)x. In the following four examples place together in paren- theses the coefficients of the different powers of a; so that the sign — will be before all the parentheses. 40. ax^ + 5x® — a^x^ — 26x® — 3x^ — bx^. Ans. — (a^ -f &)x* — (2& — 5).x® — (3 — a)x^. 41. 7x* — 3c% — abafi + 5ax 7x® — abcx^. Ans. — {ah — 7)x® — {abc — l)o? — (3c^ — 5a)x. 42. ax^ -f- — bx^ — 5x- — cx®. Ans. — (c — a^)x® — (6 -f 5 — Cf)x^. 43. 3&^x^ — bx — ax* — cx* — 5c^x — 7x^. Ans. — (a -t- c + 7 — 8b”)x* — (b + 5c-)x. Simplify the following expressions, and in each result place together in parentheses the coefficients of the different powers of x. This is known as re-grouping the terms accord- ing to the powers of x. 44. ax®— 2cx— [6x®— \cx—dx— (6x®-b3c.x®) ^ — (c.x®— &.r)]. Ans. (a — 6)x® — (& + 2c)x® — (& -f- c -}- d)x. 45. ox^ — 3^— a.x® -t- 35x — 4[-^c.r® — f(ox — Ans. (3a -f- 2c).x® (a -|- 85).x® — (8a -P 95)x. X®— 46.x*— - 12ax— 4 I 36 .X*— 9 ( b - biA -?a.x*l 6 L 1 2 jj A?is. (6b + l)x® — (a -l-2b).x* — (2a -f 3c)x. We shall close this chapter with a few examples in Addi- tion and Subtraction. 47. To the sum of 2a — 3b — 2c and 26 — a -f- 7c add the sum of a — 4c 76 and c — C6. Ahs. 2a -p 2c. 48. Add the sum of 2y — 3y^ and 1 — 5y® to the remainder left when 1 — 2f + y is subti’acted from 5y®. Ans. —y- -p y. 49. Take x® — y® from 3xy — 4y®, and add the remainder to the sum of 4xy — x® — 3y~ and 2x- -P 6y®. A?is. 7xy. 50. Add together 3.x® — 7.x -p 5 and 2x® -p 5.x — 3, and diminish the result by 3x® -P 2. A?is. 2x® — 2x. 51. What expression must be subtracted from 3a — 56 + c so as to leave 2a — 46 -p c? Ans. a — 6. EXAMPLES. 37 52. From what expression must 3a5 + 55c — 6ca be sub- tracted so as to leave a remainder Gca — 55c? Ans. Sab. 53. Subtract — 7.v + 1 from 2x^ — ox — 3, then subtract the difference from zero, and add this last result to 2x^ — 2.r* — 4. A 71 S. — 2x. 54. Subtract 3.c- — 5.r + 1 from unity, and add ox^ — 6x to the result. Ans. 2x^ — x. 55. To what expression must — 6.x^ — ox be added so as to make 9a;® — Ga; — 7x^? Ans. 2a;® — a;® — x. 5G. From 5x® + 3.r — 1 take the sum of 2.a; — 5 -j- 7x^ and 3a” + 4 — 2.a® + x. Ans. 7.r® — 10.r^. 57. Subtract 3n — 7a® + oa~ from the sum of 2 + 8a‘® — a® and 2a® — 3a® + a — 2. 8a® — 2a. 58. If 3a® — 7a + 2 be subtracted from zero, what will be the result? Ans. —3a® + 7x — 2. 59. Subtract 5a® + 3a — 1 from 2a®, and add the result to 3a® + 3.a — 1. ‘ alas. 2.a® — 2.a®. 60. What expression must be added to 5a® — 7.a + 2 to produce 7.a® — 1? al)is. 2a® + 7a — 3. 61. What expression must be added to 4a® — 3.a® + 2 to produce 4.a® -p 7a — 6 ? .4>is. 3a® + 7x — 8. 62. What expression must be subtracted from 9.a®+ 1 la— 5 so as to leave 6.a® — 17a + 3? al?is. 3.a® -}- 28a — 8. 63. From what expression must llct® — 5ab — 7bc be subtracted so as to give for remainder 5a® + 7ab + 75c? alas. 16a® + 2ab. 38 MULTIPLICATION — RULE OF SIGNS. CHAPTER IV. MULTIPLICATION. 35. Multiplication in Algebra is the process of taking any given quantity as many times as there are units in any given number.* The Multiplicand is the quantity to be taken or multiplied. The Multiplier is the number by which it is multiplied. The Product is the result of the operation. The multiplicand and multiplier taken together are called Factors of the product. In Algebra as in Arithmetic, the product of any number of factors is the same in whatever order the factors may be taken (Art. 21). Thus, 2x3x5 = 2x5x3 = 3x5x2, and so on. In like manner abc — acb = bca, and so on. Also 2a X 3b = 2 X a X 3 X b = 2 X 3 X a X b — Gab. 36. Rule of Signs. — The rule of signs, and especially the use of the negative multiplier, usually presents some difficulty to the beginner. (1) If +a is to be multiplied b}- +c, this indicates that +a is to be taken as man}' times as there are units in c. Now if +a be taken once, the result is +a ; if it be taken twice, the result is evidently + 2a ; if taken three times, the result is +3a; and so on. Therefore if +a be taken c times, it is +ca or -j-ac. That is +a X +c — +ac. (2) If —a is to be multiplied b}' +c, this indicates that —a is to be taken as many times as there are units in c. * This deflnitiou is true only of whole numbers. RULE OF SIGNS. 39 Now if —a be taken once, the result is — « ; if it be taken twice, the result is —2a; if taken three times, the result is —3a; and so on. Therefore if —a be taken c times, it is —ca or — ac. That is, — a X +c = — ac. Similarly —3 X +4 = —3 taken four times = -3 -3 -3 -3 - 12 . (3) . Suppose +a is to be multiplied by — c. We have illustrated the difference between +c and — c (Art. 20), by supposing that +c represents a line of c units measured in one direction, and — c a line of c units measured in the oppo- site direction. Hence if +a is to be multiplied by — c, this indicates that +a is to be taken as many times as there are units in +c, and further that the direction of the line which represents the product is to be reversed. Now +a taken +c times gives +ac ; and changing the sign, which corresponds to a reversal of direction, we get — ac. That is +a X — c = — ac. Similarlj- +3 X —4 indicates that 3 is to be taken 4 times, and the sign changed. The first operation gives +12, and the second —12. That is +3 X — 4 = —12. (4) If —a is to be multiplied by — c, this indicates that —a is to be taken as many times as there are units in c, and then that the direction of the line which represents the product is to be reversed. Now —a taken c times gives — ac ; and changing the sign, which corresponds to a reversal of direction, we get +ac. That is —a X — c = +ac. Similarly —3 X —4 indicates that —3 is to be taken 4 times, and the sign changed. The first operation gives —12, and the second +12. That is, -3 X -4 = +12. 40 EXAMPLES. (3) is sometimes expressed as follo\vs : +a multiplied by — c indicates that +a is to be taken as many times as there are units in c, and then the result subtracted. Now +« taken +c times gives +ac, and changing the sign, in order to subtract (Ai’t. 29), we get — ac. Similarly (4) indicates that —a is to be taken as many times as there are units in c, and the result subtracted. Now ~a taken +c times gives — ac, and changing the sign, in order to subtract, we get +ac. Hence we have the following Rule of Signs: The product of two terms with like signs is + ; the product of two terms with unlike signs is — . To familiarize the beginner with the rule of signs we add a few examples in substitution, where some of the symbols denote negative quantities. EXAM P LES. If a = -2, b -- = 3, c = - -1, , X -5, y = i, find the value of the following : 1. Serb = 3 ( — 2y X 3 = 3 X 4 : X 3 = 36. 2. — la^bc = -7(-2)3 X 3 X (- 1) = — 7 X -8x3 X — 1 = -168. 3. 8abc~. Ans. —48. 11. 8c*.r®. H?is. -1000. 4. 6aV^. 24. 12. 3cV. 375. f). — '2a*bx. 480. 13. icV. 500. 6. 500. 14. 7o®c*. -224. 7. — 7c\vy. 140. 15. -4aV. -16. 8. -8ax^. -2000. 16. — b-c". -9. 9. — bal'b^c^. -180. 17. 2crc^x. 40. 10. — 7aV. -56. If a = —4, b - = -3, c = -1, .r = 0, a; = 4. , = 1, find the value of 18. 3a" + bx - icy. Ans. 40. 19. _ 2/p _ - cx^. 118. 20. Sa^y^ — bb'hi : — 2c®. -130. THE MULTIPLICATION OF MONOMIALS. 41 21. 2a® — 86® + 7c?/^ Ans, —54. 22. 36y - 46^- 6c%. 3. 23. 2\f(ac) — {xy) -f V^6V). 1. It is convenient to make three cases in Multiplication, (1) the multiplication of 'monomials, (2) the multiplication of a. polynomial by a monomial, and (3) the multiplication of polynomials. 37. The Multiplic ation of Monomials. — Since by definition (Art. 12) we have = aaa,a, and - a® = aaaaaa, X a® = aaaaaaaaaa = a“. Also 3a^ - 3aa, 7a® = laaa. .-. 3a^ X 7a® = 3 x 7 x ctaaaa = 21a®. Similarly 5a®6^ X 6a^6^a;^ = baaabb x Qaabbbbxx = 30a®6®.r^. Also 4a®c^ X 3c®a;^ x 3a;^ = 4aaacc x 3ccca:.'c x 3a;a; = 36a®c®.r^. Hence for the multiplication of monomials we have the following Rui.e. Multiply together the numerical coefficients, annex to the result all the letters, and give to each letter an exponent equcd to the sum of its exponents in the factors. For example 2a;^ x 3cc^ x a:® = 6a;®+^ + ® = Q>x^^. Also bcdW X 26V X 3cV = 30a^6®c®cZ'*. Note. — The beginner must be careful, in applying this rule, to observe that the exponents of one letter cannot combine in any way with those of another. Thus, the expression admits of no further simplification. The product of three or more expressions is called the continued product. 42 EXAMPLES. 38. To Multiply a Polynomial by a Monomial — Suppose we have to multiply (a + h) by 3 ; that is, take a -f- 6 3 times. We have 3 (et -|- b) = (ct -j- (a- -|- 6) -j- (ct -}- 6) = (a + a + a taken three times) together with {h h -\- h taken three times) - - 3a + 36. Similarl}^ 7(a + 6) = 7a + 'tb. m (a + 6) = (a + a -p a + taken m times) together with (6 + 6 + 6 + taken m times) = ma + mb (1) Also m{a — b) = {a -\- a a -\- taken m times) together with ( — 6 — 6 — 6— taken times) = ma — mb (2) Similarly m{a — 6 + c) = ma — mb + me. This is generally called the Distributive Law. Hence, to multiply a polynomial by a monomial, we have the following Rule. Multqoly each term of the iwhjnomial separately by the monomial., and collect the results to form the complete product. For example, 4 {of + 2xy — 4z) = iaf + 8^y — K>z- (4 £c^ — ly — 8z^) X S.vy- = I2.v^y- — 21xy^ — 24.i-yV. (|a^ — ^ab — 6”) x Ga-6“ = 4a'*6- — a®6® — Gai-b*. EXAM PLES Multiply together 1. 4a'^6® and 7a®. 2. 8a*b~'x^ and bafbx. 3. 2x-yz^ and x^y’z. 4. a6 + 6c and a%. 5. 5a; + 3y and 2x~. 6. 6c + ca — o6 and abc. .4ns. 28a'^6®. 15a'6®.c^. 2x‘yh\ o4b- + a®6^c. lOaf* + Gxfy. ab'c^ + ai~bc- — a~b'-c. 7. bx-y + xy^ — 7.r-y-and Sx~y^. dO.ry -f- Sx^if — oGx^y^, THE MULTIPLICATION OF POLYNOMIALS. 43 8. 6o®&c — lalrc^ and a'^6^. A?is. Ga^b^c — 7a^bV^. 9. a*b^x — 56® and 2(6®.c®. 2a,"6®.t® — 10a®6®a;®. 10. 8a^6® — fix® and -|a6'‘. 12a®6'' — a6®c®. 39. The Multiplication of a Polynomial by a Polynomial. — Suppose we have to multiply c + cZ by a -h b. Here we are required to take c + cZ as many times as there are units in a 4- 6, i.e., we are to take c + cZ as many times as there are units in a, and then add to this product c + fZ taken as many times as there are units in b. Hence (a+b) (c+cZ) = (c+cZ) taken a times together with (c+d) taken b times = (c+cZ)a+ (c+cZ)6 = ac+acZ+6c+6fZ[(l)of Art. 38]. (1) Again (a—b) (c+cZ) = (c+cZ) taken a times diminished (c+cZ) taken b times = (c+cZ)a— (c+rZ)6 = ac+acZ— (6c+6cZ) [(l)of Art. 38] = oc+a(Z— 6c— 6cZ (Art. 33). . . (2) Also (a+6) (c— (Z) = (c— cZ) taken a times together with (c—d) taken 6 times = (c— cZ)a+ (c— fZ)6 = ac— acZ+6c— 6cZ[(2)of Art. 38]. (3) Lastly (a—b) (c—d) = (c—d) taken a times diminished by (c—d) taken 6 times = (c— cZ)c6— (c-d)b = ac—ad— (6c— 6cZ) [(2) of Art. 38] = ac— acZ— 6c+6cZ (Art. 33) . . . (4) Hence, to multiply one polynomial by another, we have the following Ruxe. Multiply each term of the multiplicand by each term of the midtiplier; if the terms multiplied together have the same sign, prefix the sign + to the product, if unlike, prefix the sign — ; then add the pcortial products to form the complete product. 44 EXAMPLES. If we consider each term in the second member of (4), and the way it w’as produced, wm find that +a X +c = +ac. +a X —d — —ad. — h X +c - —be. — b X — d ^ -\~bd. These results enable us again to state the rule of signs, and furnish us with another proof of that rule, in addition to the one given in Art. 36. This proof of the rule of signs is perhaps a little more satisfactory than the one given in Art. 36, though it is not quite so simple. EXAMPLES. 1. Multiply a; + 7 by a; + 5. The product = (a: +7) (a: + 5) = X- + 7x -f 5x + 36 — X- + 12x + 35. Eem. — It is more convenient to write the multiplier under the multiplicand, and begin on the left and work to the right, placing like terms of the partial products in the same vertical column, as follows : a: + 7 a; + 5 x~ + 7x + 5x + 35 by addition a:- + 12.r + 35. 2. Multiply 3x — 4y by 2x — 3jj. 3x — 4y 2x — 3y 6x" — Sxy — 9.ry 4- 12y- by addition 6.r- — 17a;y + I2y‘^. Here the first line under the multiplier is the product of the multiplicand by 2a: ; the second line is the product of the EXAMPLES. 45 multiplicand by — 3y; like terms are placed in the same vertical column to facilitate addition. Find the product of the following : 3. X — 1 and X — 10. Ans. x“^ — 17x 4- 70. 4. X — 7 and x -f- 10. X- + 3a; — 70. 5. X — 12 and .i; — 1. X- — 13a; + 12. 6. a; — 15 and x + 15. a;2 - 225. 7. —X — 2 and —x — 3. X“ -f- bx -f- 6. 8. —X + 5 and —x — 5. a;" — 25. 9. a; — 17 aud x + 18. a;^ 4- a; - 306. 10. —X — 16 aud —.a; 4-16. a;" - 256. 11. 2a; — 3 and x + 8. 2a;2 + 13.r - 24. 12. 3x — 5 aud 2x + 7. 6x2 iia; _ 35. 13. 4a'“ — 5ab + Gb'^ and 2cr — Sab + 452 . — 5ab + 66^ 2«^ — Sab + 45“ 8a“ — 10a®5 -f- 12a'"5’" - 12a^5 + 15a"52 - ISaJf + 16a*5^ - 20ab^ + 245". 8a" - 22a^b 4- 43a“6" - 38a5® + 245". Here the first line under the multiplier is the product of the multiplicand by 2a'^ ; the second line is the product b}^ —Sab ; the third by 46^; like terms are set down iu the same vertical column to facilitate the addition. The student will observe that both the multiplicand and multiplier are anxmged according to the descending powers of a (Art. 19). Both factors might have been arranged according to the ascending powers of a. It is of no conse- quence which order we adopt, but we should take the same order for the multiplicand and multiplier. If the multiplier and multiplicand are not arranged accord- ing to the powers of some common letter, it will be convenient to rearrange them. Thus : 46 EXAMPLES. 14. Multiply 3a7 + 4 + 2a;^by4 + 2x" — 3x. Arranging the factors according to the descending powers of x, the operation is as follows : 2x^ + 3x + 4 2x^ — 3x +4 4x^ + 6x® + 8x'^ — 6x® — 9x^ — 12x + 8x^ + 12x + 16 4x^ -f~ ox“ -f~ 16. 15. Multiply + 5“ + — ab — be — ca bj' a + ft + c. Arrange according to descending powers of a. c(? — ab — ac + b'^ — ftc + c“ a -f~ ft “|— c a® — a'^b — a\ + — abc + ac^ + a% — ab“^ — abc W — ft-c + ftc- + a^c — abc — ac^ + ft% — ftc- + c® a® — 3aftc + ft® + c® Rem. — Tlie student should notice that he can make two exercises in multiplication from every examine in which the multiplicand and multiplier are different polynomials, by changing the original multi- plier into the multiplicand, and the original multiplicand into the multiplier. The result obtained should he the same in both opera- tions. The student can therefore test the cori-ectness of his work by interchanging the multiplicand and multiplier. IMultiply together 16. a- — ab -f- ft® and or -t- oft -f ft®. o^ -t- a®ft® -f ft'*. 17. X® -f- 3y® and x -|- 4y. .x® -|- 4x®y -b 3xy® -b 12y®. 18. X* — x®y® -b y* and .x® -b y~. x® -b y^- 19. a® — 2ox -b 4x® and a® -b 2ox -b 4x®. a* -b 4o®x® -b 1 6.x*. 20. 16o® -b 12oft -b 9ft® and 4o - 3ft. 64a® - 27ft®. 21. a®x — a.x® -b .x® — a® and x -b x'* — a*. 22. 2x® — 3x® -b 2x and 2x® -b 3.x -b 2. 4.x® — .x® -b 4.x. 23. —a® -b a*ft — a®ft® and —a — ft. o® -b a®ft®. 24. a® -b 2a®ft -b 2oft® and a® — 2oft -b 2ft®. a® -b 4aft*. EXAMPLES. 47 When the coefficients are fractional we use the ordinary process of multiplication, combining the fractional coefficients by the rules of Arithmetic.* 25. Multiply — ^ab + by + -^6, fa® — + f6® 4- 1^,3 -g-a — i«-6 + fa6® 4- fct®6 — fo6® 4- f6® 1^/3 -g-a — -^a^b 4- fa6‘ 4- |6®. Multiply together 26. j and Ans. Ja® + — j^. 27. fa;® xy -\- and fx — \y. fx® — |y®. 28. |x® — f a; — f and fx® + fx — fx^ — |fx® + 29. fax + f^c" + fa^ and fa® + fx® — fox. fa'^ + x'*. It is sometimes desirable to indicate the product of poly- nomials, by enclosing each of the factors in a parenthesis, and writing them in succession. When the indicated multi- plication has been actually performed, the expression is said to be expanded, or developed. Expand the following : 30. (2a + 2b) {a — b). Ans. 2 cl^ + ab — 35®. 31. (a® -(- ax + x®)(a® — ax -f x®). x* + a®x® -)- a*. 32. (a® + 2ab -f- 26®) (a® — 2ab + 26'-). a* + Ab*. 33. (x — 3) (x -|- 4) (x — 5)(x -j- 6). Ans. X* + 2.x® — 41.x® — 42x -j- 360. 34. (a® -f- ab + b^){a^ — a®6 + 6®) (a — 6). Ans. a® — a®6 -f- a®6^ — 6®. 35. (2x® + 4x® + 8x 4- 16) (.3x - 6). 6.x" - 96. 36. (x® -f- X® 4- ® — 1 1 (•'c — 1) . x" — 2x -)- 1. 37. (x a)[(x 4- 6) (x -|- c) — (a 4-6 4- c)(x 4- 6) 4- 4- ab 4- 6®)]. Ans. x® 4- a®. * The student is supposed to be familiar with Arithmetic fractions, which are the only fractions that are used in this work previous to Chapter VIII. 48 MULTIPLICATION BY INSPECTION — EXAMPLES. 40. Multiplication by Inspection. — Although the result of multiplying together two biuomial factors can alwa 3 "s be obtained by the methods explained in Aid. 39, yet it is very important that the student should learn to write down the product rapidly by inspection. This is done by observing in what way the coefficients of the terms in the product arise ; thus (a: + 5) {x 3) = x~ + 5x + 3x + 15 = + 8a; + 15. (a; — 5) (a: + 3) = a;^ — 5a: + 3a; — 15 = x^ — 2x — 15. (a: + 5)(a; — 3) = x^ + 5a; — 3a; — 15 = x^ + 2x — 15. (a: — 5) (x — 3) = x^ — 5.^■ — 3a; + 15 = — 8a; + 15. It will be noticed in each of these results that : 1 . The product consists of three terms. 2. The first term is x^, and the last term is the product of the second terms of the two binomial factors. 3. The middle term has for its coefficient the Algebraic sum of the second terms of the two binomial factors. Hence the intermediate steps in the work may be omitted, and the product written down at once, as follows : (x + 2) (x + 3) = .x^ + ox + 6. (x — 3) (x + 4) = x'-^ + X — 12. (.X + 6) (x — 9) = .X- — 3x — 54. (x — 4y) (x — lOy) = x- — 14.xy + 40y-. (x - 5y) (x + 6^) = X- + xy — 30y‘\ Write doivn the values of the following products. EXAMPLES. 1. (x+8)(x-5). 2. (x - 3)(x 4- 10). 3. (X + 7)(x - 9). 4. (X - 4)(x + 11). A.71S. ar + 3.x — 40. X“ + 7x — 30. _ 2x - 63. ar + 7.x — 44. SPECIAL FORMS OF MULTIPLICATION. 49 5. (a; + 2)(x- 5). Ans. x^ — 3x — 10. 6. (x + 9) (x — 5) . x^ + 4x — 45. 7. (x — 8) (x + 4). x^ — 4x — 32. 8. (x - 6)(x + 13). + •<1 hi 1 GO 9. (x - 11) (a; + 12). x^ -j- ^ — 132. 10. (a; — 3a) (x + 2a). x^ — ax — 6a^. 11. (x — 9b) (x + 8b). x^ — bx — 72b^. 12. CO 1 1 x^ — Ibxy + 56y^. 41, Special Forms of Multiplication — Formulae. — There are some examples in multiplication which occur so often in Algebraic operations that they deserve especial notice. If we multiply a + 6 by a + & we get (a + 6) (a + 6) = C6^ + 2ab + ; that is (a + by = + 2ab -\- V. . . . (1) Thus the square of the sum of two mimbers is equal to the suvi of the squares of the tivo numbers increased by tioice their product. Similarly, if we multiply a — b by a — b we get (a — 5)^ = a^ — 2ab + b^ (2) Thus the square of the difference of tioo numbers is equcd to the sum of the squares of the tivo numbers diminished by tioice their product. Also, if we multiply a b by a — b we get (a + 6) (ffl - 6) == a" - b^ (3) Thus the product of the sum and difference of two numbers is equal to the difference of their squares. Because the product of two negative factors is positive (Art. 36) , it follows that the square of a negative number is positive. For example, {-ay =cd = (+a)^ and (b — a)'^ — a^ — 2ab + b'^ = (a — b)^. 50 EXAMPLES. Hence — 2ah + 5^ is the square of both a — b and b — a. Rem. 1. — Equations (1), (2), and (3) furnish simple examples of one of the uses of Algebra, which is to prove general theorems respecting numbers, and also to express those theorems briefly. For example, the result (a + 6)(a — 5) — — 5^ is proved to be true, and is expressed thus by symbols more compactly than it could be by words. A general result thus expressed by symbols is called a formula; hence a formula is an Algebraic expression of a general rule. Rem. 2. — We may here indicate the meaning of the sign ± which is made by combining the signs + and — , and which is called the double sign. By using the double sign we ma}' express (1) and (2) in one formula thus r (a ± by = a" ± 2ab + . . . . (4) where ± , read pZus or minus, indicates that we may take the sign + or — , Tteeping throughout the upper sign or the lower sign. Formuhn (1), (2), and (3) are true whatever may be the values of a and b. The following examples will illustrate the use that can be made of formulte (1), (2), and (3). The formula; will sometimes be of use in Arithmetic calculations. Thus EXAMPLES. 1. Required the difference of the squares of 127 and 123. By formula (3) we have (127)2 - (123)2 (127 + 123) (127 - 123) = 250 X 4 = 1000. 2. Required the square of 29. By formula (2) (29)2= ^30 _ 1)2 = 900 — 60 + 1 = 841. EXAMPLES. 61 3. Required the product of 53 by 47. By formula (3) 53 X 47 = (50 + 3) (50 - 3) = (50)" - (3)^ = 2500 - 9 = 2491. 4. Required the square of 34. By formula (1) (34)2 ^ (30 4)2 ^ 900 240 + 16 = 1156. 5. Required the square of Ax + 3y. We can of course obtain the square by multiplying 4a? + 3_?y by itself in the ordinary way. But we can obtain it by formula (1) more easily, by putting 4a; for a and 3y for b. Thus (4a; + 3y)2 = (4a;) ^ + 2(4a;3y) + (3y)2 = 16a;2 + 24a:y + 9y2. 6. Required the square of a; + y + 2:. Denote a; + y by a ; then a; + y + 2 = a+ 2!; and by (1) we have (a + z)2 = + 2az 4- = (a; + yY + 2(a? + y)z + 2^ =: a;2 -\- 2xy + + 2a;2 + 2yz + Thus (a; + y + 2)2 = a;2 -f- y2 + 2a;y + 2yz + 2a;2. That is, the square of the sum of three numbers is equal to the sum of the squares of the three numbers increased by twice the products of the three numbers taken tioo and two. 7. Required the square of q? — q r — s. Denote p— g by a aud r—s by b ; then p— g+?-— s=a+6 ; and by (1) we have (a+6)2=a2d-2a64-6^= (p— Q')^+2(p— 9) (r—s) + (r—s) 2. Then by (2) we expand (p — q)"^ and (r — s)2. Thus (p —q + 7' — s)2 = pr — 2pq + + 2 (p?- — p)s — qr + qs) + r 2— 2rs + s'^ — p2 -|- _|_ 9-2 -|- §2 -f- 2pr + 2qs — 2pq — 2ps — 2qr — 2rs. 52 EXAMPLES. 8. Required the product of p— g+r— s and p-q~r-\-s. Let p — q — a and r—s = b ; then p —q -\- r — s — a h., and p — q ~ r s = a — h \ and by (3) we have (a+5) (a—b) =a?—b‘^={p—qY— (pr—sY = p!^-2pq-}-q-— {r‘^—2rs-\-s^) by (2). Thus(p— s) {p-q—r-\-s) =p~ -Pq'^ — s‘ -2pq-\-2rs . From these examples we see that by using formulm (1), (2), and (3), the process of multiplication may be often simplified. The student is advised first to go through the work fully as we have done ; but when he becomes more familiar with this subject, he may dispense with some of the work, and tliereby simplify the multiplication still more. Thus in the last example he need not substitute a and 5, but apply formula (3) at once, and then (2), as follows : [(P - 9) + {'>' - s)] [(P - ’ - s)] = ip- (lY — ()■ — sY = P“ — ‘ipq + q~ — L- + 2rs — s^. 9. Required the product of a + 6 + c, o + 6 — c, a — b + c, b + c — a. By (3) and (1) we obtain for the product of the first two factors, (a + 6 + c) (a + 5 — c) = 2ab + iP + b- — c". . (1) By (3) and (2) we obtain for the product of the last two factors, (a — 6 + c) (5 + c — a) — 2ab — (cr + 5“ — c‘). . (2) Multiplying together (1) and (2), we obtain (2a6)“ — (a- + 5“ — c“)^ = 2fP5^ + 2b'-p + 2cPc- — cP — b* — P. . . . (3) Solve the following examples in multiplication by formuhn (1), (2), and (3). 10. (15.T + UyY- 11. {7x^ — 5y-)^. 12. (x-2 + 2.r - 2)“. 13. - 5.r + 7)-. Ans. 225x~ + 420.ry + 196y'^ 4 9. id — 70x-y- + '2 by*. X* + 4.r® - S.r + 4. _ UV 4 - 39.C- — 70.r + 49. IMPORTANT RESULTS IN MULTIPLICATION. 53 14. {2x‘^-Sx-4y. Ans.4x^-12x^-7x^ + 24x+lG. 1 5 . (x + 2y 3zy. x^ + 4y'^ + 9z~ + 4.r^ + Qxz + 1 2yz. 16. (x^ xy 4- y~) + xy — y^) ■ x* -\-'2xhj + xhf — y*. 17. {x^ + xy y^) (x^ — xy + y")- x* + xhj- + y*. 42. Important Results in Multiplication. — There are other results in multiplication which are important, although they are not so much so as the three formulse in Art. 41. We place them here in order that the student may be able to refer to them when they are wanted ; they can be easily verified by actual multiplication. (a + 6) (a^ — ah + V^) = 4- 5®. . . . (1) (a - h) (a" + ah + 5^) = o'* - h\ . . . (2) (0+5)3 = (0+5) (o^ + 2o5 + 53 ) = o3 + 3o-5 + 305" + h\ (3) (0-5)3 = (0-5) (o^ - 2o5 + 53 ) = o3 - 3o‘-*5 + 3ah‘^ - h\ (4) (o + 5 + c)3 = o3 + 3o®(5 + c) + 3o(5 + c)^ + (5 + c)3 = o3+53+c3+3o^(5+c) +353(o+c) +3c3(o+5) +6o5c. (5) Rem. — It is a useful exercise in multiplication for the student to show that two expressions agree in giving the same result. For example, show that (a — h)(b — c)(c — a) = cC^{c — 5) + 6^(a — c) + d^(b — a). Here we proceed as follows: Multiplying {a — b) by (5 — c) we obtain {a — b){b — c) = ab — b^ — ac + bc] then multiplying this equation by c — a we obtain (rt — b)(b — c)(c — a) = cab — cb^ — ac“^ + 5c^ — a% + ab- + a+ — abc = +(c — 5) + — c) + c2(5 — a) . . . (6) Show that {a — b)^ + (6 — c)^ + (c — a)^ = 2(c — b)(c — a) + 2(5 — o){5 — c) + 2(a — b)(a — c). By (2) of Art. 41 we obtain (a — 5)2 + (5 — c)2 -|- (c — a)2 = c(2 — 2a5 + 52 + 52 — 25c + c2 + c2 — 2ac + a2 = 2(0(2 -f g2 _ (ij) _ _ ca) (7) (c — 5)(c — a) = — ca — cb + ah, (5 — a)(5 — c) = b- — be — ab + ac, {a — b)(a — c) = 0(2 — ac — ab + 5c; Now 54 RESULTS OF MULTIPLYING ALGEBRAIC EXPRESSIONS. therefore, by adding these three equations, we obtain (c — h){c — a) A- {b — a)(b — c) + (a — h)[a — c.) = -|- ^2 _j_ g2 _ _ ac _ (S) therefore, from (7) and (8) we have (a — h)‘^ -f (6 _ c)2 -f (c — o)2 =z 2(c — h)(c — a) + 2(h — a)[b — c) + 2(a — h)(a — c). (9) 43. Results of Multiplying Algebraic Expressions. — From au examination of the examples in multiplication, the student will recognize the truth of the following laws with respect to the result of multiplying Algebraic expres- sions. (1) In the nudtiplication of tioo polynomials., when the partial jyroducts do not contain like terms, the whole numher of terms in the final p>i'oduct will be equal to the product of the numher of terms in the mtdtiplicand by the number of terms in the multiplier, but ivill be le.ss if the jxirtial products contain like terms, owing to the simplification jyroduced by collecting these like terms. Thus as we see in Ex. 17, Art. 39, there are tico terms in the multiplicand and tioo in the multiplier, and four in the product, while in Ex. 13 there are three terms iu the multi- plicand and three iu the multiplier, and oul}' five in the product. (2) Among the terms of the product there are ahoays two that are unlike any other terms; these are, that term which is the product of the tioo terms in the factors which contain the highest power of the same letter, and that term which is the product of the tioo terms in the factors which contain the loio- est power of the same letter. Thus iu Ex. 13, Art. 39, there are the terms 8a'* and 245*, and these are unlike any other terms ; in fact, the other terms contain a raised to some power less than the fourth, and thus they differ from 8a* ; and they also contain a to some power, and thus they differ from 245*. (3) When the multiplicand and multiplier are both homo- geneous (Art. 18) the product is homogeneous, and the degree EXAMPLES. 55 of the product is the sum of the numbers ivhich express the degrees of the multiplicand and multiplier. Thus ill Ex. 13, Art. 39, the multiplicand and multiplier are each homogeneous and of the second degree, and the product is homogeneous and of the fourth degree. lu Ex. 15, Art. 39, the multiplicand is homogeneous and of the second degree, and the multiplier is homogeneous aud of the first degree ; the product is homogeneous aud of the third degree. This law is of great importance, as it serves to test the accuracy of Algebraic work ; the student is therefore recommended to pa}' great attention to the degree of the terms in the results which he obtains. EXAMPLES. Multiply 1. 4a2 - - 36 by Sab. Ans. 12a®6 — 9a6". 2. 8a" - - 9a6 by 3a". 24a" - 27a®6. 3. 3ai" - - 4y" + 5z" by 2a;"?/. Ga;b/ — 8xY + lOcAyz". 4. xY ■ — y^z* + z*x“ by x-y-z-. .Ay® z" — .a;"y® 2 ® 4* .Ay"z®. 5. 2xyh :® + 3.a;"y®z — bx^yz- by 2xy-z. Ans. -ix'fi^z* 4- GAy®z" — 10.Ay®z®. 6. — 2d- -b - 4a6" by — 7a"6". 14a"6® 4- 28a®6". 7. 8xyz — 10 a;®y 2 ® by -xyz. - 8 .a;"y" 2 " 4 - 10 Ay"z". 8. abc - - a"6c — r?6"c by —abc. —a-b'^c- + a®6"c" + a"6®c". 9. X + 7 by a; — 10. a;" - 3.a; - 70. 10. X + 9 by a; — 7. x" 4- 2.x - 63. 11. 2x - - 3 by X 4- 8. 2x" + 13.x - 24. 12. 2x + S by X — 8. 2.x" - 13x - 24. 13. a;® — 7a; + 5 by .r ■ - 2x 4- 3. Ans. .A - 2.A - 4a;® 4- 19.x" - 31x 4- 15. 14. a" — 5a6 — 6" by a" 4- 5a 6 4- 6". Ans. — 25a"6" — 10a6® — b*. 15. a;" — xy + X + ifi 4- y 4- 1 by a; + y — 1 - Alls, -f- 3.xy + — !• + b'^ + c- — 6c — ca — ab by o + 6 + c. Alls, + 5® + c** — 3«6c. 16 . 56 EXAMPLES. 17. 3a^ + 2a + 2a® + 1 + a* by — 2a + 1. Ans. a® — 2a® + 1. 18. —ax^ 4- Saxy'^ — day* by —ax — 2>ay‘^. Ans. a'-.^‘® + 27a®y®. 19. — 2x^y y* Sx-y"^ + x* — 2xy^ b}’ x~ + 2xy + y^. Ans. .T® + 2x^y^ + y®. 20. 2ox4-a;^4-rt^ by a^+2oa:— a;^. a*-{-4a^x-j-4a-x‘^—x*. 21. 26“+.3«?>— a- by 7a — 55. — 105®— a6^+26o'-5— 7a®. 22. o^— a5 + 5® by a4-\-ah — Jr. o^— a-5'“+2o5®— 5’’. 23. 4x^—^xy—y‘^'by‘dx—2y. 12a;®— 17.i;-y+3.ry-+2y®. 24. a;® — ;vby+a;y^ — y® by a;+y. x^—x*y--\-x-y* — if. 25. a;^+2.i;®y+4x'^y®+8.'<;y®+lGy‘‘ by .a;— 2y. a,*®— 32y®. 26. 9a;'’y'“+27a;®y4-81a;^+3.a;y®+ y* b}' 3a;— y. 243a;®— y®. 27. a;+2y — 3z b}' a; — 2y+3z. .a;-— 4y®+12yz — 9z''^. Write down the values of inspection. 28. (a; + 7)(.a; + 1)- 29. (a; - 7) (a; + 14). 30. (a + 35) (a — 25). 31. (a - 6) (a + 13). 32. (a + 2)(a - 12). 33. (a; - 1 ) (a; + 12). 34. (2.X’ - 5)(a; - 2). 35. (3a; - l)(.^' + 1). 36. (3.1; + 7) (2a; - 3). 37 . ( 3 . 1 ; + 8 ) ( 3 . 1 ; — 7 ). 38. {2x + 7) (5a; + 4). the following products by a;^ + 8.1; + 7. X- 4 - lx — 98 . or 4- ah — 65-. aP' 4- 7a — 78. a- — 10a — 24. af^ 4- 11a; — 12. 2a;‘'* — 9.1; 4- 10. 3.1;- 4- 2 .r — 1. 6.1;- 4“ — 2 1 . 9.r® 4- 3a; — 56. lO.r- 4- 43.1; 4- 28. Solve the following examples by forinulm (1), (2), (3) in Art. 41. 39. {x^+xy+y‘^){x^—xy—y~). Ans. x*—x-y'^—2xy^—y*. 40. {x’'-+xy-y-){x^-xy-^7f). x*-xY-4r2xy^-y*. 41. (a-®4-2.^®+3.r4-l)(«®-2.r-4-3.i:-l). .r®4-2a;^4-5.i;--l. 42. (. 1 ;— 3)-(.i;'^4-6.r4-9)- a;^-18.t"4-Sl. 43. (.r4-y)"(V“-2.i;y-y®). .T^-4.ry-4.Ty®-yt EXAMPLES. 57 44. (2« + 3?/)^(4a;- + \'2xy — 9?/^). Ans. 16a;^ + + 144a;®^* — 81?/'*. 45. (rta; + by) {ax — by){a^x^ + b^if). a‘^x* — b*y*. 46. {ax + byY{ax — byY. a*.r'‘ — 2a%‘^x‘^y‘^ + 5'*^*. Show that the following results are true : 47. {a^+b'^) (c^+d') = {ac^brlY+ {ad-bcY. 48. (a4-6+c)^+a^+5“+c'^= (o + 5)^+ (5+c)^+ (c+ct)^. 49. (a—b) {b — c) {c—a) =bc{c~b) -\-ca{a—c)+ab{b—a). 50. (a — 6)®+6®— a®=3a6(6 — a). 51. {a^+ab+b^)^— {a'^—ab+b’^)‘^=4ab{a^+b‘^). 52. (a+6+c)®— a^— 5®— c®=3(a+6) (5+c) (c+a) . 53. {a+bY+-2{a^-l>^) + {a-bY-=4a\ 54. (a— 5)®+ (6— c)'*+ (c—a) ^=3 (a — 5) {b—c) {c—a)'. 55. (a— 6)®+(a+5)®+ 3(a — b)^{a + b) + 3(a+5)'^(a— 6) = {2a)\ 56. (a + 5)^(6 + c — a) (c + a — 6) + (a — 5)-(a + 5 + c) (a+6 — c) =4o6c^ 57. [(aa; + 5^)^ + {ay — 5.r)'-] [(aa; + by)'^ — {ay -f fta;)^] = (a*-5*)(a;*-?/*). 58 THE DIVISION OF ONE MONOMIAL BY ANOTHER. CHAPTER V. DIVISION. 44. Division m Algebra is the process of finding, from a given product and one of its factors, the other factor ; or it is the process of finding how many times one quantity is contained in another. Division is therefore the converse of multiplication. The Dividend is the given product ; or it is the quantity to be divided. The Divisor is the given factor ; or it is the quantity by which we divide. The Quotient is the required factor ; or it is the number which shows how many times the divisor is contained in the dividend. The above definitions may be briefly wi'itten quotient X divi.sor = dividend, or dividend -f- divisor = quotient. It is sometimes better to express this last result as a fraction ; thus dividend , . , = quotient. divisor It is convenient to make three cases in Division, (1) the division of one monomial by another, (2) the division of a pol 3 momial by a monomial, (3) the division of one poh'- nomial by another. 45. The Division of one Monomial by Another. — Since the product of 4 and x is 4a:, it follows that when 4a: is to be divided by x the quotient is 4. Or otherwise 4a: - 1 - a: = 4. Also since the product of a and b is ab, the quotient of ab divided bj" a is 5 ; that is ab A- a = b. THE DIVISION OF ONE MONOMIAL BY ANOTHER. 59 Similarly ahc a- a = be, abc A- b = ac ; abc a- c = ab ; abc A- ab = c; abc a- be — a', abc a- ca — b. These results may also be written abc a abc ab = be : = c : abc abc , — - ac ; — = ab ; b c Also 36a® A- 9a^ = abc be 36a® 9a" abc a ; — ca QGaaaaaa = b. = 4oa, by remov- daaaa ing from the divisor and dividend the factors common to both, just as in Arithmetic. Therefore 36a® a- 9a" = 4a^. 4c5aaaabbbcc Similarly 45a"5®c^ a- dct^bc^ = Hence we have the following daabcc = 5a^bK Ruxe. To divide one monomial by another, divide the coefficient of the dividend by that of the divisor, and subtract the exponent of any letter in the divisor from the exponent of that letter in the dividend. For example 72x^y^ h- 12x^y‘^ = = 6x^y. Also 55a"a;®?/® h- lla^xy'^ = baVy*. Eem. — If the numerical coefficient, or tlie literal part of the divisor be not found in the dividend, we can only indicate the division. Thus if 7a is to he divided by 2c, the quotient can only be indicated by 7a 2c or by — . In some cases, however, we may simplify the 2c expression for the quotient by a principle already used in Arithmetic. Thus if 16a®6'^ is to be divided by 12a6c, the quotient is denoted by — : — . Here the dividend = 4ab x 4a^6 and the divisor = 4a& x 3c: 12ahc thus the factor 4a&, which occurs in both dividend and divisor, may be removed in the same way as in Aritinuetic, and the quotient will be denoted by That is 3c _ 4«b X 4a^b _ Acdh \'2ahc 4a6 x 3c 3c ’ by removing the common factor 4a6. 60 THE RULE OF SIGNS — EXAMPLES. Note. — If we apply the above rule to divide any power of a letter by the same power of the letter, we are led to a curious conclusion. Thus by the rule a? -p d? = a? — ^ = but also -p a® = ^ =1, a® by removing the common factor a?\ .-. a!> = 1 ; that is, amj quantity whose exponent is 0 is equal to 1. The tme significance of this result will be explained in Art. 119. 46. The Rule of Signs for division may be obtained from an examination of the cases which occur in multiplica- tion, since the product of the equal to the dividend. Thus we have -\-CL X —a X (+&) = —ab, -fa X { — h) = —aft, — a X ( — &) = +a&, divisor and quotient must be .*. -\-c(h A- “f6 — -fa. —ah H- -f6 = —a. .-. —ah A- —b = -fa. .-. -fa& A- —b — —a. Hence in division as well as in multiplication, like sig)is produce -f , and unlike signs produce — . EXAMPLES. Divide 1 . 8a^6 by 4a&. Ans. 2a. 2. — 15.Tyby3.T. —by. 3. — 21a^&® by —Icdb"^. .36. -1. 45a®6^.r^ by —da^b.v^. — 5a*6.r^. 5. — 36a^6^c® by — 24a®6®c®. 6. 3x®bya;f 3 .t. 7. — 58a^6®c^ by — 2a^6. 29a~b'-c^. 8. 63abTV by -7ay. -9.-cK 9. 4.^"+” by 2x". 2x”'. 10. — 77x”‘+^ by — 7x". TO DIVIDE A POLYNOMIAL BY A MONOMIAL. 6 ] 47. To Divide a Polynomial by a Monomial. Since (a — b)c = ac — be, therefore ac — be — a — b. Also since (a — b) x ( — c) = —ac + 6c; — ac + be therefore b. — G Also since {a — b + c)ab — a'-b — ab^ + aic ; „ a~b — ab^ + abc , , therefore ^ = a — o + c. ab Hence we have the following rule : To divide a polynomied by a monomial, divide each term of the dividend separately by the divisor. For example (8a^ — 6a^6 + 2a^c) 2«^ = 4a — 36 + c. (9a; — 12^ + 3z) h- — 3 = — 3.r + 4?/ — z. (36a^62 - 24a^6® - 20a^6") -4- 4a-6 = 9a6 - 66^ - 5a-6. (2a;^ — bxy — fa;^^) —4a; = —4a; + 10?/ + 'dxif. EXAMPLES. Divide 1. —35a;® by 7a;®. 2. a;®y® by x^y. 3. 4n^6V by a6V. 4. — 2xy b}’ X. 5. a;® — 7a;® 4- 4a;^ by x^. 6. lOx’’ — 8a;® + 3a;^ by a;®. 7. 15a;® — 25.r^ by — 5a:®. 8. 27a;® — 36a;® by 9.r®. 9. -24a;® - 32a;" by -8a;®. 10. a® — ab — ac by —a. Ans. — 5x®. xy'^. 4ac. X - 2y. a-" — 7.a;® + 4x®. lOa:" - 8a:® + 3a. -3a® + 5a. 3a — 4. 3a® 4- 4a. — a 4“ b 4~ ^ ■ 48. To Divide one Polynomial by Another. — Let it be required to divide o® 4- 2a® — 3a by a® 4- 3a. Here we are to find a quantity which when multiplied bj' the divisor will produce the dividend. Hence the dividend 62 TO DIVIDE ONE POLYNOMIAL BY ANOTHER. is composed of all the partial products arising from the multiplication of the divisor by each term of the quotient (Art. 39). Arranging both the dividend and divisor accord- ing to descending powers of a, we see that the first term a® of the dividend is the product of the first term of the divisor by the first term of the quotient (Art. 43) ; therefore, dividing a® by we obtain a for the first term of the quotient. Multiplying the whole divisor by a we obtain a® 4- 3 c 6^ for the partial product of the divisor b}" the first term of the quotient ; subtracting this product from the dividend we obtain the first remainder —d^ — 3«, which is the product of the divisor by the remaining terms of the quotient, and consequently the first term —cr of this product is the product of the first term of the divisor b}' the second term of the quotient. Dividing therefore this first term — by the first term of the divisor a~ we obtain —1 for the second term of the quotient. Multiplying the whole divisor by —1 we obtain —a? — 3a for the product of the divisor b}' the second term of the quotient ; subtracting this product there is no remainder. As all the terms in the dividend have been brought down, the operation is completed. Hence a — 1 is the exact quotient. The work may be arranged as follows : Divisor. Dividend. Quotient. a^ 4- 3a) a® 4- 2a- — 3a (a — 1 a® 4- 3a- — a- — 3a — a- — 3 a It will lie observed that in getting each term of the quotient in this example, we divide that term of the divi- dend containing the highest power of a b}’ the term of the divisor containing the highest power of the same letter , and therefore, when the dividend and divisor are arranged according to descending powers of a, any term of the quotient is found by dividing the first term of the divisor TO DIVIDE ONE POLYNOMIAL BY ANOTHER. 63 into the first term of the dividend, or into the first term of one of the remainders. Hence for the division of one polynomial by another, we have the following Rule. Arrange both dividend and divisor according to ascending or descending powers of some common letter. Divide the first term of the dividend by the first term of the divisor, and lorite the result for the first term of the quotient; multiply the whole divisor by this term, subtract the product from the dividend, and to the remainder join as many terms from the dividend, taJcen in order, as are required. Divide the first term of the remainder by the first term of the divisor, and write the result for the second term of the quotient; midtiply the whole divisor by this term, and subtract the product from the last remainder. Continue this ojjeration until the remainder becomes zero, or until the first term of the remainder loill not contcun the first term of the divisor. This method of dividing is similar to long division in Arithmetic, i.e., we break up the dividend into parts, and find how often the divisor is contained in each part ; and then the Slim of these partial quotients is the complete quotient. Thus, in the example just solved, a® + — 3a is divided by the above process into two parts, viz., a? + 3a^, and — — 3a, and each of these is divided by a^ + 3a, giving for the partial quotients a and —1 ; thus we obtain the complete quotient a — 1. Note. — The divisor is often put on the right of the dividend and the quotient beneath the divisor as follows : Dividend. Divisor. + 2db 4- 6^ [a + b + ab a + b Quotient. ah + b2 ah -|- b*^ 64 EXAMPLES. It is of great importance to arrange both dividend and divisor according to ascending or descending powers of some common letter ; and to attend to this order in every part of the operatio7i. EXAMPLES. 1 . Divide 24a;® — &bxy + 2\y- by 8 . 1 ; — 3y. The operation is conveniently arranged as follows : 8 a; — 3y)24;r® — Q>bxy + 21y®(3a; — ly. 24.r® — %xy — 5Gxy + 21y® — o6xy + 21 y® Divide 2 . 3. 4. 5. 6 . 7. 8 . 9. 10 . 11 . + 3a; + 2 by .a; + 1 . . 1 ;® — 7a; + 12 b}' x — 3. a;® — 11a; + 30 by x — .5. .a;® — 49.a; + GOO by x — 25. 3.a;® + lO.r + 3 by + 3. 2a;® + lire + 5 by 2re + 1. 5x’® + lire -|- 2 by a; + 2. 2a;® + 17.a; + 21 b}' 2rc + 3. 5a;® + 16re + 3 by x + 3. Divide 3cC^ — 10a®5 + 22a®5® a® - 2ab + 35®. .4?is. .a; + 2. a: — 4. a; - 6. X - 24. 3.a: + 1. re + 5. 5.e + 1. re -f“ 7 . 5.e + 1. 22a6® + 155'* by The operation is written as follows. — 2ab + 35^)3a'* — lOa^ft + 22a-b~ — 22ab^ + 155'*(3a- — 4a6 + 55- 3fd — 6cdb -f 9a-5- — 4a®5 + 13a-5® — 22a5® — 4a^5 -f 8a~b” — 12a5® 5«252 - 10a53 + lob* 5a-5® — 10a5® -f 155'* 12. Divide re'*— 5re®-|-7.e^-|-2a;®— 6 .e — 2 by 1 -f-2rc— 3re®+ .r\ Arrange both dividend and divisor according to descending o 00 powers of re, and arrange the work as follows : EXAMPLES. 65 — 5x® + + 2a;^ — &x — 2 [a;^ — 3a;" + 2x + 1 x’ — 3x® + 2a;* + x® x® — 2x — 2 — 2x® - 2x* 4- 6x® + 2x- - 6x — 2x® + 6x^ — 4x^ — 2x — 2x* + Gaf — 4x — 2 — 2x* + 6x^ — 4x — 2 We might have arranged the dividend and divisor accord- ing to ascending powers of x as follows : — 2 — 6x + 2x^ -|- 7x® — 5x® 1 1 4- 2x — 3x^ 4- — 2 — 4x 4- 6x^ — 2x* —2 — 2x 4- x® — 2x — 4x^ 4" 7x^ 4- 2x* — 5x® — 2x — 4x^ 4- 6x® — 2x® X® 4- 2x* — 3x® 4- x’ x^ 4- 2x* — 3x^ 4- x’ We thus obtain the same quotient we had before, though the terms are in a different order. 13. Divide a® 4- 6^ 4- c® — 3abc by a -f- 6 4- c. Arrange the dividend according to descending powers of a. a® — 3abc + b^ + c^ja -f- b -j- c a® 4- a~b 4- a^c — ab — ac + b^ — be -j- — a"b — a^c — 3abc — a^b — ab^ — abc — a^c 4- ab^ — 2abc — ci^c — abc — a ab^ — abc 4- «c^ 4- 5® ab^ 4- 5® 4- b~c — abc 4- ac^ — b^c — abc — 6^c — 6c^ ac^ 4- t>c^ + c® ac^ + bc^ 4- c* 66 EXAMPLES. In this example we arrange the terms according to de- scending powers of a ; then when there are two terms, such as a% and a^c, which involve the same power of a, we select a new letter, as h, and put the term which contains b before the term which does not ; and again of the terms ab" and «&c, we put the former first as involving the higher power of b. 14. Divide x* + 4a^ by 2ax + 2n^. x‘^ + 4a^ I a;- -f- -f- 2a^ X* + + '2a-x^ x^ — 'lax -j- 'lo^~ — 'laxr — 2d^x^ — 2ax^ — 4a^a;^ — 4a®a; 2alr2 + + 4a" 2a^x^ + ia^x + 4a" Divide 15. x^ — 5x* + 9.r® — 6x^ — a; + 2 by x- — 3x + 2. Ans. x^ — 2x~ -t- .X* + 1. 16. x^ — 2.x" — 4x® + 19.x^ — 31.x -f 15 b}’ x® — 7x -f 5. .d.?is. x^ — 2x -f- 3. 17. a® -f 5^ -f 3abc — c® by a + 6 — c. A?is. a- — ab + ac + b- + be + c^. 18. x" + 64 by x^ + 4x + 8. x'^ — 4x + 8. 19. a® — 6® by a® — 2a'-b + 2o6® — 5®. ^ias. a® + 2a-b + 2ab- + 6®. When the coefficients are fractional we may still use the ordinary process, combining the fractional coefBcients by the rules of Arithmetic. 20. Divide |x® -f ^\x^^ + ^y® by ^x + ix® + + ^y® \jx -b ly |x® + fx®y ^x- - |.xy + Jy® — - W- + * 2 /^ W + ^y* DIVISION WITH THE AID OF PARENTHESES. 67 Divide 21. — fa^cc + ^-ax^ — 27a;® by — 3x. Alls. — 3aa: + 9a:®. 22. + -x^ci — by -^a — J. 49. Division with the Aid of Parentheses. — Some- times it is found convenient to divide with .the aid of paren- theses thus : 1. Divide x®— (a-l-6-|-c)a;®-t- (a&-f ac-t-&c)a:— n6c by x—c. X® — (ft -b & -1- c)x®-|- (ah -b ftc -b hc)x — abc |x — c X® — C.X® X®— (ft-b&)x-bft6 — (ft -b i)x® -b (ah -b ac + bc)x — (ft -b 6)x® -b (ft -b b)cx abx — abc abx — abc Divide 2. ft®x^-b (2ftc— 6®)x®-bc® by ftx® — 6x-bc. Ans. aaf+bx+c. 3. X® -b (ft -b & + c)x® -b {ab -b flc -b bc)x -b abc hyx-j-b. Ans. X® -b (ft -b 4. ftx® — (ft® + &) .X® -b 6® by ftx — x® — ftx — &. 5. ft®(6 -be) -b &®(ft — c) -b c®(ft — &) -b abc hj a + b + c. Ajis. ft(6 -b c) — be. 50. Where the Division cannot be Exactly Per- formed. — In the examples given thus far the divisor has been exactly contained in the dividend. It may happen, as in Arithmetic, that the division cannot be exactly performed. In such cases it is a good exercise for the student to dete'r- mine the accurate value of the remainder. Divide x® — 6x® -b llx -b 2 by .x — 2. X® — 6.x® -b llx -b 2 [x — 2 X® — 2x® X® — 4x -b 3 — 4x® -b llx — 4x® -b 8x 3x -b 2 3x — 6 8 68 IMPORTANT EXAMPLES IN DIVISION. The division can be carried no further without fractions, because x will not go into 8. We therefore express the result in the same way as in Arithmetic, that is, b}’ adding to the quotient a fraction of which the numerator is the remainder and the denominator the divisor. Thus the result is + ll.r + 2 X — 2 x'^ — 4x + S + X — 2 EXAMPLES. Find the remainder when 1. rc® — Ga;^ + 12a; — 17 is divided b}' a; — 3. A?is. —8. 2. 3a;® — 7a; — 9 is divided b}’ a; + 1. —5. 3. 2.a’® + 5a;^ — 4a; - 7 is divided by x + 2. 5. 4. 4a;® + 7x^ — 3a; — 33 is divided bj^ 4a; — 5. —18. 5. 27a;® + 9a;^ — 3a; — 5 is divided by 3x — 2. 5. 6 . IG.a;® — 19 + 39a; — 4 6 . 1 ;® is divided by 8x — 3. —10. 7. 8a; — 8a;^ + 5a;® + 7 is divided by 5x — 3. 10. 51. Important Examples in Division. — The follow- ing examples are very important ; the}’ may be easily verified, and should be carefully noticed. a; — y I. — = + xy -f 2 /^ X - y ^ ~ = a;'’ + x-y + xy- -f y®, L a; - y and so on •, the terms in the quotient all being positive. -.X’® r ..2 _ _ a; + y = - y. X* — y* X + y .X® — y® _x + y X® - x-y -f xif - y®, a;5 - x*y + .x®y- - .x^y® + xy* — y®. II. IMPORTANT EXAMPLES IN DIVISION. 69 aud so on ; the terms in the quotient being alternately posi- tive and negative. _ ^2 X y a;" + ^ - X + y x^y + x'^y- — x^y^ + x^y'^ — xy^ + ?/®, III. + y\ afy + x'^y^ xy^ + y\ + y’’ ^ ^6 , + y and so on ; the terms in the quotient being alternately positive and negative. The student ean verify these results in any particular case, and carry on these operations as far as he pleases, and he will thus gain confidence in the truth of the following state- ments for which we shall hereafter give a general proof. See Art. 170. These different eases may be conveniently arranged in the following concise statements : y.n _ yu jg divisible by a; — y if n be any whole number. (1) That is: the difference of any two equcd poivers of two tumbers is cdiuays divisible by the difference of the tivo numbers. x’' — y” is divisible by a; -f- y if n be any even whole number. (2) That is: the difference of any tivo equal even poivers of tivo numbers is cdivays divisible by the sum of the numbers. x^ -P y" is divisible by a: 4- y if n be any odd whole number. (3) That is : the sum of any two equal odd poivers of two numbers is cdways divisible by the sum of the numbers. x» _|_ yn jg Hever divisible by a: y or x — y, when n is an even whole number. EXAMPLES. Write the results in the following by these three state meuts. 1. a^ — b^ A- a — b. Ans. a* -f a^b -f cdb'^ + ab^ -p b^. 2. X® — 1 X — 1. x^ -P X -p 1. 0 EXAMPLES. 8a® — V -i- 2a — h. 803® — 27?/® -h 2x — a;® + 1 -f- o: + 1. a® + 64 -7- a + 4. Alls 4a® + 2ab + 6® 4o3® + ^xy + 9?/® 0,’® — 2x^y + 4a;?/® — 8?/® 8a;® — 4a:®?/ + 2x^® — ?/® a;® - a: + 1 a® - 4a 4- 16 6x?/ + 9?/® 4a;® 11 . 12 . 13. 14. 15 . 16. 17. 18. 19. 20 . 21 . 22 . 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. —a;® 4- Zxy 4- 4?/® — 2a;®?/® + ‘^x-y — 3y- :® - 3xy 4- 4?/® 3. 4. 5. X* — 16y* -h X + 2y. 6. 16a;^ — y^ -a- 2x y- 7 8 9. 8a;® + 27?/® -h 2x + 3?/. Divide 10. 3a;® — 9a;®?/ — 12.x’?/® by —3a;. 4a;*?/^ — 8a;®?/® 4- 6a:?/® Ijy — 2xy xhj — 3a:®?/® + 4a:?/® b}' a:y. — 15a®5® — 3a®5® 4- 12a6 by —Sab. ba"b- 4- a& — 4 60a®5®c® - 48a®5V 4- 36a®5®c" by 4a6c®. .4?is. 15a®6® — 12a5® 4- 9a6c® — 3a® 4- |-a5 — 6ac by — |-a. 2a — 35 4- 4c. f.x®?/® — 3x’®?/^ — 6x*?/® by — |.x®?/®. -3a.*® + 2y® 4- 4xy. Ja®a: — y^g^afta; — fac.x by -|aa;. a:® — 11a: 4- 30 by x — 5. a;® — 7x 4- 12 by a; — 3. 3a;® 4- a: — 14 by .X — 2. 6. x® - 31.x 4- 35 by 2.x - 7. 15a® 4- 17ax — 4.x® by 3a + 4.x. 60x® — 4.x?/ — 45?/® by lOx — 9y. —4:xy — 15?/® + 96x® by 12x — by lOOx® - 3x - 13.x® by 3 + 25.x. 7. x® + 96x® — 28.x by 7.x — 2. X® — 4.x^ 4- 3x® + 3.x .X -fa — ^b — c. X — 6. X — 4. 3.x + 7. 3x — 5. 5a — X. 6.x 4- by. 8.x + 3y. 4.x® — X, X- 4- 14x. 9 3x 4- 2 by x® — x yl??s. .X® — 3.x® 4" 2.x — 1. 28. .x®4-.x^— x®?/®+x®— 2.x’?/®4-?/®byx®4-.x’?/— ?/®. x*+x— y. 29. 2.x® — 8.x + .X* + 12 — 7x® by x®4- 2 — 3x. x®4-5x + 6. 30. 8.x® — 4.x®— 128.x 4- .x^ — 1 92 by .x®— 16. x®4- 8.x 4- 12, 31. X®— y® by .x®+ .xy + y®. x’—x^y-\-x^y^—x^^-\-xy^—y~. 32. 2a'*+27a5®— 815'* by a+36. 2a®— 6a®54-18a5®— 275®. 33. x®4-x*y+.x®y®4-x®y®+.xy*+y®by .x®4-y®. .x®4-xy+y®. 34. X® 4- 2x*y 4- 3.x®y® — x®y® — 2xy* — 3y® by .x"® — y®. ^??s. X® 4- 2xy 4- 3y®. EXAMPLES. 71 35. 4- a;** — 2 by x^ + + 1 ■ ^4ns. — x® + — 2. 36. a;^ — x^y — xy^ + y^ by a;^ + xy + y^. x^ — 2xy + y'^. 37. 49a;^+ 21a;?/+ 12y2 — 162:^ by 7;« + 3y— 42. Tx-^-iz. 38. + 2ab + hy a + b — c. a + b + c. 39. a® + 3a^6 + — 1 + 3a6® by a + 6 — 1. A71S. a® + 2ab + 6^ + a4-5 + l. 40. x^ — y® by .a;® + x^y + + y®. x® — a;^y + xy* — y®, 41. + 2a®6® + 6^'^ by a* + 2«-5® + 6^. Ans. a® — 2a®6^ + 3a*b* — 2a%^ + 5®. 42. + xlgfl® by + |-ac. -j^^a® — |-rt^c + foe®. 43. 39^a^-|-a®-|a®+|a+Jj6-by|a2-f-a. 44. 36a;^ + -Jy® + J — 4.a;y — 6.a; + \y by dx — \y — .x and 1 and x and 8, or 3.a; and 8 and x and 1. Taking the first products we have 3a; X 2 4- X 4 = 10.x - ; this combination therefore fails to give the correct middle term. Next try the second products, and get 3.x X 4 4- a; X 2 = 14.x, which is the correct value of the middle term. .-. 3.x^ + 14.x + 8 = (3.x 4- 2) (x + 4). The beginner will frequently find that it is not easy to select the proper factors at the first trial. Practice alouv will enable him to detect at a glance whether any two factors are the proper ones. ]02 EXAMPLES. EXAMPLES. 1. Resolve into factors + 29.x- — 15. Write down (7x 5) (2x 3) foi a first trial, noticing that 3 and 5 must have opposite signs. These factors give 14a;^ and —15 for the first and tliird terms. But since 7x3— 2x5 = 11, this combination fails to give the correct coefficient of the middle term. Next try (7xB){2x5). Since 7x5 — 3x2 = 29, these factors will be correct if we insert the signs so that the positive will predominate. .-. 14.1-2 ^ 29.1- - 15 = (7x - 3)(2.c + 5). (Verify by mental multiplication). It is not usually necessary to put down all thes^ steps. After a little practice the student will be able to ejs.amine the different cases rapidly, and to reject the unsuitable combina- tions at once. In the factoring of such expressions as these the following hints areVery useful ; (1) If tlie third term of the trinomial is positive, then the second terms of its factors have both the same sign as the middle term of the trinomial. (2) If the third term of the trinomial is negative, then the second terms of its factors have opposite signs. 2. Resolve into factors + 17.i- + 6 (1) 5.1-2 _ _|_ g ^2^ 5.1-2 _|_ _ 6 C3) 5.r2 - 13.1- - 6 a) In (1) we notice that the factors which give 6 are both positive. In (2) we notice that the factors which give 6 are both negative. In (3) we notice that the factors which give 6 have opposite signs. In (4) we notice that the factors which give 6 have opposite signs. EXAMPLES. 103 Therefore for (1) we write (5a; + )(a; + ). (2) we write {ox — ){x — (3) we write {bx ~2) {x 3) , noticing that 2 and 3 have opposite signs. (4) we write (5.r 2){x 3) , noticing that 2 and 3 have opposite signs. Since 5x3 + lx2 = 17, we see that 5a;'^ + 17a; + 6 = (5.^’ + 2) (a; + 3). 5a;^ — 17a; 6 = {bx - 2){x — 3). And, since 5 X 3 — 2 x 1 = 13, we have only to insert the proper signs in each factor. In (3) the positive sign must predominate. In (4) the negative sign must predominate. Therefore bx"^ + 13.r — 6 = (5.^’ — 2) {x + 3). bx^ - 13.r - G = (5.^• + 2){x - 3). Mo)'e generally, trinomials of the form ax“^ + bx + c, (a Bot a square) may be factored more readilj’ as follows : Multiplying by a we get a^a:^ + bax + ac. "Writing z for ax, this becomes bz ac. Factor this trinomial by Art. G5, replace the value of z, and divide the result bj’ a. Thus, 3. Resolve into factors Ga;^ — 13.a; + G. Multipljdng by G we get (Ga;)^ — 13(G.r) -|- 3G. Putting z for Ga; we get 2^ - 132 + 3G, which, being factored, gives (, _9)(2-4). Hence the required factoi-s of G.x2 - 13x + G ar e i(G.T - 9)(G.x- - 4) : = (2x - 3)(3x — 2). Resolve into factors 4. 3a;2 -f- b x -f- 2. Ans. (3x + 2)(x + 1) 5. 2x^ + 5x + 2. (2x + l)(x + 2) 6. 2x- + 7.x + G. (2x + 3)(x + 2) 7. 3a;^ -f” 8x 4“ 4. (3x + 2)(x + 2) 8. 2x2 + llx + 5. (2x + l)(x + 5) 104 TO factor the Difference of two squares. 9. 3a;2 + lO.ar + 3. A?is. (3x -f- l)(a: + 3). :o. 3a;' + 11a; + 6. (3x + 2) (x + 3). ,1. 4a;^ + 11a; - 3. (4.a; — 1) (a; + 3). 12. 3x^ + a; - 2. (3a; - 2) (x + 1). 13. 2x‘^ + 1 CO (2x — l)(a; + 2). 14. 2x‘^ + 1 00 (2.x> - l)(.r + 8). 15. 3.X-" — 19a; - 14. (3a; + 2) (.a; - -)• 16. Ga;^ — 31a; + 35. (.3.a; - 5)(2.'c - 17. 3x^ + 19.a; - 14. (3a; — 2) (a; + ')• 18. + a; - 14. (4.a; — 7) (a; + 2). 67. To Factor an Expression which is the Differ- ence of Two Squares. — From (3) of Art. 41, we see tliat the difference of two squares is equal to the product of the sum and difference of their square roots. Therefore, conversely, to find the factors we have the following Rule. Extract the square roots of the tioo terms; take the sum of the results for one factor, and the difference for the other. EXAMPLES. 1. Resolve into factors 25x~ — 16y^. 25x~ — IGy- = (5x)'^ — (4y)-. Therefore the first factor is the sum of ox aud 4y, and the second is the difference of 5.v aud 4y. 2ox~ — IGff- = (ox + 4y)(ox — 4y). The intermediate steps may usually be omitted. Resolve into factors 2 . x~ — 9 c 6 “. 3. 121 — 4. 2/" — 25.v^. 5. 36.U-2 - 2oh-. G. x'-ff- — 36. 7. a^-d^ - 4c-d“, (a; + 3a) (x — 3a) . (11 + x)(il - x). (y + o.v) (y - o.v) . (G.r + ob) (6.C — 56). (.xy + G)(xy - 6), (ab + 2cd) (ab — 2cd) . TO FACTOR THE DIFFERENCE OF TWO SQUARES. 105 8. 81a" - 49.r", 9, 9a" - 121. 10. a;® - 25. 11. - 49. 12. a" - 64.a;8. Ans. (9a^ + (9o- — lx-). (3a^ + ll)(3a2 - 11). {a? + 5)(x® — 5). {xhi + 7) (cc'^a — 7). (a + 8x®) (a — 8x®) . 68. When One or Both of the Squares is a Compound Expression. — Here the same method is employed as iu the last Article. EXAMPLES. 1. Resolve into factors (2a + 5)^ — 9a;^. The sum of 2a + 6 and 3 .t is 2a + 5 + 3.x’, and their difference is 2a + 5 — 3a;. (2a + 6)^ — 9a;- = (2a + & 4- 3x) (2a + 5 — 3a;). If the factors contain like terms they should be collected so as to give the result in its simplest form. 2. Resolve into factors (5.^’ + 8y)- — (4.a; — 3y)-. The snm of bx + 8y and 4.r — 3y is 5x + 8y + 4.a; — 3y = 9.^■ + by, and their difference is bx + 8y — 4x + Sy = x + lly. (5a; + 8y)2 - (4a; — Sy)^ = (9a; + by) {x + Ay). Resolve into factors 3. (a + 6)^ — c^. 4. (a - by - c\ b. (a; + y)^ — 4z-. 6. (.^’ + 2y)^ — a^. 7. (a - 2x)-^ - 8. (2a; - 3a) " - 9c^. 9. {x + y)2 — x^. 10. X- — (y — x)^. 11. (x + 3y)2 — 4y^ 12. (7a; + 3)'^ — (5a; — An.s. (a + b + c) (a + b — c) (a — b + c) {a — b — c) (.^’ y + 2z) {x + y — 2z) (a; 4- 2y + a) {x + 2y — a) (a — 2x 4- b) (a — 2x — b) (2x — 3a 4- 3c) (2a; — 3a — 3c) {2x + y)y y{2x - y) (x 4- by) (x + y) 4)2. (12.r; - 1) {2x + 7) 106 TO FACTOR THE DIFFERENCE OF TWO SQUARES. 69. Compound Quantities expressed as the Dif- ference of Two Squares. — Compound expressions, by suitably" grouping the terms, can often be expressed as the difference of two squares, and so be resolved into factors. EXAMPLES. 1. Eesolve into factors a- + "iax + — 4?/. From (1) of Art. 41, + 2ax + x~ = (a + x)~. + 2ax + x'^ — W — (a + ^')“ ~ 46-, which by Art. 68 = (n + a- -}- 26) (a + x — 26). 2. Resolve into factor’s 9a'^ — c~ + 4c.a — 4.a-. 9a“ — C“ + 4fa — 4a‘- = 9a- — (c- — 4c.r + 4.r-) — 9a- — (c — 2.r)-b}’ (2) of Art. 41, = (3a + c — 2.r) (3a — c -}- 2a) . 3. Resolve into factors 24.ay + 25 — 16.a- — 9y®. 24.ay + 25 — 16.a'^— 9y-= 25 — (16.a- — 24ay + dy~) --- 25 — (4.a — 3y)“b3’ (2) of Art. 41, = (5 + 4a — 3y) (5 — 4a + 3y) . 4. Resolve into factors 2bd — c- — a- + d'- + 6- + 2ac. Here we see that the expression is composed of two trinomials, each of which is the square of a binomial [(1) and (2) of Art. 41]. . • . 2hd— cr— a- + (F + 6“ + 2ac= 6-+ 26d + d~ 2ac +c-) = (6+d)-— (a— c)- = (6 4“ d -f“ a — c) (6 -|“ d — 'a -f~c) . Resolve into factors 5. .a- + 2ay + y- — a^. 6. .a'^ — 6aa + 9a- — 166“. 7. 4a^ + 4a6 + 8. a^ + a- + 2oa — y-. 9. — .a- — y- + 2xy. 10. .a^ + y-+ 2xy — AxY- Ans. (a + y + o) (x’ + y — a) (.a — 3a + 46) (a — 3a — 46) (2a + 6 + 3c) (2a + 6 — 3c) (a + a + y) (a + a - y) (c + a - y) (c - a + y) (a + y + 2.ry) (a + y - 2ay) MISCELLANEOUS CASES OF FACTORING. 107 70. To Factor an Expression which can be Written as the Sum or the Difference of Two Cubes. — Such expressions as these may be resolved into factors b}' Art. 51. EXAMPLES. 1. Resolve into factors 8a;® — 27y®. By I. of Art. 51, this is divisible by 2a; — 3y. .-. 8a;® — 27y® - (2a;)® — (3y)® = (2a; — 3y)(4a;2 + &xy + 9y®). Note. — The middle term Qxy is the product of 2x and Sy. 2. Resolve into factors 343a;® + 27y®. 343a;® + 27y® = (7a;® + 3y) (49a;* - 2lx-y + 9/), (by III. of Art. 51). Resolve into factors 3. 8a® - 27y®. 4. 1 - 343a;®. 5. n®6® + 512. 6. 343 + 8a;®. 7. 216a;® - 343. 8. 27a;® - 64y®. 9. 64.x® + 125?/®, 10. 216a;® - 5®. 11. a® + 3435®. Ans. (2a — 3y) (4a® + Qay + 9y®). (1 — 7.x) (1 + 7x + 49x®). (a5 + 8)(a®5® - 8a5 + 64). (7 + 2x)(49 - 14x + 4.x®). (6x - 7) (36.x® + 42a; + 49). (3.x — 4y)(9.x® + 12.x?/ + 16y®). (4.x® + 5y)(16x* — 20.x®?/ + 25//®). (6x® - 5) (36.x* + 6x®5 + 5®) . (a + 75) (a® — lab + 495®) . 71. Miscellaneous Cases of Resolution into Fac- tors. — When an expression can be arranged as the differ- ence of two squares, it may be factored either by (II.) of Art. 51 or bj’ (3) of Art. 41. It will be found the simplest, however, first to factor by the second method, using the rule for factoring the difference of two squares (Art. 67) . 108 EXAMPLES. EXAMPLES. 1. Resolve into factors 16a^ — 816*. 16a* - 816* = (4a2 + 96^) (4a" - 96") (Art. 67) = (4a" + 96") (2a + 36) (2a - 36) (Art. 67). 2. Resolve into factors a;® — ?/®. 3.6 _ yO _ ^3.3 _j_ ^3.3 _ y3'^ (Art. 67) = (x + ?/) (a-" - xij + ?/") {x - y) (xr + xy + y"-) (Art. 51, I. and III.) . The student should be careful in every case to remove all monomial factors that are common to each term of an ex- pression, and place them outside a parenthesis, as explained in Art. 63. 3. Resolve into factors 28x*y + 64.r®y — GOx-y. 28x*y -f G-ix^y — GOx-y = Ax-y{~x~ + 16.a — 15) = Ax-y{7x — 5)(a -f- 3) (Art. 66). 4. Resolve into factors x^cr — 8y^a~ — 4.a®6" 32y®6". x^a-— 8yhi-— 4x®6"4- 32^%-= a-(.r*— 8y®) — 46-(a;3— 8y®) = (x^ — 8y^)(a- — 46-) = {x- 2y){x-+ 2 x7j+ 4/)(a-f- 26)(a— 26). 5. Resolve into factors 4.x" — 25y- + 2x + by. 4.1;" — 25/ 4- 2.'c -h 5y = {2x + by) {2x — by) -|- 2x -f by = {2x + by){2x — by + 1). Resolve into two or more factors 6. a" — / — 2yz — 2". A»s. (a -t- y -|- 2) (a — y — 2) . 7. 6.a" — a: — 77. (3.r — ll)(2.r + 7). 8. .a®-4096. (.a’-p4) (.t;"-4.t+ 16) (.a-4) (a"-|-4.r-f 16) . 9. .a" — a" 4- / - 2xy. {x — y + a)(x — y — a). 10. aea" — dcx + aclx — bd. (ex -|- d){ax — 6). 11. (a -f 6 -|- c)" — (a — 6 — c)". 4a (6 -|- c). Other expressions which, bj’ a slight modification, can be arranged as the difference of two squares, ma}’ be factored b}' Art. 67. EXAMPLES. 109 12. Resolve into factors + x-y^^ + ?/■*. a;'* + x-y- + ?/■* = »;■* + ix-y^ + >/ — ^'y‘^ = (x-^ + f-r - ^!f = {x- + y- + xy) (.a;- + 2/^ — xy ) . 13. Resolve iuto factors — \bx~y- + ‘dy^. x^ — Ibx-y- + 9^* = (x" — 3?/")‘’ — 9.x“^“ = — 3^2 + 3.x?/) (.X- — oy- — 3.x//) . Expressions which can be put into the form .a;® ± — inaj" yZ be factored by the rules for resolving the sum or the differ- ence of two cubes (Art. 70). g 14. Resolve into factors 27?/®. -3 - 27/ X® i'2\3 ■2 15. a-.x'’ Resolve a-.x® — — y3 Scr = 3a (a + 36). a® — 9a6^ = a(a + 36) (a — 36). a^ 4- 6a"6 4- 9a6'^ = a(a 4- 36) (a 4* 36). .-. G. C. D. = a(a 4- 36). Find the G. C. D. of x{a — x)-, ax{a — xy, 2ax(a — x)*. Resolving into factors, we have x{a — x)^ = x{a — x) (a — x). ax(a — x)® = ax(a — x)(a — x) (a — x). 2ax(a — x)* = 2ax{a — x){a — x){a — x) {a — x). .-. G. C. D. = a-(a - 0;)^ Hence the following Rule. Resolve each expression into its prime factors, and take the product of all the factors common to all the e,xpressions, giving to each factor the highest power which is common to all the given expressions. GREATEST COMMON DIVISOR OF POLYNOMIALS. 113 EXAMPLES. Find the G. C. D. of 1. iab‘^, 2a-b, Gab^. Ans. 2ab. 2. 3x^2/^, x^y^, x^y^. x'Y. 3. Gxyh, Sx^y^z"^, Axyz^. 2xyz. 4. oa^F, loabc^, lOa'^Fc. bab. 5. dx^yh^, 12xyh, Gx^y'^z^. 3xy-z. 6. 8a^x, Gabxy, lOate^. 2ax. 7. al + ab, a? -'b^. a + b. 8. {x + yff, x^ - y^. X + 7J. 9. x^ + x^y, x^ + 2/®. X + y. 10. a® — ct^x, a^ — ax^, a* — ax®. a (a — x). 11. X* — 27a^x, (x — 3a)'^. X — 3a. 12. xy - y, x*y - xy. y(x - 1). 13. ax“^ + 2cd-x + a^, 2ax~ — 4a^x — 6a®, 3 (ax + a~)'^. phis. a(x + a). 74. The Greatest Common Divisor of Expressions that cannot be Readily Resolved into Factors. — To find the G. C. D. in such cases, we adopt a method analogous to that used in Arithmetic for finding the G. C. D. of two or more numbers. The method depends on two principles. 1. If an exjJression contain a certain factor., any multiple of that expression is divisible by that factor. Thus, if F divides A it will also divide mA. For let a denote the quotient when A is divided by F ; then A — aF ; therefore mA = maF ; and therefore F divides mA. 2. If two expressions have a cornmon factor, it ivill divide their sum 07id their difference; and cdso the sum and the difference of any multiple of them. Thus, if F divides A and B, it will divide viA ± nB. For since F divides A and B, we may suppose A =aF’, and B=bF-, therefore mA ± nB = maF ± nbF = F{ma, ± nb). Therefore F divides mA ± 7iB. 114 GREATEST COMMON DIVISOR OF POLYNOMIALS. 4Ye can now prove the rule for finding the G. C. D. of any two compound Algebraic expressions. Let A and B denote the two expressions. Let them be arranged in ascending or descending powers of some common letter ; and let the highest power of that letter in B be either equal to or greater than the highest power in A. Divide Bhy A\ let p be the quotient and C the remainder. Suppose C to have a simple factor m. Kemove this factor, and so obtain a new divisor D. Suppose further, that in order to make A divisible by D it is necessary to multiply A by a simple factor n. Divide iiA b}' D \ lei q be the next quotient, and E the remainder. Divide D by ; let r be the quotient, and suppose that there is no remainder. Then E will be the G. C. D- required. The operation of division will stand thus : A)B{p m)G D)nA{q qD E)D{r First, to show that F7 is a common divisor of A and B. From the above division we have the following results : D = rE. iiA = qD + E = qrE + E — (qr -f- l)E. „ pqrE + pE B = pA + C — pA + mD ~ f- mrE ( pqr A p , = ^ Therefore FJ is a common divisor of A and B. Second, to show that E is the greatest common divisor of A and B. EXAMPLES. 115 By (2) of this Art. every common factor of A and B divides also B — pA, that is (7, and therefore D (since m is a simple factor) . Similarly as it divides A and D it divides nA — qD, that is E. But no expression of higher degree than E can divide E. Therefore E is the greatest common divisor of A and B. The greatest common divisor of three expressions, A, B, C, may be obtained as follows : First find D, the G. C. D. of any two of them, say of A and B ; next find F, the G. C. D. of D and (7; then F will be the G. C. D. of A, B, C. For D contains every factor which is common to A and B (Art. 72); and as F is the G. C. D. of D and G, it contains every factor common to D and C, and therefore every factor common to A, B, and C. Hence F is the G. C. D. of A, B, C. EXAMPLES. 1. Find the G. C. D. of x^—4,x + 3 and 9.r^— 15x+18. x“^ — Ax + 3)4x® — 9.r’^ — 15a; + 18 (4a; + 7 4.^® — 16a;- + 12a; 7x^ — 27x + 18 7a;'^ — 28x + 21 X — 3) a;® — 4a; + 3 (a; — 1 a;^ — 3a; — a- + 3 - a; + 3 Therefore the G. C. D. is a; — 3. Explanation. — First arrange the given expressions according to descending powers of x. Take for dividend that expression whose first term is of the higher degree; and continue each division until the first term of the remainder is of a lower degree than the first term of the divisor. When the first remainder, x — 3, is made the divisor, we put the first divisor to the right of it for a dividend, and after obtaining the new quotient, x — 1, we have nothing for a remainder. Hence, as in Arithmetic, the last divisor, x — 3, is the G. C. D. required. 116 EXAMPLES. 2. Find the G. C. D. of — 2x^ — 53x — 39 and — 3x^ — 24a; — 9. X - 3x" - 24a; - 9 4a;® — oa;® — 21a; 8x® — 2a:^ — 53a; — 39 8a;® - 6a-2 - 48a; - 18 2x 2a;'^ — 3a; — 9 4x® — oa; — 21 2x^ — Gx 4x- — G.X — 18 3 3x - 9 X — 3 3a; — 9 Therefore the G. C. D. is a; — 3. Explanation. — First arrange the given expressions according to descending powers of x. The expressions so arranged having their first terms of the same order, we take for divisor that whose highest power has the smaller coefficient, and arrange the work in parallel columns, as above. (1) At the first division we put the quotient 2 to the riff/tt of the dividend. (2) When the first remainder 4a;- — ox — 21 is made the divisor we put the quotient x to the left of the dividend. (3) When the second remainder 2,c- — 3.r — 9 is made the divisor we put the quotient 2 to the ri'jht of the dividend. (4) When the third remainder a; — 3 is made the divisor we put the quotients 2.r and 3 to the left of the dividend, and so on. This method is used only to determine the compound factor of the G. C. D. Simple factors of the given expressions must first be separated from them, and the G. C. D. of these, if they have an}", must be reserved and multiplied into the compound factor obtained b}" the rule. 3. Find the G. C. D. of C.r* — 26.1;® + dCx- — 42.r and 18.r" + 3.r^ - 132a;' + 63x. We have 6x*-2Gx^+ 4Ga;--42.T=2.T(3.'t;"-13a;-+23a;-21), . (1) and 18.r^+ 3.t;3-132.a;2-f 63.a;=3.i;(6.T®+ .a--44x+21) . . (2) The simple factor 2 is found in the first expression and not in the second ; therefore it forms no part of the G. C. D., and may be rejected. Likewise the simple factor 3, occurring in the second expression and not in the first, may EXAMPLES. 117 be rejected as forming no part of the G. C. D. But the simple factor a; is common to both expressions, and is therefore a factor of the G. C. D. and must be reserved. Rejecting therefore the simple factors 2 and 3 as forming no part of the G. C. D., and reserving the common factor x as forming a part of the G. C. D., and arranging in parallel columns, we have Sx^ - 13x"- + 23a; - 21 + a;2 - 44a; + 21 2 Ga;3 - 26x^- + 46a; - 42 27x^ — 90x + 63 The first division ends here, since 27a;- is of a lower degree than 3a;®. If we now make 27a;® — 90a; + 63 a divisor we find that it is not contained in 3a;® — 13a;® + 23x — 21 with an integrcd quotient. But, noticing that 27a;® — 90.r + 63 may be w'ritten in the form 9 (3a;® — 10a; + 7), and remem- bering that the G. C. D. we are seeking is contained in the remainder 9 {?>x~ — 10a; -f 7), and that, since the two expres- sions 3a;® — 13a;® + 23a; — 21 and 6a;® -f- a;® — 44x -p 21 have no simple factors, therefore their G. C. D. can have none, we conclude that the G. C. D. must be contained in the factor 3a;® — 10.r -p 7, and that therefore we can reject the simple factor 9, and go on with the divisor 3a;® — 10a; -p 7. Resuming the work, we have X 3a;® - 13a;® -p 23a; - 21 3a;® — 10a; -p 7 3a;® — 10a;® + lx 1 CO 1 - 3a;® + 16a; — 21 — 3a; -p 7 - 3a;® + 10a; - 7 - 3a; -p 7 2)6.a- - 14 3a; — 7 Therefore the G. C. D is a;(3.i; — 7). The factor 2 was removed for the same reason as the factor 9. 4. Find the G. C. D. of 2a;® -p x- — 3.a-® - 2a;® -P a; - 2 (2). X 2 ( 1 ) and 118 EXAMPLES. As the expressions stand neither can be divided by the other without obtaining a fractional quotient. This difficulty cannot be obviated by removing a simple factor, since neither expression contains a simple factor. We may however frifro- duce a suitable factor into either expression, just as in Ex. 3 we removed a factor when we could no longer proceed with the division without a fractional quotient. The given expres- sions (1) and (2) have no common simple factor, therefore their G. C. D. can have no simple factor, and hence cannot be affected if we multiply either of them by any simple factor. Multiplying (2) by 2 and taking it for dividend, we have 2x^ + — X — 2 7 6.x® — 4x^ + 2.x — 4 6x®-f 3.x"- 3x- 6 — 2x + 1 1 — 7.x" + 5.x 4- 2 14x®— 10.x^— 4x 17 17x 17x^ - 3x - 14 — 119x"4-85x4-34 17x^ — 17x - 119.x" + 21X + 98 14 14x - 14 64) 64.x- 64 14x - 14 X — 1 Therefore the G. C. D. is a- — 1. In this example, after the first division the factor 7 is introduced because the first remainder —lx- + bx + 2 will not divide the first divisor 2.r® + — x — 2. After the second division the factor 17 is introduced because the second remainder 17.X" — 3x — 14 will not divide the second divisor —7x- + 5.x -f 2. Finally the factor 64 is removed as explained in Ex. 3, Note. — The difference between the Algebraic G. C. D. and the Arithmetic G. C. D. can be seen by an example. Factor (1) and (2) of last examplo as follows: 2x® 4- — X — 2 = (x — 1) (2.X" -f 3x + 2), and 3.x8 - 2x" + x - 2 = (x - l)(3x- + x + 2). EXAMPLES. 119 Now since the G. C. D. of these expressions is ic — 1, the factors + 3a; + 2, and 3a;'^ + a; + 2, have no common factor. But if we put a; = 4, then 2a? + — X — 2 = 138, and 3a;® — 2a;^ + a; — 2 = 162, and the G. C. D. of 138 and 162 is 6, while 3 is the numerical value of the Algebraic G. C. D., a; — 1. Thus the numerical value of the Algebraic G. C. D. does not agree with the numerical value of the Arithmetic G. C. D. The reason may be explained as follows ; the expressions 2a;^ + 3.a; 4- 2 and 3a;- + a; + 2 have no xVlgebraic common factor ; but when x — 4 the}- become equal to 46 and 54 respectively, and therefore have a common Arithmetic factor 2, which, multiplied into a; — 1 or 3, gives 6 for the nu- merical value of the Arithmetic G. C. D., while 3 is the numerical value of the Algebraic G. C. D. In the same way it may be shown that if we give particular numerical values to the letters in any two expressions, and in their Algebraic G. C. D., the numerical value of the G. C. D. is by no means necessarily the Arithmetic G. C. D. of the values of the expressions. We may now enunciate the rule for finding the greatest common divisor of two compound Algebraic expressions. Buie. Arrange the given expressions according to the descending poioers of the same letter. Divide that expression ivhich is of the higher degree by the other ; or., if both are of the same degree., divide that ivhose first term has the larger coefficient by the other ; and if there is no remainder the first divisor ivill be the required greatest common divisor. If there is a remainder divide the first divisor by it, and continue thus to divide the last divisor by the last remainder, until a divisor is obtained tvhich leaves no remainder; the last divisor ivill be the greatest common divisor required. 120 LEAST COMMON MULTIPLE — DEFINITIONS. Note 1. — Before beginning the division, all simple factors of the given expressions must be removed from them, and the greatest common divisor of these must be reserved as a factor of the G. C. D. required. (See Ex. 3.) Note 2. — Either of the given expressions or any of the remain- ders may be multiplied or divided by any factor which does not divide both of the given expressions. (See Ex. 4. ) Note 3. — Each division must be continued until the remainder is of a lower degree than the divisor. Find the G. C. D. of 5. -h 2a;^ — 13a; + 10, and a;® a;^ — 10.r -f- 8. Ans. X- — 3x + 2. 6. a;®— 5a;^ — 99.T-t-40, and a;® — 6a;-— 86.T d- 35. 13a;-f-5. 7. x^—x^~ox— 3, and a;®— 4x^— II.t— G. a;--|- 2x-\- 1. 8. a;® -J- 3 .t^ — 8x — 24, and x^ + — 3.x — 9. x + 3. 9. 2a;®-|-4a;'^— 7a;— 14, and Ga;^— 10.T-— 21a;-|-35. 2.rr—~. LEAST COMMON MULTIPLE. 75. Definitions. — A Multiple of an expression is any expression that can be divided by it exactly. Hence, a multiple of an expression must contain all the factors of that expression. Thus, 6a^6 is a multiple of 3 or 2 or 6 or a or h. A Common Multiple of two or more expressions is an expression that can be divided by each of them exactly ; or, it is one of which all the given expressions are factors. Thus, the expression alAc^ is a common multiple of the expressions, o, 5, c, ah., ahc, ab'^, etc., or of the expres- sion itself ; Imt it is not a multiple of tr, nor of 5®, nor of any symbol which does not enter into it as a factor. The Least Common Multiple * of two or more Algebraic expressions is the expression of least degree which is divisi" ble b}' each of them exactl 3 -. * Called also lowest common multiple. The term, least common multiple^ is objected to by some, for a reason similar to the one for which they object to the term greatest common divisor* LEAST COMMON MULTIPLE OF MONOMIALS. 121 Hence, the least common multiple of two or more expres- sions is the product of all the factors of the expressions, each factor being taken the greatest number of times it occurs in any of the expressions. The abbreviation L. C. M. is often used instead of the words least common multiple. Kote. — Two or more expressions can have only one least common multiple, while they have an indefinite number of common multiples. 76. The Least Common Multiple of Monomials, and of Polynomials which can be easily Factored. — Let it be required to find the least common multiple of 21a%’i/, 35aVy, 28a^x‘^y*, and lAa^x^y"^. By separating each expression into its prime factors, we have 2la*a^y = 3 X Icd-x^y, 35a^x*y = 5 X la^xhp 28a,^x^y* = 2^ X 7a^x~y*, lAa^xhj'^ = 2 X la^x’^y'^. Hence, the L. C. M. = 7 x 3 x 5 x 2\i^x*y* — 420a\v'^y * ; for 420 is the numerical L. C. M. of the coefficients ; a® is the lowest power of a that is divisible by each of the quan- tities a*, a^, a®, a® ; x* is the lowest power of x that is divisible by each of the quantities x^, .a;*, x ^ ; and y'^ is the lowest power of y that is divisible by each of the quantities 2/> yS y‘"- 2. Find the L. C. M. of 6.'e"(a - xY, 8a‘^{a - xy, and 12a^.T^(a — x)*. Resolving into factors, we have 6ic®(a — x)^ — 3 X 2x^(a — xY, 8a^(a — xY = 2 X 2 X 2ct^(a — xY, 12aV(a - a;)-* = 3 X 2 X 2a\xfa - xy. Hence, the L. C. M. = 3 x 2hi’-x^{a — x)'^ — 24a®a;®(a — x)"^. For it consists of the product of (1) the numerical L. C. M. of the coefficients, and (2) the lowest power of each factor 122 EXAMPLES. which is divisible by every power of that factor occurring in tlie given expressions. 3. Find the L. C. M. of + 9«6, 2a® — 18a&®, a® + 6a®6 + 9a6^, a® + 5a-y + 6a&®. Resolving into factors, we have 3a® + 9a5 = 3a (a + 36), 2a® — 18o6® = 2a(a + 36) (a — 36), a® + 6a®6 + 9a6® = a (a + 36)®, a® + 5a®6 + 6o6® = a (a + 36) (a + 26). Hence the L. C. M. = Go(a + 36)®(a — 36) (a + 26). Hence the following Rule. Resolve each expression into its privie factors., and take the product of all the factors., giving to each factor the highest exponent lohich it has in the given expressions. If the expressions are prime to each other, their product is the least common multiple. EXAMPLES. Find the least common multiple of 1. 5a®6c®, 4a6®c. Ans. 20a®6®c®. 2. 12a6, 8.xy. 2iahxy. 3. 2a6, 36c, 4ca. \2abc. 4. a®6c, 6®ca, c®a6. a-b~c~. 5. 5a®c, Gc6®, 36c®. 30a®6®c®. G. a;®, x~ — 3x. .a®(a — 3). 7. 21a’®, 7x-{x +1). 21.a®(a + 1). 8. a® + ah, ab + 6®. ab{a + 6). 9. Ga® — 2x, 9.r® — 3.r. 6.r(3a - 1). 10. a® + 2x, x- + 3x + 2. a (a + 2)(a + 1). 11. a® -f“ I I ^ “b 6a -p H • (a + 2)®(a + 3). 12. a® + a — 20, a® — lO.r + 24, .a® — a — 30. Has. (a -f- 6)(-c - I)(■^• - 6). LEAST COMMON MULTIPLE OF POLYNOMIALS. 123 77. When the Given Expressions cannot be Resolved into Factors by Inspection. — To find the least common multiple of two compound Algebraic expres- sions in such cases, the expressions must be resolved by finding their G. C. D. 1. Find the L. C. M. of + a;® — 20a;^ — 7a; + 24 and 2a;^ + 3a;® — 13.x^ — lx + 15. We first find their G. C. D. X 2a;^+ a;®— 20a;^— 7a;+24 2a;^+7a;® — 9x 2a;^+3a;® — 13a;® — 7a;+ 15 2a;^+ a;®— 20a;®— 7a;+24 -3 — 6a;®— 20a;®+2a;+ 24 2x®+ 7a;® — 9 -6a;®- 21a;® -f27 2a;® -f- 4a;®— 6a; x^+2x— 3 3a;®4-6a;— 9 3a;®+6a;- 9 .-. G. C. D. == a;® + 2x — 3. Hence, by division, we obtain 2a;^+ a?— 20a;^— 7a; + 24 = {x^+ 2x — 3) (2a;^— 3a; — 8) , and 2a;^+3a;®- ISa;^- 7a; + 15 = (x^+ 2a; - 3) (2x‘^~ x-5). Therefore the L. C. M. = {x‘‘ + 2a; - 3)(2x^ - 3x - 8){2x^ -x - b). We may now prove the rule for finding the least common multiple of any two compound Algebraic expressions. Let A and B denote the two expressions, F their greatest common divisor, and M their least common multiple. Sup- pose that n and b are the respective quotients when A and B are divided by F ; then A = aF, and B — bF. . . . . (1) Since F contains all the factors common to A and .B, the quotients a and b have no common factor, and therefore their least common multiple is a&, and hence the least 124 LEAST COMMON MULTIPLE OF POLYNOMIALS. common multiple of aF ami hF, or of A and B, from (1) is obF, by inspection. That is M = obF (2) But from (1) we have AB — abFF = MF, from (2) (3) Rule. The least common multiple of tivo expressions may be found by dividing their product by their G. C. D., or, by dividing either of the expressions by their G. C. D. and midtiplying the quotient by the other. From (3) we see that the product of any tivo expressions is equal to the product of their G. C. D. and L. C. M. To find the least common multiple of three expressions, ^1, B, C. First find M, the L. C. M. of ^1 and B. Next find N, the L. C. M. of M and C; then N will be the required L. C. M. of A, B, C. For N is the expression of least degree which is divisible by M and C, and M is the expression of least degree which is divisible by A aud B. Therefore F is the expression of least degree which is divisible by all three. In a similar manner we may find the L. C. M. of four expressions. Note. — The theories of the greatest common divisor and of the least common multiple are not necessary for the subsequent chapters of the present work, and any difficulties which the student may find in them may be posti^oned till he has read the Theory of Equations. The examples however attached to this chapter should be carefully worked, on account of the exercise which they afford in all the fundamental processes of Algebra. EXAMPLES. 125 EXAMPLES. Resolve into factors 1. + xy. 2 . X? — x^y. 3. lOic® — 2ox^y. 4. x^ — x^y + xy‘^. 5. 3a^ — 3 c 6®6 + 6a^6^. 6. 38a®x® + bla^x-. 7. ax — bx ~ az + hz. 8. 2aa; -\- ay + 2hx + by. 9. + 3a;?/ — 2ax — a?/. 10. 2a;^ _ a;® + 4a; - 2. 11. 3a;® + + 3a; + 5. 12. x‘^ -\- x^ 2x + 2. 13. 2/8 _ ^2 _(_ y 15. a;2 - 19a; + 84. 16. x" - 19x + 78. 17. a" - 14o5 + 496". 18. 4- bab + 65®. 19. m® — 13mn + 40u®. 20. ??i® — 22mn 105n®. 21. X® - 23.x?/ + 132y®. 22. 130 + 31x?/ + xY- 23. 132 - 23x + X®.' 24. 88 + 19x + X®. 25. 65 + %xy — x®?/®. 26. X® + 16x - 260. 27. X® — llx — 26. 28. a®5® - 3a6c - 10c®. 29. x^ — a®x® — 132a^. 30. 4x® + 23x + 15. 31. 12x® - 23x?/ + 10?/®. 32. 8.x® - 38x + 35. 33. 12x® - 31x - 15. Ans..x{x + y'), x®(x - y). 5.x® (2 — 5.x?/). .x(x® — X?/ + y~). 3a®(a® — o5 + 25®). 19a®x®(2x® + 3a). (a — 5) (x — z). (2x + y){a + 5). (2x + ?/) (3x — a) . (2.x - l)(.x® + 2). (3x -|- 5) (x® + 1). (a; + i)(a;3 + 2). (Z/ - 1)(/ + !)• (2x + 3y){ax — by). (X- 12) (X- 7). (x - 13) (x - 6). (a — 75) (a — 75). (a 4- 35) (a + 25). (m — 8?i) (?)i — bn ) . (??i — 15w)(m — 7?i). (x — 12y) (x — 11?/). (26 xy) (5 4- xy). (12 — x) (11 — x). (8 4- x)(ll 4- a;). (5 + x?/)(13 — xij). (x + 26) (x - 10). (x 4- 2)(x - 13). (a5 4- 2c) {ab — be) . (x® 4- lla®)(x® — 12o®). (x 4" 5) (4x + 3^. (3x - 2y)(4x — by). (2x - 7)(4x - 5). (12x 4- 5)(x - 3). 14. 2ax® 4- 3ctxy — 25.x?/ — 35?/®. 126 EXAMPLES. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. 50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 3 + 11a; - 4a;2. ■6 + 5a; — 6a;^. 4 — 5a; — 6a;^. 5 + 32a; - 21a;^. 20 - 9a; - 20x^. 25 - 64a;2. 81p%® - 255^. (1811)2 - (689)2. (8133)2 - (8131)2. (24a; + y)'^ — (23a; — y)‘ / - , r\ \ O / ^ [ox + 2jf)2 — (3a; )a;2 — (3a; — by)'^ .6a;2 - (3a; + 1)2 i® + 7295®. ;®?/® — 512. )00x-y — 20 ?/® >+5)^-1. yV Ans. (3 — a;)(l + 4a;). (2 + 3a;) (3 - 2a;). (4 + 3a;) (1 - 2x). (1 + lx) (5 — 3a;). (5 + 4a;) (4 - 5a;). (5 + 8a;) (5 — 8x). + bb){9ph^ — bh). X U2i = 2805000. 16264 X 2 = 32528. 47a;(.a; + 2y). (8a; + y){2x + 3y). by{Gx - by), {lx + 1)(: {'^p-z^ 2500 , X — 1 ) . (a2 + 95) (a^ - M-b + 8I52). {xy — 8) {x-y- + Sxy + 64). 2Qy{bx + tj){bx - y). [(a+5)"+l] (0+ 5 + 1) (a + 5 — 1). c + d)® + (c — cZ)®. 2c (c2 + 3c?2). V — xY — a;®?/2 + xy\ xy{x + y) (,c - rj) {x — y ) . * — 6a;2/ 4. if, (^x- + 2xy — y-) {x- — 2xy — if ) . 5(.a;2 + 1) + .a;(a2 + 52). (aa; + b){bx + a). ® + (a + 5)cta; + 5a;2. (a~ + bx){a + x). Find the greatest common divisor of 56. 66«^52c®, 44a®5V, 24a25®c^. 2a-b~cr. bl . a;2 + a;, (a; + 1)2, x® +1. x 1. 58. X® + 8?/®, .x® 4- xy — 2y“^. x 4- 2y. 59. 12x® 4- X — 1, 15.x® 4- 8x + !• 3x + 1. 60. 2x® 4- 9.x + -i, 2.x® + 1 1.x + 5, 2.x® - 3.x - 2. 2.x + 1. 61. 3x^-3.x®-2x®-x-l, 6x^— 3x®-.x®— x-1. 3.x®+l. 62. 2x® — 9a.x® + 9a®x — 7a®, 4x® — 20ax® + 20a®.x — 16a®. ..4?is. af^ — ax + 63. 4x®+14x^+20.r®+ 70.x®, 8.r’+ 28x®— 8.x-®— 12.x^+ 56.x®. ^l?js. 2x-{2x +7). 64. 35x® + 47x® -f- 13x + 1, 42.x" + -ila;® - 9x® - 9x - 1. 7X® -j- 8X -f 1. EXAMPLES. 127 Find the least common multiple of 65. 35ax^, 42a^^, 30«z^. Ans. 210ax~yh^ 66. — 3x + 2, — 1. (x + 1)(.t — l)(x’ — 2) 67. x'^ — ox + 4, — 6x + 8. (x — 4) (a; — 1) {x — 2) 68. x'^ — X — 6, x^ + X — 2, x^ — 4a; + 3. Ans. {x — 3)(a: + 2) (.a; — 1) 69. 3x^ + 11a; + 6, 3x^ + 8.t; + 4, x~ + ox + 6. Ans. (x + 2)(a; + 3) (3a; + 2) 70. 5a;^ + 11a; + 2, 5.a;^ + 16x* + 3, x~ + 5a; + 6. ^l?is. (x + 2)(a; + 3) {ox + 1) 71. 3a:^ - a; - 14, 3.a;^ - 13a; + 14, x^ - 4. ^)!S. {x + 2) (a; — 2) (3a; — 7) 72. a;^ — 1, a;® + 1, .a;® — 1. a;® — 1 73. a;" — 1, a;^ + 1, a;^ + 1, X® — 1. x® — 1 74. x^ — 1, X® + 1, x'^ — 1, X® 4- 1. x^® — 1 75. x®+2.x^— 3x, 2.x®+5x“— 3x. x(x— 1) (x+S) (2x— 1) 76. X® — lOx + 24, x“ — 8x + 12, x^ — 6x + 8. Ayis. (x — 4) (x — 6) (x — 2) 77. X® - y\ x^y - y\ y\x - ?/)^ x‘^ + xy + y~. Alls. 2 r(x — ?/)“(x“ + xy + y^) 78. a® - a'-6 - ab^ - 2bK Alls, {a + b) (a — b) (a — 2b) (cir -|- ab + b^) 79. 21x(.xy — ?/2)^ 35(xV — ary*), loy{x^ + xy)'^. Ans. 105x"?/^(x + y)“^{x — a/)^ 128 A FRACTION — ENTIRE AND MIXED QUANTITIES. CHAPTER VIII. FRACTIONS. Note. — I n this chapter the student will find that the definitions, rules, and demonstrations closely resemble those with which he is already familiar in Arithmetic. 78. A Fraction — Entire and Mixed Quantities. — A Fraction is an expression of an indicated quotient by writing the divisor under the dividend with a horizontal line between them (Art. 11). In the operation of division the divisor sometimes may be greater than the dividend, or may not be contained in it an exact number of times ; in either case the quotient is expressed by means of a fraction. Thus, the expression ^ indicates either that some unit is divided into b equal parts, and that a of these are taken, or that a times the same unit is divided into h equal parts, and one of them taken. In an 3 ’ fraction the upper number, or the dividend, is called the numerator, and the lower number, or divisor, is called the denominator. Thus in the above fraction - b' which is read a divided b}’ b, a is called the numerator and b the denominator, and the two taken together are called the terms of the fraction. Thus the denominator indicates into how man^^ equal parts the unit is to be divided, and the numerator indicates how main’ of those parts are to be taken. Ever}’ integer or integral expression may be considered as a fraction whose denominator is unity ; thus, a , j a + 5 a = a + 0 = — ^ — . T 1 TO REDUCE A FRACTION TO ITS LOWEST TERMS. 129 An entire quantity or integral quantity is one which has no fractional part ; as ah or — 2ab. A mixed quantity is one made up of an integer and a fraction ; as & d — . a A proper fraction is one whose numerator is less than its denominator ; as — - — . a + X An improp)er fraction is one whose numerator is equal to or greater than the denominator ; as - and a a The reciproccd of a fraction is another fraction having its numerator and denominator respectively equal to the denom- inator and numerator of the former. 79. To Reduce a Fraction to its Lowest Terms. — Let - denote any fraction, and—*' denote the same frac- b mb tion with its terms multiplied by m. Now ^ means that a unit is divided into b equal parts, and that a of these are taken (1) Aud^^ means that the same unit is divided into mb equal mb parts, and that ma of these are taken (2) Hence b parts in (1) = mb parts in (2). 1 part in (1) = m parts in (2), and .•. a parts in (1) = a.m parts in (2), that is, a _ ma b mb Conversely, ma _ a mb b Therefore, the vcdue of a fraction is not altered if the numerator and denominator are either both multiplied or both divided by the same quantity. 130 EXAMPLES. When both numerator and denominator are divided by all the factors common to them, the fraction is said to be reduced to its lowest terms. Hence to reduce a fraction to its lowest terms we have the following Rule. Divide both numerator and denominator by their greatest common divisor. Dividing both terms of a fraction bj* a common factor is called canceling that factor. EXAMPLES. Reduce the following fractious to their lowest terms. 6a^6c" _ 2ac 9a6^c 3b The greatest common divisor 3abc of both terms is can- celed. IxSjz ^ 28o^yz^ 4xz The factor Ix'^yz, which is the greatest common divisor of both terms, is canceled. g 24a^c^a;^ _ 2ia^c~x^ __ 4ac^ — 120^1;® Ga'-x-{3a — 2x) 3a — 2x Here 6cr.r;" is canceled since it is the greatest common divisor of both terms. Note. — In each of these examples, the resulting fractions have the same value as the given fractions, but thej" are expressed in a , simpler form. The student should be careful not to begin canceling until he has expressed both terms of the fraction in the most con- venient form, by factoring when necessary. Thus, ^ Gx^ — 8.vy _ 2.'c(3.r — 4?/) _ ^ 9xy — \2y'^ 3y{3x — 4y) 3y Instead of reducing a fraction to its lowest terms by dividing the numerator and denominator b}’ their G. C. D., EXAMPLES. 131 we ma}' divide by any common factor, and repeat the process till the fraction is reduced to its lowest terms. Thus, _ 1 2g^&c'^ _ 6^ _ ^ 36a^6V 18a&“c^ 96c 36 Eeduce the following fractious to their lowest terms. G. 8a^bc^ . 2ac 1 2ab\d 3bd 1 CO ! 3 2a'"6 — 4«6'^ 2b 8. 4a;2 - 9y2 2x — 3y 4;r^ -f- G^'y 2x 9. 20 (.7;® — ?/®) 4(x - y). 5a;® + 5xy + 5y® 10. a;® — 2xy^ 4 A '2.,. -2 I 4 „. 4 * X ^,2 0 .. 2 ' When the factors of the numerator and denominator cannot be found by inspection, their greatest common divisor may be found by the rule (Art. 74), and the fraction then reduced to its lowest terms. „ „ , * 1 3a;3 - 13a;2 + 23.7; - 21 11. Reduce to its lowest terms — • 15X-3 - 38a;2 _ 2a; + 21 The G. C. D. of the numerator and denominator is 3a; — 7. Dividing the numerator and denominator by 3a; — 7, we obtain the respective quotients — 2x + 3 and 5x^ — x — 3. Therefore 3a;^- 13.7;"+ 23a; -21 ^ (3.r -7) (a;'^- 2.r + 3) ^ 2.r + 3 15a;^— 38a;"— 2a; + 21 (3.7^ — 7) (5a;^— x — 3) 5.i;'^— a; — 3 This example may also be solved without finding the G. C. D. by the rule (Art. 74) as follows : By 2 of Art. 74, the G. C. D. of the numerator and denominator must divide their sum 18.7;® — 51a;^ + 21x’, that is, 3.7;(3a; — 7) (2.7; — 1). If there be a common divisor it must clearly be 3a; — 7. Hence, arranging the numerator 132 TO REDUCE A MIXED QUANTITY TO A FRACTION. and denominator so as to show 3a; — 7 as a factor, we have the fraction _ a-^(3a; — 7) — 2x(3x — 7) + 3 (3a; — 7) 5a;^(3a; — 7) — a;(3a; — 7) — 3(3a; — 7) _ (3a; — 7) (x^ — 2x + 3) _ x" — 2x + 3 (3x — 7) {ox^ — X — 3) bx~ — X — 3 When either the numerator or denominator can readily bc- hxctored we may use the following method : 12 . Reduce to its lowest terms x^ + 3a;^ — 4a; 7x^ — 18a;'^ + G.r + 5 The numerator =: a;(.a;^ + 3a; — 4) = x(x + 4) (a; — 1). The only one of these factors which can be a common divisor is a; — 1, since the denominator does not contain x, and 5 the last term in the denominator does not contain 4. (See Art. GG.) Hence, arranging the denominator so as to show a; — 1 as a factor, the tractio.1 = -5 »(»+n(»-l) ^ . 7x'^(x—l )—llx(x—l)—5(x—l) 7.r“— ILr— 5 Reduce to lowest terms jg a® — a-b — ah’- — 2// ■a® + 3a-b + 3ab'- + 26® a;® — ox“ 4~ ^a; — 3 .u® - 3a; + 2 4g® + 12g^6 — ah^ — 156® 6 a® + 13 0-6 — 4o6- — 156® Ans. a — 26 o + ■ 26 ’ ■a; - 3 a; + 2' 2a + 56 3a + 56 80. To Reduce a Mixed Quantity to the Form he h + c of a Fraction. — Let it be required to reduce a + to the form of a fraction. The entire part j (Art. 78) = ~ (Art. 79). TT , he a(h + r) , be Hence a 4 = ^ — - H 6+c 6+c 6+c a6 + flc + 6c 6 + c TO REDUCE A FRACTION TO A MIXED QUANTITY, 133 Hence we have the following Eule. Multiply the entire part by the denominator,, and to the product add the numerator ivith its jirojier sign ; under this sum p>lace the denominator,, and the residt tvill he the fraction required. EXAMPLES. Eeduce the following to fractimial forms : a-2 1 . a — X -\- 2 . a; + 1 + a + X 4 a; — 3 3. x“^ — xy + 7 / — y X + -y' 4. a + b — + b- Ans. -41—. ct 4“ ^ x“ — 2x 4“ 1 X + y 2b'^ 'a - b' 81. To Reduce a Fraction to an Entire or Mixed Quantity. — Let it be required to reduce ^ ^ to a mixed quantity. Performing the division indicated, we have ax 4- 2 . 1 ’^ , ar = a; 4- - — ; — • a 4 ~ ^ ” 1 ~ ^ Hence we have the following Rule. Divide the numerator by the denominator,, as far as possible, for the entire part, and annex to the quotient a fraction having the remainder for numerator , and the divisor for denominator ; it will be the mixed quantity required. 134 TO REDUCE FRACTIONS TO THEIR L. C. D. EXAMPLES. Reduce to whole or mixed quantities the following : 24a Ans. 3a + 7 2 . 4. 5. G. a? 4 - ^ah a + 6 3Gac + 4c 9 ■ 8a^ + 36 4a + 3.r + 2 a; + 3 2x^ — Gx- - 1 X — ‘d ,.4 + 1 a 4” 2ab a + b A 1 4ac 4 . 9 o I 2a 4 . 4a X 4~ 2 X X — 1 2x a;° 4- 4- ® + 1 4- a' 4- 3 1 a — 3 2 a — r 82. To Reduce Fractions to their Least Common Denominator. — Let it be required to reduce — , — , — to yz zx xy equivalent fractions having the least common denominator. The least common multiple of the denominators is xyz. Dividing this L. C. M. by the denominators, yz, zx, and xy, we ha^•e the quotients a, y, and z, respective!}'. By Art. 79, both terms of a fraction may be multiplied by the same number without altering its value ; therefore we may multiply both terms of the first fraction by a, both terms of the second fraction by y, and both terms of the third fraction by z, and the resulting fractions will be equivalent to the given ones. 4^ _ ^ _ _c^ yz xyz' zx xyz' xy xyz Hence — = — , That is, the resulting fractions — , a:yz xyz cz and — have the xyz a b same values respectivelv as the given fractions — , — , and — . yz zx xy and they have the least common denominator xyz. Hence, RULE OF SIGNS IN FRACTIONS. 135 for reducing fractious to their least common denominator, we have the following Rule. Find the least common midtijM of the given clenominators, and take it for the common denominator ; divide it by the denominator of the first fraction, and midtiply the numercdor of this fraction by the quotient so obtained; and do the same ivith all the other given fractions. Note 1. — It is not absolutely necessary to take the least common denominator. Any common denominator may be used. But in practice it will be found advisable to use the least common denomina- tor, as the work will thereby be shortened. Note 2. — It frequently hapijens that the denominators of the fractions to be reduced do not contain a common factor. Thus, the denominators of the fractions and - have no common factor; 5’ d’ / therefore the least common denominator of these fractions is hdf, the product of all their denominators. EXAMPLES, Reduce the following fractions to their L. C. D. 1 3 ^ 5 'Ans 8.x 5 4x’ 12.x8’ 12x^' 12a;®' 83. Rule of Signs in Fractions. — The signs of the several terms of the numerator and denominator of a fraction relate onl}^ to those terms to which they are prefixed, while the sign prefixed to the dividing line relates to the fraction as a whole, and is the sign of the fraction. Thus, in the fraction the sign of a, the first term of the numer- a + b “ ator, is -p understood, the sign of the second term 5 is — , and the sign of each term a and b of the denominator is -p, while the sign of the fraction itself is — . 13G RULE OF SIGNS IN FRACTIONS. The symbol — ^ means the quotient resulting from the division of —a by —h\ and this is obtained by dividing a by h, and prefixing +, by the rule of signs in division (Art. 4G). Therefore — = +- = - (1) -h h h ^ ’ Also, — ~ is the quotient of —a divided bj’ b ; and this is b obtained by dividing a by b, and prefixing — , b^' the rule of signs. Therefore ■ — - = — (2) b b In like manner, is the quotient of a divided b}' —b; and this is obtained by dividing a by b, and prefixing — , bj^ the rule of signs. Therefore (3) -b b ^ ^ Hence, we have the following rule of signs : (1) If the signs of both numerator and denominator be changed., the sign of the ivhole fraction remains unchanged. (2) If the sign of the numercdor alone be changed, the sign of the ichole fraction ivill be changed. (3) If the sign, of the denominator alone be changed, the sign of the ichole fraction will be changed. Or they may be stated as follows : (1) Tie may change the sign of every term in the numera- tor and denominator of a fraction without altering the value of the fraction. (2) We may change the sign of a fraction by changing the sign of every term either in the numercdor or denominator. EXAMPLES. 137 EXAMPLES. 1. a — b _ — a + b _ b — a m — 11 —m n n — m 2. b — a _ — 6 + g _ a — b 2x 2x 2x 3. 3x 3x _ 3x X — x^ -x-p aP x~ — X The iutermediate steps may usuall}' be omitted. From Art. 36 we have ahmx _ ( — g) { — h) (—m)x _ a(—b)( — m)x _ 2 ?qr {-P)qr {~P) {-' That is, if the terms of a fraction are composed of any number of factors, any even number of factors may have their signs changed loithout altering the vcdue of the fraction; hut if any odd number of factors have their signs changed, the sign of the fractioyi is changed. Thus, (« - - c) 0^ - «) (b-~c) ^ (b - a) (c - b) _ (?/ - iw) (?/ - 2 ) (y-x){z-y)' When the numerator is a product, any one or more of its factors can be removed from the numerator and made the multiplier. rr., abed j cd 7 7 1 ihus, = ab = abed . a + b a + b a + b Change the signs of the following fractions so as to express them altogether in four different ways. 4 a - b Ans. b - a b - a a, — b X - y y - X — ■ y y - X 5 . X — X — X X y — z ^-y > y - ~ z z — y 6. b — a a — b a - b b — a a — b + c 1 1 s a — b + c' b — c — a y abed xyz ■ a( — b) (-c)d, a( — b)cd abed xy(-z) ’ x{-y){-z)' xyz 138 ADDITION AND SUBTRACTION OF FRACTIONS. 84. Addition and Subtraction of Fractions. — Let it be required to add together - and c c Here the unit is divided into c equal parts, and we first take a of these parts, and then h of them; i.e., we take a + 6 of the c parts of the unit ; and this is expressed b}' the fraction a _i_ 6 _ g + & c ' c c " a _ b _ a — b c c c ' c Similarly Let it be required to add together - aud b d TTr , a ad T c be u e have - = — , aud - = — . b bd d bd Here in each case wo divide the unit into bd equal parts, aud we first take ad of these parts, and then be of them ; i.e., we take ad + be of the bd parts of the unit; aud this is expressed by the fraction bd + 1 - d ad + be M ■ Similarly a _ jc _ ad — be b d~ bd Here the fractions have been reduced to a common denom- inator bd. But if b aud d have a common factor, the product bd is not the least common denominator, aud the fraction cid -4“ "he will not be in its lowest terms. To avoid working bd with fractions which are not in their lowest terms, it will be found advisable to take the least common denominator, which is the least common multiple of the denominators of the given fractious (Art. 82, Note 1). EXAMPLES. 139 Hence we have the following Rule. To add or subtract fractions, reduce them to the least common denominator ; add or subtract the numerators, and write the result over the least common denominator. EXAMPLES. 1 Aii« + ca — c , a + d 1 . Add — i — , , and — ' — . b b b Here the fractions have already a common denominator, and therefore need no reducing. Hence we have a + c a — c a + d _ a + c + a — c + a + d _ 3a + cZ b b b ~ b ^ “ b~' n 1 2.r + a , 5x — 4a 2. Add — — and . 3a 9a Here the least common denominator is 9a. Hence we have (Art. 82) 2x_+_a 5x — 4a _ 3(2x + «) , 5x — 4a 3a 9a 9a 9a _ Gx + 3a + 5.U’ — 4a _ llx — a 9a 9a o 4a — 26 , 1 3a — 3b 3. From take . c c 4a — 26 _ 3a — 36 _ 4a — 26 — (3a — 36) c c c 4a — 26 — 3a + 36 a + 6 2sn - - — — — ■ zzz - , c c Note 1. — To insure accuracy, the beginner is recommended to put down the work in full ; and when a fraction whose numerator is not a monomial is preceded by a — sign, he is recommended to enclose its numerator in a parenthesis as above before combining it with the other numerators. 140 EXAMPLES. 4. Add Here a T b and a — h + b — a b ^ b — a b a — b a (Art. 83). b a a — b a — b a — b = 1 . 5. Add a ~b X — 2y 2>y — a 2a — 5x xy ay ax The least common denominator is axy. X — 2y ?>y — a 2a — 3x + — 1 xy ay ax a(x — 2y) + x{3y — a) + y{2a — 3x) axy ax — 2ay + 3xy — ax + — 3xy = 0 , since the terms in the numerator destroy each other. „ y, a + b ^ . a — b 6. Inom — ! — take . a — b a + b The least common denominator is a~ — b~. a + b _ a — b _ (o + b)- _ {a — b)~ a — b a + b o’ — b~ _ o^ + 2ab + — (f<~ — 2a& + b~) cr — b- _ iab a- — b~ ^ , ■2.r — 3o , 2x — a 7. Add and . X — 2a X — a The least common denominator is (x — 2a) (x — a). EXAMPLES. 141 Hence we have 2x — 3a 2x — a _ (2.x — 3a) (.x — a) — (2x — a) (x — 2a) X — 2a X — a (a; — 2a) (x — n) _ 2x^ — 5ax + 3a^ — (2x‘-^ — 5ax + 2a^) (x — 2a) (x — a) _ 2x^ — 5ax + 3a" — 2x~ + 5a.x — 2a^ (a; — 2a) (x — a) _ a^ ~ (X - 2a) (X - a)' Note 2. — In finding the value of an expression like —(2x — a)(x — a), the beginner should first express the product in parentheses, and then after multiplication, remove the parentheses, as we have done. After a little practice he will be able to take both steps together. Note 3. — In practice, the foregoing general method may some- times be modified with advantage. When the sura of several fractions is to be found, it is often best, instead of reducing at once all the fractions to their L. C. D., to take two or more of them together, and combine the results. 8. Simplify . a — 4 a — 3 a^ — 16 Here, instead of reducing all the fractions to the least common denominator at once, we may take the first two fractions together, as follows : n -h 3 _ g +4 _ 8 _ g- - 9 - (g^ - 16) _ 8 g — 4 a — - 3 g'^— 16 (a — 4)(g — 3) a'^— 16 ^ 7 8 (a — 4) (a — 3) (a + 4) (a — 4) _ 52 — a (a — 4) (a + 4) (a — 3) 9. Simplify — — ■ — . a — X a + X a^ + x^ a* x'^ Here we see that the first two denominators give L. C. D. g^ — x ^ ; and this with a'^ + gives L. C. D. a^ — ; and this with a^ -|- gives L. C. D. a® — x^. Hence, instead 142 EXAMPLES. of reducing all the fractious to the least common denom- inator, we proceed as follows : The first two terms = a + x — _ {a — _ x) _ — 2x — ^ a- — X- The first tln’ee terms 2x 2x — X- cr + X- _ 2x(a^ + X-) — 2x(g- — x^) a’ — x^ 4x^ The whole expression = 10. Simplify cr — X* 4.X-3 X* a* x^ Sx'’ cr — x° +- (a — h){a—c) {h—c){b — a) ' (c— o)(c— &) The beginner is very liable, in this example, to take the product of the denominators for the least common denom- inator, and thus to render the operations very laborious. The denominator of the second fraction contains the factor h — a, and this factor differs from the factor a — b, which occurs in the denominator of the first fraction, only in the sign of each term. Also the denominator of the third fraction contains the factors c — a and c — b, which differ from the factors a — c and b — c in the denominators of the first two fractions, onl}' in the signs of each term. It is better to arrange these factors so that a precedes b or c, and that b precedes c. By Art. 83 we have b b {b and c){b c a) {b — c) (a — &)’ (c — a)(c — b) (a — c) (6 — c) Hence the given expression may be put in the form a b , c + (a — b) {a — c) {b — c) {a — b) ' (a — c){b — o) whose L. C. D. we see at once is (a — b){a — c) (6 — c). EXAMPLES. 143 Reducing the fractions to the least common denominator, the given expression becomes a{h — c) — b{a — c) + — b) (a — b)(a — c) (6 — c) _ ab — ac — ab + be + ac — be _ ^ (a — b){a — c) (b — c) The work is often made easier by completing the divisions represented by the fractions. 2x + I 4a: 4- 5 11. Simplify 1 + 2a: — 2 We have by division 3 2a: + 2 1 + 1 + 2a: — 2 - 2 - 1 2a: -f 2 2x — 2 2x + 2 _ 3a: + 3 — .r 4- 1 2x^ — 2 _ X + 2 x^ - 1 12 . 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 5x — 1 3x - 8 7 2x 4- 5 X 4- 3 X 2x X — 4 X - 7 X — 2 X — 5 4- a: — 5 Ans. 25x - 61 11 8x'^ 4a" 4-62 2a - 6 4a2 - 62 2a 4- b' 5 3a: _ 4 — 13a: 1 — 4a:2 5x 1 -j- 2x 1 — 2x 3 , 2 X — 2 3x 4“ 6 3a: 2 4- a:2 - 4 2 56 12a:2 4- 28a: - 27 - 8x2 6 (X - 2)(x - 5)' 4a6 4a2 - 62' 1 - 6x2 1 — 4x2 2(13x 4- 7) 3(x — 2) (x 4- 2) 7x X .2 X — 1 + .X 4- 1 1 1 4- 1 (a— 6)(a— c) (6 — c)(6 — a) (c— a)(c— 6) 0 . 144 TO MULTIPLY A FRACTION BY AN INTEGER. 85. To Multiply a Fraction by an Integer. — Rule. Multiply the numerator by that integer; or divide the denominator by that integer. The rule may be proved as follows : (1) Let - denote any fraction, and c any integer; then b will - X c = — ; for in each of the fractions - and — ^ the b b b b unit is divided into b equal parts, and the number of parts taken in — is c times the number taken iu -. b b (2) Let — denote any fraction, and c any integer ; then - X c = b, (1). = I (Alt. 79). 86. To Divide a Fraction by an Integer. — Rule. Divide the numerator by that integer; or multiply the denominator by that integer. The rule may be proved as follows : (XC (1) Let — denote any fracticu, and c any integer; then will — ~ c = - ; for — is c times - (Art. 85) ; and there- b b b b^ ’ fore - is the quotient of — divided by c. b b (2) Let ^ denote any fraction, and c any integer ; then - = — (Art. /9). 0 be (X (XC Oj -t / 1 \ ••• = = TO MULTIPLY FRACTIONS — EXAMPLES. 145 87. To Multiply Fractions. — Let it be required to multiply - by -. b d Put - = .T, aud - = y. b d ^ a = bx, therefore divide by bd, But Then (Art. 85) and c = dy, etc = bdxy ; ac M xy ^ V b d c _ ac ^ cl~ M' and ac is the product of the numerators, and bd the product of the denominators. Hence the following Rule. Multiply the numerators together for the numerator of the product., and the denominators for the denominator -of the product. Similarly, the rule may be demonstrated when more than two fractions are multiplied together. Note. — If either of the factors is a mixed quantity, it is usually best to reduce it to a fractional form before applying the rule. Also, it is advisable to indicate the multiplication of the numerators and denominators, and to examine if they have common factors; and, if so, to cancel them before performing the multiplication. EXAMPLES. 1. Multiply together — and — . ^ ^ ^ 3a X 8c ^ 46 9a 46 X 9a 36 ^ ^ 146 EXAMPLES. 2. Multiply by 2a^ (a + _ 2a^(a + 6)(a + &) a? - 6^ ^ 4a'*6 “ (a + 6)(a - &)4a"6 _ g + & “ 25(g - 6)’ by canceling those factors M^hich are common to both numer- ator and denominator. o HT 1. • , 2a^ + 3a ■, 4a^ — 6a . 3. Multiply — and together 2a^ + 3a 4o8 4a^ 12a + 18 4g^ — 6a _ a(2a + 3)2a(2a — 3) 12a -f 18 4a^(2a + 3)6 ■ _ 2a — 3 “ 12a 4. Multiply y + - + lby^ + - — 1. ha ha « + ^ + 1 = + h^ 84), h a ah and a^+h^+ah ah a 6 _ a^ + &^ — a& ha ah a^+&"— o& _ (g~+&~)^— a~6~ ah a^h'^ a* + h^ + a-h^ dV [(3) of Art. 41] Otherivise thus : h _ a] , ^ , 1 _ g'^ + 6'^ + g-6^ hr a? a?b- Simplify 5 ^ y ^ ^ X 33—1 a;^ — 1 (x* + 2)''^ Ans. 1 (x-l)(x + 2)- 6 . xa X + a X X — a. TO DIVIDE FRACTIONS — EXAMPLES. 147 7. U + db a — h b - ab ^ a + bj Ans. ■ Q x{a — x) a(a + x) d^ — 6 ^ ax — x^' d^ + 2ax + x^ — 2ax + x^ 88. To Divide Fractions. — Let it be required to divide a , c Denote the quotient b}’ x. Then, since the quotient mul- tiplied by the divisor gives the dividend (Art. 44), we have c a X X - = cl b Multiplying by we have c «x^x^ = 2x!?, cl c b c Therefore, Art. 87, and canceling factors common to the numerator and denominator, we have acl X = be a c _ c A _ a ^ d b d be b c That is, Hence the following Rule. Invert the divisor, and proeeed as in multiplication. EXAMPLES. 1 . Divide a by c a = j (Art. 78). 1 ■ c ~ 1 ^ b ~ b' 148 COMPLEX FRACTIONS. 2. Divide ab — h" {a + hY by - 6 " ab - b^ , b _ ab - 6 ^ _ 52 (a + by ■ “ (a + 6 )" ^ b _ &(ft — 5)(g + b)(a — 5) _ (a — by b{a + b)'^ a + b Simplify g 14x^ — 7a; 2x — 1 _7_ 12 x-® + 24a:''^ x'^ + 2x 12 + Sab ^ q 5 + 3 4a^ - 1 ■ 2 a + l’ ab 2a — 1 ' — 121 . a + 11 a — 11 — A a + 2 a — 2 2x^ + 13a; + 15 2.r- + H-r + 5 2x — 1 4a;- — y Ax^ — 1 2x — 3 x^ — 14a; — 15 x^ — 12a; — 45 a; + 1 — 4a; — 45 a;^ — Oa; — 27 a; + 5 89. Complex Fractions. — A fraction whose numerator and denominator are whole numbers is called a Simple Frac- tion. A fraction whose numerator or denominator is itself a fraction is called a Comp>lex Fraction. Thus, a a b a b 1 f i- - are complex tractions. c b c c d Since a fraction ma}- be regarded as representing the quotient of the numerator by the denominator (Art. 78) , a complex fraction may be regarded in the same way ; therefore, to simplify a complex fraction. Divide the numerator by the denominator, as in division of fractions (Art. 88 ). EXAMPLES. 149 EXAMPLES, 1 1. Simplify 1 , and 2, a 1 1 h b b Here 1 a b a a b a T b b 1 - = i--i = ix- = - 1 a & a 1 a b The student should be able to write down the above results readily without the intermediate steps. 2. Simplify This fraction a;^ + a;^ — a‘ X a;® a" X- X a- 150 EXAMPLES. g" + 5" 3. Simplify g -f“ b a — b g" + 5" a — b g + 6 g^ + 5^ a?- — b’^ __ {o? + 5^)^ — (a^ — 6^)^ g2 - g2 + 6^ - _ ^2) (^2 ^ ^ 2 ^ (g^ — V){a} + bi^y a-\-b_a — b_ (a + b)^ — {a — by _ 4g5 a — b g + 6 — b'^ — b^' Hence the fraction _ 4g^6'^ Aab (g'^ — b'^) (g^ + 5^) — b'^ _ 4g^6^ ^ d^ — b- __ db {cd — d) (g® 4- d) 4ab a- + d^ Note 1. — In this example the factors a — h and a + h are multi- plied together, and the result d — d is used instead of (a — 6)(a -)- h). In general, however, the student will find it advisable not to multiply the factors together till after he has canceled all the common factors from the numerator and denominator. Note 2. — When the numerator and denominator are somewhat complicated, to insure accuracy and neatness, the beginner is advised to simplify each separately as in the above example. Note 3. — The terms of the simple fractions which enter into the numerator and denominator of the complex fraction are sometimes called Minor Terms. Thus in Ex. 2, a- and d are minor numerators, and X and are minor denominators. It is often shorter to reduce a complex fraction to a simple one by multiplying both terms of the fraction by the least common multiple of all the minor denominators. 4. Simplify a: + 5 + - X X x~ Multiplying both terms b}^ x^ we get x^ + 5-t- + 6.T _ x(x -f- 2)(g: -b 3) _ x(x -f- 3) a;^ -j- 6a’ -p 8 (.r -f- 2) (a -p 4) a -p 4 A SINGLE FRACTION EXPRESSED AS A GROUP. 151 5. Simplify 3a; - 8 a: — 1 1 - 4 -1- a: In the case of Continued Fractions., we begin with the lowest complex fraction, and simplify step by step. Here multiplying both terms of the fraction which follows a: — 1 by 4 + a;, the given fraction becomes at once 3a; — 8 3a; — 8 4 + a; ~ , 4 + p; ’ A X — X 4 and now multiplying both terms by 4, we have 4(3a; - 8) ^ 4 (3a; - 8) ^ ^ 4 (a; — 1) — (4 + a;) 3a; — 8 Simplify 6 . 1 + Ans. X ~ 1. 7. i _ A _ A X a;^ x^ X a; + 1 x^{x + 3) 90. A Single Fraction Expressed as a Group of Fractions. — Let it be required to express the fraction 5x^y — 10a;y~ + loy^ — 5.a;^ lO.vY as a group of four fractions. The fraction = 5x-y lOx'Y lOx?/ 15?/^ 10a;^y^ 10a;^y^ _1 1 I % ^ 2y X 2x'^ 2]f- 10a;y 152 EXAMPLES. Express each of the following fractions as a group of simple fractions in lowest terms. j + xy'^ — y^ •dxy 3a\v — iarx"^ + Gax^ 2 . 3. 12acc be + ca -f- nb abc Ans. ^ _ r. 3 9 9a; ax x~ abc EXAMPLES. Eeduce to lowest terms the following examples : j x^ + 3a; + 2 x^ + Gx + 5 2 a;^ + lO.'g + 21 x^ — 2x — 15 Ans. ^ a; + 5 X 1 X — 5 2 3.r^ + 23.x- - 36 4x^ + 33.T - 27' ^ - 10.T + 21 a;® - 46a- - 21* 3x — 4 4.a- - 3 a- — 3 X“ -f“ ^ X -|- 3 Here we see at once that the numerator = (x — 7)(x — 3); and we find by trial that x — 7 is a factor of the denominator. a-2 + 9.a- + 20 .a® + 7.a® + 14a + 8‘ x“^ + X - 42 a® - - 10a-- A ■ 21a + 18 6a-^ - ll.a + 5 3.a® - 2.a-' - - r 20.a^ + a : - 12 12.X-® — 5.x'^ + 5.r — 6 a + 5 X- -|- 3x + 2 X + 7 a-® — 4a - 3 6a — 5 3.a - + a + 1' 5.a + 4 3.z^ + .a + 2‘ .a® - 8a- - 3 a-'* — 7x- + 1 .a - 3 a-2 — 3.a + r ■a® — .a^ — 7.a + 3 .a'* -f- 2.a® + 2.a — 1 a* — 3 ar -f 1 10 . EXAMPLES. 153 11. x^ — 1 + 1 x« — r .X'* + x^ + 1 12 x“ + X® 4- x-2 + X • ■f 1 1 - 1 X — 1 13. X® — 6x" - - 37x + 210 X — 5 X® + 4.x^ - - 47x — 210’ X + 5 Reduce to fractioual forms the following examples : 14. a + a: -f a — ax Ans. + X- 15. — ax x‘^ — 2x^ a + X 16. a; 4- 5 2x - 15 a; — 3 17. + ax^ 4- a- — x^ fr — x^^ a + X X — S a — x^ Reduce to whole or mixed quantities the following examples: 18. 19. 20 . 21 . 22 . 23. 24. 25. 26. a 1 - 2x" 1 + ^ 1 4- 2x 1 — 3x X 4- 7 X + 2’ 3x — 2 Ans. X — X + b 2x^ — 7a; — 1 X — 3 x^ — 2x‘^ — a: 4- 1 a;* + 1 a; — 1 X* - 1 a: 4- 1 1 — a; — 1 -f- bx 4" 1 + 3 - 2.a: — 1 — - 1 — 1 + a; 15.x^ 1 - 3a;' 5 a; 4- 2 17 X + b 4 » a: - 3‘ 2x - 1 x^ — X I X^ X^ + X + 1 + .a- - 1 X® — 4- a — 1. / 154 EXAMPLES. Perform the additions and subtractions indicated in the following examples : 27. 28. + 2y X -p y — y^ Ans. 1 a + 3a 2ax 29. - a — X ' a X — x ^ 5 2x — 7 30. 31. 32. 33. X 2x — I 4iX^ + a — b a + b a* 2 X - 3 b* + a; + 4 a;'^ — 4a; + 16 a.*® + 64 a;^ + ax + a^ x^ — ax + a^ X - y 4a a + x' 2x — 3 a’(4a:'^ — 1) 2a" + Q>a-b‘^ a* - b* 2x^ — 9x + 44 a:» + 64 2a .a”" — a*" »2 _1_ „2 + y xy x^ + a® f xy + y- oi^ + xy 2 ^ x^ — 2x^ + 3 ^ — 2 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. a;® + 1 1 x^ — .T + 1 a; 4- 1 ■2 1 a;^ - a'^ 1 . a? — 2x a;* + 1 ■ + - (a--3)(.r-4) (x-2)(a;-4) (.x'-2)(x-3) 1 . 1.1 1 0 . + + 4(1 + X) ' 4(1 - X ) ' 2(1 + x^) a—c b—c (a— 6)(x— a) {b—a){b—x) 1 - .r" . (See Art. 84, Ex. 10.) A?is. 1 (x — a) {x — b) 1 (a‘^— 6‘^) (.x’^+ft'^) ' (b'^—a^){x-+a-) (x'^+a-) (x^+5-) Ans. 0. ^ + ^ J-. a(a — 6) (a — c) b{b — a) {b — c) abc 1 Ans. c(a — c)(c — n) EXAMPLES. 155 40 . 41. + + (a— 6)(a— c) (6 — a)(6— c) (c— a)(c— 6) Ans. 1. + ; - + (a-b)(a--c){x—a) (b—a)(b—cj(x—b) (c—a)(c—b)(x—c) 1 4 ns. (x — a)(x — b)(x — c) Simplify the following examples in multiplication and division : + 4x 4 o + 5x + 2 _ 4 "" 2x^ + 9.x + 4 Aris. — X — 1 4x^ + X — 14 43. ; r X 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. 50. 2x^ + 5a; + 2 16a;^ — 49 2 ^ 4- 5x + 4 x^—-x—20 x^ — X 1~ 4 / x^ -f- 3a; -[- 2 ^ x -|- 3 \ s — 2x — 15 x‘^ ) _x X — 2 X — 1 4x + 7 X. x^ — 8x a;^ + 2x + 1 . a;^ + 2x + 4: 4a; — 5 x^ X 2a; x — 5 2 _ /,2 (a — b)‘ — c (a + hy-c^ + ab — ac ' (a + c) ^ — 6^ ' ab — b^ — be Sx , X — I Y 3~ 1 . 1 b' 1 . V (o; + 1) - X a; — 1 + 6 a; — 6 X — 2 + X — b X — 6 1 — (1 + — {a + xy x‘‘ + - i(-^ + — Y 1. \l — X 1 + xj y 1 _ 1 y » x^ — x^ -j- X. 156 EXAMPLES. 51. 1 - 1 1 + 1 X Ans. . a: + 1 52. 1 + 1 X -\- 2x^ • 1 — a; 53. 54. 1 - 1 + 1 + 1 + X + 2 .x" 1 — .X 1 + X 1 + .x"' .X + 1. 1 + .x" 1 -|- X 55 . \x + y x — y x^-y-J \x-\-y x^ — if/ 56. x + - y X + _i yi^y^ + •'« + y + - 1 . 57. (t + y'y ^ \ y + _J_. \y ^/W - W + ^'y ^y — y^' ^ + y X — 1 X — 1 .X + 3 _ X + 3 58 3 ^ ^ 7 X + 4 28 (x + 4) ^ ■ X + 2 X + 2 ■ X — 2 X — 2 ‘ 9(x + 3) ‘ 4 x-3 3 x-1 SOLUTION OF HARDER EQUATIONS — EXAMPLES. 157 CHAPTER IX. HARDER SIMPLE EQUATIONS OF ONE UNKNOWN QUANTITY. 91. Solution of Harder Equations. — We shall now give some simple equations, involving Algebraic fractions, which are a little more difficult than those in Chapter VI. These may be solved, by help of the preceding chapter on fractions, and by the same methods as the easier equations given in Chapter VI. The following examples w'orked in full will sufficiently illustrate the most useful methods. 1 . EXAMPLES. Solve ^ ^ -f- 7 X -f- 5 The L. C. M. of the denominators is (2a: + 7) (a: + 5). Clearing the equation of fractions by multiplying each term by '(2a: + 7)(a: + 5), we have* (6.a: - 3)(.^• + 5) = (3.a: - 2) (2a: + 7), or + 27a: — 15 = 6.A + 17a: — 14 ; .*. 10a: — 1 ^ .*. a: — ■ We may verify this result by putting for x in the original equation, as in Chapter VI. ; it will be found that each member then becomes — Note 1. — When the denominators of the fractions involved con- tain both simple and compound factors, it is frequently best to multiply the equation by the simple factors first, and then to collect the integral terms; after this the simplification is readily completed by “multi- plying across ” by the compound factors. * This is called “ multiplyiug across.” 158 EXAMPLES. 2. Solve 8a; + 23 5a; + 2 2a; + 3 20 3a; + 4 - 1 . Multiplying by 20, the L, C. M. of the simple factors in the denominators, we have 8a; + 23 - = 8a; + 12 - 20. 3a; + 4 Transposing, 31 = 20 (5a; + 2) ^ ^ ° 3a; + 4 Multiplying across by 3a; + 4, we have 93a; + 124 = 20 (ox + 2), or 84 = 7a; ; a; = 12. We may verify this result as before ; it will be found that each side becomes Note 2. — The student will see that, even when the denominators of the fractions contain all simple factors, it is sometimes advanta- geous to clear of fractions partially, and then to effect some reduc- tions, before removing the remaining fractions. 3 . Solve 7 = 5| + 11 3 4 12 Multiplying by 12, the L. C. M. of 3, 4, 12, 12(a^+*") _4(2a;- 18) + 3(2a; + 3)= 16 x 4 + 3a; + 4. or 12(a; + 6) 11 - 8a; + 72 + 6x- + 9 = 64 + 3a; + 4. Transposing and reducing, we have + -^ = 5.r - 13. 11 Multiplying by 11, we have 12(.t + 6) = ll(5.r - 13), or 12a; + t2 = oox — 14o j .•. 43a; = 215; x = 5. We may verify this result as before. Note 3. — When two or more fractions have the same denominator, they should be taken together and simplified. EXAMPLES. 159 4. Solve 13 - 2x 23a; + 8^ _ 16 — |a; ^ a; + 3 4a; + 5 a; + 3 Transposing, we have 23a; + 8^ __ ^ 16 — Ja; — 13 + 2a;. 4a; + 5 a; + 3 then 3 + jx a; -|- 3 IMultipIying across, we have (a: + 3) (7a; - = (3 + lx) (4a; + 5), or — ^-^-x + 21a; — 35 = 12a; + 7a;^ + 15 + -\®-a; ; Note 4. — This equation might be soived by ciearing of fractions, by muitipiying by the four denominators, but the work wouid be very iaborious. The soiution wiii be much simpiifled by transposing two of the fractions as foiiows : Transposing, we have Simplifying each side separately, we have (a;— 8) (a;— 7) — (a;— 5) (a;— 10) _ (a;— 7) (a;— 6) — (a;— 4) (a;— 9) 15a; + 56 - (x^- I5x + 50) _ a-~- 13a;+42 -(a;^- 13.T+36) X — 8 _x — 5_x — 7 X — 4 a’ — 10 X — 7 a — 9 a; — 6 (a;— 10) (a;— 7) (a;-9)(a--6) or (a;— 10) (x—7) (x-9)(x-6) 6 6 or (a;— 10) (a;— 7) (a:— 9) (a;— 6) Dividing by 6 and clearing of fractions, we have or (x - 9)(x - 6) = (x - 10) (a; - 7), x^ — 15a; + 54 = a;^ — 17a; -1- 70 ; a; = 8. 160 EXAMPLES. Note 5. — Tliis example may also be solved very neatly by writing the equation at first in the form a: — 10 + 2 a: — 6 + 2 _ a; — 7 + 2 a: — 9 + 2 a; — 10 X — a ~ X — 1 a: — 9* Eeclucing each fraction to a mixed number (Art. 81), we have 1 + X — 10 which gives Transposing, + 1 + + X — 6 1 = 1 + -w + 1 + X - 9’ ^ ' X — 10 X — 6 X — 7 X — 9 1111 X — 10 X — 7 X — 9 X — 6 3 _ 3 (X - 10)(x _ 7) ~ (x - 9)(x - 6)’ and the solution may be completed as before. 6. Solve 5x — 64 2x — 11 4x — 55 .r — 6 X 13 X X - 14 X — t Proceeding as in the second method of Ex. 5, we have 5 4 (2 -j ^ = 44 (14 ; x-13 V x-6/ x-14 V a; -7/ 1 1 1 1 X — 13 X — 6 X — 14 X — 7 Simplif 3 Mng each side separately, we have 7 7 (x — 13) (x — 6) — 14) (x — 7) Clearing of fractions, or, since the numerators are equal, the denominators must be equal, we have (x — 13) (x — 6) = (x — 14) (x — 7); x^ - 19x 4- 78 = .x'^ - 21x 4 - 98 ; .-. X = 10. Solve the following equations : 7 — 4- ^ - 2Q_ X ^ I2x 8 . 9 . 45 57 2x 4- 3 4.x — 5 3x - 1 .4?is. 10. 6 . 2.x — 5 , .X — 3 X = X 4- 1. 3 4 6 HARDER PROBLEMS. 161 10 . 6^ -f“ 8 -f- 38 2x + 1 ~ a; + 12 = 1 . Ans. 2. 11. -|(2x— 10) — 40) = 15— J(57— a:). (See Note 2). Ans. 17. 12 . 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20 . 4 32 40 2 ® ^ a; + 4 a; 4- 5 3a; - 8 6a; + 13 15 3.x- - 1 _ 2a; - 1 6a; + 7 3a; — 7 3a; + 5 5.1; — 25 4a; — 2 ^ y. (See Note 1). 3a; - 1 1 — ir- 9.x + 6 4 2 = tV + 5x — 5 12a; +-8’ 5. 6 . 20 . 7 17 * — R5 2i a;+3 x+1 2x+G 2x+2 X — 1 , a; — 2 .X — 1 X — 2 6x 4- 1 15 X 4 _^x - 2 X — 6 X — 5 X — 3 X — 2 X — 5 X — 6 (See Note 3). (See Ex. 5). 1 . X — 3 X _ 2x - 4 ^ 7x — 16 -6 X 2x — 1 44 . ■ 2 . 92. Harder Problems Leading to Simple Equations with One Unknown Quantity. — We shall now give some examples which lead to simple equations, but which differ from those of Art. 61 in being rather more difficult. The statement of the problem is rather more difficult than in the examples of that Article, and the equations often involve more complicated expressions. 162 EXAMPLES. EXAMPLES. 1. A alone can do a piece of work in 9 days, and B alone can do it in 12 days; in what time will they do it if they w'ork together? Let X = the number of days required for both to do the work ; then - = the part that both can do in one day. X Also = the part that A can do in one day, and = the part that B can do in one da}'. Since the sum of the parts that A and B separately can do in one day is equal to the part that both together can do in one day, we have Clearing of fractions by multiplying by 36x, we have “1“ 3x o6 ^ .*. X ■ which is the number of days required. 2. A workman was employed for 60 days, on condition that for every day he worked he should receive "SS, and for every day he was absent he should forfeit $1 ; at the end of the time he had $48 to receive : required the number of days he worked. Let X = the number of days he worked ; then 60 — a’ = the number of days he was absent. Also 3x = the number of dollars he received, and 60 — a’ = the number of dollars he forfeited. Hence, from the conditions of the problem, we have 3.x- - (60 - x) = 48. .-. 4x = 108. .-. X = 27. That is, he worked 27 days and was absent 33 days. 3. A starts from a certain place, and travels at the rate of 7 miles in 5 hours ; B starts from the same place 8 hours after A, and travels in the same direction at the rate of 5 EXAMPLES. 163 miles in 3 hours ; how far will A travel before he is over- taken by B ? Let X = the number of hours A travels before he is overtaken ; then X — 8 = the number of hours B travels before he overtakes A. Also = the part of a mile wiiich A travels in one hour, and -| = the part of a mile which B travels in one hour, Therefore = the number of miles which A travels in x hours, and -Ka; — 8) = the number of miles which B travels in a; — 8 hours. Since, when B overtakes A, they have traveled the same number of miles, we have for the equation ix = Kx - 8). 21a; = 25a; — 200. .•. a; = 50. Therefore ^ x 50 = 70 miles, the distance which A travels before he is overtaken by B. 4. A cistern could be filled with water by means of one pipe alone in 6 hours, and by means of another pipe alone in 8 hours ; and it could be emptied by a tap in 12 hours if the two pipes were closed : in what time will the cistern be filled if the pipes and the tap are all open? Let X = the required number of hours. Then ^ = the part of the cistern the first pipe fills in one hour ; therefore - = the part of the cistern the first pipe fills in X hours. And J = the part of the cistern the second pipe fills in one hour ; therefore - = the part of the cistern the second pipe fills in X hours. 164 EXAMPLES. Also = the part of the cistern the tap empties in one hour ; therefore ~ = the part of the cistern the tap empties in x hours. Since in x hours the whole cistern is filled, we have, repre- senting the whole by unity. a; a; _ x _ ^ 6 8 ~ 12 ~ Multiplying by 24, we have 4a: -J- 3a: — 2a: = 24. a: = 4|- 5. A smuggler had a quantity of brandy which he ex- pected would bring him $198 ; after he had sold 10 gallons a revenue officer seized one-third of the remainder, in con- sequence of which the smuggler gets only $162: required the number of gallons he had at first, and the price per gallon. Let X = the number of gallons ; 198 then = price per gallon in dollars. and a: — 10 3 ’ a; - 10 198 3 a: = the number of gallons seized ; = the value of the quantity seized in dollars. Hence we have the equation ~ X — = 198 - 162 = 36. 3 X Clearing of fractions 66 (a: - 10) = 36a:. .-. 30.-C = 660. .'. X = 22, the number of gallons ; 198 198 eo • u = $9, the price per gallon. X 22 and EXAMPLES. 165 6. A colonel, on attempting to draw np his regiment in the form of a solid square, finds that he has 31 men over, and that he would require 24 men more in his regiment in order to increase the side of the square by one man : how many men were there in the regiment? Let X = the number of men in the side of the first square ; then x^ -f- 31 = the number of men in the regiment. Also (a; + 1) - — 24 = the number of men in the regiment. Hence, we have the equation + 31 = (a; + l)'^ _ 24, or a;^ + 31 = a:^ + 2x — 23. .*. x = 27. Hence (27)^ -[- 31 = 760 is the number of men in the regiment. Note 1. — In this example it was convenient to let x represent the number of men in the side of the first square instead of the number of men in the whole regiment. 7. At the same time that the up-train going at the rate of 33 miles an hour passes A, the down-train going at the rate of 21 miles an hour passes B; they collide 18 miles be 3 'ond the midway station from A : how far is A from B ? Let X = the distance from A to B in miles ; cc then - = half the distance. 2 Also - + 18 2 the number of miles the up-train goes. and 18 = the number of miles the down-train goes. 2 ” distance in miles ,.i .• • i INow = the time in hours. rate in miles per hour - -f 18 2 Therefore = the time the up-train takes, 33 ^ - - 18 2 = the time the down-train takes. and 21 166 EXAMPLES. Heuce, since these times are equal, we have the equation - + 18 - - 18 2 _ 2 33 21 Solving, we get x = 162, which is the distance from A to B in miles. 8. A cask. A, contains 12 gallons of wine and 18 gallons of water ; and another cask, B, contains 9 gallons of wine and 3 gallons of water : how many gallons must be drawn from each cask so as to produce by their mixture 7 gallons of wine and 7 gallons of water? Let X = the number of gallons to be drawn from A ; then 14 — x — the number of gallons to be drawn from B, since the mixture is to contain 14 gallons. Now A contains 30 gallons, of which 12 are wine ; that is, of A is wine. Also B contains 12 gallons, of which 9 are wine ; that is, of B is wine. Hence = the number of gallons of wine in the X gallons drawn from A ; and y%(14 — x) = the number of gallons of wine in the 14 — .r gallons drawn from B. Since the mixture is to contain seven gallons of wine, we have + fV(l-l — ^) = j that is, f ^’ + Solving, we get x — 10, the number of gallons to be drawn from A, and 14 — a’ = 4, the number of gallons to be drawn from B. 9. At what time between 4 and 5 o’clock is the minute- hand of a watch 13 minutes in advance of the hour-hand? Let X = the required number of minutes after 4 o’clock ; that is, the minute-hand will move over x minute divisions of the watch face in x minutes; and as it moves 12 times as fast as the hour-hand, the hour-hand will move over — minute divisions in x minutes. At 4 o’clock the minute-hand EXAMPLES. 167 is 20 minute divisions behind the hour-hand, and finally the minute-hand is 13 minute divisions in advance ; therefore, in the X minutes, the minute-hand moves 20 -t- 13, or 33, divisions more than the hour-hand. Hence x — — + S3 ] 12 therefore 11a: = 12 x 33. .-. x = 36, or the time is 36 minutes past 4. If the question be asked, “At what times between 4 and 5 o’clock will there be 13 minutes between the two hands? ” we must also take into consideration the case when the minute-hand is 13 divisions behind the hour-hand. In this case the minute-hand gains 20 — 13, or 7 divisions. Hence a; = — -f- 7. 12 11a: = 84. x = 7j^-j. Therefore the times are 7^y minutes past 4, and 36 minutes past 4. ISTote 2. — The student is supposed to have obtained from Arith- metic some knowledge of ratio and proportion. When two or more imknown quantities, in any example, have to each other a given ratio, it is best to assume each of them a multiple of some other unknown quantity, so that they shall have to each other the given ratio. Thus, if two unknown numbers are to each other as 2 to 3, it is best to express the numbers by 2x and 3x, since these two numbers are to each other as 2 to 3. This will be illustrated in the next two examples. 10. A number consists of two digits of which the left digit is to the right digit as 2 to 3 ; if 18 be added to the number the digits are reversed : what is the number? The student must remember that any number consisting of two places of figures is equal to ten times the figure iu the ten’s place plus the figure in the unit’s place ; thus, 46 is equal to 10 X 4 -f 6 ; likewise 358 is equal to 100 x 3 -)- 10 X 0 -f- 8. Let 2x = the left digit ; then 3a: = the right digit, and 10 X 2x 3x — number. 168 EXAMPLES. Hence we have the equation (10 X 2x + 3.X’) 18 = (10 X 3a: + 2x), or 20x’ + 3a; + 18 = 30a; + 2a;. X = 2 \ 2a; = 4, and 3a: = 6 ; therefore the number is 46. 11. A hare takes 4 leaps to a gre 3 'hound’s 3, but 2 of the greyhound’s leaps are equivalent to 3 of the hare’s ; the hare has a start of 50 leaps : how many leaps must the greyhound take to catch the hare ? Let 3a; = the number of leaps taken by the gre 5 ’hound ; then 4x = the number of leaps taken by the hare in the same time. Also, let a denote the number of feet in one leap of the hare ; then |n denotes the number of feet in one leap of the greyhound. Therefore 3x x fa = the distance in 3x leaps of the grey- hound ; and (4.r + 50) a = the distance in 4a; + 50 leaps of the hare. lienee we have the equation |a.T = (4a; -)- 50)«. Dividing by a and multiplying by 2, we have dx = 8.T -f 100. .-. .a; 100. Therefore the greyhound must take 300 leaps. Note 3. — It is often convenient to introduce an auxiliary symbol, as a was introduced in the above example, to enable us to form the equation easily; this can be removed by division when the equation is formed. 12. A person bought a carriage, horse, and harness for 8600 ; the horse cost twice as much as the harness, and the carriage half as much again as the horse and harness : what did he give for each ? Has. 8360, 8160, 880. 13. In a garrison of 2744 men. there are two cavalry soldiers to twenty-five infantry, and half as many artillery as cavalry; find the numbers of each. Ans. 2450, 196, 98. EXAMPLES. 169 14. A and B play for a stake of $5 ; if A loses he will have as much as B, but if A wins he will have three times as much as B : how much has each? Ans. $25, $15. 15. A, B, and C have a certain sum between them ; A has one-half of the whole, B has one-third of the whole, and C has $50 ; how much have A and B? Ans. $150, $100. 16. A number of troops being formed into a solid square, it was found that there were 60 over ; but when formed into a column with 5 men more in front than before and 3 less in depth, there was just one man wanting to complete it: find the number of men. Ans. 1504. 17. A and B began to pay their debts ^ A’s money was at first -| of B’s ; but after A had paid $5 less than •§ of his money, and B had paid $5 more than ^ of his, it was found that B had only half as much as A had left : what sum had each at first? Ans. $360, $540. 18. In a mixture of copper, lead, and tin, the copper was 5 lbs. less than half the whole quantity, and the lead and tin each 5 lbs. more than a third of the remainder : find the respective quantities. Ans. 20, 15, 15 lbs. 19. A and B have the same income ; A lays by a fifth of his ; but B, by spending annually $400 more than A, at the end of four years finds himself $1100 in debt: what was their income? .d7is. $625. 20. There are two silver cnps and one cover for both ; the first weighs 12 ozs., and with the cover weighs twice as much as the other cup without it ; but the second with the cover weighs a third as much again as the first without it : find the weight of the cover. Ans. 6-| oz. 21. Two casks, A and B, contain mixtures of wine and water ; in A the quantity of wine is to the quantity of water as 4 to 3 ; in B the like proportion is that of 2 to 3. If A contain 84 gallons what must B contain, so that when the two are put together, the new mixture may be half wine and half water? Ans. 60. 170 EXAMPLES. EXAMPLES. Solve the following equations. 1- + i = X — 2x — 1 n 4x + 17 , 3a: — 10 2. ' — f- — = V. a: + 3 a; — 4 Ans. —6. 2 . 3. {x — \){x — 2) = x^ — 2x — i. ^ 3(7 + 6a;) 35 + 4a; 2 + 9.1; 9 + 2x 5. — ^ H — = 1. a; + 2 X’ -j- 6 „ 2x — 5 , X — 3 4.X’ — 3 5 2.X’ — 15 10 1 . 2 . 5. ^ 4(.r + 3) ^ 8x + 37 _ 7x - 29 '■9 18 5.X’ - 12' g _7 60 ^ 10^ 8 X — i 5a; — 30 3a; — 12 x — 6 9. 10 . 11 . 12 . - 2a; - 8 ^ (7.x- - 2) (3.i; - 6) 5 35 _ I ( 3 a; — 4) + 2) (2a;— 3) _ ^o_ 3 6 “ 2 ]_ ^ 6 2x- — 3 X — 2 3a: + 2 .X- — 4 a; — 5_a;— 7 x — 8 X — 5 X — 6 X — 8 X— 9 2 . 2 . 13. 14. 15. X ,x — 9_x+l ,x — 8 X— 2 X— / .X— 1 X — 6 3 — 2x 2x — 5 _ j 4.r^ — 1 1 — 2x 2x — 7 7 — 16x + 4.x^ X — 5 x^ + 6 _ a;- - - 2 _ x? — .r + 1 . g 7 3 ~ 2 6 4. - 1 . - 23 . EXAMPLES. 171 16 3 30 ^ 3 5 ' 4 — 2x 8(1 — a;) 2 — a; 2 — 2a; 3 0 + 6a; 60 + 8a; ^14, 48 a; + l a; + 3 a;+l Ans. —4. 3. 18. 19. 20 . 21 . 22 . X X + 1 _ X — 8 X — 9 X — 2 X — 1 “ X — 6 X — 7 X + 5 X — 6 _ X — 4 X — 15 X + 4 X — 7 X — 5 X — 16' X — 7 X — 9 X - - 13 X — 15 X — 9 X — 11 " X - - 15 X - 17' X + 3 X + 6 X + 2 X + 5 X + 6 X + 9 a; + 5 X + 8' X + 2 X — 1 _ a; + 3 _ a; — 6 X X — b a;+l a; — 4 4. 6 . 13. — i. 2 . 4a; - 17 10a; - 13 ^ 8a; - 30 bx - 4 a; — 4 2a; — 3 2a;— 7 a; — 1 2 ^- o, 5.1; — 8 , 6a; — 44 10a; — 8 a; — 8 . 24. 1 = . 4. X — 2 X — 7 X — 1 X — 6 25. (a;+lX^’+2)(a;+3) = (.T-lXa;-2Xa;-3)+3(4a;-2Xa;+l). Ans. 3. 26. (a;— 9) (a;— 7) (a:— 5)(a;— l) = (a;— 2)(a;— 4)(a;— 6)(.a;— 10). yl/is. 54. 27. (8a; - 3)2(.a; _ 1) = (4.a; - l)2(4.r - 5). a;^ — a; + 1 _j_ a;- + + _ 1 ^ 2a;. 0. .a; — 1 a; + 1 29 ^ — 2a; — 2 _ 2.a; + 1 ^ 15 7a; — 6 5 30. .bx — 2 = .25a; + .2a; — 1. 20. 31. .5a; + .6a; — .8 = .75a; + .25. 3. 32. 33. 15a; 4- •135.a; - .225 ^ _ .09.a; - .18 ' ^ .6 .2 .9 2a; — 3 _ .ix — .6 .3a; - .4 ~ .06a; — .07* 5. n. 172 EXAMPLES. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. .3a; - 1 .5 + 1.2a; .5a; — .4 2a; — .1 (.3a; - 2)(..3 .t - 1) .2a; — 1 a^{x — a) + l/{x — b) = abx. 2x + 3g _ 2 (3a; + 2a) X a 3x + a ‘ X ^{.3x - 2) = .4a; - 2. 20. a -f* 5. a. — 3 — 4 + 0 x” + a{2a ~ ~ ^ ~ ~ (2x —a ) = 4a^^ — .a;^ — |(a — 4a:) ( 2a + 3x) . 17a. a rr' a + 6. .d?is. 2a 2l' a — b X — a X — b x^ — ab X — a _ X + a _ 2aa; a — b a + b — b^ X — a X — a — \ X — b 2ab a + b g- b - a X — b — I X — a 1 X — a 2 a; — 6 — 1 X — b — 2 Ans. 4 (a + 5 + 3). {x—a)^{x-\-a—2b) = (.a-— 6)®(.a;— 2a+5). 4(a+5). 3abc g-b^ (2a + b)b’ix _ ^ ab a + b (a + 5)® a(a + b)- a a + b 47. A person wishing to sell a. watch by lottery, charges $1.20 each for the tickets, by which he gains $16 ; whereas, if he had made a third as many tickets again and charged $1 each, he would have gained one-fifth as many dollai"S as he had sold tickets : what was the value of the watch ? Ans. $128. EXAMPLES. 173 48. There is a number of two digits, whose difference is 2, and if it be diminished by half as much again as the sum of the digits, the digits will be reversed : find the number. Ayis. 75. 49. Find a number of 3 digits, each greater by 1 than that which follows it, so that its excess above a fourth of the number formed by reversing the digits shall be 36 times the sum of the digits. Ans. 654. 50. A can do a piece of work in 10 days, which B can do in 8 ; after A has been at work upon it 3 days, B comes to help him : in how many days will they finish it? Ans. 3^ days. 51. A and B can reap a field together in 7 days, which A alone could reap in 10 days : in what time could B alone reap it? Ans. 23-| days. 52. A privateer, running at the rate of 10 miles an hour, discovers a ship 18 miles off, running at the rate of 8 miles an hour : how many miles can the ship run before it is over- taken? Alls. 72. 53. The distance between London and Edinburgh is 360 miles ; one traveler starts from Ifdinburgh and travels at the rate of 30 miles an hour, while another starts at the same time from London and travels at the rate of 24 miles an hour : how far from Edinburgh will they meet? Ans. 200 miles. 54. Find two numbers whose difference is 4, and the dif- ference of their squares 112. Ans. 12, 16. 55. Divide the number 48 into two parts so that the excess of one part over 20 may be three times the excess of 20 over the other part. Ans. 32, 16. 56. A cistern could be filled in 12 minutes by two pipes which run into it, and it could be filled in 20 minutes by one alone : in what time would it be filled by the other alone ? Ans. 30 minutes. 57. Divide the number 90 into four parts so that the first increased by 2, the second diminished by 2, the third multi- plied by 2, and the fourth divided by 2, ma}’ all be equal. Ans. 18, 22, 10, 40. 174 EXAMPLES. 58. Divide the number 88 into four parts so that the first increased by 2, the second diminished by 3, the third multi- plied by 4, and the fourth divided by 5, may all be equal. A?is. 10, 15, 3, 60. 59. If 20 men, 40 women, and 50 children receive S500 among them for a week’s work, and 2 men receive as much as 3 women or 5 children, what does each woman receive for a week’s work? A?is. 85. 60. A cistern can be filled in 15 minutes by two pipes, A and B, running together ; after A has been running by itself for 5 minutes B is also turned ou, and the cistern is filled in 13 minutes more : in what time would it be filled by each pipe separately? Ans. 37^, and 25 minutes. 61. A man and his wife could drink a cask of beer in 20 days, the man drinking half as much again as his wife ; but of a gallon having leaked awa}q they found that it only lasted them together for 18 days, aud the wife herself for two days longer : how much did the cask contain when full? .4?is. 12 gallons. Let X = the number of gallons the woman could drink in a day. 62. A man, woman, and child could reap a field in 30 hours, the man doing half as much again as the woman, aud the woman two-thirds as much again as the child : how many hours would they each take to do it separately ? Ahs. 62, 93, 155. Let 2x = the man’s number of hours, 3x = the woman’s, and 5.r = the child’s. 63. A and B can reap a field together in 12 hours, A and C in 16 hours, aud A by himself in 20 hours : in what time (1) could B aud C together reap it, aud (2) could A, B, aud C together reap it? A?is. 21,^y hours, lOJf hours. 64. A can do half as much work as B, B can do half as much work as C, and together they can complete a piece of work in 24 days : in what time could each alone complete the work? 168, 84, aud 42 days. EXAMPLES. 175 65. There are two places 154 miles apart, from which two persons start at the same time with a design to meet ; one travels at the rate of 3 miles in two hours, and the other at the rate of 5 miles in four hours : when will they meet ? Ans. At the end of 56 hours. 66. Three persons, A, B, and C, can together complete a piece of work in 60 days ; and it is found that A does three- fourths of what B does, and B four-fifths of what C does : in what time could each one alone complete the work ? Ans. 240, 180, 144 days. Let X = C’s time of completing the work, in days. 67. A general, on attempting to draw up his army in the form of a solid square, finds that he has 60 men over, and that he would require 41 men more in his army in order to increase the side of the square by one man : how many men were there in the army? Ans. 2560. 68. A person bought a certain number of eggs, half of them at 2 for a cent, and half of them at 3 for a cent ; he sold them again at the rate of 5 for two cents, and lost a cent by the bargain ; what was the number of eggs ? Ans. 60. 69. A and B are at present of the same age ; if A’s age be increased by 36 years, and B’s by 52 years, their ages will be as 3 to 4 ; what is the present age of each? Ans. 12. 70. A cistern has two supply pipes which will singly fill it in 4|^ hours and 6 hours respectively ; and it has also a leak by which it would be emptied in 5 hours : in how many hours will it be filled when all are working together? Ans. 5j\. 71. A person hired a laborer to do a certain work on the agreement that for every day he worked he should receive $2, but that for every day he was absent he should lose 80.75 ; he worked twice as many days as he was absent, and on the whole received $39 : how many days did he work ? Ans. 24. 72. A sum of money was divided between A and B, so that the share of A was to that of B as 5 to 3 ; also the share of A exceeded five-ninths of the whole sum by $200 ; what was the share of each oerson? .4as. $1800, 1080 176 EXAMPLES. 73. A gentleman left his whole estate among his fonr sons. The share of the eldest was 84000 less than half of the estate ; the share of the second was 8600 more than one- fourth of the estate ; the third had half as much as the eldest ; and the youngest had two-thirds of what the second had : how much did each son receive ? Ans. 811000, 88100, $5500, 5400. Let X = the number of dollars in the estate. 74. A draper bought a piece of cloth at 38 cents per yard ; he sold one-third of it at 48 cents per yard, one-fourth of it at 44 cents per yard, and the remainder at 40 cents per yard ; and his gain on the whole was 81-70 : how many j’ards did the piece contain? Ans. 30. 75. A and B shoot by turns at a target ; A puts 7 bullets out of 12 into the bull’s eye, and B puts in 9 out of 12; between them they put in 32 bullets : how many shots did each fire? Ans. 24. 76. Two casks, A and B, are filled with two kinds of sheriy, mixed in the cask A in the proportion of 2 to 7, and in the cask B in the proportion of 2 to 5 : what quantity must be taken fiom each to form a mixture whicli shall consist of 2 gallons of the first kind and 6 of the second kind ? Ans. 4^, 3J. 77. The national debt of a country was increased by one- fourth in a time of war. During a long peace which followed, 8250000000 was paid off, and at the end of that time the rate of interest was reduced from 4^ to 4 per cent. It was then found that the amount of annual interest was the same as before the war. "What was the amount of the debt before the war? Ans. 82000000000. 78. How many minutes does it want of 4 o’clock, if three- quarters of an hour ago it was twice as many minutes past 2 o’clock? A;?s. 25. Let X = the number of minutes it wants of 4 o’clock. 79. At what time between 3 o’clock and 4 o’clock is one hand of a watch exactly in the direction of the other hand produced ? Has. 49jij minutes past three. EXAMPLES. 177 80. The hands of a watch are at right angles to each other at 3 o’clock : when are they next at right angles? pbis. minutes past three. 81. At what time between 3 and 4 o’clock is the minute- hand one minute ahead of the hour-hand? 17y\ minutes past three. 82. A clock has two hands turning on the same centre ; the swifter makes a revolution every 12 hours, and the slower every 16 hours: in what time will the swifter gain just one complete revolution on the slower? A?is. 48 hours. 83. A watch gains as much as a clock loses; and 1799 hours by the clock are equivalent to 1801 hours by the watch : find how much the watch gains and the clock loses per hour. A?is. 2 seconds. Let X = the number of seconds which the watch gains and the clock loses per hour. 84. A and B made a joint stock of $2000 by which they gained $640, of which A had for his share $128 more than B : what did each contribute to the stock ? A71S. $1200, $800. 85. A hare is 80 of her own leaps ahead of a greyhound ; she takes 3 leaps for every 2 that he takes ; but he covei's as much ground in one leap as she does in 2 : how many leaps will the hare have taken before she is caught? Ans. 240. 86. A and B play at a game, agreeing that the loser shall always pay to the winner one dollar less than half the money the loser has ; they commence with equal quantities of money, and after B has lost the first game and won the second, he has $2 more than A : how much had each at the commencement? A?is. $6. 87. An officer can form his men into a hollow square 4 deep, and also into a hollow square 8 deep ; the front in the latter formation contains 16 men fewer than in the former formation : find the number of men. Ans. 640. 88. A person has just a hours at his disposal; how far may he ride in a coach which travels 6 miles an hour, so as 178 EXAMPLES. to return home in time, walking back at the rate of c miles an hour ? Ans. . b + c 89. A man rides one-third of the distance from A to B at the rate of a miles an hour, and the remainder at the rate of 26 miles an hour ; if he had traveled at a uniform rate of 3c miles an hour, he could have ridden from A to B and back again in the same time : prove that 90. A certain article of consumption is subject to a duty of $2.25 per cwt. ; in consequence of a reduction in the dut}' the consumption increases one-half, but the revenue falls one-third : find the duty per cwt. after the reduction. Ans. $1. 91. A vessel can be emptied by three taps; by the first alone it could be emptied in 80 minutes, by the second alone in 200 minutes, and by the third alone in 5 hours. In what time will the vessel be emptied if all the taps are opened ? Ans. 48 minutes. 92. A cask A contains 12 gallons of wine and 18 gallons of water ; and another cask B contains 9 gallons of wine and 3 gallons of water : how many gallons must be drawn from each cask so as to produce by their mixture 7 gallons of water and 7 gallons of wine ? Ans. 10 from A, 4 from B. 93. A ship sails with a supply of biscuit for 60 days, at a daily allowance of a pound a head ; after being at sea 20 days she encounters a storm in which 5 men are washed overboard, and damage sustained that will cause a delay of 24 days, and it is found that each man’s daily allowance must be reduced to five sevenths of a pound. Find the orig- inal number of the crew. Aiis. 40. SIMULTANEOUS EQUATIONS. 179 CHAPTER X. SIMULTANEOUS SIMPLE EQUATIONS OF TWO OR MORE UNKNOWN QUANTITIES. 93. Simultaneous Equations of Two Unknown Quantities. — If we have a single equation containing two unknown quantities x and we cannot determine any thing definite regarding the values of a: and y, because whatever value we choose to give to either of them, there will be a corresponding value of the other. Thus, from the equation, but we cannot find the value of y from this equation unless we know the value of x. We may give to x any value we choose, and there will be one corresponding value of y ; and thus we may find as many pairs of values as we please which will satisfy the given equation. For example, if x = 3, then y = (24 — 6) -4- 3 = 6. If a; = 6, then y = (24 — 12) h- 3 = 4. If a; = 9, then y = (24 - 18) -h 3 = 2. If .r = 20, then y = (24 - 40) -4- 3 = -5L and so on. etc., substituted for a; and y in (1) will satisfy the equation. Hence a single equation containing two unknown quantities is not sufficient to determine the definite value of either. 2x + 3y = 24, ( 1 ) we may deduce the equation, 24 - 2x Any one of these pairs of values 180 SIM VL T AN EO VS EQ, V A TIONS. Suppose we have a second equation of the same kind, expressing a different relation between the unknown quanti- ties, as for example, 3x + 2?/ = 26 ; (2> then we can find as many pairs of values as we please which will satisfy this equation also. Now suppose we wish to determine values of x and y which will satisfy both equations (1) and (2) ; we shall find that there is only one pair of values of x and y, i.e., only one value of x and one value of y that will satisfy both equations. For, multiply equation (1) by 2, and equation (2) by 3, and the equations become F'C d- 6y = 48, (3) and 9x -f 6y = 78 (4) The coefficients of y are now the same in (3) and (4) ; hence if we subtract each memlier of (3) from the corre- sponding member of (4), we shall obtain an equation which does not contain y : tlie equation will be bx — 30 ; therefore a; = 6. Substituting this value of x in either of the two given equations, for example in equation (1), we have 12 -b 3y = 24. .-. 3y = 12. ••• y = -I- Thus, if both equations are to be satisfied liy the same values of x and y, x must equal 6, and y must equal 4 ; and the pair of values ( ~ ^ ) is the onlv pair of values which \y = will satisfy botli the given equations. Simultaneous Equations are those which are satisfied by the same values of the unknown quantities. Thus, Since (1) and (2) are satisfied by the same values of x and y, they are simultaneous equations. ELIMINATION BY ADDITION OR SUBTRACTION. 181 Indeixndent Equations are those which express different relations between the unknown quantities, and neither can be reduced to the other. Thus, Equations (1) and (2) are independent, because they ex- press different nelations between x and y. But 2x — 3y = 4, and 8a; — 12y = 16, are not independent equations, since the second is derived directly from the first, l\v multiplying both members by 4. Hence we see that tivo independent simultaneous equations are necessary to determine the values of two unknown quan- tities. 94. Elimination. — In order to solve any two simulta- neous equations containing two unknown quantities, it is necessary to combine them in such a way as to deduce a third equation which contains only one of the unknown quantities ; and this equation containing only one unknown quantity can be solved by the method given in Chapter IX. When the value of one of the unknown quantities has thus been determined, we can substitute this value in either of the given equations, and then determine the value of the other unknown quantity. The process of combining equations so as to get rid of either of the unknown quantities is caWed Elimination. The unknown quantity which disappears is said to be elimmated. There are three methods of elimination in common use : * (1) by Addition or Subtraction; (2) by Substitution ; and (3) by Comparison. 95. Elimination by Addition or Subtraction. — 1 . Let it be required to determine the values of x and y in the two equations Sx -f- 7y = 100 (1) 12;c — oy = 88 (2) * There is also a method by Undetermined ^tultiplierny which sometimes has the advantage over either of these three methods, especially in Higher Mathematics. — See Art. 99, Note. 182 ELIMINATION BY ADDITION OR SUBTRACTION. If we wish to elimiuate y we multiply (1) by 5, and (2) by 7, so as to make the coefficients of y in both equations equal. This gives 40a; + 35y = 500 (3) 84a: — 35y = G16 . . “ . . . . (4) Adding (3) and (4), we have 124a: = 1116. .-. a; = 9. To find y, substitute this value of x in either of the given equations. Thus in (1) 72 + 7y = 100. ly = 28. ••• y= and X = 9j In this solution we eliminated y by addition. Otherwise thus: Suppose that in solving these equations we wish to eliminate x instead of y. Multiply (1) by 3, and (2) by 2, so as to make the coefficients of x in both equations equal. This gives 2ix + 21y = 300 (5) 24.r - lOy = 176 (6) Sxihtracting (6) from (5), we have 31y = 124. y = 4. In this solution we eliminated x by subtraction. Note 1. — The student will observe that we might have made the eoetticieiits of x equal by multiplying (1) and (2) by 12 and 8 respec- tively, instead of by 3 and 2; but it was more convenient to use the smaller multfijliers, because it enabled us to work with smaller numbers. 2. Solve 2.T -f 3y = 31 (1) 12.T — 17y = —59 (2) Here it will be more convenient to eliminate x. ELIMINATION BY ADDITION OR SUBTRACTION. 183 Multiplying (1) by 6, to make the coefficients of x in both equations equal, we have 12a; + 18y == 186 ; .... (3) and from (2) 12a; — 17y = —59 (4) Subtracting (4) from (3), 35y =: 245. ■ y = 7. Substituting this value of y in (1), we have 2a; + 21 = 31. . • . a; = 51 and y = 7 j Note 2. — When one of the unknown quantities has been found, it is immaterial which of the equations we use to comislete the solution, though it is sometimes more convenient to use a particular equation on account of its being less involved than the other. Thus, in this example, we substituted the value of x in (1) rather than in (2), because it rendered the process simpler. In these two examples we have eliminated by addition and subtraction. Hence to eliminate an unknown quantity by addition or subtraction., we have the following Rule. Multiply the given equations, if necessary, by such numbers as will viake the coefficients of this unTcnoivn quantity numeri- cally equcd in the resulting equations. Then, if these equcd coefficients have unlike signs, add the equations together ; if they have the same sigyi, subtract one equation from the other. Rem. — It is generally best to eliminate that unknown quantity which has the smaller coefficients in the two equations, or which requires the smallest multipliers to make its coefficients equal. "When the coefficients of the quantity to be eliminated are prime to each other, we may take each one as the multiplier of the other equation. When these coefficients are not prime to each other, find their least common multiple; and the smallest multiplier for each equation will be the quotient obtained by dividing this L. C. M. by the coefficient in that equation. Thus, in Ex. 1, first solution, 7 and 5 (the coefficients of y] are prime to each other. We multiplied (1) by 5 and (2) by 7. In the second solution of Ex. 1, the L. C. M. of 8 and 12 (the coeffi- cients of x) is 24; and hence the smallest multipliers of (1) and (2) are 3 and 2 respectively, which we used in that solution. 184 ELIMINATION BY ADDITION OR SUBTRACTION. 3. Solve 171x- - 213?/ = 642 (1) 114x - 326y = 244 (2) Here we see tliat 171 and 114 contain a common factor 57 ; so we shall make the coefficients of x in (1) and (2) equal to t\\e least common multiple ot 171 and 114 if we multiplj- (1) by 2 and (2) by 3. Thus, 342x — 426y = 1284 342x - 978y = 732 Subtracting, 552y = 552. ••• y = 1, j therefore x = 5. j Note 3. — The solution is sometimes easily effected by first adding the given equations, or by subtracting one from the other. Thus, 4. Solve 127x + 59y = 1928. . . . (1) 59x + 1271/ = 1792. . . . (2y By addition 186.x + 186y = 3720. .-. .X + y = 20 . . . . (3) Subtracting (2) from (1), 68.x — 68y = 136. X - y = 2 .... (4) Adding (3) and (4), 2.x = 22. .-. .x = 11. Subtracting (4) from (3), 2y = 18. .•. y = 9. Note 4. — The student should look carefully for opportunities to effect such reductions as are made in this example. He will find as. he proceeds that in all parts of Algebra, particular examples may be treated by methods which are shorter than the general rules; but such abbreviations can only be suggested by experience and practice. Solve the following equations by" addition or subtraction : 5. 6 . 7. 8 . 9. 10 . 3.x + 4y = 10, 4;x + y = 9. X + 2y = 13, 3.x + y = 14. 4x -f- 7y = 29, .x + 3y = 11. 8x — y = 34, X + % = 53. 14x — 3y = 39, 6x -|- 1 z = 0. ■ y = 2>z (7) Substitute these values of x and y in (1) ; thus 122 + 62 - 52 = 13. .-. 2 = 1 ; ' therefore from (6) and (7), x = 2, ■ 2/ = 3. . 194 EXAMPLES. 2. Solve i_ + J_ _ 1 - 1. 2a 4y 3z ' . . . (1) 1 _ 1 . a ~ 3y ’ ■ ... (2) a 5y ^ z lo ” • ... (3) Clearing of fractional coefficients, we obtain from (1) ^ + ^ - ^=^3, . . . X y z • • • from (2) 3-i -0, . . . a y ... (5) from (3) _ 3 ^ _ 3, X y z ... (6) Choose z as the first quantity to be elimiuated (Note 1). Multiply (4) by 15 and add the result to (6) ; thus 1 = 77. re y Divide by 7, = 11 (71 re y Multiply (5) by 6, — — - — 0. a- y X X = 3, from (5) y = 1, from (4) z = 2. 3. Solve 5x — 3y — z = 6, (1) 13a - 7y + 3z = 14, (2) 7x — 4y = 8 (3) Multiply (1) by 3 and add the result to (2), 28a - 16y = 32. Divide by 4, 7a — 4y =: 8. Thus vs’e see that the combination of equations (1) and (2) leads to an equation which is identical with (3) ; and so to find a and y, we have but a single equation, ~x — 4y = 8, EXAMPLES. 195 with two unknown quantities, which is not sufficient to determine the definite value of either (Art. 93). The anomaly here arises from the fact that one of these three equations is deducible from the others ; in other words, that the three equations are not independent (Art. 93) . Note 3. — Sometimes it is convenient to use the following rule: Express the values of two of the unknown quantities from two of the equations in terms of the third unknown quantity, and substitute these values in the third equation. From this, the third unknown quantity can he found, and then the other two ; thus 4. Solve 3a; + 4y — 16z == 0, (1) bx — 8y + 102 = 0, (2) 2a; + 6y -f- 7z — 52 (3) Multiply (1) by 2 and add to (2) ; thus 11a; — 22z = 0. .-. x = 2z. Multiply (1) by 5, and (2) by 3, and subtract; thus 44y — IIO2 = 0. .-. y — Substitute these values of x and y in (3) ; thus 4z + 15z 4-72! = 52. .-. 2! =2, I and a; = 4, 1 y = 5. J Note 4. — The rule in Note 3 is especially convenient when all of the unknown quantities occur in only one equation; thus 5. Solve X y -\- z = a b c, . . . .(1) X — y — b — a, (2) X — z = c — a (3) . . (4) • . ( 5 ) From (2) we have • From (3) we have y = X a — b. . 2: = a; 4- a — c. . . 196 PROBLEMS LEADING TO SIMULTANEOUS EQUATIONS. Substitute these values of y aud z in (1), x-{-x-\-a — h-{-x-{-a — c = a-\-h-\-c. from (4) from (5) 3a; = — a + 26 + 2c. X = ^(a b -\- c) — a, 1 y = K« + 6 + C) — 6, 1 z = |(a + 6 + c) — c. J Solve the following equations : ,6. 'ix 2>y — 2z — 16, 2a; + 5i/ 4- 3z = 39, 5a; — y bz = 31. 7. 2a; + 3?/ + 4z = 16, 3x- + 2y — bz — 8, bx — 6?/ 4- 3z = 6. 8. .r 4- 2?/ 4- 2z = 11, 2a; 4- 2/4- 2 = 7, 3a; 4- 4^ 4- z = 14. 9. X 4- 3?/ 4- dz = 14, X + 2y + z = 7, 2a; 4- 2 / 4- 2z = 2. 10 . a; .a; .a; y 101. Problems Leading to Simultaneous Equa- tions. — We shall now give some examples of problems which lead to simultaneous equations of tlie first degree with two or more unknown quantities. Manj- of the problems given in Chapter IX. realh^ contain tico or more unknown quantities, but the given relations are there of so simple a nature that it is easy to express all of the unknown quauti- 197 EXAMPLES. ties in terms of one unknown quantity, and thus to require but a single equation. In the problems of the present chapter the relations between the unknown quantities are not so simple, and the solution will give rise to simultaneous equations ; and in all cases the conditions of the problem must be sufficient to furnish as many independent equations as there are unknown quantities to be determined (Art. 100). EXAMPLES. 1. Find two numbers such that the greater exceeds twice the less by 3, and that twice the greater exceeds the less by 27. Let X = the greater number, and y = the less number. Then from the conditions, X — 2y = 3, and 2x — y = 27. Solving these equations, we have x = \7, y = 1. 2. If the numerator of a fraction be increased by 2 and the denominator by 1, it becomes equal to ; and if the numerator and denominator are each diminished by 1, it becomes equal to i : find the fraction. Let X = the numerator, and y = the denominator. Then from the conditions, + 2 _ 5 11 — 8 ’ y + 1 Solving, we have x = 8, y = 15. Hence the fraction is 3. A man and a boy can do in 15 daj’s a piece of work which would be done in 2 days by 7 men and 9 boys : how long would it take one man to do it ? 198 EXAMPLES. Let X = the number of days in which one man would do the whole, and let y — the number of days in which one boy would do the whole. Then - = the part that one man can do in one day, X and - = the part that one boy can do in one day. y Then from the conditions of the question, a man and a boy together do ^'g^th of the work in one day ; hence we have 1 , 1 cr y Also, since 7 men and 9 boys do half the work in a day, we have r- n i + i = i ( 2 ) X y Multiplying (1) by 9, and subtracting (2) from it, we have 2 T5 ( 1 ) 1 — TC- X = 20. Thus one man would do the work in 20 days. 4. A railway train after traveling an hour is detained 24 minutes, after w’hich it proceeds at six-fifths of its former rate, and arrives 15 minutes late. If the detention had taken place 5 miles further on, the train would have arrived 2 minutes later than it did. Find the original rate of the train, and the distance traveled. a’ = the original rate of the train in miles per hour ; y = the number of miles in the whole distance traveled. y — X = the number of miles to be traveled after the detention. ~ ^ = the number of hours in ti’aveliug y — x ^ miles at the original rate, Let and Then and ^ = the number of hours in traveling y — x Gx miles at the increased rate. EXAMPLES. 199 Since the train is detained 24 minutes, and yet arrives only 15 minutes late, it folio vrs that the remainder of the journey is performed in nine minutes less than it would have been if the rate had not been increased ; hence we have y - X o(y - X) n ^ 6 ^ “ If the detention had taken place 5 miles further on, there would have been y — x — 5 miles left to be traveled after the detention ; hence we have y — X — o X Subtract (2) from (1), or and 5(y - a’ - 5) _ , TTr 6a ^0- 5 25 O a 6.0 IjOl 5 •gV- 6a . a = 25, y = 47| • • ( 2 ) 5. There is a number consisting of three digits ; the middle digit is zero, and the sum of the other digits is 11 ; if the digits be reversed, the number so formed exceeds the original number by 495 : find the number. Let X = the digit in the unit’s place, and y = the digit in the hundred’s place. Then, since the digit in the ten’s place is 0, the number will be represented bj^ lOOy + x (Art. 92, Ex. 10) ; hence from the conditions, we have a + y = 11, and 100a + y — (lOOy + x) = 495. Solving, we get a = 8, y = 3 ; hence the number is 308. 6. A sum of money was divided equally among a certain number of persons ; had there been three more, each would have received $1 less, and had there been two less, each would have received $1 more than he did : find the number of persons, and what each received. 200 EXAMPLES. Let X = the number of persons, and y — the number of dollars which each received. Then xy = the number of dollars to be divided, and from the conditions, we have {x + 3) (^ - 1) = xy, and — 2) (?/ + 1) = ^y- Solving, we get x = 12 and y = 5. 7. A train traveled a certain distance at a uniform rate ; had the speed been 6 miles an hour more, the journey would have occupied 4 hours less ; and had the speed been 6 miles an hour less, the journej' would have occupied G hours more : find the distance. Let X — the rate of the train in miles per hour, and y = the time of running the journey in hours. Then xy = the distance traversed, and from the conditions, we have {x + G) (y — 4) = xy, and (.a- — G) (y + G) = xy. Solving, we get x = 30, and y — 24. Hence the distance is 720 miles. 8. A, B, and C can together do a piece of work in 30 days ; A and B can together do it in 32 days ; and B and C can together do it in 120 da 3 'S : find the time in which each alone could do the work. Let X — the number of daj’s in which A could do it, y = the number of da}'s in which B could do it, and z — the number of daj^s in which C could do it. Then we have from the conditions. -+-+-= y z 30 ’ rr y y 2 ■sV’ ITJO' Solving, we get x = 40, y = IGO, z = 480. EXAMPLES. 201 9. Find the fraction which is equal to when its numerator is increased by unity, and is equal to when its denominator is increased by unity. Ans. 10. A certain number of two digits is equal to five times the sum of its digits ; and if nine be added to the number the digits are reversed : find the number. Ans. 45. 11. If 15 lbs. of tea and 17 lbs. of coffee together cost $7.86, and 25 lbs. of tea and 13 lbs. of coffee together cost $10.34, find the price per pound of each. Ans. The tea cost 32 cents, and the coffee cost 18 cents, a lb. 12. If A’s money were increased by $36 he would have three times as much as B ; and if B’s moue}’ were diminished by $5 he would have half as much as A ; find the sum possessed by each. Ans. A has $42, B has $26. 13. Find two numbers such that half the first with a third of the second may make 32, and that a fourth of the first with a fifth of the second may make 18. Ans. 24, 60. 14. A farmer parting with his stock, sells to one 9 horses and 7 cows for $1200 ; and to another, at the same prices, 6 horses and 13 cows for the same sum ; what was the price of each? Ans. $96, $48. 15. Having $45 to give away among a certain number of persons, I find that for a distribution of $3 to each man and $1 to each woman, I shall have $1 too little ; but that, by giving $2.50 to each mau and $1.50 to each woman, I may distribute the sum exactly : how many were there of men and women? Ans. 12, 10. 16. Find three numbers. A, B, C, such that A with half of B, B with a third of C, and C with a fourth of A, may each be 1000. Ans. 640, 720, 840. 17. A person spent $1.82 in buying oranges at the rate of 3 for two cents, and apples at 5 cents a dozen ; if he had bought five times as many oranges and a quarter of the number of apples he would have spent $5.30 : how many of each did he buy? Ans. 153, 192. 202 EXAMPLES. EXAMPLES. Solve the following equations : 1. bx — ly = 0, lx by — 74. Ans. x = 1 y = b. 2. bx = ly — 21, 21a: — 9y = lb. x = 1 , y = 8. 3. 6y — bx = 18, 12a; — 9y = 0. x = 6, y = 8. 4. lx -h 4y = 1, 9x + 4y = 3. x = 1, y = —1^. b. X — lly = 1, Illy — 9x = 99. x — 100, y = 9. 6. 8a; — 21y = 5, 6x + 14y = — 26. a:=— 2,y=— 1. 7. 39a: — 8y = 99, 52a; — 15y - 80. x — b, y = 12. 8. 3.a; - - 7y, 12y = 5x — 1. x = —7, y = —3. 9. 93a; + 15y = 123, 15a: -{- 93y = 201. a; = 1, y = 2. a: = ■!, y = -3. 10. ^ + y = l,^_ _ 3 3 , , a; + y , , . a: 11. — 4- a; = lo, — 3 y + y = G. a: = 10, y = 5. 12. 1^ + 2^ = 34, — + ^ = ^+ 12. a; =12.?/ = 12. 6 3 8 4 8 , „ 1 — 3a; , 3y — 1 ^ + y , n 13. • — ;; — + — = 2, y’^ +y=9. x=o,y=t. 1 5 11 14- f-i(2/-2)-i(x-3)=0,.a;-|(y-l)-i(x-2)=0. .,4?is. X = 3f , y = 6-|. 15. £=-2 - tt? = 0, = 0. x=5, y=-2. 3 4 5 7 16. —4-- — 3x — ly — 37, 3a; — 7y= 37. a; = 3,y = — 4. 3 4 17. (a;+l)(y+5) = (.a;+5)(y+l),a;y+.a’+y=(.x'+2)(y+2). ^??s. X = —2, y = —2. 18. a;y — (y — l)(a; - 1) = 6(y — 1), a; — y = 1. ..4?is. X 2-1-, y 14* 7 + a; ^ 9 + y _ 11 + a; + y _ 3 5 7 19 ® = 8, y = 16 EXAMPLES. 203 20. .3a; + .125^ — x — 6,3x ~ .5y = 28 — .25y. Ans. X = 10, y = 8. 21. .08a; — .21?/ = .33, .12a; + .7^ = 3.54. x=12,y — 3. 22. ^ - i = 2, — + - = 10. X y X y 23. - + - = 7,- - - = 11. X y ^ y 24. a; + - = I, 3a; - - = -\6-. y y 25. 2x — 3, 8a; + — = -6. y x = 2^,y= 2f. X = l-l, y - —10. X = 3, y — 0. — 1 „ _ _ 3 — 21 y — 26. a; — o 0 , + •'^ 1 ^ + 1 ^ 0 . 6 4 27. - + ^ ~ 2, bx — ay = 0. a b Ans. X = i, y — 12. X = a, y = b. 28. a{x + y) + b{x — y) = l, a(x — y) + b(x + y) == 1. A71S. X = 1 y = 0. a -f“ b 29. a; + y = a 4- 5, ax ~ by + — b~ = 0. Ans. X — 2b — a, y = 2a — b. 30. {a-{-b)x -|- (a— 6)y = 2ac, {b-\-c)x + (6— c)y = 25c. Ans. X — y — c. 31. a; + 2y — 3z = 6, 2a; + 4y — 7z = 9, 3a; — y — 5z = 8. 32. 2a; — y + z = 4, ox -f" y “f“ 3z = 5, 2a; — 3y + 4z = 20. 33. a; + 4y + 3z = 17, 3a; -f- 3y -f~ z = 16, 2a; + 2y + z — 11. X = 8-f, y = 31 , [z = 3. f X ■ - 1 , \ y — —2, [ z = 4. f a; = 2, \y= 3, = 1. 204 EXAMPLES. 34. 2a? 4- 3?/ + 4z = 20, 3a; + 4^ + 52 = 26, 3a; 4- 5^ + 62 = 31. Ans. ( I a; = 1 . 2 . 3. 35. a;— ^=6, ?/— -=8, 2— -=10. a;=8, ?/ = 10, 2=14. 5 7 2 a , h , c „ a , b c ,2a b c 36. - 4 I-- = 3,-4 =1, X y z X y z x y z 0 . 37. i + i=l,i + i=:2,i4-- = -^ X y x z y z 4?is. X — a, y = b, z = c. 2_j_1^3 3_2 X y z z y 1 , 1 x=hy^-~ '^1 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 5a; ,42 , - T + I = ^ “1“ 1 ^ _L 1 U + ^ ^ ?i, and a > 0. This hypothesis makes both terms of the fractions (1) and (2) positive ; hence the values of both t and x are positive. That is, the couriers are together after 12 o’clock, aud to the right of P. This interpretation evidently corresponds wdth the supposi- tion made. For if m > n, A travels faster than B, and will therefore be continually gaining on him ; hence at some time after 12 o’clock they must be together and at the right of P. 2. Suppose m < n, and a > 0. This hypothesis makes the numerator in each of the fractions in (1) and (2) positive, aud the denominators 220 PROBLEM OF THE COURIERS. negative ; hence the values of both t and x are negative. Now, since we supposed distances measured to the rigid of P, and time counted after 12 o’clock to be regarded as positive., we conclude, from what we have observed respect- ing negative quantities (Arts. 20, 29, 103), that these values of t and X indicate that, instead of the couriers meeting after 12 o’clock and to the rigid of P, they met before 12 o’clock and to the left of P. This interpretation evidently corresponds with the sup- position made. For, if m < ?i., A travels more slowly- than B, and hence, after 12 o’clock, thej' continually separate. But as A travels more slowl}' than B, and was behind B at 12 o’clock, it follows that, at some time before 12 o’clock and at the left of P, the}' must have been together. 3. Suppose TO = n, and a > 0. This hypothesis makes the numerator of each fraction finite and the denominator zero ; hence, the values of both t and X become oo (Art. 104). That is, the couriers will be together at an infinite distance from P; in other words, they will never be together. This iutei'pretatiou evidently corresponds with the sup- position made. For, if to = n, the couriers travel at the same rate ; and since they were a miles apart at 12 o’clock, they always have been, and always will be separated by the same distance, so that the}' will never meet. 4. Suppose to > n or < n, and a — 0. This hypothesis makes the numerator of each fraction zero, and the denominator finite ; hence the values of t and X become 0 (Art. 104) . That is, the couriers are together at the point P at 12 o’clock, and at no other time and place. This interpretation evident!}" corresponds with the sup- position made. For, if a = 0, the couriers are together at 12 o’clock at the point P; and as m and n are unequal, they travel at dilfereut rates ; hence they can never be together after 12 o’clock, nor could they ever have been together be- fore that time. EXAMPLES. 221 5. Suppose m = ?i, and a = 0. This hypothesis makes both terms of each fraction 0 ; hence the values of both t and x assume the form §. But when an expression takes this form, it may have any value whatever (Art. 104(3)). That is, there is an infinite number of times when the couriers are together. This interpretation evidently corresponds with the sup- position made. For, if m = ?i and a — 0, the couriers were together at 12 o’clock at the point P, and were traveling at the same rate ; hence they are alioays together, both before and after 12 o’clock. EXAMPLES. 1. Given 2x — y = 2, ox — 3y — 3, 3x 2y = 17, 4a: + 3y = 24 ; to find X and y, and to show how many equations are redundant (Art. 102). Ans. x = 3, y — i. 2. The sum of two numbers is 9, and their difference is 25 : find the numbers. Atis. 17, and —8. Interpret the negative result obtained, and modify the question accordingly (Art. 103). 3. A is 50 years old, and B 40 : find the time when A will be twice as old as B. Ans. In —30 years. Interpret the negative result, and modify the question accordingly. x^ — 1 4. Find the value of — ^ when a: = 1. Ans. |. X- + a: — 2 5. Find the value of — when x = a. %a. a? — a? 6. Find the value of — when a: = a. 2. x^ — ax 7. Find the value of ~ when x = a, 3. X- — ax 222 INEQUALITIES. INEQUALITIES. 106. Inequalities. — ■ It is often desirable to compare expressions that are unequal., and to learn which of them is the greater. An Inequality is a statement in Algebraic language that two expressions are unequal. Thus, a > b, is an inequality, showing that a is greater than 6, or that a — b is positive. Also, a < b, is an inequality, showing that a is less than 6, or that a — b is negative. The quantitj' on the left of the sign is called the Jirst member., and that on the right, the second member of the inequality. The form a> b > c, indicates that b is less than a but greater than c. The form ci>b, indicates that a may be either equal to or greater than &, but cannot be less than b. Two inequalities are said to subsist in the saine sense when the first member is the greater or the less in both. Thus, the inequalities a > b, and 5 > 3 ; or a &, and 3 < 8 ; or a < 6, and 7 > 2, are said to subsist in a contraiy sense. Properties of Ineciualities. — (1) An inequality will still subsist in the same sense after the same quantity has been added to or subtracted from each member. INEQUALITIES. 223 For suppose a > b, then n — 6 is positive ; therefore, a + c — (6 + <^) and a — c — (b — c) are positive, since each equals a — b. Therefore a + c > & + c, and a — c> b — c. Hence, any term may be transposed from one member of an inequality to the other, if its sign be changed. (2) If the signs of cdl the terms of an inequality be changed, the sign of inequality must be reversed. For, to change all the signs is equivalent to removing each term of the first member to the second, and each term of the second member to the first- (3) An inequcdity will still subsist in the same sense after each member has been multiplied or divided by the same positive number. For suppose a>b, then ct — & is positive ; therefore, if m is positive m(a — b) or — (ct — b) m is positive ; and therefore 7 a b ma > mb or — . 771 771 It may be shown in like manner that if each member of an inequality be multiplied or divided by the same negative number, the sign of inequality must be reversed. (4) If two or more inequalities subsist in the same sense, the cori'esponding members may be added together, arid the resultmg inequcdity ivill subsist in the same sense. For, if a >b, a' > b', a" > b", ...... then a — b, a' — b', a" — b", are all positive ; therefore their sum a — b + a' — b' + a" — b" + is positive ; hence a a a, l^" (5) If a> 5, a' > b' , a" > b" , and all the quantities are positive, then it is evident that aa'cd' > bb'b" .... 224 EXAMPLES OF INEQUALITIES. (6) If two positive members of an inequality he raised to any y>oiver, the inequality will still subsist in the same sense. For suppose a > b, and let a and b be positive ; then if n is any positive number, it follon’s directly from (5) that a" > EXAMPLES OF INEQUALITIES. 1. Find the limit of x in tlie inequality 0 H — > 8 + 3 4 Clearing of fractions, 60 + 4x > 96 + 2)X. X > 36. 2. If « > 5, prove that a^ + 6“ > 2ab. The square of (a — b) or (b — a) must be positive (Art. 36), and therefore greater than zero. .-. a'^ — 2ab + b” > 0. .”. a- + b- > 2ab. 3. Show that the fraction + «3 + • • • • o>, ^ + 6, + 63 + . . . . &„ least, and < the greatest of the fractious, hi h, 63 h„ all of the denominators ha^dng the same sign. Suppose the fractious . . . . ^ to be in ascend- hi 6,1 &3 b„ inq magnitude, and that all the denominators are positive. Then h„ b. tti = 61 X a., > h„ X > h„ X — 1. and so on. b. EXAMPLES. 225 Adding, aj+a 2 +fl 3 + «„> • • • • ^' 71 ) 7^1 . ftl + «2 + »3 + • • • • an ^ (±l ^1 + ^2 + ^3 + • • ■ • ^1 Similarly it may be shown that a , + Q-2 + + • • • • Cln ^ ^ hi + &2 + &3 + • • . . &„ h„ In like manner the proposition may be proved when all the denominators are negative. Find the limit of x in the following three inequalities : 4. 7x’ — 3 > 32. A?is. x > 0 . 5. 7x — > fa; + 5. x > 2. 6. — + bx — ab >—. x> a. 5 5 7. Show that - + - > 2, unless a = b. b a 8 . Show that + 1 > 71 ^ + n, unless n = 1. EXAMPLES. 1 . Show that the following example, is impossible : "WTiat number is that whose diminished by 5 is equal to the difference between its f and ^ increased by 7 ? Interpret the negative results in the following two ex- amples, and modify the enunciation accordingly. 2. The triple of a certain number dhninislied by 100 is equal to 4 times the number inci'eased by 200 : find the number. Ans. —300. 3. The sura of two numbers is 90, and their difference is 120: find the numbers. Ans. 105, —15. ^3 ^ 4. Find the value of ^ , when a’ - 1 . a ;3 _ 2x^ + 2x - 1 Ans. 3- 2 5 . Find the value of ‘ , when a’ = 1. 5. a; - 1 226 EXAMPLES. 6. Find the value of ^ 5a; + lx 3^ ^-hen x = 3. a? — — 5x — 3 Ans. — — ! — , when X = —1. —3. x^ - 1 ^ Find the value of 8. Find the value of ('^ + 2x ) (x ^ when x = (4x® - 9)(1 + x) Find the limit of x in the following four inequalities : 9. 3x — 5 > 13. ^?is. X > 6. . ^ /X 5x X n 10. > 3. 5 3 3 11. m — iix> p — qx. 12. ax + 56x — bob > a\ X > C> 0. p — m q — n X > a. In the following examples the letters are unequal and positive. 13. Show that — , + h'- or a b 14. Show that cr + 5^ + > ab + ac + be. 15. Show that (a^ + b-)(a* + b*) > (a® + b^)~. 16. If x^=a’^+5^, and y~ = C“ + d-, show that xy > ac + bd. 1 7. Show that abc > (a b — c){a + c — b){b + c — a). 18. Show that o6(a + 5) + 6c (6+c) + ca{c + a) > 6a6c. 19. Show that (a + 6) (6 + c) (c + o) > 8abc. 20. Show that .x^ — 8.x + 22 is never less than 6, what- ever may be the value of x. 21. Show that ^ ^ ^ > the least, and < the greatest b + d +f of the fractious each letter being positive. 6 d f ° ^ INVOLUTION OF POWERS OF MONOMIALS. 227 CHAPTER XIL INVOLUTION AND EVOLUTION. 107. Involution is the process of raising an expression to any required power. Involution is therefore only a particular case of multiplication., in which the factors are equal (Art. 12). It is convenient, however, to give some rules for writing down the power at once. It is evident from the Rule of Signs (Art. 36) that, (1) No even power of any quantity can he negative. (2) Any odd power of a quantity will have the same sign as the quantity itself. Thus, { — aY = (—a) ( — a) = +a^ ( — a)® • ( — a) (—a) (—a) = +a^( — a)* = —a®, { — ay = {—a) {—a) {—a) { — a) = (— a®)( — a) = +a^; and so on. Note. — The square of every expression, whether positive or negative, is positive. 108. Involution of Powers of Monomials. — From the definition, we have, by the rules of multiplication, (a®)®= (a^) (a®) (a®) == + = a®. (— a®)®= ( — a®) ( — n®) =a® + ® = a®. (-3a®)®=(-3a®)(-3a®) = (- 3)®(a®)® = 9a«. Generally, {a”^Y—a™ • a" • a”‘ • a”' .... to n factors _f^m + m + m + m tCrmS = a™". (ab)”'=ab • ab • ah to m factors = {ctaaa .... tom factors) x {hbhh .... tom factors) - a'"6™. Hence (a&)™ = a'"b”', 228 EXAMPLES. and so on for any number of factors. Thus, the m"" power of a product is equal to the joroduct of the powers of its factors. Hence )” = = Hence, to raise any power of a quantity to any other power, we have the following Rule. Baise the numerical coefficient to the required poiver by Arithmetic, multiply the exponent of each factor by the exponent of the required power, and give the proper sign to the result. a. a a . , = -X-X- tom factors b b b _ aaa .... to m factors bbb . ... to m factors _ a™ ~ h’"' Hence, for obtaining anj^ power of a fraction ; Raise both the numerator and denominator to that power, and give the proper sign to the result. EXAMPLES. Show that 1 . {cWy^cdb\ 2 . {-a%Y=-a%\ 3. {a%h^Y = 4. = -32.'r“. 5. {-Sab^y = 729a®6^®. 8 . 9. 10 . a 6 J12gl8- 1 27y^' ^ 27.r^ 125.C® 11 . 4 INVOLUTION OF BINOMIALS. 229 109. Involution of Binomials. — We have already proved by actual multiplication (Art. 41), the two following cases of the involution of binomial expressions : (a + b‘^ . . . . (1) {a — by — — 2tt6 -\- V . . . . (2) If we multiply (1) and (2) by a + 6 and a — b respec- tively, we have (a + by = + Sa‘b -f 3ab^ + bK . . (3) (a - by = a® - 3a^b + 3ab^ - bK . . (4) If we multiply (3) and (4) by a + 6 and a — b respec- tively, we shall have (a + &)^ = a* + 4ct®6 -f- 6a^b^ -j- 4a&® -f b^. {a — by = a* — 4a®6 -b — AaV + b^. By multiplying these two results by a -)- 6 and a — b respectively we should obtain (a + and (a — by \ and by continuing the process we could obtain any required power of (a -|- b) or (a — b). Hence the following Rule. Multiply the binomial by itself, until it has been taken as a factor as many times as there are units in the exponent of the required power. This rule, however, would be very laborious in finding any high power, for instance (a -t- 5)-®. In Chapter XIX. we shall prove a theorem, called the Binomial Theorem, b}’ the aid of which any power of a binomial expression can be obtained without the labor of actual multiplication. Since the above formulm are true for all values of a and b, we can write down the squares and the cubes of any binomial expressions. Thus, 1. (a* - b*)'^ = (aY + 2(a^)(-by + (-b^Y = - 2a^b* + b^. 230 INVOLUTION OF POLYNOMIALS. Show that 2. (2a; + = 4o;^ + \2xy + 9^^. 3. (3a: + byY = 9o;^ + 2>0xy + 2by^. 4. {x — 2?/)^ z= x^ — Qx-y + 12o:^- — Sy^. 5. {2ah — 3c)® = 8a®&® — 3Ga^b~c + 54a&c^ — 27c®. G. (5a® - 35®)® = 125a® - 225a^5® + 135a®6' - 276®. 110. Involution of Polynomials. — We may now apply the formulae of Art. U)9 to obtain the powers of any trinomial or polynomial. Thus from (1) (a + 6 + c)® = [(a + 6) + c]® = (a + 6)® + 2(a + 6)c + c® = a® + 6® + c® + 2ab + 2ac + 26c . (1) In the same way we may prove (a+6+c+d)-=a®+6-+c®+cZ®+2a6+2ac+2ad+26c+26cZ+2c(Z . (2) We observe in both (1) and (2) that the square consists of (1) the sum of the squares of the several terms of the given expressions ; (2) twice the sum of tlie products two and two of the several terms, taken with their proper signs. The same law holds whatever be the number of terms ia the expression to be squared. Hence the following Rule. To find the square of a.ny polynomiaf ivrite the square of each term together with tioice the qyroduct of each term by each of the terms folloiving it. From (3) of Art. 109 we obtain the cube of a trinomial as follows : (a+6+c)3 = [a+(6+c)l® = a®+3a-(6+cH-3a(6+c)®4-(6+c)^ = a®+63-j.c3-f-3a-(6q-c)+36-(a+c)+3c®(a+6)+6a6c . (3) INVOLUTION OF POLYNOMIALS. 231 Hence to find the cube of a triuoinial we have the following Rule. Write the cube of each term., together loith three times the product of the square of each term by the sum of the other two., and six times the product of the three terms. Fonnuljfi (1), (2), and (3) may be used for obtaining the squares and cubes of any polynomial expressions, as ex- plained in Art. 109. Thus, if we require (1 — 2x + 3a;^)^, in formula (1) we put 1 for a, —2x for b, and 3x^ for c, and obtain 1. (l-2a’-t-3a;-)2 = (l)2+(_2a;)2+ {Sx-y+2{l){-2x)+2(l)(Sx‘^)+2{-2x){Sx^) = 1 -1- 4a:'-i- 4a'-i- 1 2a;^ = 1 — 4a ;-|- 1 1 2 a;®+ 9a;^. Similarly by (3) we have 2 . (l — 2x+Sx^)^ = (1)3+ (_2a;)''4- (3a;2) 3+3 (i)2(_2a;+ 3.^2) + 3(-2xy(\ -f-3rc2) +3(3a;2)2(l_2a;) + 6 ( 1 ) (- 2 a:) (5x^) = l-8a;®+27a:3+3(-2.T+3x2) + 12a;2(l+3.T2) + 27x\l-2x)-36x^ = 1 — 6x+21x^— 44x3+63x^— 54x^+27x®. Show that 3. (1 — X -f- x^)^ = 1 — 2x ■+ 3x^ — 2x® +- x^. 4. (1 -f- 3x4- 2x^)2 = 1 4- 6x 4- ISx^ -f 12x3 +. 5 . /£ _ 26 4- -^Y = 4- 46^ 4- — - 2a6 -f ^ - 6c. \2 4/ 4 16 4 6 . (|x2 _ a: 4- f)^ = - y + 3x^ - 3x -+ f. 7. (1 4- 4- = 1 4- 3x 4- 6 x^ 4- 7x3 _|_ + 3^6 _j_ 8. (1 4- X — X^)3 = 1 -f- 3X — 5x3 + 33.5 _ 2;8, 232 EVOLUTION OF MONOMIALS. EVOLUTION. 111. Evolution — Evolution of Monomials. — Evo- lution is the operation of finding any requh'ed root of a number or expression. A root of any quantity is a factor which being multiplied by itself a certain number of times produces the given quantity (Art. 13). Hence Evolution is the inverse of Involution (Art. 107). The symbol which denotes that a square root is to be extracted is \j ; and for other roots the same S 3 ’mbol is used, but with a figure called the index written above to indicate the root (Art. 13). By the Rule of Signs (Art. 36), we see that (1) any even root of a positive quantity may he either positive or negative ; ( 2 ) every odd root of a quantity has the same sign as the quantity ; (3) there can he no even root of a negative quantity. Thus, (l)a X a — a^, and (— o)(— a)= a*; therefore there are tioo roots of o^, uamelj', +a and —a. (2) ( — a) ( — a) ( — a) = —a®; therefore the cube root of —a® is —a. (3) There can be no square root of —or; for if any quantity be multiplied b}' itself, the result is a positive quantity. There can be no even root of a negative quantity, because no quantity raised to an even power can produce a negative result. Even roots are called impossihle roots or imaginary wots. Since the n'* power of oF is a”'" (Art. 108), it follows that the n*’^ root, of a"'" is a”*. Also, the m"‘ power of a product is the product of the m”' powers of its factors (Art. 108) ; hence, conversely, the root of a product is the product of the m'* roots of its factors. Thus, V'ct&c = ^aWh \^c : ’Vah = V« Vh. EVOLUTION OF MONOMIALS. 233 Again, we have (Art. 108) ; therefore, conversely, ”\J . . . . = Hence to extract any root of a monomial, we have the following Rule. Extract the required root of the coefficient by Arithmetic., then divide the e.vponent of every factor in the expression by the index of the root, and give the proper sign to the result. Thus, for example, = a^; ^ —af = —.a;®; \/^ = a;®; /l6o^ = 4a V— = — 2a®6®c^ To obtain any root of a fraction : Find the root of the numerator and denominator, and give the proper sign to the residt. This is the converse of the rule in Art. 108. T. , ,f-27a^ Sa- Forexample,y_ = Note 1. — Since every positive quantity lias two square roots equal in magnitude but opposite in sign, it is customary to prefix the double sign ±, read plus or minus, to a quantity when we wish to indicate that it is either + or — . Thus ^rocess until there is no remainder, or until cdl the terms of the root have been obtained. EXAMPLES. 1. Find the square root of 4x* — 20x^ + S7x^ — 30a: + 9 |2.a;^ — 5a; + 3. 4x* “ 4x- — 5a; - 20a;® + 2,1 x^ - 20a;® + 2bx^ 4x^ - CO + o 1 12a;2 _ 30a; + 9 12a;2 - 30a; + 9 The expression is arranged according to the descending powers of x. The square root of 4x‘^ is 2a;^, and this is placed at the right of the given expression for the first term of the root. By doubling this we obtain 4x^, which is the trial divisor. The second term of the root, —5a;, is obtained by dividing — 20a;®, the first term of the remainder, by 4x^, and this new term has to be annexed both to the root and divisor. Next 236 EXAMPLES. multiply the complete divisor by —bx and subtract the product from the first remainder. We then double the root already found and obtain 4x‘- — lOx for a new trial divisor. Dividing 12cc“, the first term of the remainder, by 4x^, the first term of the divisor, we get 3, which we annex both to the root and divisor. We now multiply the complete divisor by 3 and subtract. There is no remainder, and the root is found. 2. Find the square root of 15a^x^ — Gax^ + a’® — 20a^x^ + a® + 15ciV — 6a®a. Arrange in descending powers of x. .T®— 6c6o;®+ loa^a^— 20a®a®+ 15a^a"— 6ci®x+a® I a®— 3aa’“+3a'^a— a® 2a’®— Sacc" — 6a.a®+loa^a — 6aa®+ 9a^a 4 4 2a’®— Gcrx*— 20a®.a’®+ 1 oa^x- 6a^a^— I8a®a®+ 9a V 2a®— 6aa^+ 6a^a— a® — 2o®.a®+ 6a^a^— 6a®.a+a® — 2a®a®+ 6a^a’^— 6a®.a+a® Note. — All even roots admit of a double sign (Art. 111). Thus the square root of + 2ab + is either a + 6 or — a — 6, as may be verified. In the process of extracting the square root of a- + 2ab + b% we begin by extracting the square root of a-, and this may be either a or —a. If we take the latter, and continue the operation by the rule as before, we shall obtain — a — b. A siniilar remark holds in every other case. Thus, in Ex. 2 the square root of the first term a® is either .x® or — .x®. If we take the latter, and continue the operation as before, we shall obtain — .x® + 3ax^ — 3a-x + a®. Since the fourth power is the square of the square, the fourth root of an expression may be found by extracting the square root of the square root. Similarly the eighth root ma}' be found by three successive extractions of the square root ; and so on. For example, required the fourth root of 16.x^ - 96.x®^ + 2I6xV - 2I6ay + 81yh EXAMPLES. 237 By the rule we find that the square root is 4a;^ — \2xy + ; and the square root of this is 2x — 3y, which is therefore the fourth root of the given expression. 3. Find the square root of 24 + 1 6?/'^ _ ^ _ 32y y X ' Arranging in descending powers of y, we have * 16 y‘^ IQf .y.2 ^ + 24 8x y y ^^-4 + X X - 4 32y + 24 + 16 _ 8 + - a: y n 8x , o 1 — y r Q 8a; , a;^ o 1 — y y‘ Here the second term of the root, —4, is found by the rule as usual, i.e., by dividiug - term, -, is found by dividing 8 by y ^ by and the third X X EXAMPLES. Find the square root of each of the following : 4. 25a;^ — 30a;y + 9y'^. A^is. 5x — 3y. 5. 4x^ - 12a;® + 29a;® - 30a; + 25. 2a;® - 3a; + 5. 6. 1 — 10a; + 27.a;® — 10a;® + a;^. 1 — 5a; + a;®. 7. 4a;®+ 9y®+ 25»®4- 12a;y — 30y2 — 20a;z. 2a; + 3y — 52. 8. 34x®—22x^+ 121.a;®— 374a; + 289. a;®— 11a; +17. * The reason for this arrangement will appear in Chap. XIII. 238 SQUARE ROOT OF ARITHMETIC NUMBERS. 9. 10 . 64x2 32a; + + 2 . 4 a2 X x2 Ans. — + ^ _l_ a _ 2 . X a 113. Square Root of Arithmetic Numbers. — The rule which is given in Arithmetic for extracting the sqnare root of a number is based upon the method explained iu Art. 112 . Since 1 = P, 100 = 10^, 10000 = 100^, 1000000 = 1000^, and so on, it follows that the square root of a number between 1 and 100 is between 1 and 10; the square root of a number between 100 and 10000 is between 10 and 100; the sqnare root of a number between 10000 and 1000000 is between 100 and 1000, and so on. That is, the square root of a number of one or two figures consists of only one figure ; the square root of a number of three or four figures consists of two figures ; the square root of a number of five or six figures consists of three figures ; and so on. Hence the Rule. If a point is placed over every second figure in any number, beginning ivith the units’ place, the number of points will show the number of figures in the square root. Find the square root of 5329. Point the number according to the rule. Thus, it appears that the root consists of two places of figures, i.e., of tens and units. Let a denote the value of the figure iu the tens’ 5329(70 + 3 = 73. place of the root, and b that 4900 in the units’ place. Then a must be the greatest multiple ^ of 10 whose square is less than 5300; this we find to be 70. Subtract a", i.e., the square of 70, from the given number, and the remainder is 429, which must equal (2a + b)b. Divide this remainder by the 429 429 SQUARE ROOT OF ARITHMETIC NUMBERS. 239 trial divisor, 2a, i.e., by 140, and the quotient is 3, which is the value of h. Then the complete divisor, 2a + 6, is 140 4- 3 = 143, and (2a 4- h)h, that is, 143 X 3 or 429 is the number to be subtracted ; and as there is now no remainder, we conclude that 70 4- 3 or 73 is the required square root. In squaring the tens, and also in doubling them, the ciphers are omitted for the sake of brevity, though they are understood. Also the units’ figure is added to the double of the tens bj' merely writing it in the units’ place. The actual operation is usually performed as follows : If the root consists of three places of figures, let a repre- sent the hundreds and b the tens ; then hav- ing obtained a and b as before, let a represent 5329(73 the hundreds and tens as a new value ; and 49 find a new value of b for the units ; and in 143 ^ 429 general, let a represent the part of the root 429 already found. Hence for the extraction of the square root of a number, we have the following Rule. Separate the given number into periods of two figures each, by pointing every second figure, beginning at the units’ place. Find the greatest number ivhose square is contained in the left period, and place it on the right ; this is the first figure of the root ; subtract its square from the first period, and to the remainder bring down the next period for a dividend. Double the root already found for a tried divisor, and see how many times it is contained in the dividend, omitting the last figure, and annex the result to the root and also to the tried divisor. Multiply the divisor thus comp>leted by the figure of the root last obtained, eind subtract the product from the dividend. If there are more periods to be brought down, continue the operation as before, regarding the root already found as one term. 240 SQUARE ROOT OF A DECIMAL. Extract the square root of 132496, and 10246401. 1. 132496(364 9 66)424 396 724)2896 2896 2. 10246401(3201 9 62)124 124 6401)6401 6401 As the trial divisor is an incomplete divisor, it is sometimes found that the product of the complete divisor by the corre- sponding figure of the root exceeds the dividend. In such a case the last root figure must be diminished. Thus, in Ex. 1, after finding the first figure of the root, we are re- quired by the rule to divide 42 by 6 for the next figure of the root, so that apparently 7 is the next figure. On multi- plying however 67 by 7 we obtain a product which is greater than the dividend 424, which shows that 7 is too large, and we accordingly try 6, which is found to be correct. The student will observe in Ex. 2 that, in consequence of the dividend, exclusive of the right hand figure, not contain- ing the trial divisor, 64, we place a cipher in the root and also at the right of the trial divisor 64, making it 640 ; we then bring down the next period and proceed as before. 114. Squai'e Root of a Decimal. — The rule for extracting the square root of a decimal follows from the rule of Art. 113. If any decimal be squared there will be an even number of decimal places in the result; thus (.25)- = .0625, and (.111)^ = .012321. Therefore there cannot be an exact square root of any decimal which has an odd number of decimal places. The square root of 32.49 is one-tenth of the square root of 3249. Also the square root of .0361 is one-hundredth of that of 361. Hence, for the extraction of the square root of a decimal, we have the following SQUARE ROOT OF A DECIMAL. 241 Rcle. Separate the given nvnnher into periods of tioo figures each., by putting a point over every second figure., beginning at the units’ pla.ce and continuing both to the right and to the left of it; then jR’oceed as in the extraction of the square root of in- tegers., and point off as many decimcd places in the result as there are periods in the decimcd part of the proposed number. If there be a final remainder in extracting the square root of an integer, it indicates that the given number has not an exact square root. We may in this case place a decimal point at the end of the given number, and annex any even number of ciphers, and continue the operation to any desired extent. We thus obtain a decimal part to be added to the integral part already found. Also, if a decimal number has no exact square root, we may annex ciphers and obtain decimal figures in the root to an}" desired extent. Find the square root of 12 ; and also of .4 to three deci- mal places. lio6o6o6(3.464 9 64)300 256 686)4400 4116 6924)28400 27696 Note. — We see here in what sense we can he said to approximate to the square root of a number. The square of 3.464 is less than 12, and the square of 3.465 is greater than 12. Also the square of .632 is less than .4, and the square of .633 is greater than .4. No fraction can have a square root unless the numerator and denominator are both square numbers when the fraction is in its low- est terms. But we may approximate to tlie square root of a fraction to any desired extent. Thus, .400000 (.632 36 123)400 369 1262)3100 2524 242 SQUARE ROOT OF A DECIMAL. Let it be required to find the square root of Here (Art. Ill) t A = V 7 y-7 Therefore we find the square root of 5 and also of 7, ap- proximately, and divide the former by the latter. Or, we may reduce the fraction f to a decimal to any required degree of approximation, and obtain the square root of this decimal. Otherwise thus : X / Vo 0 X / X 7 V7 X 7 7 then find the square root of 35 approximate!}’, and divide the result by 7. Either of these last methods is preferable to the first. If the square root of a number consists o/ 2n + 1 figures, when the first n + 1 of these have been obtained by the ordinary method, the remaining n may be obtained by division. Let N represent the given number; a the part of the square root already found, i.e., the first 7i + 1 figures found by the rule, with n ciphers annexed; and z the part of the root which remains to be found. Then = « + -r; N — a‘^ + 2ax + N - 2a 2a ( 1 ) Now A — is the remainder after )i -f- 1 figures of the root, rep- resented by a, have been found; and '2a is the corresponding trial divisor. We see from (1) that A — a- divided by 2a gives x, the rest of the square root required, increased by — 2a /j*2 Now A is a proper fraction, so that by neglecting the remainder 2a arising from the division, we obtain x, the rest of the root. For, x contains n figures by supposition, so that x~ cannot contain more than 2n figures; but a contains 2ii - 1 - 1 figures (the last n of which are ciphers) and thus 2a contains '2n + 1 figures at least; therefore ^ is a proper fraction. From this investigation, by putting n = 1, we see that at least tico of the figures of a square root must have been obtained in order that CUBE ROOT OF A ROLYNOMIAL. 243 the method of division may give the next figure of the square root correctly. “We will apply this method to finding the square root of 290 to five places of decimals. We must obtain the first four figures in the square root by the ordinary method ; and then the remaining three may be found by division. 290 (17.02 1 27) 190 189 3402) 10000 6804 3196 We now divide the remainder 3196, which is W — o?, by twice the root already found, 3404, which is 2a, and obtain the next three figures. Thus, 3404) 31960 (938 30630 13240 10212 30280 27232 3048 Therefore to five places of decimals, ~ 17.02938. In extracting the square root, the student will observe that each remainder brought down is the given expression minus the square of the root already found, and is therefore in the form N — a?. EXAMPLES. Find the square roots of the following numbers ; 1. 15129. 2. 103041. 3. 3080.25. 4. 41.2164. Ans. 123. 321. 55.5. G.42. 0 . 6 . .835396. 1522756. 29376400. 384524.01. Ans. .914, 1234. 5420. 620.1. 115. Cube Root of a Polynomial. — Since the cube of a + 5 is a® + 3a’-5 + 3ci5^ + 5®, the cube root of a® + 3a^5 + 3a6“ + 5® is a + h. We may deduce a general rule for the extraction of the cube root of a poly- 244 CUBE ROOT OF A POLYNOMIAL. nomial by observing in what manner a h may be derived from a® + 3a^6 + 3n6^ + V. Arrange the terms of the cube according to the descending powers of a then the first term is cF, and its cube root is a, which is the first term of the required root. Subtract its cube, a®, from the given expression, and bring down the remainder '&a% + 3a6'^ + IF. Thus, 6, the second term of the root, will be the quotient w'hen 3a'"6, the first term of the remainder, is divided by 3a^, i.e., by three times the square of the first term of the root. Also, since 3cr6 + 3a6^ = (3a^ + 3a& + we add to the trial divisor 2>ah + i/-, i.e., three times the product of the first term of the root by the second, plus the square of the second, and we have the complete divisor 3a^ + 2>ab + ; multiply this complete divisor by i, and subtract the product, Za-b + ^ab~ + 6®, from the remainder, and the operation is completed. The work may be ai-ranged as follows : n® + 3a-?j + 'dab- + &®|a + b 3a® + dab + b - 'da-b + dab- + V 'da'~b + 'dab- + 6® If there were more terms, we should proceed with a + fe as we have done with a ; its cube, a® + 'da'-b + dab'- + 6®, has already been subtracted from the given expression, so we should divide the remainder by tliree times the square of the first term, i.e., by 3 (a + b)'-, for a new term of the root, c say. Then for a new complete divisor we would have 3 (a + &)® + 3 (a + b)c + c® ; and this multiplied by c would give us a new subtrahend ; and so on. Hence the following Rule. Arrange the terms according to the p>oivers of some letter; find the cube root of the first term for the first term of the cube root; and subti’act its cube from the given polynomial. EXAMPLES. 245 Take three times the square of the root already found for a trial divisor ; divide the first term of the remainder by this trial divisor for the second term of the root; annex this second term to the root, and complete the divisor by adding to the trial divisor three times the product of the first and second terms of the root and the square of the second term. Multiply the complete divisor by the second term of the root, and subtract the product from the remainder. If there are other terms remaining, take three times the square of the part of the root already found for a neio trica divisor; and continue the operation until there is no remain- der, or until all the terms of the root have been obtained. EXAMPLES. 1. Fiud the cube root of 8a;® — 2>Qxfi + blxy^ — 27^®. The work may be arranged as follows : 8a;®— 36a;®y+54a;y®— 27y®|2a; — 3y 8a;® 3(2a;)® =12a;® — 3 6a;®y + 54a;y®— 2 7y® 3(2a;)(-3y)= -18.a;y (-3y)®= +9/ 12a:®— 18.ry+9?/® — 36a;®y+54a;y®— 27y® 2. Fiud the cube root of [3 -f-4a;— 2a;^ 27 + 108a;+ 90a;®— 80a;®— 60a;^+48a;®— 8a;® 27 27+36a:+16.x® 108a;+ 90a;®- 80.T® 108.x- +144.1;®+ 64.x® 27 + 72a;+48.T® - 54.+ - 1 44.x® - 60a;^ + 48a;® - 8a:® -18a;®-24x® +4.x-^ 27 + 72x+30.i;®-24a;®+4x* - 54+ - 1 44.+ - 6 O.x^ + 48.x® - 8x® Explanation. — The root is placed above the given expression for convenience. When we have obtained two terms in the root, 3 -f 4x, 246 CUBE ROOT OF ARITBMETIC RUBBERS. we form the seconfl divisor as follows : take 3 times the square of the root already found for the trial divisor, 27 + T2x + 4Sx ^ ; divide —Mx% the first term of the remainder, by 27, the first term of the trial divisor; this gives the third term of the root, —2x^. To complete the divisor we add to the trial divisor 3 times the product of (3 + 4x) and — 2.x'-^, and also the square of —2x\ Now multiply the complete divisor by —2x^ and subtract; there is no remainder and the root is found. Find the cube root of each of the following : 3. a® + 3a^ + 3a + 1. 4. 64a3 - lUcL^h + 108a&- - 2W. 5. X® + 3.r^ + + Ix^ + Ga;'^ + 3a; + 1. G . 1 - G.r + 2 la;2 - 44a;^ + 63a;* - 54a;" + 2 7a;®. Ans. a + 1. 4a — 36. af^ + a; + 1 . 1 — 2x+3a.-^. 116, Cube Root of Arithmetic Numbers. — The rule which is given in Arithmetic for extracting the cube root of a number is based upon the method explained in Art. 115. Since 1 = 1®, 1000 = 10®, 1000000 = 100®, and so on, it follows that the cube root of a number between 1 and 1000 is between 1 and 10 ; the cube root of a number between 1000 and 1000000 is between 10 and 100 ; and so on. That is, the cube root of a number of one or tivo or three figures consists of only one figure ; the cube root of a number of four or five or six figures consists of two figures ; and so on. Hence the Rule. If a point is placed over every third figure in any number, beginning with the units' place, the number of j)oints ivill shoio the member of figures in the cube root. Find the cube root of G14125. Point the number according to the rule. Thus it appears that the root consists of two places of figures, i.e., of tens and units. Let a denote the value of the figure in the tens’ place of the root, and 6 that in tlie units’ place. Then a must be the greatest multiple of 10 whose cube is less than G14000 ; this we find to be 80. Subtract a®, i.e., the cube of 80, from the given number, and the remainder is 102125, which must equal (3a® + 3a6 + 6®) 6. Divide this remainder by the trial divisor, ocr, i.e., by 19200, and the quotient is 5, CUBE ROOT OF ARITHMETIC NUMBERS. 247 which is the value of b. Then adding 3«&, or 1200, and 6^, or 25, to the trial divisor 3a^, or 19200, we obtain the com- plete divisor 20425 ; and multiplying the complete divisor by 5 and subtracting the product 102125, there is no remain- der. Therefore 85 is the required cube root. 614125 |80 -f 5 512000 Sed = 3(80)2 : 19200 102125 Sab — 3(80) (5) = 1200 b^ = (5)2 = 25 20425 102125 In cubing the tens the ciphers are omitted for the sake of brevity, though they are understood. If the root consists of three places of figures, let a repre- sent the hundreds and b the tens, and proceed as before. See Art. 113. Hence for the extraction of the cube root of a number, we have the following Rule. Separate the given number into periods of three figures each by p>ointing every third figure, beginning at the units’ place. Find the greatest number tohose cube is contained in the left period, and place it on the right ; this is the first figure of the root ; subtract its cube from the first period, and to the re- mainder bring doion the next period for a dividend. Take three times the square of the root cdready found for a tried divisor, and see hoio many times it is contained in the dividend, omitting the last tivo figures, and annex the result to the root. Add together, the tried divisor toith tioo ciphers annexed; three times the product of the last figure of the root by the rest, loith one cipher annexed; and the square of the last figure of the root. 248 CUBE ROOT OF A DECIMAL. Multiply the divisor thus completed hy the figure of the root last obtained, and subtract the p>roduct from the dividend. If there are more j^eriods to be brought dozen, the operation must be repeated, regarding the root already found as one term. Extract the cube root of 109215352. 10921.5352(478 3(4)^ 3(4) (7) ( 7 )^ G4 = 4800 45215 = 840 = 49 5689 39823 3(47)^ = 3(47) (8) = (8)^ = 662700 11280 64 5392352 674044 5392.352 After finding tlie first figure of the root we are required by the rule to divide 452 b}’ 48 for the next figure of the root, so that apparently 8 or 9 is the next figure. On trial we find that these numbers are too large ; so we tiy 7, which is found to be correct. As in the case of the square root (Art. 113), we are liable occasionally to try too large a figure, especially at the early stages of the operation. 116a. Cube Root of a Decimal. — If the cube root have an}' number of decimal places, the cube will have three times as many. Hence for the extraction of the cube root of a decimal, we have the following Rule. Separate the given number into periods of three fgures each, by putting a point over every third figure, beginning at the units' place and continuing both to the right and to the left of it; then ptroceed as in the extraction of the cube root of integers, and point ojf as many decimal places in the result as there are periods in the decimal part of the proposed number. CUBE ROOT OF A DECIMAL. 249 If there be a final remainder in extracting the cube root of any number, integral or decimal, it indicates that the number has no exact cube root. We may in this case, as in the extraction of the square root (Art. 114), annex any number of cipliers, and continue the operation to auy desired extent. Extract the cube root of 1481.544 i48i.544 1 11.4 1 300 481 30 1 331 331 36300 150544 1320 16 37636 150544 The cube root is 11.4. If the cube root of a number consists of 2n + 2 figures, vjhen the first n + 2 o/ these have been obtained by the ordinary method, the remaining n may be obtained by division. Let N denote the number; a the part of the cube root already found, i.e., the first n + 2 figures found by the rule, with n cipliers annexed; x the remaining part of the root. Then _ l^iV = a + x; .-. iV = cd -j- 3a^x + 3a:c2 q. g®; N — = a; + ^ 3a’^ a ^ 3a- ( 1 ) Now N — a® is the remainder after n q- 2 figures of the root, represented by a, have been found; and 3a® is the corresponding trial divisor. We see from (1) that JV — a® divided by 3a® gives x, the rest 2*2 ^3 of the cube root requirei], increased by (- — . This latter expres- a 3a® sion is a proper fraction, so that by neglecting the remainder arising from the division, we obtain x, the rest of the root required. This may be shown as follows ; 250 Examples. By supposition, x contains n figures, and a, 2n + 2 figures. X < 10", and a> 10-" + . a;2 lO-^ • • a 10^1’ < *• a;3 103" 1 Also 3a2 < 3 X 10*" + 2 < 3 X 10" + 2 og^ x^ 1 ^ ^ ^ 3 X 10" + 2’ and is therefore a proper fraction. EXAMPLES. Show that 1. (-2a®)" = 16a-®. 2. (-a")®= -a®. 3. (— 3a’5®c)®= — 27a^"5"®c®. 4. ( — 5a^5®c")® = — 125a®5®c"-. 5. (-3a^5-c)" = Sla^W. Find the value of 6. { — ax* -f- hif)-. xl)is. a®n® — 2abx*y^ + 6®j/®. 7. (2a" -t- 35®) ^ 4a® + 12a"6® + 96®. 8. (2a'® - 36®)®. 8a6 - 36a"6® + 54a®6" - 276®. 9. {2x -f- 3)". 16.n" -1- 96.a® + 216.a® + 216a -f 81. 10. (1 + a;)® — (1 — .a; 2(5.a -f- 10.a® + a®). 11. (1 - 3x- + 3.X’'®)®. 1 — 6a + 15a® — 18.r® + 9.c". 12. (2 + 3.T+4.a®)®+(2 -3a + 4a®)®. 2 (4 4- 25a® -1-1 6a"). 13. (1 + 3.n -f 2x^)\ xins. l-|-9.'c-|- 33a® 4- 63.a® 4- 66a" -h 36a® -f- 8a®. 14. (2 -f 3x -f- 4a®)® - (2 - - 3a + 4a®)®. .4»s. 2 (36a -|- 171.f® + 144a®). 15. (1 4- 4a + 6.a® + 4a® -f •a")®. ^Ins. l+8.t;+28.'c--|-56.^®-|-70j;"-f56.r®-|-2S.f®-f8.i-'-ha;® EXAMPLES. 251 Show that 16. V32^ = 2xy. 17. = 2ax^. 18. V-32a;iY5 = -2o;Y. 19. Find the square roots of the following expressions : 20. - 12a;® - 2.r2 + ix + 1. Ans. Sa:^ _ 2a; - 1 21. 16.a;® + 16a;^ — 4a;® — 4a;® + a;^®. 4.r® + 2a;* — .a-® 22. 25a;*— 30aa;®+49a®a;®— 24a®a;+ 16a*. 5a;® — 3a.^• + 4a® 23. X* — 4a;® + 8a; + 4. a;® — 2x — 2 24. a;®+ 4aa;® — 10a®a;® + 4a®a; + a®, a;® + 2aa;® — 2a®a; — a® 25. a;* — 2ax^ + (a® + 26®)a;® — 2ab'-x + 6*. a;® — aa; + 6® 26. 16 - 96a; + 216x® - 216.r® + 81a;*. 4 - 12x + 9a;® 27. 9a;®— 12a;®+ 22a;* 4- a;® + 12a; + 4. 3a;® — 2a;® + 3a; + 2 28. 4x® - 4a;® - 7a;* + 4a;® + 4. 2.a;* - a;® - 2 29. 1 — a;^ — ^-x^y^ + 2.r®?/® + 4.r*^*. 30. ^ + 4a;® + — + - - 2a;® - 4 3 9 3 — ^xy — 2x^y‘ — — za; 4 — 2 3 Find the square roots of 31. 165649. Ans. 407. 32. 384524.01. 621.1. 33. 4981.5364. 70.58. 34. . 243739 , 69.0 .4937. 35. 144168049. 12007. 36. .5687573056. ^ns. .75416 37. 3.25513764. 1.8042 38. 4.54499761. 2.1319 39. 196540602241. 443329 Find the square roots of the following to five decimals : 40. .9. 41. 6.21. 42. .43. Ans. .94868. 2.49198. .65574. 43. .00852. 44. 17. 45. 129. Ans. .09233. 4.12310. 11.35781. 252 EXAMPLES. Find the cube roots of the following expressions : 46. 1728a;®+1728.r^?/® + 576x’^y®+64^®. Ans. 12x^ + 4?/®. 47. a;® — d>ax^ + 5a®.r® — 3a®a; — n®. — ax — a^. 48. 8it’®+48ca;® + 60c^x^ — 80c®a.’® — 90c^a;^ + 108c®x — 27c®. Ans. 2x^ + 4cx — 3c^. 49. 1 _ 9a: + 39a;2 - 99a:® + 15Ga:^ - 144a:® + 64a:®. Ans, 1 — 3a: + 4x®. 50. 27a;® — 27a;® — 18a:® + lla.*® + 6x® — 3.^• — 1. yljis. 3a;® — a; — 1. 51. ® , 6x® , 9a: y6 + 6a + y 52. — + a b _ y® . ^® a; ® ,3 9y X 7 ^ 35® . 6® 5® 5® or a® + 2 - y a 1 I 5 T ^ ‘ • 0 a Find the fourth roots of .53. 1 + 4a: + 6x® + 4a:® + .a;®. Ans. 1 + x. 54. 1 -4a; + 10a;® - 16a;® + 19a:® - IGx-® + 10.r® - 4.^'+x-®. pins. 1 — a: + ar. Fiud the sixth root of 55. 1 + 12a: F 60F® + 160a.-® + 240a;® + 192.x-® + 64.r®. A)is. 1 + 2.r. Fiud the cube roots of 56. 2628072. ^us. 138. 57. 3241792. 148. 58. 60236.288. 39.2. 59. 191.102976. 5.76. 60. .220348864. .4ns. .604. 61. 1371330631. 1111. 62. 20910518875. 2755. « I'c; TEE THEORY OF EXPONENTS — SURDS. 253 CHAPTER XIII. THE THEORY OF EXPONENTS — SURDS. 117. Exponents that are Positive Integers. — Hitherto we have supposed that an exponent was always a positive integer. Thus, in Art. 12, we defined o'” as the product of m factors each equal to a, which would have no meaning unless the exponent was a positive integer. When m and n are positive integers, we have oF= a ■ a ■ a . . . tom factors ; and (F— a ■ a ■ a .. . to n factors. .-. o’”x o"=(n • a - a . . . to m factors) X (o • n • o . . ton factors) = a ■ a ■ a . . . to m+n factors = o'" + " hy definition (Art. 12) (1) Also o’" n" — T! — g • « • ft . . . to m factors a” o • o • o . . . to n factors = a • a ■ a . . . to — ?i factors = ( 2 ) From Art. 108 we have (a’")" = (3) and o’” X 5"* = (o6)’” (4) These four fundamental laws of combining exponents are proved directly from a definition which has meaning only when the exponents are positive and integral. 118. Fractional Exponents. — It is often found con- venient to use fractional and negative exponents, such as o^, o“®, which at present have no intelligible meaning, because we cannot write a 14 times or —5 times as a factor. It is very important that Algebraic symbols should always obey 254 FRACTIONAL EXPONENTS. the same laws ; and to secure this result in the case of exponents, the definition should be extended so as to include fractional and negative values. Now it is found convenient to give such definitions to fractional and negative exponents as will make the relation a" X a" = a’” + " (1) always true., whatever m and n may be. To find the meaning of aK Since (1) is to be true for all values of m and n, we must have 1 1 1 -l. 1 1 a 2 X = cr = a. Thus ai must be such a number that its square is a. But the square root of a is such a number (Art. 13). Therefore ai — ^a ( 2 ) To find the meaning of a^. By (1) ai X a^ X = ai + i + i = a^ = a. Hence ai must be such a number that when taken three times as a factor it produces a ; that is, ai must be equivalent to the cube root of a. ai = 'Va (3) To find the meaning of a?. By (1) ai x ai X ai x ai = a®. .-. a? = .... (4) 1 To find the meaning of a", where n is any positive integer. %( 1 ) a" X a" X a" X . to n factors = a " ' , . . to n terras = a^= a therefore a" must be such that its power is a. ax = ’"'J a (5) m To find the meaning of a", where m and n are any positive integers. NEGATIVE EXPONENTS. 253 By (1) a” X a" X o." X to ?i factors m , m , m , — H 1 r ton terms = a" " " = C6™ ; m therefore a" must be equal to the n*'’ root of a” ; that is, m a" = Va™ (6) ill - Also, a" X ft" X a" X to m factors = a" ; m I therefore a" means also tlie m”' power of a" ; that is, from ( 5 ) m Therefore from (6) and (7), a" = Vft'" = (Vo)” • • • (8) Hence a" means the n'* ?’oof o/ the 7ii‘^ poiver of a, or the m*'' power of the n'* root of a; that is, in a fractional exponent the numerator denotes a power and the denominator a root. Examples, xr = V-'c®, ft^ = \fa^, 4^ = V4® = Vw = 8. 119. Negative Exponents. — (1) To find the ineaning of a\ By (1) of Art. 118, a® x a" = a« + " = a" ; a° = a" -p a" = 1 . . . (1) Hence, any number whose exponent is zero is equal to 1. (See Art. 45). (2) To find the nneaning of a~", where n is any positive number. By (1) of Art. 118, a" X a~" = a"“" = a® = 1 [from (1)]. Hence ft" = and a"" -- — ( 2 ) a ~ " ft" Thus we see that any quantity may be changed from the numerator to the denommator, or froin the denominator to the numerator, of a fraction, if the sign of its exponent be changed. 256 EXAMPLES. Examples. x~^ = = xi = \/x; — i-j = x^ = Vaf-, x^ x-i 1 = a^b^x~^y~^ = xy^ a~'^b~ ^xy^ = 2-k = yP = P = = * <'•'■ "*>■ Otherwise thus . 1 27^ cm 3^ 1 9- (3) To prove that a™ a" = a'"~" for all values of m and n. „m a“ -f- a" = — = a’" x a“" = by the fundamental a" law. Examples, a^ ^ a^ = a^ ® = a~- = — . a A- a o = a 2oa X a^ X 6a i + j — — . 9a ^ X = -|a^ + t-^ + ^-? : 4(;j-l , A. 3a £^2^ = JHL2L£- = ^ y. iy~ X \x" _i 3 y 3 X iC '3 2/^ ■y -- y- Note. — It appears that it is not absolutely necessary to introduce fractional and negative exponents into Algebra, since they merely supply us with a new notation in addition to one we already had. It is simply a convenient notation, Mhich the student will learn to appreciate as he pi'oceeds. EXAMPLES. Express with positive exponents : 1. 2x *a x*a-< 2 . 2x^ X 3.r-^ Vx* 3. 3 4. Va“^ A- TO PROVE THAT (a”‘)’‘ = a”'" IS UNIVERSALLY TRUE. 257 Express with radical signs : 5. ba^x b\/a yjxb^ f). a.-i X 2a~K yjci} 7. X * — 2a ^4/is. 8. 7a-^ X oa~ _y^ 2Va;^' 21 120. To Prove that (a"')" = a™" is Universally True for All Values of m and n. 1. Let n be a •positive integer, and ni have any value. Then from the definition of a positive integral exponent (a"")" = a™ X a“ X a'" x to ?i factors = Cl”* + »i + m+ ton terras = a”'* (1) 2. Let n be a positive fraction vjliere p and q are Q positive integers, and m unrestricted as before. Then (a”)" = (a’")« = V(a"0*’ (Art. 118) = faPP by (1) mp = a® (Art. 118) = • • (2) 3. Let n be negative, and equal to —p, where p is a positive integer, and m unrestricted as before. Then (a™)-‘ = (a”)-^ = ^ (Art. 119) = by (1) (2) = a~^p =. a™” (3) Hence (a™)" = (a")™ = a™" for all values of m and n. 4. Let n = n Then we have (a™)" = (a")'" = a" • (4) 258 TO PROVE THAT («5)" = FOR ANY VALUE OF 71. That is, the 7i‘^ root of the m'* power of a is equal to the mf poioer of the root of a. 5. Let 7)1 — — and n = 1 i X i J (a™)" - (a")”* = a" • ( 5 ) That is, the n"“ root of the m'* root, or the 7n"‘ root of the root of a is equal to the 7'oot of a. Examples. (5^)^ ^ z = b ^. = x^. (Vs)® = (3^)® = 3^ = v'S. Vv/^® = [(27a:®)i]^- = [(27a-®)^]7 = V^. 121. To Prove that (ab)'’ = a"b’’ for Any Value c./ n. — This has already been shown to be true when n is a positive integer (Art. 108). 1 . Let n be a positive fraction lohere p and q o ,•& 9 positive integers. Then p (ab)" = (a5)®. p Now [(«^)'']^ = (ab)P (Art. 120) = a’’b^ (Art. 108) p p = (a«6«)«. p p p .-. (a6)« = a’6" '.) 2. Let n have any negative value, say —r, where 7 is a positive hiteger. Then 1 (ab)" = (ah)~" = (aby 1 a"b" — a~"b' which proves the proposition generally. ( 2 ) EXAMPLES. 259 In this proof the quantities a and h are wholly unrestricted^ and may themselves have exponents. p 1 Let — — Then from ( 1 ) we have q n ^ ^ (aby = a"6". "'fab = ”}/a ■ ”}/b (3) That is, the n‘^ root of the product is equal to the product of the n'* roots. EXAMPLES. 1. == x^y~^ -a- x~^y^ = x^y~^. Express with positive exponents 5. (xy-^y(xY)-<^. 3. 4. Ans. — 2xy-^ /27a;n-| 4 VSa-V dci^x^' f— V'- 16«cL W) X {a~^b~‘‘c Ans. y 6. y/x^x L 7. {ia-^ ^ 9a-2)-A 9. X 10. (a X Vaj Vct~ . 11. ^(a + by X (a + 6)-l 2a + 36* 1 x^. Sax 2 a^. a^ + K x^ a + b. Rem. — Since the laws of the exponents* just proved are universally true, all the ordinary operations of multiplication, division, involution, and evolution are applicable to any expressions which contain frac- tional and negative exponents. * Called the index laws. 2(30 EXAMPLES. The reason for the arrangement in Ex. 3, Art. 112, may now be seen. Thus the descending powers of x are as may be seen (Art. 119) by wu-itiug the terms as follows : /^»3 ,^*1 / j ,0 M — 1 rp — 2 ^ Uy ^ Uy ^ 44 / ^ •••••• 12. Multiply 3x~i + ^ + 2a;t by a’i — 2. Arrange in descending powers of x. X + 2 xi + 3 x~^ xi — 2 a-f + 2a +3 — 2x — 4a*t — 6x~^ xt — -f. 3 — 6.a"J. 13. Divide 3a^?/~^4-a^ — 3.a^y“^— by xi +y~i —2xiy~i . Arrange in descending powers of x. xi — 2xhj~i 4- y~l I a2 — 3.a%~^ + 3xiy~^ — j 1 ^ 11 . 11 x^ — 2x'sy-^ + xty-¥ — x^y f 4- 2x»y~^ — y~^ — .T'3'y“5 4- '2xiy~s — y i Multiply 14. X? 4- 2/^ by .xv — ?/v. 15. .X'* 4- + 1 by + 1- 16. a~i 4- a~^ 4- 1 by a~i — 1. Divide 17. 21.x 4- 4- x^ 4- 1 by 3.x^ 4- !• 18. 15a— 3a^— 2a'J4-8a“^ by 5a^4-4. Find the square root of 19. 9x - 12.xi 4- 10 — 4x-^ 4- a;-h 20. 4.x" 4- 9x~" 4- 28 — 24x~2 — 16.xi .33 Ans» — 2/“- 4 ^^ + 1 + - 1 . — 2 x^ + !• 3a^ — 3a~i 4- 2a~^. 3.vi - 2 4- x-h. 2x5 — 4 4- 3 x"5. SURDS — DEFINITIONS. 261 SURDS (RADICALS). 122. Surds. Definitions. — When the indicated root of a quantity cannot be exactly obtained, it is called an irra- tional qxiantity or a Surd. Thus, \^4, ai, are surds. When the indicated root can be exactly obtained, it is called a rationed quantity. Thus ^9, are rational quantities, though in the form of surds. The order* of a surd is indicated by the index of the root. Thus ^a respectively surds of the third and Jifth orders. The surds of the most common occurrence are those of the second order ; they are sometimes called quadratic surds. Thus V^3, y/a, y are quadratic surds. Surds of the third and fourth orders are called cubic and biquadratic surds respectively. When the same root is required to be taken, the surds are said to be of the same order. Thus, 'V«, and oi are all surds of tlie third order or cubic surds. Surds are said to be like or similar when they are of the same order, or can be reduced to the same order, with the same quantity under the radical sign. Thus, 4^7 and 5V^7 are like or similar surds ; also 5^2 and 3Vl6 are like surds ; 2V^3 and 3\^ are unlike surds. A mixed surd is the product of a rational factor and a surd factor. Thus 4V^, and 3V^7 are mixed surds. When there is no rational factor outside of the radical sign, the surd is said to be entire. Thus yj’l and \1'6 are entire surds. The rules for operating with surds follow from the propo- sitions of the preceding Articles of this Chapter. * Sometimes called degree. 262 TO REDUCE AN ENTIRE TO A MIXED SURD. 123. To Reduce a Rational Quantity to a Surd Form. — It is often desirable to write a rational quantity in the form of a surd. Thus a = SJa^ — ”\[aT\ 3 = y/9 = ^27. In the same way the form of any surd may be altered. Tence the Rule. Any rational quantity may he expressed in the form of a surd of any required order by raising it to the power corre- sponding to the root indicated by the surd, and prefixing the radical sign. Examples. 5 = y^25 = yi25= y/5". (a + 6) = V^(« + b)’^ = V(« + W- 124. To Introduce the Coefficient of a Smd under the Radical Sign. — We have 3v/2 = y/9 X \/2 (Art. 123) = y/9 X 2 [(3) of Art. 121] = \flS. 2 SJ 0 — y^2® X ^ “ Y^IO. x^'2a — X = ^2axi^ — x^. Rule. Redxice the coefficient to the form of the surd and then midtiply the surds together. EXAMPLES. Express as entire surds. 1. \l\J 2 . Ans. ^242. 3. A?is. \/^. 2. Sy/e. 6y/^- V^- 125. To Reduce an Entire to a Mixed Surd.— We have y/^ = y/i6 X 2 = y/Te X \/2 = 4y/2 ; also X Yb — a^y/&. REDUCTION OF SURDS TO EQUIVALENT SURDS. 263 Rule. Resohie the quantity under the radical sign into two factors, one of which is the greatest 2 )erfect poiuer correspond- ing to the root indicated; extract the required root of this factor, and prefix the result as a coefficient to the indicated root of the other. When a surd is so reduced that the smcdlest possible integer is left under the radical sign, it is said to be in its simplest form. Thus, The simplest form of \/l28 = \Z64 x 2 = 8y^2o EXAMPLES. Express in the simplest form : 1. \/288. Ans. 12 ^ 2 . 3. \j2>Qcd. Ans. 6a\/a. 2. 7 V 3 . 4. \l 2 ianK 3a6V^- 126. Reduction of Surds to Equivalent Surds. — To reduce surds of different orders to equivalent surds of the same order. For example, take.y/5 and ^11. y /5 = 5 ^ = bi = --- ^ 125 . y/lT = 11^ = 11^ = = Vl^l- In general, let \/a“ and ^b^ be two surds of different orders. Then we have to change these into equivalent surds wdiose fractional exponents have the same denominator. W e can reduce both surds to the order nq as follows : m mq y/a'” = oF = p m and ybP — b'^ — Thus the equivalent surds of the same order are "ya”*® and Rule. Represent the surds with fractioncd exponents; re- duce these fractions to their least common deyiominator ; then express the resulting fractioncd e.vponents with radical signs, 264 ADDITION AND SUBTRACTION OF SURDS. and reduce the expressions under the radical signs to their simplest forms. Note. — In this way, surds of different orders may be compared. Thus, if we wish to know which is the greater, \/5 or we have only to reduce them to the same order, as above; we see that the former is greater because 12.5 is greater than 121. EXAM PLES. Express as surds of the twelfth order, with positive ex- ponents : 1. 1 X ' i . Ans. ^y^ 1 4. x^. Ans. 7^’^- 2. —1 — 5. y.T®^4. ya® 10 i~ 3. 1 a~* 7^ 6. y«x® X ya“Pt;“®. y/-- Express as surds of the same lowest order : 7. \Ja,y^. 9. y .r®®. 8. y/^, y/a. y^a®, ’^a®. 10. \ab. \ a^b^. 11. Which is the greater y 14 or y^6? <6. 127. Addition and Subtraction of Surds. — Let it be required to find the sum of — V4^8? aud y/oO. Here we have (Art. 125) y/l2 + y/75 — y/48 + y/oO = 2y/3 + 5^3 — 4y^ + 5y 2 = (2 + 5 - 4)y/3 + oy/2 = 3V'3 + 5y/2. Rule. Reduce the surds to their simplest form; then add or subtract the coefficients of similar surds and prefix the residt to the common surd., and indicate the addition or subtraction of unlike surds. Thus, 3\20 + 4y/5 + y/i + y'75 = Gy/o -p 4y/o -p "^y/o -p 5^3 = l0|-y/5 -p oy/3. MULTIPLICATION OF SURDS. 265 EXAMPLES. Find the value of the following ; 1. 3V*45 4- 7y/5 — \/20. Ans. 14\/5. 2. + 5V^ - 8y^^. ^ 7 . 3. V^44 - 5v^r76 + 2y/^. ~12)/n. 4. 2y/3^ - 5y/243 + ^192. -15\/3. 5. 2^^ + sVS- SV2. 6. V^O - + Vl35. 3 y/o. 128. Multiplication of Surds. — (1) TF^en the surds are of the same order. To multiply a by h y/y. _ _ 1 1 Here a^x x ^ [Art. 118, (5)] 1 1 1 = ahx’'y’' = ah(xyY (Art. 121) = ah y«y. (2) When the surds are of different orders. To multiply a 'Sjx by h T^y. _ 1 y Here a '\fx X - asf- X fty" m n = a6x’""'y"“ (Art. 126) 1 = ah{x’^y''Y”- (Art. 121) = ah”''^ af'y" . Rule. When the surds are of the same order., multiply sep- arately the rational factors and the irrational factors. When the surds are of different orders, reduce them to equivalent surds of the same order, and proceed as before. Thus, 3V^2 X 7y/6 = 2lV^12 = 42y/3. 5 V 2 X 2y/5 = 5V^ X 2V^ = 10 V^. A compound surd is an e.xpression involving two or more 266 MULTIPLICATION OF SURDS — EXAMPLES. simple surds. Thus 2^a — 3\/^, and V a + yb are compound surds. The multiplication of compound surds is performed like the multiplication of compound Algebraic expressions. Multiply 2y/a* — 5 by 3y^a;. The product = 3y/x(2y^ — 5) = 6a: — lo^x. Note. — To multiply a surd of the second order by itself is simply to remove the radical sign; therefore x = x. Multiply 6y/3 — 5y^2 by 2y^3 3y^2. The product = (6\/3 — 5\/2)(2y/3 + 3y/2) = 36 + 18 V^6 - 10\/6 - 30 = 6 + 8^6. The following case of the multiplication of compound surds deserves careful attention. The product of the sum and difference of any two quadratic surds is a rational quan- tity. Thus (3y/5 + 4y/3) (3y/5 - 4\/3) = (3y'5)'* - (4V^3)- = 45 - 48 = -3. Also (\/a + \/5)(y/a — V&) = — (V^)^ = a — b. A binomial in which one or both of the terms are irra- tional, is called a binomial surd. When two binomial quadratic surds differ only in the sign which connects their terms, they are said to be conjugate. Thus _ _ _ 3y^5 + 4\/3 is conjugate to 3y/5 — 4y/3. Similarly, a — y^a'^ — b'^ is conjugate to a + y/o- — b'-. The product of two conjugate surds is always rational. EXAMPLES. Find the value of 1. 2y/n X y/n. Mas. 14y/6. 2. 3y/8 X y/6. l2y/3. 3. 2y'l5 X 3y/5, 30\/3. :. y/l68xVl47. A?is. 14y/9. . ^3 X V . 1/2 X X Vi X Vi- V TO RATIONALIZE THE DENOMINATOR OF A FRACTION. 267 7 8 9 10 11 12 {fs[x — 5) X 2y/x. Ans. 6x — lOy/x. — y/g) X 2^x. 2x — 2^ ax. (y/7 + 5y^)(2y/7 - 4y/3). - 46. ( 3 y /5 _ 4y/2)(2y/5 + 3y/2). 6 + y/Io. (5 + 3y/2)(5 - 3y/2). 7. (3y/g -H y^x — 9g)(3y^g — ^x — 9g). 18g — x. 129. To Rationalize the Denominator of a Frac- tion. — The process by which surds are removed from the denominator of any fraction is known as rationalizing the denominator. ( 1 ) When the denominator is a monomial. A 2 y /3 v /3 ~ y /3 X \/3 2x9 2 y /3 3 3x9 3 ■ Rule. MiXltiply both terms of the fraction by any factor which ivill render the denominator rational. (2) When the denominator is a binomial quadratic surd. 5- Rationalize the denominator of The expression = b^ \a^ + 6^ + a ^ y/g^ + b‘‘ — a y/g" 4- 6^ + a y/a'^ + — ct = y/AT^ - (g" + 62) - g2 a. Rule. Multiply both numerator and denominator of the fraction by the surd which is conjugate to the denominator. When the denominator of the fraction is rationalized, its numerical value can be more easily found. Thus, the numeri- , /- 2 cal value of fy3 can be found more easily than that of 268 DIVISION OF SURDS. - 29 Given \jo = 2.236068, find the value of — Tv* * i — 2^0 It might seem at first sight that we must subtract twice the square root of o from 7, and divide 29 by the remainder — a troublesome process, as the divisor would have 7 figures. We may avoid much of this labor by rationalizing the de- nominator. Thus, 29 ^ 29(7 -h 2y/5) _ .. 2y/5 49 - 20 = 11.472136. + 2^5 EXAMPLES. Rationalize the denominators of 1 . 2 . 3. 4. V^f- Vi- VI- 2 -f y/5 V/5 - l' Ans. W6. iV6. iVl8. -f- 3y/5 6 . 2ov/ 3 _ 4y/2 ^ ^,is. 5-fy^. 7^3 — o\2 lOy/6 - 2y/7 3\/6 + 2y'7 V7 + V2 _ 9 + 2\JU 8 - \/42. 130. Division of Surds. — Since a ^\jx x b^y = ab ”\.xy (Art. 128), therefore abyxy H- a^x = bVy. Rule. When the surds are of the same order., divide separately the rational factors and the irrational factors. When the surds are of different orders, reduce them to equivalent surds of the same order, and proceed as before. Then the denominator may be rationalized (Art. 129). Thus, 4\/^ ^ 25v/^ = ^ X 25yo6 25 x 2yi4 = fy/A = t\J- 3 X 14 14 X 14 y42 35 BINOMIAL SURDS — IMPORTANT PROPOSITIONS. 269 The only case of division of a compound surd which we shall consider is that in which the divisor is a binomial quadratic surd. AVe may express the division by means of a fraction, and then practically effect the division by ration- alizing the denominator. Thus, Divide \jz -f \/2 by 2\/3 — sji. The quotieut = = (^3 + (2y/3> y/2) , 2\/3 - \J2 (2\/3 - V^2)(2\/3 + \/2) _ 8 -f- 3y/6 ^ 8 + 3y/6 12-2 10 ' EXAMPLES. Find the value of 1. 2iy'384 ^ 8y/98. Ans. 3^3. 2. 5\/¥7 3v/24. 5. 29 -- (11 -f 3V^7). 3. -13v/l25 H- 5 ^. _ ^?is. — y/l3. 4. ey/u H- 2\Ja. \/6. 11 - 3 \!i 2 6. (3v/2 - 1) ^ (3V^2 -f 1). 7. (2y/3 -1- 7\/2) -r- {b\j3 - 4y/2). 8. (2a: — ^xy) h- {2\Jxy - y). 19 - 6y/2 17 2 + ^. y 131. Binomial Surds. Important Propositions. (1) The square root of a rational quantity cannot be partly rational and partly a quadratic surd. If possible, let \Ja Squaring, we have a = h s/c. = If' -f 2b\Jc -f c. y/c = f - c, 2b that is, a surd is equal to a rational quantity, which is impossible. 270 SQUARE ROOT OF A BINOMIAL SURD. (2) In any equation consisting of rational quantities and quadratic surds, the rational parts on each side are equal, and also the irrational parts. X = a -\- ^h, tlieu will x = a, and y — h. For if X is not equal to a, suppose x — a m‘, then a + m + y/y = a + y/6; that is, m \jy = \^b, which is impossible by (1). Hence x = a, and therefore s/y = ^b. Note. — Wlien x + = a + V^, we can conclude that x — a and V^?/ = 0) only when and are really irrational. tVe cannot, for example, from the relation 6 + ^4 = 5 + V^, conclude that 6 = 5 and y/4 = v^. (3) If Va + = Vx + ^y, then \/a — ^b — \[x — Vy. For by squaring the first equation we have a + \/6 = x + y + -isjxy. a = X + y, and y/& = 2\Jxy. Subtracting, a — \Jb = x — 2^ xy + y •, ^a — \/b = y/x — \/y. 132. Square Root of a Binomial Surd. — The square root of a binomial surd, one of whose terms is rational, may sometimes be expressed by a binomial, one or each of lohose terms is a quadratic surd. Let a + \/6 be the given binomial surd. Assume ^a + \/b = \/x + \fy. . . . (1) By (3) of Art. 131, - \/b = )/x - \!y. . . . (2) Multiplying (1) by (2), - & = .x - y (3) Squaring (1) n + V^> = x- + 2\^xy + y. . (4) Therefore by (2) of Art. 131, a — x y (5) SQUARE ROOT OF A BINOMIAL SURD. 271 Hence, from (3) and (5), by addition and subtraction, we have a; g + — 2 h • • ( 6 ) y = y/g^ — h ( 7 ) which substituted for x and y in (1) and (2) will give the values of Vg + \jb and ^ a — Find the square root of 16 + 2y/^. Here a = 16, and \jb = 2y^55. Then g^ - & = 256 - 220 = 36, which in (6) and (7) gives cc = 1(16 + 6) = 11. y == 1(16 - 6) = 5. Hence y/l6 + 2^55 = Vll + ^5. From the values of x and y in (6) and (7), it is clear that each of them is itself a complex surd unless — b is rational; and the expression \Jx s/y will be more compli- cated than S a -f ^b itself. Hence the above method for finding the square root of g y^5 fails entirely unless — b is a square number ; and as this condition is not often satis- fied, the process has no great practical utility. The square root of a binomial surd may often be found by inspection. For we see from (4) and (5) that we have to find two numbers whose sum is g and whose product is b ; and if two rational numbers satisfy these conditions, they can generally be found at once by inspection. Thus 1. Find the square root of 11 -|- 2y/30. We have only to find two numbers whose sum is 11, and whose product is 30 ; and these are evidently 6 and 5. Hence 11 -f- 2y/30 = 6 + 2y/6 X 5 -)- 5 = (y/6 + y^5)^. y^ -t- y/5 == the square root of 11 2y/S0. 272 EQUATIONS INVOLVING SURDS. 2. Find the square root of 53 — 12y/l0. We must write the binomial so that the coefficient of the surd is 2. Thus 53 - 12v/l0 = 53 - 2\/^. The two numbers whose sum is 53 and whose product is 360 are 45 and 8. Hence 53 — = 45 — 2y^45 x 8 + 8 = (\/45 - y/8)2. V^53 - 12V/I0 = V45 - ^8 = 3^5 - 2V^. EXAMPLES. Find the square root of 1. 7 + 2v/l0. 2. 13 + 2sJ^. 3. 5 + 2\Jl. 4. 47 - 4v/^. 5. 15 + 2\/^. Ans. + \J2. V/lO + y/3. \/3 + y/2, 2v/n - \/3. V/8 + \Jl. The cube root of a binomial surd may sometimes be found by a method similar to the one just given for obtaining the square root. But the method is very imperfect, and is of no practical importance. 133. Equations Involving Surds. — Equations some- times occur in which the unknown quautit}' appears under the radical sign. In the solution of such equations, special artifices are often required. We shall here consider only a few of the easier cases, which reduce to simple equations. ’These can generally be solved b}’ the following Rule. Transpose to one member of the equation a single radical term so it will stand by itself; then on raising each member to a power of the same degree as the radical, it tcill disappear. If there are still radioed terms remaining, repeat the process till all are removed. EXAMPLES. 273 EXAMPLES. 1. Solve 2\/x — \j4:X — 11 = Transposing, 2\jx — 1 = Squaring, 4a; — A.\Jx + 1 = Transposing and dividing by — 4, = 2. Solve ^x — \Jl — X + V^a; = Transposing, yx — — x = Squaring, x — y/l — a; = Canceling x and squaring, 1 — a; = Transposing and squaring, 25a‘^ 1 . Sj4.x - 11 . 4a; — 11. 3. a: = 9. 1 . 1 - V®. 1 — 2\jx + a;. 1 — 4y/a; + 4a;. 16a;. Dividing by 25a;, x = When radicals appear in a fractional form, the equation should be first cleared of fractions in the usual way before performing the involution. 3. Solve ^ Z\jx \jx Q Clearing of fractions 6a; + 25\/x — 66 = 6a: + 3\/®. 22\/x = 66. .•. a; = 9. Solve the following equations. 4. CO II ‘O 1 Ayis. 14. 5. II 1 33. 6. \Jbx — 1 = 2^x + 3. 13. 7. 13 — \Jbx — 4 = 7. 44. 8. 2\/3 - lx - 2,sj8x — 12 = 0. 6 ■S’* A + V3 + = 2. 9. 6 . 274 EXAMPLES. EXAMPLES. 1. Multiply a~* by a^. Ans. a~^. 2. Multiply 3a^6^ by 4a^6^. Ua^bi. 3. Divide x^ by x*. x'f^. 4. Divide a~^x~^ by a“®. ax~K Find the numerical values of 5. 16“i Ans. 8. 4“i Ans. 6. 27i 81. 9. 16~i 1 4* 7. 8i. 4. 1*5- (t5t) 25. Express with positive exponents 11. + V^- 12. + \/A- ~ 1 -t- -t- — -1 13. 4- + 3 /- ~ \a Alls, + a^y. £ . 1 , a;^ ^ + — + X- X X -1\5 14. (.X -h yxY + y-‘}- + 1 X . x'^a~^ x~Wa/ 17 18. x'^a~^ 9« + 1 4- + 1 Express with radical signs and positive exponents : a® 19. 2a 4x- a ^ 3a a; ^ 1 ^HS. ^ 4- y/a 2 3 X __ 2 x 20. X a* 4- a~'s -i- a a“ yxr + v^- EXAMPLES. 275 21. a%~'^ ■— a %. Ans. , Va^ b b SJa^' 22 . a-^b~^ + 3a^b~^. Multiply 23. 1 + a;i + by 1 — a;^. 24. a;+ — a;^ + a;^ — £C~i by a:^ + x‘^. 25. af + a;5 + 1 by x~”‘ + x~^ + 1. Ans. af + 2a;5 + 3 + 2a:”? + a:”'', 26. 1 — 2ya: — 2a:? by 1 — \/a:. 1 — a;? — 2a:? + 2a:?. 28. 16a”® + 6a“^ + 5a ^ — 6 by 2a ^ — 1. Ans. 8a” ^ + 7a” ^ + 6. 29. 21a®^ + 20 - 27a^ - 26a®^ by 3a^ - 5. Ans. la“^ + 3a* — 4. 30. 8c”" — 8c” 4 - 5c®” — 3c”®” by 5c” — 3c”". Ans. c*“ — 1 + c”^. 31. 1 — y/a — 2a + 2a^ by 1 — a?. 1 — 2a — 2a?. 32. a:? — xy^ + a:?y — y? by a:? — y?. a: + y. 33. a? + 6? — c? + 2a?6? by a? + 6? + c?. a? + 5? — c?. Find the values of 35. (a?a;”^ + a ?a:)®. ax ® + 3a?a: ^+3a ?a: + a”^a;®. Ans. 4a? — 8a? — 5 + 10a ? + 3a ?. Divide Ans. 1 + (1 — x^)i. 36. (la? - a”?) 2. nr, a? — 8a?6 ■Ja? — I + a ?. a? (a? — 26?). ■ at + 2 V«6 + 46^ 1 . 276 EXAMPLES. Find the square root of 39. — 12o;ct“^ + 25 — 24cc~^a + 16x’“^a^. Ans. 2m“^ — 3 + 4x~^«. 40. — 4a;o + Ax + 2a’^ — 4x^ + x^. x-^ — 2x^ + x^. 41. 4a — 12a?6^ + 96? + 16a?c? - 246?c? + 16c?. Ans. 2a? — 36? + 4c?. Express as entire surds 42. Ans. ^bb. 2c V 9a"6 ^ ■ zhllx'^ 3 [Z 43. — < 3a; 45 ■ «(/- V ce- x^\ ,2n + 1 .<4as. \a-b~. Express in the simplest form : 46. 3V^1M and 2sjl^. 47. V-108o;y. 48. \Ja^ + 2a% + a6'^. Ans. 15y/6 and 24y5. — 3xy y 4.r. (a + 6)Va. 49. ySx*y — 24.a;y + 2ix-y^ — 8.xy*. 2(x — y)\xy. 50. yWs, y/l250, V3^. 4y/3, 5V^’6V3. Express as surds of the same lowest order : Ans. V cPx'‘ 51. ^ax'-, 52. y/5, Vn, Vl3. 53 . ys, ys, ye. 54. 3?, 2?, 5?. Find the value of a^V’®, y'a^.v*. 7 «/^ 6 /T V 12 , Vl25, Vl21, Vl3. Vw, Ve- *y6561, y/512, y 15625. 55. \/2A3 + y¥i + yis. 56. 2yTs9 + 3y^ - 7y^. 57. 5y^ - 7yi^ + 4y648. 58. 3yl^ - 7y^ + yi250. 59. 3y2 + 4ys - yM. 60 . 2 yi + 5 y 32 - yio 8 . 61 . 4 y/l^ + 4 y^ - 5 V'Tg 2 . ^HS. 16\/3. ^ 3 ~ / V / • 11 y 3 . 0. 7\2. 9 y 4 - 20\/3 - 13\. 2. EXAMPLES. 277 62. SVT^ X 2y/4^- 63. 3V& X ^Ma. 64. V^2 X X V^- 65. 4v/5 X 2Vii. iJi " VI-.' 67. (2v/3 + 3v/2)". 68. (y/a; + \Jx — l)\Jx — 1. Ans. 240^4. 12 'V648000. 8 ^15125. 2y/2 a 30 + 12y/V .t; — 1 + y/a;'^ — a;. 69. (y/a; + a — y^a; — a)y/a; + a. .r + a — y^a;‘^ — a'^. 70. (y/2 + ys - y/5)(y/2 + y/3 + \/5). 2y/v 5. 71. (Vl2^ + y/l9)(Vi2 - y/i9). 72. (a;2 + x^2 + l)(.a;2 - .^2 + 1). Rationalize the denominator of 2y/3 + 3y^2 5 + 2y/6 ’ 2y/5 a:* 4- 73. 74. 75. 76. 7/. 78. y/5 + ^3 3 + y/5 _ 3 - y/5' .4»s. 3y/2 — 2y/3. 5 - yjd. ■|(7 + 3y/5). 2/^ + yx^ — 2/'^ a;2 y/a;2 + + a y/l + a;- X — y.r'^ — ?/■. yx^ + — 3_2 . X -t" - 3 -a/ — -3 , completing the square, 0;2 + 1„Q3. + (5)2 _ 3_2 + 2^5 = 121. X- + f = ±v-- ••• a; = —I ± ¥ = 2, or -5i Note 3. — We add (J)'^ and not (ir)-, to complete the square. 4. Solve 5.T" + 11a; = 12. Dividing by 5, a;- + Wa; = completing the square, ™2 I 11.V, I /'ll'v2 _ 12 I 121 _ 3.61 X i- --g-X -t- _ Yoo- 0 - 4 - — +19 o . a/ -f- y-Q- — m 1 (j. r,. 11 4- 19 — 4 or .3 X — JLQ- n: y-Q — -g, oi o. Hence, for solving affected quadratic equations, we have the Rule I. Reduce the equation so that the terms involving the unJcnotvn quantity are alone in one member, and the coefficient of xr is +1 ; complete the square by adding to each member of the equation the square of half the coefficient of x; extract the square root of both members, and solve the resulting simqile equation. Note 4. — There are other ways of completing the square of an affected quadratic, which are convenient in special cases, and some of which will be given as we proceed; but the method just explained is the most important, and will solve every case. AFFECTED QUADRATIC EQUATIONS. 285 Instead of going through the process of completing the square in every particular example, it is more convenient to apply the following rule deduced from formula (1) of this Article : Rule II. Reduce the equation to the general form, + qyx = q. Then the value of x is half the coefficient of the first poiver of X with a contrary sign, plus or minus the square root of the second member increased by the square of hcdf the same coefficient. Note 5. — The student should use this method in practice, and become familiar with it, but at the same time be careful that he does not lose sight of the complete method. 5. Solve 36x — 3o;^ = 105. Transposing, changing signs, and dividing by 3, a;2 - \2x = -35. Therefore by Rule II, a- = 6 ± V— 35 + 36 = 1. rr = 6 ± 1 = 7, or 5. 6 . Solve 3cr — 2 _ 5x 2a; — 3 x 4z - 2 . o • 1 . . 3a; — 2 3a; • — 8 Simplifying, — = . ^ 2a; - 3 a; + 4 Clearing of fractions, 3a;^ + 10.T — 8 = — 25a; + 24. Reducing, x‘‘ — Therefore, Rule II, x = ± V— ... a; == 3/- ± 2_9 = io|, or 1. 7. Solve a:^ — 4a; = 1. Rule II, a; = 2 ± Vl + 4 = 5. .-. a; = 2 ± 2.236 = 4.236, or -0.236. These values of x are correct only to three places of decimals, and neither of them will be found to satisfy the equation, exactly. 286 CONDITION FOR EQUAL ROOTS. If the numerical of the irnknowu quantity are not required, it is usual to leave the roots in the form 2 + V^5, and 2 — Vo. 8. Solve x‘‘ — \Qx = —32. Eule II, X = 5 ± V— 32 q- 25 = —7. X = b ± V— 7. But — 7 has no square root, either exact or appi’oximate (Art. Ill) ; so that no real value of x can be found to satisfy the given equation. In such a case the quadratic equation has no real roots ; the roots are said to be imagin- ary or imx)ossible. In the examples hitherto considered, the quadratic equa- tions have had two different roots. Sometimes however, there is only one root. Take, for example, the equation, — lOx -b 25 = 0 ; by extracting the square root we have X — 5 = 0 ; therefore x = 5. It is found convenient how- ever in this and similar cases to say that the quadratic has two equal roots. EXAMPLES. Solve • 9. x^ = X -t- 72. 10. 9x - x" -f 220 = 0. 11. X- — fx = 32. 12. i^x = I - .x^ 13. 5x^ = 8x + 21. 14. + ^ = 3x- -b 2. X - 1 , . 3x' — 8 5x — 2 lo. = . X — 2 X -b 5 Ans. 9, — 8. 20 , - 11 . 137. Condition for Equal Roots. — To find the rela- tion that must exist hetioeen the knoivn quantities of a quadratic equation in order that the two roots may be equal. Take the general equation ax* -b 6x -b c = 0. CONDITION FOR EQUAL ROOTS. 287 Transpose c and divide by a, 9 , L/ H — X = — . Rule II, X = ± 2a /■ c _ b'^ — 4ac a 4a^ 4a^ X = -b ±sj¥ 4ac 2a ( 1 ) Denoting the root corresponding to the positive surd by and that corresponding to the negative surd by a’ 2 , we have — 6 + ^b“^ — 4ac 2a — b — sjb‘^ — 4ac X.J = . ^ 2a Now we see that if — 4ac = 0, these two roots are equal, and each of them is — 2a Hence the relation, 6- — 4ac = 0, is the condition that tin tivo roots of the equation ax^ + b.v + c = 0 may be equal. The two roots are real and unequcd if 6^ — 4ac is i^ositive, i.e., if 6'^ is Algebraically greater than 4ac. The two roots are imaginary if — 4ac is negative, i.e., if b'^ is Algebraically less than 4ac. Hence the two roots of this equation are reed and unequcd, equed, or imaginary, according as b^ is greater than, equal to, or less than 4ac. Note 1. — If either of the roots of a quadratic equation is imaginary, they are both imaginary. By applying these tests, the nature of the roots of any quadratic may be determined without solving the equation. 1. Show that the equation 2x^ — 6« + 7 = 0 cannot be satisfied by auj^ real values of x. Here a = 2, b = —6, c — 7. b" - 4ac = 36 - 4 • 2 • 7 = -20. Hence the roots are imaginary. 288 HINDOO METHOD OF COMPLETING THE SQUARE. Determine the nature of the roots of 2. + 3a; + 1 = 0. Ans. Real and surds. 3. 3a;^ — 4a; — 4 = 0. Rational. 4. If the equation + 2(fc + 2)x + 9^- = 0 has equal roots, find Ti. Ans. A: = 4, or 1. AVhen an equation is in the general form ax^ + bx + c = 0, instead of solving it by either of the rules in Art. 136, we may make use of formula (1) above as follows: 5. Solve ox^ + lla* = 12. Here a — 5, b = 11, c= —12; substituting these values in (1) -11 ± s/{Uy - 4-.5(-12) 10 -11 ± V361 10 -11 ± 19 10 4 o^’ or —3, which agrees with the solution of Ex. 4, (Art. 136). Solve b}" tins method the following : 6. 3.t^ = 15 — 4a;. Ans. .|, -3. 7. 2a;^ + lx = 15. h — 5. 8. 5.t^ + 4 + 21.a; = 0. -i, 1 0^' CO II + 1, 10. 35 4- dx — 2x^ = 0. 7, -h Note 2. — Though we can always find the roots of a given quad- ratic equation by substituting in formula (1), yet the student is advised to solve each separate equation either by the method given in Art. 136, and embodied in Rule II, or by one of the two following. 138. Hindoo Method of Completing the Square. — When a quadratic equation appears in the general form ax'^ + bx + c = 0, the first member may be made a complete square, without dividing by the coefficient of x-, thus avoid- ing fractions, by another method (called the Hindoo method), as follows : Transpose c, and multiply by 4a, 4n‘V^ + iabx = — 4oc. HINDOO METHOD OF COMPLETING THE SQUARE. 289 Now since the middle term of any trinomial square is twice the product of the square roots of the other two (Art. 41), the square root of the third term must be equal to the second term divided by twice the square root of the first term. Hence, dividing 4a5.x’ by twice the square root of 4a^x’^, i.e., by 4aa;, and adding the square of the quotient, to both members, the first becomes a perfect square. Thus, 4a'^a;^ + iahx h" — h”- — Aac. Extracting the square root, 2aa; + 6 = ± — 4ac. — 6 ± — Aac .-. a; = , 2 a which are the same values we obtained in (1) of Art. 137. Eule. Reduce the equation to the form ax^ + + c = 0. Mul- tiply it by four times the coefficient of ; add to each member the square of the coefficient of x in the given equation; extract the square root of both members, and solve the resulting simple equation. Note. — This method may be used to advantage when we wish to avoid fractions in completing the square, and it is often preferred in solving literal equations. (See Note 4 of Art. 136.) 1. Solve 2x^ — 5x = 3. Multiply by four times 2, or 8, 16x'" - AOx = 24. Add to each side 5^, or 25, lQx‘^ - 40.r + 25 = 49. Extract the square root, 4x — 5 = ±7. x A 290 SOLVING A QUADRATIC BY FACTORING. Solve liy the Hindoo method the following : 2. 3a- + 5a = 2. Ans. -2. 3. 6a^ - 12 = a. 4. 40 00 II + CO 5, -.5|. 5. aca® — bcx + adx = bd. b 5 d 5 a c 139. Solving a Quadratic by Factoring. — There is still one method of solving a quadratic which is often shorter than either of the methods already given. 1. Consider the equation a;'^ — 2x — 15 = 0. Resolving this into factors (Art. 65), we have (a; — 5) (x 4- 3) = 0. Now it is clear that a product is zero when any one of its factors is zero ; and it is also clear that no product can be zero unless one of the factors is zero. Thus ab is zero if a is zero, or if b is zero ; and, if we know that ab is zero, we know that either a or b must be zero ; and so on for any number of factors. Similarly the product (x — 5)(a; + 3) is zero, when either of the factors, x — 5, a; + 3, is zero, and in no other case. Hence the equation (.a- — 5) (a + 3) = 0, is satisfied if .a — 5 = 0, or if .a + 3 = 0 ; i.e., if .a - 5, or if a = —3, and in no other case. Therefore the roots of the equation are 5, and —3. 2. Solve x~ — 5.a + 6 = 0. Resolving this into factors, we have (,a - 2) (a - 3) = 0. The first member is zero either when a — 2 = 0, or when ,a — 3 = 0 ; and in no other case. Hence the equation is satisfied by a = 2, or 3 ; and by no other values ; thus, 2 and 3 are the roots of the equation. From these examples it appears that when a quadratic equation has been simplified, and has all its terms in the SOLVING A QUADRATIC BY FACTORING. 291 first member, its solution can always be readily obtained if the expression can be resolved into factors. Hence for the solution of such an equation, wm have the following Rule. Reduce the equation to its simplest form, with all its terms in the first member ; then resolve the lohole expression into factors, cmd the values obtained by equating each of these factors separately to zero loill be the required roots. 3. Solve — 4.r = 0. Factoring, we have x{x — 4) = 0. The equation is satisfied if x = 0, or if .i; — 4 = 0, and in no other case. Hence we must have either a; = 0, or a; — 4 = 0. .-. a; = 0, or 4. Note 1. — In this example we might have divided the given equation by x and obtained the simple equation x — 4 = 0, whence X = 4, which is one of the solutions. But the student must be partic- ularly careful to notice that whenever we divide every term of an equation by x, it must not be neglected, since the equation is satisfied by X = 0, whicli is therefore one of the roots. Note 2. — Wlien the factors can be written down by inspection, the student should always solve the example in this way, as he will thus save himself a great deal of unnecessary work. Solve the following by resolution into factors: 4. (fix — l)(3x -j- 1) = 0. Ans. ±-|. 5. x^ — llx = 0. 0, 11. 6. - 3x -f 2 = 0. 1, 2. 7. - 2x = 8. 4, -2. 8. x^ — 2ax 4c(6 = 2bx. 2a, 2b. 9. x^ — 2ax -j- 8x = 16a. 2a, —8. Note 3. — When the student cannot factor the equation readily by inspection, he should solve it by Rule II, Art. 136, or by Art. 138. 292 TO FORM A QUADRATIC WHEN THE ROOTS ARE GIVEN. 140. To Form a Quadratic when the Roots are Given. — We have seen (Ait. 139) that if px q = {x — a) {x — h ) , then a and 1) are the roots of the equation X- + px + q = Q (1) Conversely, if a and b are roots of (1), then x — a and X — h are factors of the expression x~ + px + q, which may be proved as follows : Since a is a root of (1), we have a- + 2 ^a + q = 0 (2) Hence x^ + px + q — x- + px + q — (a^ + pa + ?) = (x — a) {x -\- a + p). a: — a is a factor of x^ + px + q. Hence, if a is a root of (1), a- — a will be a factor of x~ + px + q. Similarly it may be shown that if & is a root of (1), than X — b will be a factor of x^ + px + q. Now x^ px q cannot have more than two factors of the form x — a, for the product of any number of factors of the form x — a must be of the same degree •in x as the number of the factors ; also or + px + q clearly has no factors not containing x. Hence a- + p>x + q = (x — a) (x — b) . . . (3) Performing the multiplication in (3), we have X- + x>x + q = x^ — (a + b)x + ab. Hence we have a + & = —p> ) ^ , ab = q. j That is, m a quadratic equation xcliere the coefficient of xr is unity and all the terms are in the first member., the sum of the roots is equal to the coefficient of x with its sign changed., and the product of the roots is equal to the third term. Thus, dividing the general equation b}’ a, it becomes X- H — X -I — = 0 a a ( 5 ) TO FORM A QUADRATIC WHEN THE ROOTS ARE GIVEN. 293 Adding together the two roots of (1), Art. 137, we have a’j X.2 — ^ a and by multiplication we have _ — 4ac) _ c ,r X.2 — - - — — , 4cr a which confirms the proposition. Hence any quadratic may be expressed in the form X- — (sum of roots) x + product of roots = 0 . (6) By this principle we maj" easily form a quadratic with given roots. Although we cannot in all cases find the roots of a given equation., it is easy to solve the converse problem, namely, the problem of finding an equation which has given roots. These relations are useful in verif 3 ’ing the solution of a quadratic equation. If the roots obtained do not satisfy these relations, we know there is some error in the work. Relations analogous to those above hold good for equations of the third and of higher degrees. But we defer the proof to a subsequent chapter. When we know one root of an equation, we may by division lower the degree of the equation. Thus if a is one root of an equation, we may divide it b}' the factor x — a. Note 1. — In any equation the term which does not contain the unknown quantity is frequently called the absolute term. A quadratic equation cannot have more than two roots. For no other value of x besides a and b can make {x — «) (x — b) in (3) equal to 0, since the product of two factors cannot equal 0 if neither factor is equal to 0. It may therefore be inferred that a cubic equation has three and only three roots ; and that in any equation the number of roots is equal to the degree of the equation. Note 2. — The student must carefully distinguish between a quad- ratic equation and a quadratic expression. Thus, in the quadratic equation A -p -f 5 = 0 , we must suppose x to have one of two 294 EQUATIONS HAVING IMAGINARY ROOTS. definite values, or roots, but when we speak of the quadratic expres- sion px q, without saying that it is to be equal to zero, we may suppose X to have any value we please. EXAMPLES. Form the quadratic equation whose roots are 1 . 2 and 3. Ans. — ox 6 = 0. 2. 3 and —2. — x — 6 = 0. 3. 2 + Vs and 2 — VS. a;^ — 4a; + 1 = 0. 4. 6 and 8 . — 14a; + 48 = 0. 5. 4 and 5. x‘^ — 9x + 20 = 0. 141. Equations Having Imaginary Roots. — It was shown (Art. 137) that when b'^ is less than 4ac, i.e., when 52 c — is less than the two roots are imaginary. Hence, from 4a^ a (5) aud ( 6 ) of Art. 140, the roots are imaginary lolien the square of half their sum is less than their product. Now it is impossible to have two numbers such that the square of half their sum is less than their product, which may be shown as follows : Let a represent any number ; and suppose it to be divided into two parts - + a; aud ^ — x. Then the product is 2 2 2 r - " ’ which is evidently the greatest when x- is the least. But vhen x^ or a; = 0 the parts are each | ; thus the product of two unequcd numbers is less than the square of half their sum. Hence, The square of half the sum of two numbers can never be less than their p>roduct. If then any problem furnishes an equation of the general quadratic form x^ + + (7 = 0 , in which q is positive and greater than the square of we infer that the conditions of EQUATIONS OF HIGHER DEGREE THAN THE SECOND. 295 the problem are incompatible with each other, and hence the problem is impossible. Thus, Let it be required to divide 6 into two parts whose product shall be 10. Let X = one of the parts, then 6 — ce = the other. a;(6 — x) = 10, whence x = 3±V — 1. Thus, the roots are imaginary. Now we know from the preceding proposition, that the number 6 cannot be divided into any two parts whose product will be greater than 9. Hence when we are required to divide 6 into two parts whose product is 10, we are required to solve an impossible problem. Thus, the imaginary root shows that the p>roblem is imptossible. 142. Equations of Higher Degree than the Second. — There are many equations which are not really quadratic, but which may be reduced to the quadratic form, and solved by the methods explained in this Chapter. An equation is in the quadratic form when the unknown quantity is found in two terms., and its exponent in one term is twice as great as in the other. Thus, X* — 9x’^ = —20, (.r^ + + 4(a;^ + x) = 12, aic"" + + c = 0, etc.. are in the quadratic form, and may be solved by either of the preceding rules ; care however should be taken to use the one best adapted to the example considered. 1. Solve X* — 9a:^ = —20. Here we maj^ complete the square and solve by Rule I, Art. 136, or we may write out the value of x‘^ at once by Rule II, Art. 136 as follows : = I ± V- 20 + -V- = f ± i = 5, or 4. X — ±V^, or ±2. Thus there are four roots, ±V^5, ±2. X 4 296 EQUATIONS OF HIGHER DEGREE THAN THE SECOND. Otherwise thus. Transposing and factoring the first member, (a;- — 5) (a;- — 4) = 0. — 5 = 0, giving a: = ±Vo, or a;'^ — 4 = 0, giving x — ±2. 2. Solve aa;-" + hxT + c = 0. Transpose and divide by a, a a Art. 136, Rule II, a:" = ±\/-- + — ^ 2a V a 4a^ _ — 6 ± ^b- — 4ac “ 2a from which x may be found by taking the n"' members. Note 1. — If the student prefers, he may let x’' = y Substituting, the equation becomes a]/- + hy + c = 0. After solving for y, he may replace the value of y. 3. Solve a;® — 6.r® = 16. Art. 136, Rule II, x^ = 3 ±V^ = 3 ± 5 = : .-. .T = 2, or -^2. 4. Solve a;”^ + x~'-< — 6. Solving for x~^, x~^ = — -i- n: \/6 + J = 2, .•. a;-^ = 16, or 81. .•. X = ov 5. Solve Vx' + 12 + + 1- = 6. Solving for Vx“ + 12, t/.v- +12 = — I ± V6 + i = — 4- ± f = .-. X- + 12 = 16, or 81. X- = 4, or 69. = ±2, or ±V'69. _ b- — 4ac ia^ root of both ; then x** = 8, or —4. or —3. = 2, or -3. X EQUATIONS OF HIGHER DEGREE THAN THE SECOND. 297 6. Solve X + '^bx -)- 10 = 8. By transposing x, and squaring, 5a; -j- 10 = 64 — 16a; + x^. x^ — 21x = —54.' Solving, we get x = ± i/- = 18, or 3. If we proceed to verify these values of x by substituting them in the given equation, we shall lind that 3 satisfies the equation, but that 18 does not, while it does satisfy the equation X — \/bx + 10 = 8. Now the reason is this: the equation x^ — 21x = —54, which we obtained from the given equation by transposing and squaring, might have been obtained as well from X ~ sfbx + 10 = 8, since the square root of a quantity may have either the sign + or — prefixed to it; i.e., the resulting equation x^ — 2lx = —54, of which 18 and 3 are the roots, would be obtained, whether the sign of tlie radical be — or — . Hence we see that when an equation has been reduced to a rational form by squaring, we cannot be certain without trial whether the values which are finally obtained for the unknown quantity are roots of the given equation. 7. Solve a;" — 7x + S/x- — 7a; + 18 = 24. Add 18 to both members in order that the equation may be in the quadratic form. x'^ — 7a; + 18 + \Jx^ — 7a; + 18 = 42. Solving, Va;'^ — 7x + 18 = —4 ±^42 + J = -i ± V- = 6, or -7. .*. a;- — 7a; + 18 — 36, or 49. Solving the first quadratic, we obtain a; = 9, or —2. Solving the second quadratic, we obtain x = ^(7 ± Vl73). Only the first two values are roots of the given equation ; the other two are roots of the equation x~ — lx — sjx- — lx + 18 = 24. 298 SOLUTIONS BY FACTORING. 8. Solve — 4x^ — 2x^ + 12x — 16 = 0. We proceed to form a perfect trinomial square vitb the first two terms and a part of the third. The square root of this square is evidently {x‘‘ — 2a;), the square of which is X* — 4a:® + 4a;® ; having added 4a:® to the equation we must now subtract 4a;®. Hence the equation becomes x^ — 4a;® + 4a;® — 6a;® + 12x — 16 = 0, or (a? — 2a:)® — 6(a:® — 2a;) = 16, which is in the quadratic form, and may be solved as those above. Hence a:® — 2a; = 3 ± Vl6 + 9 = 8, or — 2. a; = 1 ± y/8 + 1, or 1 ± y/-2 + 1. a; = 4, or —2, or 1 ± 1. Solve the following : 9. - 13a;® + 36 = 0. 10. .a-® + Va® + 9 = 21. 11. 9v'a;® - 9.x + 28 + 9.a; = a;® + 36. 12. -f- .a;^ = 1056. 13. (a;® - 9)® - 11 (.a-® - 2) = 3. 14. X* — 8a;® + 10a;® + 24.a- + 5 = 0. Ans. ±2, ±3. ±4. 12, -3. 64, (-33)^. ±5. ±2. 5, -1, 2 ± V^. 143. Solutions by Factoring. — By the principles of Art. 139, many equations of a higher degree than the second may be solved, which cannot be reduced to the quadratic form. If an equation can be reduced to the form (x — a)X = 0, in which X represents an expression involving x, we have either ^ n a; — n = 0, or A = 0 ; therefore x = n, is one value of x ; and if we solve the equation X = 0, we shall have the other values of x. Hence whenever we have one factor of an equation, we have at least one root, and by division we may lower the degree of the equation by one (Art. 140) . Thus SOLUTIONS BY FACTORING. 299 1. Solve {x - b){x- - 3x + 2) = 0. Here the first member is zero either when aj — 5 = 0, or when — 3a; + 2 = 0 ; and in no other case. Hence we have a; — 5 = 0, or a;^ — 3a; + 2 = 0. From the first we have a; = 5 ; and the other roots of the equation are those given b}- a;- — 3a; + 2 = 0, that is, {x — 2) (x — 1) = 0. Thus the cubic equation (x — 5) (x^ — 3a; + 2) = 0 has the three roots 5, 2, and 1. The difficulty to be overcome in this method consists in resolving the equation into factors ; and facility in separat- ing expressions into factors can be acquired only by experi- ence. 2. Solve a;® — 1 = 0. Since a;® — 1 = (.a; — l)(a;^ + a; + 1), we have 1) ^ + 1) = 0. .•. .r — 1 = 0, or x~ + .r + 1 = 0, the roots of which are 1, or Hence there are three roots of the equation a;® = 1, one being real and the other two imaginary. Thus there are three numbers whose cubes are equal to 1 ; that is, there are three cube roots of 1 . 3. Solve a; — 1 = 2 -| — yfx 4. “ 2a;® — a;^ — 6a; = 0. 5. “ .T® + — 4a; = 4. 6. “ .T® — 3a; = 2. "■ < t „,2 2 3a; = U. Ans. 4. Oj 2, — 1^. - 1 , 2 , - 2 , - 1 , 2 . -I, 1(1 + vTo). 7. a," 300 PROBLEMS LEADING TO QUADRATIC EQUATIONS. 144. Problems Leading to Quadratic Equations of One Unknown Quantity. — We shall uow give some examples of problems which lead to pure or affected quad- ratic equations of one unknown quantity. In the solution of such problems, the equations are found on the same principles as in problems producing simple equations (Art. Gl). EXAMPLES. 1. Find two numbers such that their sum is 15, and their product is 54. Let X = one of the numbers, then 15 — a* = the other number. Hence from the conditions, we have a(15 — x) = 54, w x^ — 15.r = —54. Solving, we get x — 9, or 6. If we take x = 0 we have 15 — .a = 6 ; and if we take X = 6 we have 15 — a = 9. Thus, whichever value of x we take, we get for the two numbers 6 and 9. Hence, although the equation gives two values of .r, yet there is really only one solution of the problem. 2. A man bu}’s a horse which he sells again for 896 ; he finds that he thus loses one-fourth as much per cent as the horse cost him ; find the price of the horse. Let X = the price of the horse in dollars, x^ then = the man’s loss in dollars. 400 Hence from the conditions, we have Solving, we get x = 240 or 160. That is, the price was either 8240 or 8160, for each of these values satisfies the conditions of the problem. EXAMPLES. 301 3. A train travels 300 miles at a uniform rate ; if the rate had been 5 miles an hour more, the journey would have taken two hours less : find the rate of the train. Let X — the rate the train runs in miles per hour ; then 300 x = the time of running on the first sup- position ; and 300 ~ (x + 5) = the time of running on the second supposition. 300 _ 300 g .r + 5 X Solving, we get x = 25, or —30. Only the positive value of x is admissible, and thus the train runs 25 miles per hour. Note. — In the solutions of problems it often happens that the roots of the equation, which is the Algebraic statement of the relation between the magnitudes of the known and unknown quantities, do not all satisfy the conditions of the problem. The reason of this is that the Algebraic statement is more general than ordinary language ; and the equation, which is a proper representation of the conditions, will also express other conditions. Thus, the roots of the equation are the numbers, whether positive, negative, integral, or fractional, which satisfy that equation ; but in the problem there may be restric- tions on the numbers, expressed or implied, which cannot he retained in the equation. If for instance, one of the roots of an equation is a fraction, it cannot be a solution of a problem which refers to a number of men, for such a number must be integral. Thus 4. Eleven times the number of men in a group is greater by twelve than twice the square of the number : find the number of men in the group. Let X = the number of men ; then we have Ila; = 2x^ -f- 12, or 2x^ — llx = —12. Solving, we get a: = 4, or 1^. Thus, there are 4 men ; the value is plainly inadmissi- ble. 302 EXAMPLES. 5. Eleven times the number of feet in the length of a rod is greater by twelve than twice the square of the number of feet : how long is the rod ? This question leads to the same equation as Ex. 4, only here we cannot reject the fractional result, since the rod may be either 4 feet long or feet long. 6. The square of the number of dollars a man possesses is greater by 600 than ten times the number ; how much has the man ? Let X = the number of dollars the man has. Then x~ = 10a; + 600. Solving, we get x — 30, or —20. Both these values are admissible, since a negative posses- sion is a debt (Art. 20). 7. The sum of the ages of a father and his son is 80 years ; also one-fourth of the product of their ages, in years, exceeds the father’s age by 240 : how old are they? Let X = the father’s age in A^ears ; then 80 — a; =: the son’s age in 3'ears. Hence Ja;(80 — x) = x 240, or x^ — 76.1: = —960. X = 60, or 16. Thus the father is 60 and the son 20 years old. The second solution 16 is not admissible, since it would make the father younger than his son. Note. — The student should examine each root of every equation to see if it satisfies the conditions of the problem, and reject those which do not. 8. A cistern can be filled by two pipes in 33-|- minutes ; if the larger pipe takes 15 minutes less than the smaller to fill the cistern, find in what time it will be filled by each pipe singl3^ A?is. 75 and 60 minutes. 9. A person selling a horse for S72, finds that his loss per cent is one-eighth of the number of dollars that he paid for the horse : what was the cost price? Hus. §80, or §720. EXAMPLES OF QUADRATICS. 303 10. Divide the number 10 into two parts such that their product added to the sum of their squares may make 76. .4?is. 4, 6. 11. Find the number which added to its square root will make 210. Ans. 196. 12. A and B together can do a piece of work in 14f days ; and A alone can do it in 12 days less than B alone : find the time in which A alone can do the work. Ans. 24 da 3 ’S. 13. A company dining together at an inn, find their bill amounts to $35 ; two of them were not allowed to pay, and the rest found that their shares amounted to $2 a man more than if all had paid : find the number of men in the company. Ans. 7. 14. The side of a square is 110 inches long : find the length, and breadth of a rectangle which shall have its perimeter 4 inches longer than that of the square, and its area 4 square inches less than that of the square. Ans. 126, 96. Note. — We will conclude this chapter with the following examples. In solving them care must be taken to select the method best adapted to the example considered. Many of them may be solved by special methods (Arts. 137, 138, 139); but the methods of Art. 136 are the most important, and will solve every example. EXAMPLES OF QUADRATICS. 1. x\J% + =z 1 4- 2 7x^ + 8 _ + 4 _ 2f ” 8x'^ - 11 “ 3 . * + 4. ^ + y = ^ + y/2 — x^ ~ \2 — x" ^ 5. x^ — 5x =: — 6. 6 x" - lOx = -9. 7. x^ + 12x = 13, Ans. ±i. ± 2 . ±i\/3. 2, 3. 1, 9. •*,, -13. 304 EXAMPLES. 8. a:^ + 9a; = 22. 9. a;^ + 2a: = 143. 10. 15x® — 2ax = a^. 11. 21a:^ = 2ax + 3a^ X 3 2x - 7 2x - 1 X — 3 13. — 1 + a: 5 ^ 3 a; + 2 X 15. {x + l)(2a: + 3) = 4x^ - 22. 16. ^ + = 1 _ a; + a;^. 3 2 17. 8x + 11 + - X 68.r 7 18. 3(x — X + 1) 2(x + 1) 1 X — 1 19. X + 1 X — 2 _ 3 X — 1 X + 2 ~ 20. 1 2 _ 3 X — 2 X + 2 21. 3 1 2(x" - ■ 1) 4(x + 1) 22. 5 + 5 X 14 X + 2 X + i 23. 24. 25. 4 5 ^ 12 a; + l x + 2 a: + 3 a; + 1 I X — 1 _ 2x — 1 X 2 X — 2 X— 1 X — 2 . X + ^ _ .^/ x + 3 \ X + 2 X — 2 \x — 3/ Ans. 2, —11. 11, -13. a _a 3’ , a 3‘ 4) t- 13, f. O5 — 5, —2^. 1 , 2 . T2- 1 ■2 ’ -3. 3, 3‘ 3, -4f. 3, —5. 3, — 1^. 3, -If. 4, 0. H, 0 - EXAMPLES. 305 26 ^ ~ ^ ^ ~ 2 _ 2x’ + 13 X -f- 1 X -}— 2 X -f~ 16 2y X -f- 1 I X -f- 2 2x -f- 13 X — 1 X — 2 x + 1 „o 2x — 1 , 3x — 1 ox — 11 zo. + = x+1 x+2 X— 1 Ans. 5, — li ^3 14x — 9 X® — 3 8x — 3 x + 1 I 1 1 L 1 a; _j 1 -j 30. + = 31. 1 1 1 X X y/ix + 2 _ 4 — \/x 4 + y/x y/x 32. a"x^ - 2a®x + - 1 = 0. 33. 4a^.x = (a^ — + x)^o Q . X . cfj X , b 34. — I — = - H a X b X 2f, 0. 3 , - 4. ,1 a ±— . a (a ± by. ±^ab. 35. (3a^ + 6“) (x^ — x + 1) = (36^ + a^) (x^ + x + 1). a + 6 a — b a — b’’ a b — a, —b. Ans. 36. a + 6 + X - + ^ + i- a b X a + c(a + x) a + X _ a + c(a — x) X 38. ® + “ _ ? = 0. a X a 39. y/ci + ^b — (a^ — bi)x = + g) . a — 2cx ’ c(2c + 3) 1 ± y/l — ct^- .. a, —6. (a52)-4 +(a2&)-z 306 EXAMPLES. Form the equation whose roots are 40. 1 ± 5. 41 —4 S. 42. ~ g P + g ^ns. — 2x —24 = 0. 35x" + 13® - 12 = 0. P + q' p — q '• (P^ ~ q^)x^ + ipqx — 4- = 0. 43. 7 ± 2\/5. 44. ±2y/3 - 5. 45. —p ± 2\j2q. x^ + 2px + — 8g = 0. x^ — 14a; 4- 29 = 0. a;2 4- 10a; 4- 13 = 0. Show that the roots of the following equations are real : 46. x^ — 2ax 4- — 5^ — c“ = 0. 47. (a — b + c)a;^ 4- 4(a — b)x + {a — b — c) = 0. For what values of m will the following equations have equal roots? 48. a;^ — 15 — m{2x — 8) = 0. Ans. 3, 5 49. x^ — 2x(l 4- 3to) 4- 7(3 4- 2m) = 0. 2, — EXAMPLES OF EQUATIONS REDUCIBLE TO 51. (pP - xY - 8(.x’2 - x) + 12 0. 3, -1, ±2. 52. (a;2 + a;) (a;^ + a; + i) = 42. 2, -3, ^ ^ . QUADRATICS. 50. a;^ - 5.x2 4-4 = 0. Ans. ±1, ±2. 56. X* 4- 4a^a; = a^. a_ ^ gSl2\j2 — 1 f2 1 4- a;^ (1 4- a;)'* Ans. 1 4- V^3 ± q- 2y/'3) 1 — V^3 ± _ 2y^3. 57 . EXAMPLES. 307 58 . o- ■> 841 , 2/0!“ + -V- 232 1 , . = w Ans. 2, —If, f(-2 ± V/-266). Solve as explained in Art. 143 : 59. 2x^ — x^ = 1. Ans. 1, -1 ± v/-7). 60. — 6x = 9. 8? i(' -3 ± V^-3). 61. 8a;3 + 16x- = 9. -1 ± V/-35). 62. x^ — ^x^ + a; + 2 = 0. 2 ’ i(i i 63. 3x-® + 8x* - 8x‘^ — 3. ± 1, [i (- 11 ± 64. x^ — 4a; — 4 = 0. -1, ±2. 65. x^ + A ( Cl — 1 + ' a — i). + 1 - 0. 1 66. Find a number whose square diminished by 119 is equal to ten times the excess of the number over 8. Ans. 13. 67. A man is five times as old as his son, and the sum of the squares of their ages is equal to 2106 : find their ages. Ans. 45, 9. 68. If a train traveled 5 miles an hour faster it would take one hour less to travel 210 miles : what time does it take? Ans. 7 hours. 69. The sum of the reciprocals of two consecutive numbers is ff : find them. Ans. 7, 8. 70. The perimeter of a rectangular field is 500 yards, and its area is 14400 square yards : find the length of the sides. Ans. 90 and 160 yards. 71. A number of two digits is equal to twice the product of the digits, and the digit in the ten’s place is less by 3 than the digit in the unit’s place : what is the number? Ans. 36. 72. The sum of a certain number and its square root is 42 : what is the number? Ans. 36. 308 EXAMPLES. 73. A rectangular court is ten yards longer than it is broad; its area is 1131 square yards: find its length and breadth. Ans. 39 and 29. 74. One hundi-ed and ten bushels of coal were divided among a certain number of persons ; if each person had received one bushel more he would have received as many bushels as there were persons : find the number of persons. Ans. 11. 75. A cistern can be supplied with water by two pipes ; by one of them it would be filled 6 hours sooner than by the other, and by both together in 4 hours : find the time in which each pipe alone would fill it. Ans. 6, 12. 76. Two messengers A and B were sent at the same time to a place 90 miles distant; the former b}’ riding one mile per hour more than the latter arrived at the end of his iourney one hour before him : find at what rate per hour each traveled. Ans. 10, 9 miles. 77. A person rents a certain number of acres of laud for $280 ; he keeps 8 acres in his own possession, and sublets the remainder at $1 per acre more than he gave, and thus he covers his rent and has $8 over : find the number of acres. Ans. 56. 78. From two places 320 miles apart, two persons A and B set out in order to meet each other. A traveled 8 miles a day more than B ; aud the number of days in which they met was equal to half the number of miles B went in a day : find how far each traveled before they met. A?is. 192, 128. 79. A certain number is formed by the product of three con- secutive numbers, and if it be divided by each of them in turn, the sum of the quotients is 47 : find the number. A)iS. 60. 80. A boat’s crew row 3^ miles down a river and back again in 1 hour and 40 minutes : supposing the river to have a current of 2 miles per hour, find the rate at which the crew would row in still water. Ans. 5 miles per hour. 81. A person rents a certain number of acres of laud for $336 ; he cultivates 4 acres himself, aud letting the rest for EXAMPLES. 309 $2 an acre more than he pays for it, receives for this portion the whole rent, $336 : find the number of acres. Ans. 28 acres. 82. A person bought a certain number of sheep for $140 ; after losing two of them he sold the rest at $2 a head more than he paid for them, and by so doing gained $4 by the transaction : find the number of sheep he bought. Ans. 14. 83. A man sends a lad to the market to buy 12 cents’ worth of oranges ; the lad having eaten a couple, the man pays at the rate of one cent for 15 more than the market price : how many did the man get for his 12 cents? Ans. 18. 84. What are eggs a dozen when two more in a shilling’s worth lowers the price one penny per dozen ? Ans. Ninepence. 85. Two men were employed at different wages, and paid at the end of a certain time ; the first received £4. 16s., and the second, w’ho had worked for 6 days less, received £2. 14s. If the second had worked all the time and the first had omitted 6 days, they would have received the same sum : how many days did each work, and what were the wages of each? Ans. 24 days at 4s., and 18 days at 3s. per day. 86. A man bought a certain quantity of meat for $2.16; if meat were to rise in price one cent per lb. he would get 3 lbs. less for the same sum : how much meat did he buy? Ans. 27 lbs. 87. The price of one kind of sugar per stone of 14 lbs. is Is. 9d. more than that of another kind ; and 8 lbs. less of the first kind can be got for £l than of the second : find the price of each kind per stone. Ans. 8s. 9d., 7s. 88. A person spent a certain sum of money in goods, which he sold again for £24, and gained as much per cent as the goods cost him : find what the goods cost. Ans. £20. 89. A person di'ew a quantity of wine from a full vessel which held 81 gallons, and then filled up the vessel with water ; he then drew from the mixture as much as he before drew of pure wine ; and it was found that 64 gallons of pure wine remained : find how much he drew each time. Ans. 9 gallons. 310 EXAMPLES. 90. A certain company of soldiers can be formed into a solid square ; a battalion consisting of seven such equal companies can be formed into a hollow square, the men being four deep. The hollow square formed by the battalion is sixteen times as large as the solid square formed by one company : find the number of men in the compan}’. Ans. 64. 91. Find that number whose square added to its cube is nine times the next higher number. Ans. 3. 92. A courier proceeds from one place P to another place Q in 14 hours ; a second courier starts at the same time as the first from a place 10 miles behind P, and arrives at Q at the same time as the first courier. The second courier finds that he takes half an hour less than the first to go 20 miles ; find the distance from P to Q. Ans. 70 miles. 93. A vessel can be filled with water by two pipes ; by one of these pipes alone the vessel would be filled 2 hours sooner tlian b}" the other ; also tlie vessel can be filled by both pipes together in 1| hours : find the time which each pipe alone would take to fill the vessel. Ans. 5 and 3 hours. 94. There are three equal vessels, A, B, and C ; the first contains water, the second brandy, and the third brandy and water. If the contents of B and C be put together, it is found that the fraction obtained b}' dividing the quantity of brandy by the quantity of water is nine times as great as if the contents of A and C had been treated in like manner : (iud the proportion of brandy to water in the vessel C. Ans. Equal. 95. A person lends $5000 at a certain rate of interest ; at the end of a year he receives his interest, spends $25 of it, and adds the remainder to his capital ; he then lends his capital at the same rate of interest as before, and at the end of another j'ear finds that he has altogether $5382 : find the rate of iutei’est. A.??s. 4 per cent. SIMULTANEOUS QUADRATIC EQUATIONS. 311 CHAPTER XV. SIMULTANEOUS QUADRATIC EQUATIONS. 145. Simultaneous Quadratic Equations. — We shall now consider some of the most useful methods of solving simultaneous equations, one or more of which may be of a degree higher than the first. It should be remarked that it is, in general, impossible to solve a pair of simultaneous quadratic equations ; for, if we eliminate one of the unknown quantities, the resulting equation will be of the fourth degree with respect to the other unknown quantity, and we cannot, in general, solve an equation of a higher degree than the second. There are several cases however in which a solution of two equations may be effected, when one or both of them are of the second or some higher degree. Various artifices are employed for the solution of such equations, the proper application of which must be learned by experience. 146. Case I. When One of the Equations is of the First Degree. — Tliis case may be solved by the following Rule. From the sim2)Ie equation find the value of one of the unknown quantities in terms of the other, and substitute this value in the other equation. 1. Solve 3.r + 4y = 18 (1) - 3.ry = 2 (2) From (1) we have y — ~ ; (3) and substituting in (2), ^^2 3a;(18 3,'r) _ ^ i 20sr — o4rX + = 8, 29.r" - 54x = 8. or 312 SIMULTANEOUS QUADRATIC EQUATIONS. Solving, we get x = 2, or — and by substituting iu (3), y = 3, or Solve the following ; 2. 3x — 4y = 5, Ans. X = 3, or __137 3x^ — xy — 3,f = 21. y = 1, or „ 38 3. ox - y = 17, X = 4, or 3 5’ xy - 12. y = 3, or - 20. 4. 2x — 5y = 3, X = 4, or _ 25 7 ’ x‘^ + xy = 20. y = 1, or 7JL 3 5 * 5. Ax — oy = 1, X = 4, or _ 48 13’ 2a:'^ — xy + 3y" + 3x — 4y = 47. y = 3, or 4 1 1 3* 147. Case II. Equations of the Form X ± 7=0, and xy = b\ or y- + / - a, and xy = b. 1. Solve a- + y = 15 . . • (1) xy = 36 . • . • (2) Square (1), + '^xy + y- = 225; • • (3) multiply (2) by 4, 4.ry = 144 ; • • • (4) subtract (4) from (3), x^ - 2xy + y- = 81; extract the square root. X - y = ±9. . (5) Combining (5) ’ tvith (1), we have the two cases X + y = 15.) X + y = 15,) X - y = 9.} X - y -9.f from which we have x = 1-2, ( X = 3,| y = 3. i y = 12. i 2. Solve + y' ■ = 25 • (1) xy = 12 • C^) Multiply (2) by 2 ; then by addition and subtraction we have a;- + 2.vy + = 49, a;2 — 2xy + = 1. X + y = ±7, X — y = ±1. SIMULTANEOUS QUADRATIC EQUATIONS. 313 We have now four cases to consider, namely, x + y=l) x + ^j= 7} x + y=-7) x + y^—7) X — y= ij X — ij = — \\ x — tj^ Ij X — ij = —\\ From which the values of x are 4, 3, —3, —4 ; and the corresponding values of y are 3, 4, —4, —3. Thus there are four pairs of values, two of which are given by X = ±4, ?/ = ±3, and the other two by a- = ±3, y = ±4, it being understood that in both cases the upper signs are to be taken together, and the lower signs are to be taken together. These are the simplest forms that occur, but they are specially important, since the solution of a large number of other forms is dependent upon them. Our object, as a rule, is to solve the given equations symmetrically., by finding the values of X + y and x — y, which we can always do as soon as we have obtained the product of the unknown quantities and either their sum or their difference. Any pair of equations of the form X- ± 2)xy + y'2 = (-j) X ± y = b (2) where p is any numerical quantity, can be reduced to one of the forms above considered ; for by squaring (2) and combining with (1), we obtain an equation to find xy •, the solution can then be completed by the aid of equation (2). Thus 3. Solve + xy -[- y^ = 333 (1) ^ y — ^ ( 2 ) Square (2), x^ — 2xy + y- = 9 (3) Subtract (3) from (1), 3xy = 324. .-. xy — 108 (4) Add (1) and (4) and extract square root, X -p y = ±21 (5) From (2) and (5) x = 12, or —9.) y = 9, or -12. ) 314 SIMULTANEOUS QUADRATIC EQUATIONS. 4. Solve i — i = i . . « y 1 + 1-5 Square (1), 1 - — + i = -1- . . xy y^ Subtract (3) from (2), — = A . . xy Add (2) and (4) and take the square root, ( 1 ) ( 2 ) ( 3 ) (1 From (1) aud ( - + - = X y 3 ) ? 1 y ±1 2 or 1 3 ’ or i 3 ' 2 ( 5 ) X — |, or —3, aud ?/ = 3, or Solve the following : 5. X — y — 12, Ans. X — 17, or - 5, xy — 85. 2/ = 5, or -17. 6. X y = 74, X = 53, or •21, xy = 1113. y = 21, or 53. 7. a; + ^ = 84, X — 71, or 13, xy = 923. y = 13, or 71. 8. + y- = 97, rr= 9, or 4, X y = 13. 2/ = d, or 9. 9. X + y = 9, X = 5, or 4 , a;2 + xy + / = Gl. 11 + or 5. 148. Case III. When the Two Equations Con- tain a Common Algebraic Factor. Rule. Divide one equation by the other, and cancel the common factor. SIMULTANEOUS QUADRATIC EQUATIONS. 315 1. Solve xy = 133 (1) a;2 _ / = 95 (2) Divide (2) by (1) and cancel the common factor x y, ••• X = ^-y, (3) and substituting in (1) W- + 2/^ = 133. Solving, we get y = ± 7 ; and by substituting in (3), x = ±12. JTote. — This includes the case where one equation is exactly divisible by the other. 2. Solve ic® -}- _ i^xy (1) a; + 2/ = 12 (2) Divide (1) by (2), x^ — xy + y"^ = ^xy. .-. — ^xy + y^ = 0 (3) Subtract (3) from the square of (2), ^xy = 144. ••• = 16 . (4) Add (3) and (4) and take the square root, X - y = ±4: (5) From (2) and (5) a: = 8, or 4, 2 / = 4, or 8. 3. Solve X* ± x^y^ + y* = 2613 (1) xi^ + xy + = 67 (2) Divide (1) by (2), x‘^ — xy + y'^ = 39 (3) Add (2) and (3), + y^ = 53. Subtract (3) from (2), xy — 14. a; = ± 7, or ±2, 2 / = ± 2, or ±7. 316 SIMULTANEOUS QUADRATIC EQUATIONS. Solve the i following : 4. x" + xy -- = 84, Ans. X = ±7? x" — y""- == 24. y = ±5. 5. x" + xY + y^ ^ 133, X = ±3, or ± 2, x^ + xy + 2 /" = 19. y ±2, or ± 3. 6. x^ + yZ t= 407, =::: 7, or 4, X + y = 11. y = 4, or 7, 7. X — y = 4, X = 11, or — 7, x^ — yZ == 988. y = 7, or -11, 149. Case IV. When the Two Equations are of the Second Degree and Homogeneous. First method. 70 . . . . (1) = . . . ( 2 ) xy- = Hence IO. 7 ;- + \bxy + by“^ = 42.-?:^ + Ixy — ly-\ or 32a:^ — Sxy — 12y'^ — 0. This is a quadratic equation which we may solve, and find tlie value of one unknown quantity in terms of the other. Thus, solving for x, - Lxy = |y2. By Art. 136, Rule II, x | ± or X = y or -\y. 1. Solve 2x^ + 2>xy + 6x^ + xy — 2x^ + 3.xy + Take x = |y, and substitute in either (1) or (2), and we have y~ = 16. y = ±4, and x = ±3. If we substitute the second value of x, which is —hy, we find an inadmissible result. Second method. Examples of this class are conveniently solved by substituting for one of the unknown quantities the SIMULTANEOUS QUADRATIC EQUATIONS. 317 product of the other and a third unknown quantity, called an auxiliary quantity. 2. Solve — Axy + Zx^ =17 (1) _ a;2 _ jg ^2) Put y = vx, and substitute in (1) and (2). Thus x^(2v^ - 4u + 3) = 17. . . a;2( 7)2 _ 1) = 16 . , . . By division, 2v‘^ — 4?; + 3 - 1 _ 17 — rtr- 327)2 _ gq^ + 48 = 17 t)2 - 17; • ( 3 ) • ( 4 ) or 15?;^ — 64 t; = —65. Solving, we obtain v = or J^. Take v = f, and substitute in either (3) or (4). From (4) x\\^- - 1) = 16; .-. a:^ = 9. a: = ±3, and y = vx = ^x = ±5. Again, take v = x^{^^ — 1) = 16 ; .•. x^ = .•. a: = ±-|, and y = vx = ±^. Any pair of equations which are of the second degree and homogeneous.! can be solved by either of these methods, though the second is usually preferred. Solve the following : 3. x^ + 3xy = 28, ^7is. X = ±4, or q: 14, xy + 4y2 = 8. 7/ = ± 1, or ± 4. • 4 . x^ + xy + 2y^ = 74, a; = ±8, or ± 3, 2x^ + 2xy + 7/2 ^ 73. 7/ = q:5, or ± 5. 5. a)2 + xy — 6y^ = +1 II a;2 + Sxy — lOy^ = -- 32. II H- 6. x^ + xy — 6y^ = 21, II H- II 1 4. II If Note. — Many examples of homogeneous equations of the second degree are easily solved by Case 11 or III. Only those examples of this class are to be solved by Case IV that cannot be solved by either Case II or III. 318 SYMMETRICAL EQUATIONS. 150. Case V. When the Two Equations are Symmetrical with respect to x and y. — An expres- sion is said to be symmetrical with respect to two letters when these letters are similcuiy involved, i.e., when they can be interchanged without altering the expression. Thus, the expression a® + a^x + ax^ + x^ is symmetrical with respect to a and x, since if we write x for a, and a for x, we get the same expression. Also x'^ + 2>x^y + is symmet- rical with respect to x and y. Examples of this class may frequently be solved by substituting for the unknown quantities, the sum and differ- ence of two others. 1. Solve -f = 82 ' X — y = 2 . . . Put X = u V, and y — u — v ; (2) becomes {u v) — {u — v) — 2 ; (1) becomes (u + 1)^ (u — 1)^ = 82. .-. 2(t(^ + + 1) = 82 ; or — 40 = 0. Hence, Art. 139, -t- 10) (w“ — 4) = 0. = 4, or —10. ( 1 ) ( 2 ) .•. u — ±2, or ±y/ — 10. Thus X =3,-1, 1 ± \/— 10, y =\, -3, -1 ± \/^. 2. Solve (x? -f- (.x® -|- y®) = 280 . X + y = 4 . • ( 1 ) • ( 2 ) Put X = u V, and y = u — v ; (2) becomes {u -j- r;) -|- (w — v) = 4 ; .-. u = 2. Also -t- = (2 + v)" -b (2 — v)- = 8 -b 2v~, and -b y® = (2 -b v)® -b (2 — vy = 16 -b V2v^. SPECIAL METHODS. 319 Hence (1) becomes (8 + 2u^)(16 + 12u^) = 280, or (4 + (4 + Sv^) = 35. =: -f ± = 1, or V = ±1, or ±y/ — Jj®-. a; = 3, 1, 2 ± y = 1, 3 , 2 :p V-¥- Solve the following : cF II 1 CO and ^5 _ ^5 _ 242. Ans. X = 3, or — 1 ; y = 1, or —3. II 1 and 1 II 00 Ans. X = 4, — 3 ; y = 1 CO 5. X -\- y — 3, and + y^ — 33. Ans. X = 1,2; y = 2, 1. 151. Special Methods. — -The preceding cases will be sufficient as a general explanation of the methods to be employed ; but in some cases special artifices are necessary. One that is often used with advantage consists in consider- ing the swm, difference., product, or quotient, of the two unknown quantities as a single quantity, and first finding its value. Other artifices may also be used with advantage, but familiarity with them can be obtained only by experience. 1. Solve + 4iXy -f- 3.r = 40 — 6y — 4y® . . • (1) 2xy - = d (2) From (1) we have x^ -f- Axy 4y® -f 3.'c -f 6y = 40 ; or {x + 2yY -|- 3(a; -f 2y) — 40 = 0. Consider x 2y &s, a single unknown quantitj’, and find its value from this quadratic. Thus, (Art. 139), [(x + 2y) -|- 8][(x + 2y) - 5] = 0. .-. X -\- 2y = —8, . . . X + '2y ^ 5 ... or • • ( 3 ) . . (4) 320 SPECIAL METHODS. From (2) and (4) we obtain X = 1 , or f ; ?/ = 2, or J. From (2) and (3) we obtain 2 -12 T ylo ^ 2 2. Solve — 6* = 34 — 3?/ fl) ^xy + y = IS + 2x (2) Multiply (2) by 3 and subtract the result from (1), xhj"^ — 9xy + 20 = 0. (xy - 5) (.ry - 4) = 0. xy = 5 . . . . (3) rcy = 4 . . . . (4) From (2) and (3) we obtain a; = 1, or -f, y = 5, or —2. From (2) and (4) we obtain X - — and y = 3 ± y/I?. Solve the following : 3. 4. 5. 6 . a;^ + y = 73 — 3a: — 2xy, y2 -f- a: = 44 — 3y. a;2 4a: _ , „ 2 / y X - y S. + 3xy = 54, xy + 4y- = 115. X* — x^ + 21* — y^ = 84, X- + xY + F = -±9- Ans. X = 4, 16, — 12 ± \/58, y=5, —7, -1 zf a: = 6, y = S, -4. a: = i3, ±36, y = ±5, X = ±3, ±2, y - ±2, ±3. PROBLEMS LEADING TO QUADRATIC EQUATIONS. 321 152. Simultaneous Quadratic Equations with Three Unknown Quantities. 1. Solve + £cz = 27 (1) 2/z + ?/x' 32 (2) zx zy — db (3) Add (1) and (2) and subtract (3) from the sum, 2xy = 24; xy = 12 ... . (4) Subtract (4) from (1), = 15 (5) Subtract (4) from (2), yz = 20 (6) Multiply (4) and (5), x^yz = 180 (7) Divide (7) by (6), ar — 9 .-. aj = ±3. Hence from (4), y = 12 h- (±3) = ±4. And from (5), z = 15 (±3) = ±5. Thus X = ±3, y — ±4, z = ±5, all the upper signs being taken together. Solve the following : 2. 3yz + 2za; — 4xy = 16, Ans. x = ±1, 2yz — 3za: + = 5, y = ±2, 4yz — zx — ^xy = 15. z = ±3. 3. 6(x^ + + 2^) = 13(a: + y + z) = ^, a; = |, f, xy = z^. y = f , f , z = ±2. 153. Problems Leading to Simultaneous Quad- ratic Equations. 1. The small wheel of a bicycle makes 135 revolutions more than the large wheel in a distance of 260 jmrds ; if the circumference of each were one foot more, the small wheel would make 27 revolutions more than the large wheel in a distance of 70 3 'ards ; find the circumference of each wheel. Let X — the circumference of the small wheel in feet, and y = the circumference of the large wheel in feet. Then the two wheels make and revolutions respec- a; y tively in a distance of 260 3 'ards. 322 PROBLEMS LEADING TO QUADRATIC EQUATIONS. Hence or X 1 _ 1 X y 9 'S2 • • • ( 1 ) Similarly from the second condition, 210 210 or X + 1 1 y + 1 1 - 27: X + 1 y + I ( 2 ) F rom ( 1 ) , X = — — dy + 52 X + 1 = 61y_+^_ 9y + 52 Substituting in (2), -f 9y + 52 1 61y + 52 y + 1 9y^ — 113y = 52. Solving, we obtain y = 13, or — Substituting y = 13 in (1), we find x = 4. The negative value of y is inadmissible. Hence the small wheel is 4 feet, and the large wheel is 13 feet in circumference. 2. A man starts from the foot of a mountain to walk to its summit ; his rate of walking during the second half of the distance is half a mile per hour less than his rate during the first half, and he reaches the summit in 5^ hours. He descends in 3| hours by walking at a uniform rate, which’ is one mile per hour more than his rate during the first half of the ascent : find the distance to the summit, and the rates of walking. Let '2x = the number of miles to the summit, and y = the rate of walking, in miles per hour, during the first half of the ascent. Then - = the time in hours for the first half of the ascent ; y and — - — = the time in hours for the second half of the y - k ascent. PROBLEMS LEADING TO QUADRATIC EQUATIONS. 323 Hence - 11 + . . . (1) y y - 1 Similarly Q 3 y+i“ " • • • • ■ (2), ji’om (2) X - ¥ (^ + 1) . . . . . . (3) r’rom (1) x{2y — 4) Substituting (3) in (4), 1 5s II ... (4) ¥(2/ + - i) = -“ 3 /( 2 / - i)- 2Sy~ — 89^ : —15. Solving, we obtain ?/ = 3, or Substituting ^ = 3 in (3), we find x = The other value of y is inapplicable, because by supposition y is greater than Hence the whole distance to the summit is 15 miles, and the rates of walking are 3, 2^, and 4 miles per hour. 3. The sum of the squares of two numbers is 170, and the difference of their squares is 72 : find the numbers. Ans. 11 ; 7. 4. The product of two numbers is 108, and their sum is twice their difference : find the numbers. Ans. 6 ; 18. 5. The product of two numbers is 6 times their sum, and the sum of their squares is 325 : find the numbers. Ans. 10 ; 15. 6. A certain rectangle contains 300 squai'e feet ; a second rectangle is 8 feet shorter, and 10 feet broader, and also contains 300 squai’e feet : find the length and breadth of the first rectangle. Aiis. 20 ; 15. 7. Find two numbers such that their sum may be 39, and the sum of their cubes 17199. Ans. 15 and 24. 8. The product of two numbers is 750, and the quotient of one divided by the other is 3-| : find the numbers. Ans. 50 and 15. 324 EXAMPLES. EXAMPLES OF SIMULTANEOUS QUADRATICS. Note. — In the great variety of simultaneous quadratic equations, it is impossible to give rules for every solution. The artifices employed in Algebraic work are very numerous. The student is cautioned not to go to work upon a pair of equations at random, but to study them until he sees how they can be reduced to a simpler equation by addition, multiplication, factoring, or by some other process, and then to perform the operations thus suggested. Solve the following : 1. X + 4y = 14, 2 /“ + 4a; = 2y + 11 2. 3x + 2y ^ : 16, xy = : 10. 3. X + 2y - 9, - 5a;2 = 43. 4. 3a; y = 11, 1 CO = 47. 5. 4x + 9y ■■ = 12, 2x- + xy : = 6/. 6. 3.T + 2y = 5.T7, 15a; — 4^ = 4a-^. 7. X + y 51, xy - 518. 8. a; — y = 18, xy = 1075. 9. + y^^ 89, xy = 40. 10. X- + ?/^ = 178, X + y = 16. x^ + y-= 185, X — y = 3. Ans. X = 2, —46, y = 3, 15. a: = 2, -Vi, y = 5, 3. at = 1, -f4, y = 4 , X - 4, 7, y = 1 , 10 . a: = -24, y = 12 , i- X = I, 0, y = 0 . X — 37, 14, y = 14, 37. X = 43, —25. y = 25, —43. a; = ± 8, ± 5, y = ± 5, ± 8. X - 13, 3, y = 3, 13. X = 11, - 8, y= 8,-11. 11 . EXAMPLES. 325 12. ~ xy + = 76, Ans. X = 10, 4, X + y = = 14. y = 4, 10. 13. a; - y ^ = 3, X = 7, - 4, x^ — Zxy + 3/^ = —19. y = 4, - 7. 1^- h + h y 48 1 X = f? 3 8 ’ 1 X + - y — ^ y = 3 8 ’ t* 15. \ + h y 6 1 — 90{T’ X - ± 6, ± 5, xy = 30. y = ± 5, ± 6. 16. + y^ + xy — 208, X 12, 4, X -j- y = 16. y 4, 12. 17. a;^ ~y^ = 16, X = 5, X - y = 2. y = 3. 18. x^ — y^ = '^xy, X 4, - 2, X - y - 2. y - 2, - 4. 19. a; + y = 23, X = 14, 9, a;^ + 3/® = 3473. y 9, 14. 20. X + y = 35, X = 8 , 27, a;^ + y'^ = 5. y - 27, 8 . 21. x - y = \Jx + sfy, X 16, 9, 3 - y^ = 37. y - 9, 16. 22. a;^ + a:^ + 3/^ = 2923, X ■ ± 7, ± 3, x^ - xy + 3/^ = 37. y = ± 3, ± 7. 23. X* + o:Y + y* = 9211, X z= ± 9, ± 5, x^ - xy + 3/" = 61. y = ± 5, ± 9. 24. a;® -- 3/® = 56, X = 4, - 2, x‘‘‘ + xy 4- 3/^ = 28. y 2, - 4. 25. a:® + 3/® = 126, X = 5, 1, a:* - xy + 3/^ = 21. y = 1, 5. 326 EXAMPLES. 2®- 3 + i = 'A. Ans. X = 5, 1, 27. + xy = 45, •>/ + xy = 36. 28. 2x^ — xy — 56, 2xy — y-= 48. 29. — 2xy =15, xy — 2y‘^ — 7. 30. x^y{x-\-y) = %0, x^y{2x—Zy) =80. 31. x^ + 1 — 9y, x'^ + X ~ Gy. y = 1, 5. a;=± 5 \y=±\. a;=± 7; y=±G. a-— ±15 ; 2/=±7. a-± 4 ; ?/=±l. X - 2, I, — 1, 2/ = 1, A, 0. Note. — It will be seen that Examples 17 to 31 can be solved by Case III. 32. X- + ^xy = 54, Ans. X = ±3, ±36, xy + 4y^ = 115. y ~ ±3, ± 33. x^ -\- xy = 24, a; = ±4, ±6V^, 2}f + 3a;?/ = 32. y = ±2, =F8V^. 34. o' II CO 1 X = ±5, ±4, 1 II 1 II 35. a;2 -f xy - 2y- = -44, X — ± 14, ± 1, xy + 3?/2 = 80. y = ^ 8, ±5. 36. -j- ^xy = 54-, X = ±3, ±36, xy + Ay- = 115. y = ±5, ±11*. 37. a;(a; -\- y) = 40, X = ±5, ±4V^, y{^ - y) = 6. 2/ = ±3, ± \/2. 38. ^{x + y) + y{x-y)= 158, a;= ±9, ±8V^2. 7.t(.t + ?/)= 'i2y{x II 1 39. .t + ?/ = 4, .T* + ?/•*= 82. X — 3, 1; y — 1,3. 40. X — y = 5, x^ — 2/® = 3093. a: = 5, -2; y = 2, -5. 41. xY ± 13.t7 ± 12 = 0, a;- 4, 3,1±/^. X + y ^ 1. y = -3, 4, EXAMPLES. 327 42* X y — 65 ^ P 1 5 ± Ans. X = 6,-1, — , Axy = 12 — x^y'^. 43. x^y"^ + bxy — 84, X A y == 8. y = - 1 , 6 , 5 =F Vl7 a; = 7, 1, 4 ± V^28, 2/ - 1, 7, 4 T 44. .a;^ + 4?/^ -|- 80 = 15aj + 30y/, xy = 6. .T = 4, 3, 6, 2, 2/ = I, 2, 1, 3. 45. 9a;2 + 2/" - 63a; - 2ly + 128 = 0, xy = 4. /V. — ^ 2 A 1 * 4 / — 39 2 / = 2 , 6 , 1 , 12 . 46. x'^ + 2/^ = 14a;y, X Ay = a. ^ = |(1 TV'S), 1(1 47. / 3x’ Y /a; + 2/Y = 2, X = 6, — 4|-, + 2// \ 3a; / xy - X — y = 54. y = 12, —9. 48. x^ + y{xy - 1) = 0, t-H 1 I'M ' II y^ - x{xy + 1) = 0. 1 y = n • V2(V^ - 1) 49. x^ A y^ = xy{x + 2/)®, a; = fVlO ± xif = (a; + yY. y = ± fv/5. 50. (a;«+l)2/ = (2/^^-l)a;^ a;=|[\/|r3 + 3 + Vlf3-l], (2/®+ l)a;== 9(a;^H- 1)2/®. Ans. y = ^[if3Vif3 + 3 ±V3Yr-i], 51. a; + 2/ + 2 = 13, a: = 5, 2, 3 ± V^, x‘‘ A y^ A = 65, 2/ = 2, 5, 3 4: V^, xy = 10. z = 6, 7. 52. {x A y) {x + z) = 30, 1 II {y + 2) (2/ + ‘'s) = 15, 2/ = 1, -1- (z Ax){z A y) = 18- z = 2, —2. 328 EXAMPLES. 53. + ?/2 + 2^ = 49, Arts, a; = ±2, ±M, \h y = ±5, s/7 2 = ±3, ±^. V7 'A + = 19 , x^ + xy + y^ = 39 . 54. x(y + 2 ) = a, a- = ± . / (Z±AZ^)(«±Zm, ^ V 2(5 + c - a) ^ . / (a + b — c)(b + c — a) V 2( ?j(x + z) =: b, y !(a + c — 6) z{x + y) = c. 2 = ± '(5 + c — a) (« + c — 5) \ 2(a + 5 — c) 55. The product of two numbers is 60 times their differ- ence, and the sum of their squares is 244 : find the numbers. Ans. 10, 12. 56. Find two numbers whose difference added to the difference of their squares is 14, and whose sum added to the sum of their squares is 26. ^ns. 4, 2. 57. Find two numbers such that twice the first with three times the second may make 60, and twice the square of the first with three times the square of the second may make 840. Ans. 18 and 8, or 6 and 16. 58. Find two numbers whose sum is niue times their difference, and whose product diminished by the greater number is equal to twelve times the greater number divided by the less. -4?is. 5, 4. 59. Find two numbers whose difference multiplied by the difference of their squares is 32, and whose sum multiplied by the sum of their squares is 272. Ans. 5, 3. 60. Find two numbers whose product is equal to their sum, and whose sum added to the sura of their squares is 12. ^/is. 2, 2. 61. Find two numbers whose sum added to their product is 34, and the sum of whose squares diminished by their sura is 42. Ans. 4, 6. EXAMPLES. 329 62. A number consisting of two digits has one decimal place ; the difference of the squares of the digits is 20, and if the digits be reversed, the sum of the two numbers is 11 : find the number. Ans. 6.4, or 4.6. 63. A man has to travel a certain distance ; and when he has traveled 40 miles he increases his speed 2 miles per hour. If he had traveled with his increased speed during the whole journey he would have arrived 40 minutes earlier ; but if he had continued at his original speed he would have arrived 20 minutes later. Find the whole distance he had to travel, and his original speed. A?is. 60, 10. 64. A and B are two towns situated 18 miles apart on the same bank of a river. A man goes from A to B in 4 hours, by rowing the first half of the distance and walking the second half. In returning he walks the first lialf at the same rate as before, but the stream being witli him, he rows 1|^ miles per hour more than in going, and accomplishes the whole distance in 34 hours. Find his rates of walking and rowing. A7is. 4^ walking, 44 rowing at first 65. A and B run a race round a two mile course. In the first heat B reaches the winning post 2 minutes before A. In the second heat A increases his speed 2 miles per hour, and B diminishes his as much ; and A then arrives at the winning post 2 minutes before B. Find at what rate each man ran in the first heat. Ans. 10, 12 miles per hour. 66. Find two numbers whose product is equal to the dif- ference of their squares, and the sum of their squares equal to the difference of their cubes. Ajis. J \/5, -1(5 4- v/S)- 67. The fore-wheel of a coach makes 6 revolutions more than the hind-wheel in going 120 yards; but if the circum- ference of each wheel be increased 1 yard, the fore-wheel will make only 4 revolutions more than the hind-wheel in the same distance : find the circumference of each wheel. Ans 4 and 5 yards. 68. A vessel is to be filled with water by two pipes. The first pipe is kept open during three-fifths of the time which 330 EXAMPLES. the second would take to fill the vessel ; then the first pipe is elosed and the second is opened. If the two pipes had both been kept open together the vessel would have been filled 6 hours sooner, and the first pipe would have brought in two-thirds of the quantity of water which the second pipe reall}’ brought in. How long would each pipe alone take to fill the vessel? Ans. 15 and 10 hours. 69. The number of men in both fronts of two columns of troops, A and B, where each consisted of as many ranks as it had men in front, was 84 ; but when the columns changed ground, and A was drawn up with the front that B had, and B with the front that A had, then the number of ranks in both columns was 91 : find the number of men in each column. Ans. 2304, 1296. 70. Two trains start at the same time from two towns, and each proceeds at a uniform rate towards the other town. When they meet it is found that one train has run 108 miles more than the other, and that if they continue to run at the same rate they will finish the journey in 9 and 16 hours respectively. Find the distance between the towns and the rates of the trains. Ans. 756, 36, 27. 71. Two travelers, A and B, set out from two places, P and Q, at the same time ; A starts from P with the design to pass through Q, and B starts from Q and travels in the same direction as A. When A overtook B it was found that they had together traveled 30 miles, that A had passed through Q 4 hours before, and that B, at his rate of travel- ing, was 9 hours’ journey distant from P. Find the dis- tance between P and Q. Has. 6 miles. 72. Two travelers, A and B, set out at the same time from two places, P and Q, respectively, and travel so as to meet. AVhen they meet it is found that A has traveled 30 miles more than B, and that A will reach Q in 4 days, and B will reach P in 9 days, after they meet. Find the distance between P and Q. Has. 150 miles. RATIO — DEFINITIONS. 33 CHAPTER XVI. RATIO — PROPORTION — VARIATION. 154. Ratio — Definitions. — The relative magnihide of two quautities, measured by the number of times which the first contains the second, is called their Ratio. The ratio of a to 6 is usnally written a : b ; a is called the first term, and h the second term of the ratio. The first term is often called the antecedent, and the second term the consequent. Magnitudes must alwa}'s be expressed by means of mim- bers; and the number of times which one number contains' the other is found by dividing the one by the other. Hence the ratio a : b may be measured by the fraction b Thus, the ratio a : 6 is equal to or is -. ^ b b Concrete quantities of different kinds can have no ratio to one another ; thus, we cannot compare pounds with }'ards, or dollars with days. To compare two quantities, they must be expressed in terms of the same unit. For example, the ratio of 4 yards to 15 inches is measured by the fraction 4 X 3 X 12 15 “ A ratio is called a ratio of greater inequality, of less in- equality, or of equcdity, according as the antecedent is greater than, less than, or equcd to the consequent. Ratios are compounded by multiplying together the ante- cedents of the given ratios for a new antecedent, and the 332 RATIO — DEFINITIONS. consequents for a new consequent. Thus, the ratio com- pounded of the three ratios, 3a : 26, 4a6 : 5c‘^, c : a, is 3a X 4n6 x c : 26 x 5c^ X a, or 6a ; 5c. When the ratio a : 6 is compounded with itself, the result- ing ratio is a^ : 6^, and is called the duplicate ratio of a : 6. Similarly, the ratio a® : 6® is called the triplicate ratio of a : 6. Also tlie ratio a^ : 6^ is called the subjliqMcate ratio of a : 6. If we interchange the terms of a ratio, the result is called the inverse ratio. Thus 6 : a is the inverse of a : 6. The inverse ratio is the reciprocal of the direct ratio. When the ratio of two quantities can be exactly expressed by the ratio of two integers, the quantities are said to be commensurable ; when the ratio cannot be exactly expressed by the ratio of two integers, they are said to he. incommen- surable. Although we cannot find two integers which will exactly measure the ratio of two incommensurable quantities, j'et we can always find two integers whose ratio differs from the required ratio by as small a quantity as we please. For example, the ratio of a diagonal to a side of a square cannot be exactly expressed b\' the ratio of two whole numbers, for this ratio is y^2, and we cannot find any fraction which is exactly equal to V^2 ; but by taking a suf- ficient number of decimals, we may find \/2 to any required degree of approximation. Thus y/2 = 1.4142135 and therefore V^2 > and < \tUUi- That is, the ratio of a diagonal to a side of a a square lies between and therefore differs from either of these ratios b}’ less than one-millionth ; and since the decimals may be continued without end in extracting the PROPERTIES OF RATIOS. 333 square root of 2, it is evident that this ratio can be expressed as a fraction with an error less than any assignable quantity. In general. When a and b are incommensurable, divide b into n equal parts each equal to a;, so that b — nx, where n is a positive integer. Also let a > ?nx, but < (m + l)a;, then a mx ^ (m + l)x’ b nx nx that is, - lies between — and ^ ; so that - differs from b n n b Tft 1 — by a quantity less than And since we can choose x n n (our unit of measure) as small as we please, n can be made as great as we please, and therefore - can be made as small n as we please. Hence two integers, m and n, can be found whose ratio will express the ratio a:b to any required degree of accuracy. Note. — T he student should observe that the. Algebraic definition of ratio deals with numbers, or with magnitudes represented by numbers, while the Geometric definition of ratio deals with concrete magnitudes, such as lines or areas represented Geometrically, but not referred to any common unit of measure. 155. Properties of Ratios. — (1) If the terms of c ratio be multiplied or divided by the same number the value of the ratio is unaltered. T"> dj TThCt / k I r- \ hor - = — (Art. 79). b mb ^ ’ Thus the ratios 2:3, 6:9, and 2m : 3m, are all equal to each other. Two or more ratios are compared b}' reducing the fractions which measure them to a common denominator. Thus, sup- , , , , ,. a ad c be pose a : b and c : d are two ratios, ihen - = — , - = — ; b bd d bd hence the ratio a-.b>, = , or < the ratio c : cZ, according as ad >, = , or < be. 334 PROPERTIES OF RATIOS. The ratio of two fractions can be expressed as a ratio of two integers. ® n Thus the ratio - is measured by the fraction - or — ; b d c be and is therefore equivalent to the ratio ad : be. ^ (2) A ratio of greater inequality is diminished., and a ratio of less inequality is inereased, by adding the same quantity to each of its terms; that is, the ratio is made more nearly equal to unity. Let a : b be the ratio, and let a + a: : ft + be the new ratio formed by adding x to each of its terms. a a + X _ x{a — b) b b + X b{b + x) ’ Then and a — 6 is positive or negative according as a is greater or less than b. Hence ^ ^ <, or > - according, as a >, or < & ; that is, b + X b the resulting ratio is brought nearer to unit}’. For example, if to each term of the ratio 3 : 2 we add 12, the new ratio 15 : 14 is less than the former, because = ly^^ is clearly less than | = 1^. Also, if to each term of the ratio 2 : 3 we add 12, the new ratio 14:15 is greater than the former, since ^ is clearly greater than |. (3) Similarljq it can be proved that a ratio of greater in- equality is inereased, and a ratio of less inequality is dimin- ished, by taking the same quantity from both its terms. (4) The following is a very important irroposition concern- ing equal ratios. If - = - = — = then each of these ratios b d f _ f pa”^ + gc" + re" -p . . . .V'* \p5" + gd" + rf" + ..../’ where p, q, r, n are any quantities tohedever. EXAMPLES. 335 Let a c b d e f .. = 7c; then a = bk, c = dk, e = fk, ; therefore /)(X"+gc”+re"+ . . . .=pb^k'^+qd’^k^-\-rf’‘k’'-{- . . . . ( . 1 pg” + gc” + + • • • - V pb’^ + qd'‘ + ?/" + ..../ b d f By giving different values to p, q, r, n, many particular cases of this general proposition may be deduced ; or they may be proved independently by the above method. Suppose n = 1, then we have from (1) a _ c _ e _ b ~ d~ f~ Suppose = 1 , and p = a _ c _ e _ b ~ d~f ~ ■ pa -\- qc -\- re + (2) pb + qd -\- rf + ... . then (1) becomes ' = r = _ g + c + e ~ h -U d M f • • ( 3 ) That is, lohen a series of fractions are equcd, each of them is equal to the sum of all the numerators divided by the sum of all the denominators. EXAMPLES. 1. If - = I, find the value of ^ y 7x + 2y — — 3 5x — Sy _ j/ _ JjS — 3 _ 3 _ 7x 2y Jf 2 + 2 y 2. If g : 6 be in the duplicate ratio of g + x : 6 + a:, prove that x^ =: ah. From the condition ( ^ \b + x) b a^b + 2abx + = ab^ + 2abx + — ab. 336 PROPORTION — DEFINITIONS. Find the ratio compounded of 3. The ratios 4 : 15 and 25 : 36. Ans. 5 : 27. 4. The ratio 27 : 8, and the duplicate ratio of 4 : 3. 6:1. 5. The ratio 169 : 200, and the duplicate ratio of 15 : 26. Ans. 9:32. 6. If z= 4a’^, find the ratio x\y. 1:2. 7. What is the ratio x : ?/, if the ratio 4a: + 5y : 3x — y is equal to 2 ? Ans. 7 : 2. 8. If 7x — 4y : 3a: + y = 5 : 13, find the ratio x : y. ^Hs. 3 : 4. PROPORTION. 156. Definitions. — Four quantities are said to be in proportion when the ratio of the first to the second is equal to the ratio of the third to the fourth ; and the terms of the ratios are said to be 2iroportionals. Cl c Thus, if - = -, then «, b, c, cl, are called proportionals, b cl or are said to be in proportion. The proportion is written a:b = c:d, or a : 6 :: c : d, which is read “ a is to 6 as c is to d.” The Algebraic test of a proportion is that the two fractions which represent the ratios shall be equal. The four terms of the two equal ratios are called the terms of the proportion. The first and fourth terms are called the extremes, and the second and third, the means. Thus, in the above proportion, a and d are the extremes and b and c the means. Quantities are said to be in continued proportion when the first is to the second, as the second is to the third, as the third to the fourth, and so on. Thus a, b, c, cl, e, f, . . . are in continued proportion when a : b = b : c = c: cl — cl: e — e :f = PROPERTIES OF PROPORTIONS. 337 If a, b, c, be in continued proportion, b is said to be a mean proportional between a and c ; and c is said to be a third proportional to a and b. If «, 6, c, d be in continued proportion, b and c are said to be two mean proportionals between a and d ; and so on. 157. Properties of Proportions. — (1) If four quan- tities are in proportion, the product of the extremes is equal to the product of the mea?is. Let the proportion be a : 6 = c : d. Then by definition (Art. 156), - = b d Multiplying by 5d, ad = be (1) Hence if any three terms of a proportion are given, the fourth may be found from the relation ad = be. Note. — This proposition furnishes a more convenient test of a proportion than the one in Art. 156. Thus, to ascertain whether 2 ; 5 : ; 6 : 16, it is only necessary to compare the product of the means and extremes; and since 5 x 6 is not equal to 2 x 16, we see that 2, 5, 6, 16, are not in proportion. If 6 = c, we have from (1), = 6^; .-. 6 = s/m. That is, the mean proportional betiveen two given quanti- ties is equal to the square root of their product. (2) Conversely, If the product of ttvo quantities be equal to the product of tioo others, two of them may be made the extremes. and the other two the means, of a proportion. For let ad = be. Dividing by bd. a _ b ~ c . cl' that is. a:b : c : d. In a similar manner it may be shown that the proportions a : c : b:d. b : a : d : c. b-.d : a: c. c : d : a :b, etc., are all true provided that ad = be. 338 PROPERTIES OF PROPORTIONS. If four quantities are in proportion they will be in propor- tion by (3) Inversion. — If a:b : : c : d, then b: a : : d-.c. For - — - ; therefore 1 = 1 ; b d b d that is, - = - ; or b: a :: d:c. a c (4) Alternation. — If a:b : : c\ d, then a : c : : b: d. For ad = be \ therefore ^ — Jf.. cd cd that is - = - ; or a : c : : b : d. c d (5) Composition. — If a : b : : c : d, then a+b :b:: c+d : d. For - = - ; therefore - + 1 = - + 1 ; b d b d that is ^ ^ ^ ; ov a + b : b :: c -f d : d. b d (6) Division. — If a : 6 : : c : cZ, then a — b : b :: c — d : d. For - = - ; therefore - — 1 = - — 1 ; b d b d that is = \ or a — b : b :: c — d : d. b d In a similar manner it ma}' be shown that the sum (or the difference) of the first and second of two quantities is to the first as the sum (or the difference) of the third and fourtli is to the third. (7) Composition and Division. — If a :b : : c: d, then a A b : a — b : : c + d : c — d. For by (5) and (6), a A b _ c + d a — b _ c — d . V~ ~ d ’ by division, or g + Z> a — b a A h:a — b c A d . c — d' c A d •. c — d. PROPERTIES OF PROPORTIONS. 339 (8) If three quantities are in continued proportion., the first is to the third in the duplicate ratio of the first to the second. For if a:b ; ; b : c. theo - = b c T-T « « Now - = Hence V ^ “ V “ - b c b b b‘“ a:c : : a^ :b'^. Similarly it may be shown that if a : b : : b : c : : c : d, then a: d : : a^ :b^. (9) Quantities which are proportional to the same quanti- ties., are proportional to each other. If a : 6 : : e : /, and c: d: : ex f, then a : b : : c : d. a e , c e £ a c ror - = — , and - = - ; therefore - = b f d f b d' or a : b : : c : d. (10) The products of the corresponding terms of two or more proportioyis are in proportion. For if a : 6 : : c : d, and e : f : : g : h, then and ^ = b d fh therefore ^ ^ S3_.^ oj. ae-.bf :: eg: dh. bf dh (11) When four quantities are in proportion, if the first iind second be multiplied, or divided, by any quantity, as also the third and fourth, the residting quantities icill be in proportion. For if a : h ; : c : d, then - = - ; b d tnererore — = — ; or ma : mb :: nc: nd. mb nd Similarly it may be shown that — : — mm n 71 340 PROPERTIES OF PROPORTIONS. (12) In a similar manner it may be shown that if the first and third terms be midtiplied, or divided, by any quantity, and also the second and fourth, the residting quantities will be in proportion. (13) If four quantities are in proportion, the like powers, or roots, of these quantities will be in propiortion. For if a : 6 : : c : cZ, then - = - ; b d therefore — = a” : 6" : : c" ; d". 6" d" j- i fin f*n J.X XX Also — a" ; Z;" : : c" ; d". d" (14) If any number of quantities are in proportion, any antecedent is to its consequent, as the sum of all the antecedents is to the sum of all the consequents. For if a : b :: c : d :: e : f, then by (1), ad = be, and af — be ; also ab = ba. Adding o(6 + d + /) = i(a + c + e) ; therefore by (2 ) , a : b :: a c + e :b + d f. This also follows directly from (3) of Art. 155. (15) IVhen are unequal, it follows from b d f Ex. 3 of Art. 106, that «--\-c-\-e-]-g-\- & + d + / + 7i + is greater than the least, aud less than the greatest, of the t .. a c e q tractions-, b d f h It is obvious from the preceding propositions that if four quantities are in proportion, many other proportions may be derived from them. The propositions just proved are often useful in solving problems. In particular, the solution of certain equations is greatly facilitated by a skilful use of the operations of composition and division. EXAMPLES. 341 EXAMPLES. 1 . It a •. h :: c i d, show that + a6 : + cd : : 6^ — 2a6 : — 2cd. Let - = - = x\ then a = 6a;, and c = dx. bd + ab _ bV + 6^a; _ 6^ + cd d^.c^ + d'^x d^ . , 62 - 2a6 62 - 2b^x b'^ d2 - 2cd d2 - 2d2a; d^ Therefore by (9), + ab : c~ cd : : b^ — 2ab : d^ — 2cd. 2 3ct -f" 36 c -f“ 2d 3n -f- 66 — c — 2d 3ct — 66 + c — 2d 3a — 66 — c + 2d’ prove that a i b :: c : d. By (7) 2(3a + c) _ 2 (3a — c) 2(66 + 2 d) “ 2(66 - 2 d)' By (4) Again by (7), 3a + c _ 66 + 2d 3a — c 66 — 2d 6a _ 126 . 2c 4d ’ a : b :: c : d. 3. Find a fourth proportional to a;^, xy, 5x^y. Ans. 5y‘^. 4. Find a mean proportional between 12aa,*2 and 3a®. A 71 S, 6a^x. 5. Find a third proportional to a:® and 4a;. 6. If a : 6 : : c : d, show that ( 1 ) ac : bd : : c2 : d'^. (2) ab : cd : : : c^. (3) a2 : c2 :: — b'^ : c^ — d*. 7. If a : 6 : : c : d, prove that ( 1 ) a6 + cd : ab ~ cd:: a^ + c2 • a* — c*. (2) a2 -j- ac + c2 : a?- — ac c^ :: 62 + bd + d^ : b^ — bd + d“^ (3) a : 6 : : sj‘da^ + bc^ : \!'db‘^ + M\ (4) a + 6 : c + d : : sja^ + b- • 342 VAR [AT I ON — DEFINITION. 8, It a : b :: c : d :: e : /, prove that 2«2 _|_ 3c2 _ 5g2 . 2^2 ^ 3f^2 _ 5/2 : : : 5/ n o 1 o:^ + a; — 2 4a^ + 5a; — G 9. Solve the equation ' - — . X — 2 oa; — 6 Ans. X — 0, —2. 10. Find X in terms of y from the proportions x:y :: : 5®, and a ■. h ■.■.SJc + X : yd + y. ^ £ cf 11. If a, 6, c, d are in continued proportion, prove that a : d : : a® + 6^ + c® : 5® + c® + VARIATION. 158. Definition. — One quantity is said to vary directly as another when the two quantities depend upon each other in such a manner that if one be changed the other is changed in the same proportion. Thus, if a train moving uniformly, travels 40 miles in an hour, it will travel 80 miles in 2 hours, 120 miles in 3 hours, and so on ; the distance in each case being increased or diminished in the same ratio as the time. This is expressed by saying that when the velocit}" is uniform, the distance is proportional to the time., or more briefly, the distance varies as the time. We may express this result with Algebraic symbols thus : let A and a be the numbers which represent the distances traveled 113’ the train in the times represented I13' the numbers B and b ; that is, when A is changed to an}’ other value a, B must be changed to another value b, so that A : a :: B : b ; then A is said to vary directly as B, or more briefl}’, to vary as B. Another phrase,* which is also in use, is “A is proportional to B.” * Strictly speaking, this phrase is better than the one ‘‘varies as/* which is somewhat antiquated ; but iu deference to usage we retain it. The student must not suppose that the variation here considered is the onlj* kind. TTe are not here concerned with variation in general^ but merely with the simplest of all the possible kinds of variation. DIFFERENT CASES OF VARIATION. 343 This relation is sometimes expressed by the sj’mbol oc, so tliat ^ oc B is read ‘ ‘ A varies as B.” It will thus be seen that variation is merely an abridged method of expressing proportion, and that four quantities are understood though only two are expressed. If A varies as B, then A is equal to B multiplied by some constant quantity. For suppose that a, a^, ctg, . . . . , 6, b^, are corresponding values of A and B. Let a and b denote one pair of these values, so that when A has the value a, B has the value b ; then we have by the definition, A •. a B : b. Hence A = -B=^ mB, b where m is equal to the constant ratio a : b. 159. Different Cases of Variation. — There are four afferent kinds of variation. (1) One quantity is said to vary Directly as another when the two increase or decrease together in the same ratio. Thus, yl oc -B, or A = mB (Art. 158). For example. If a man works for a certain sum per hour, the amount of his wages varies as the number of hours during which he works. (2) One quantity is said to vary Inversely as another when the first varies as the reciproccd of the other. Thus A varies inversely as B is written H. 00 — , or H , where m is a constant. B B For example. If a man has to perform a certain journey, the time in which he will perform it varies inversely as his speed. If he doubles his speed, he will go in half the time ; and so on. 344 PROPOSITIONS IN VARIATION. (3) One quantity is said to vary as two others Jointly, when the first varies as the product of the other two. Thus A varies as B and C jointly is written A cc BC, or A — mBC, where m is a constant. For example, The wages to be received by a workman will vary as the number of days he has worked and the wages per day jointly. (4) One quantity is said to vary Directly as a second and Inversely as a third, when it varies jointly as the second and the reciprocal of the third. Thus A varies directly as B and inversely as C is written A oc JS> I -LJ — , or A = m-, O’ c' where m is a constant. For example, The base of a triangle Amries directly as the area and inversely as the altitude. In the different cases of variation just defined, to deter- mine the constant ??i it will only be necessary to have given one set of corresponding values. Example 1. If ^loc B, and ^1 = 3 when B = 12, we ha^-e A = mB ; 3 = Jrt X 12 ; or m = A = iB. 2. If A varies as B and inversel}’ as C, and B = 2 and (7=9, we have A = m— ; (7 . 6 = X 1 ; or = 27 ; . A = -1 160. Propositions in Variation. — The simplest method of treating variations is to convert them into equations. ( 1 ) If oc B, and B cc C, then -.1 oc C. For let A = mB, and B — nC (Art. 158), where m and n are constants. PROPOSITIONS IN VARIATION. 345 Then A = mnC ; A oc C', since mn is constant. In like manner, if ^ oc and JB oc then A cc O 0 (2) If A cc C, and B C, then ^1 ± iJ oc (7, and '^AB cc C. For let A = mO, and B = 7iC, where m and ?i are constants. Then ^4 ± -B = (m ± 7i)C. .-. .4. ± .B oc C, since m ± n is constant. Also ^AB — \/m7iO'^ — C\/mn. .-. v^Zb cc (7, since is coustciiit. (3) If A cc BC, then .B cc and C oc -. ^ ^ ’ C B For let A = mB(7; then i? = — — . 7)1 C B a : Similarly C cc C ^ B (4) If A oc -B, and C cc D, then AC oc BD. For let A = 7nB, and C = 7iD. Then AC — TinnBD. AC cc BD. (5) li Acc B, then A”- oc B". For let A = mB ; then A" = 7n’'B’‘. .-. ^I'*oc_B". (6) If A oc B wliG7i C IS constcuit, 0,71(1 A cc C when B is constant, then A oc BC when both B and C are variable. The variation of A depends on the variations of the two quantities B and C. Suppose these latter variations to take place successively, each in its turn producing its own effect on A. Let then B be changed to b, and in consequence let A be changed to a', C being constant ; then, by supposition, A^B a' b’ 346 PROPOSITIONS IN VARIATION. Now let C be changed to c, and in consequence let a' be changed to a, b being constant ; then, by supposition, a' C a Hence A X a' a or A a c b c be ■ AozBC. The following are illustrations of this proposition. The amount of work done by a given number of men varies directly as the number of days they work, aud the amount of work done in a given time varies direct!}' as the number of men ; therefore when the number of days and the number of men are both variable, the amount of work will vary as the product of the number of men and the number of days. Again, the area of a triangle varies directly as the base when the height is constant, and directly as the height when the base is constant ; hence when both the base and the height are variable, the area will vary as the product of the base and height. In the same manner, if A varies as each of any number of quantities, .B, C, D, . . . when the rest are constant, then when they all vary A varies as their product. Also, the variations may be either direct or inverse. Note. — This principle is interesting because of its frequent occurrence in Physical Science. For example, in the theory of gases it is found by experiment that the pressure p of a gas varies as the “absolute temperature” t when the volume v is constant, and that tlie pressure varies inversely as tlie volume when the temperature is constant; that is, p oc f, when V is constant; and pa:-, when t is constant. V From tliese results, we should expect that, when both t and c vary, we should have the formula p oc -, or ^ = a constant, V t which by actual experiment is found to be the case. PROPOSITIONS IN VARIATION. 347 1. \i y varies inversely as aj" — 1, and is equal to 24 when X = 10, find y when x = 5. Since 2 / oc y = ^ by (2) of Art. 159. As ?/ = 24 when x — 10, we have 24 = — . m = 24 X 99. 99 Hence, when x = 5, we have _ 24 X 99 ^ ^ a:" - 1 2. The pressure of a gas varies jointly as its density and its absolute temperature ; also when the density’ is 1 and the temperature 300, the pressure is 15. Find the pressure when the density is 3 and the temperature is 320. Let p = the pressure, t = the temperature, and d = the density. Then, since p oc td, we have p = mtd, by (3) of Art. 159. As p = 15 when t = 300 and d — 1, we have 15 = m X 300 X 1. .•. m — Hence, when d = 3 and t = 320, we have p = X 320 X 3 = 48. 3. The time of a railway journey varies directly as the distance and inversely as the velocity ; the velocrt}' varies directly as the square root of the quantity of coal used per mile, and inversely as the number of ears in the train. In a journey of 25 miles in half an hour with 18 cars, 10 cwt. of coal is required : how much coal will be consumed in a journey of 21 miles in 28 minutes with 16 cars? Let t = the time in hours, d = the distance in miles, V = the velocity in miles per hour, q = the quantity of coal in cwt., and n = the number of cars. Then we have t cc-, and v oc 348 EXAMPLES. As d = 25 when t = n — 18, and q = 10, we have ,25 X 18 . _ V'TO , VTO dn = m- m = and t y^lO 25 X 36’ " " ’ 25 x 36 y/^ Hence, when d = 21, ; = and n = 16, we have X 21 X 16 V'lo X 28 28 — TO — 25 X 36y/g 25 X 3V^ . X X 60 ^ 4y^ ^ 25 X 3 X 28 ® (7 = 3-A = 6t. • • 'a o o Hence the quantity of coal is Qi cwt. 4. A vai'ies as B, and A is 5 when 5 is 3 ; what is A when 5 is 5? Ans. 8 5. A varies inversely as B, and H is 4 when B is 15 ; what is A when B is 12? A?is. 5. 6. If a: oc ?/ and y cc z, show that xz oc 7. If X oc -, and y oc-, prove that z oc x. y 2 8. If X cc z and y oc z, pi’ove that x^ — oc EXAMPLES. Find the ratio compounded of 1. The ratio 32 : 27, and the triplicate ratio of 3:4. Ans. 1 : 2. 2. The ratio 6 : 25, and the subduplicate ratio of 25 : 36. A?is. 1 : 5. 3. The triplicate ratio of x : y, and the ratio 2y- : 3.x^. Ans. 2x : 3y. 4. If X : y = 3^, find the value of (x — 3y) : (2x — by). Ans. 1:5. 5. If - = f , and - = f, find the value of J) y ~ Ans. 17 : 7. 6. Find x : y, having given x^ + = 5xy. 2 or 3. EXAMPLES. 349 7. Find two numbers in the ratio of 5 to 6, and whose sum is 121. Ans. 55 and 66. 8. For what value of x will the ratio 15+o;:17 + a; be J? A?is. — 13. 9. Find x in order that .x’ + 1 : a; + 4 maj’ be the duplicate ratio of 3 : 5. ^l?is. 11 : 16. 10. Two numbers are in the ratio of 4 : 5, and if 6 be taken from each, the ratio is that of 3:4: find the numbers. Ans. 24, 30. 11. Find two numbers in the ratio of 5 : 6, such that their sum has to the difference of their squares the ratio of 1 : 7. Ans. 35 : 42. 12. Find x so that x : 1 may be the duplicate of the ratio 8 : x. A7is. 4. 13. If 2.X’ : 3y be in the duplicate ratio of 2x — m : 3y — m, prove that = Gxy. 14. If A : 5 be the subduplicate ratio of A — x : B — x., prove that x — AB : {A -\- B). 15. Prove that if each «-2 + « 32 / «3 + of these ratios is equal to 1 + a: : 1 + y, supposing to t)e zero. 16 If ^ ~ ^ _ b — c _ c — a _ a + b + c ay + bx bz + cx cy + az ax + + cz’ prove that each of these ratios = 1 : a: + y + z, supposing a + 6 + c not to be zero. 17. Find a mean proportional between a^b and «5®. a-b-. 18. Find a third proportional to (a — bY and — 6^. Ans. (« + bY- 19. If a : 5 : : c : d, prove that (1) 2a + 3c : 3a + 2c : : 2b + 3d : 36 + 2d. (2) la + mb : pa + qb : : Ic + md : pc + qd. (3) + 6" : Vc' + d^ : : + b^ ■ (4) a\ + ac^ : bhl + 6d^ : : (a + c)® : (6 + d)^. 350 EXAMPLES. Find the value of x in each of the proportions : 20. Sx — 1 : 6a; — 7 : : 7x — 10 : 9a; + 10. Ayis. 8 or -|. 21. a;^ — 2a; + 3 : 2a; — 3 : : £c^ — 3a; + 5 : 3a; — 5. 2 or 0. 22. 2a; — 1 : a; + 4 : ; a;^ + 2a: — 1 : a;^ + a: + 4. 5 or 0. 23. (Va;+1+Va;-1) ; (Va;+ 1 -Va;- 1) : : 4a;-l : 2. IJ. 24. If a : 5 : : c : d : : e : /, prove that a® + c® + e® : 6® + d® + /* : : ace : bdf. 25. If a : 6 : : c : d, prove that (1) a(c + d) = c{a + b). (2) (g + c) (cd + c^) _ (5 + d) (b^- + d^) _ (a — c) (n^ — c^) (5 — d) ( 6 ^ — d^)" |.g\ + gab + + qcd + rd^ la^ + mab + nb"^ Ic^ + mcd + nd'^ 26. If a; and y be unequal and x have to y the duplicate ratio of .^■ + z : ?/ + 2 , prove that z is a mean proportional between x and y. 27. If a : b : : p : q, prove that a'^+b^ : — — : : p‘^+q~: — . a+b p-\-q 28. If four quantities are in proportion, and the second is a mean proportional between the third and fourth, prove that the thii'd will be a mean proportional between the first and second. on TAg4“54-c-f*d g-j -6 — c — d 4 . 1 *. 29. If — ! ! ! — = — i , prove that a, a — o + c — d a — b — c d 5, c, d ai’e in proportion. 30. Each of two vessels contains a mixture of wine and water ; a mixture consisting of equal measures from the two vessels contains as much wine as water, and another mixture consisting of four measures from the first vessel and one from the second is composed of wine and water in the ratio of 2:3. Find the proportion of wine and water in each of the vessels. Ayis. In the first the wine is | of the whole ; in the second |. EXAMPLES. 351 31. If the increase in the number of male and female criminals be 1.8 per cent., while the decrease in the number of males alone is 4.6 per cent., and the increase in the number of females is 9.8 per cent., compare the number of male and female criminals respectively. Ans. Female criminals four- fifths of the male. 32. If xccy, and y =1 when x = 18, find x when y = 21. Ans. 54. 33. If a; oc -, and y = 4 when x — 15, find y when x = 6. y Ans. 10. 34. A varies jointly as B and C ; and .4 = 6 when B = 3 and C = 2 : find A when B = a and (7=7. 35. 35. A varies jointly as B and C ; and A = 2 when B — a and (7=7: find B when A — 54 and C = 10. ^ns. 21. 36. A varies directlj" as B and inversely as (7 ; and 4. = 10 when jB = 15 and (7=6: find A when B = 8 and (7=2. 4?is. 16. 37. If 3a -f- 76 oc 3a -f- 136, and a = 5 when 6 = 3, find the equation between a and 6. 4ns. 3a = 56. 38. A cc B, and 4=2 when JB = 1 ; find 4 when B = 2. Ans. 4. 39. If 4'^ 4- oc 4^ — Br, prove that A B cc A — B. 40. 34 -f- bB oc 54 -j- 3B ; and 4 = 5 when B — 2 : find the ratio 4 : B. Ans. 5:2. 41. 4 oc nB 4- (7 ; and 4 = 4 when B — 1 and C = 2 : and 4=7 when B = 2 a,nd (7=3: find n. Ans. 2. 42. If z oc p.'c 4- y ; and if z = 3 when x = 1 and y — 2, and z = a when a: = 2 and y = 3 ; find p. Ans. 1. 43. If a; oc y when z is constant, and a; oc i when y is con- * z stant, prove that, if y and z both vary, a; will vary as z 44. If 3, 2, 1 be simultaneous values of x, y, z in the last example, determine the value of x when y = 2 and 2 = 4. 4/is. f. 352 EXAMPLES. 45. If oc ?/®, and x = 2 when y = S, find the equation between x and y. Ans. 27 = 4y^. 46. If y varies as the sum of two quantities, one of which varies as x directl}', the other as x iuversel}', and ii y = 4 when X = 1, and ?/ = 5 when x = 2, find the equation between x and y. Ans. y — 2x + - x' 47. If one quantity vaiy directlj' as another, and the former be f when the latter is find what the latter will be when the former is 9. Ans. 16. 48. If one quantity vary as the sum of two others when their difference is constant, and also vary as their difference when their sum is constant, show that when these two quan- tities vary independeuthq the first quantity will vary as the difference of their squares. 49. If y = the sum of two quantities, one of which varies directl}" as x, and the other inversely as x’- ; and if y = 19 36 when X = 2, or 3 ; find y in terms of x. A7is. y — ox XT 50. If y varies as the sum of three quantities of which the first is constant, the second varies as x, and the third as x^; and if y = 0 when x = 1, y = 1 when x = 2, and y = 4 when x = 3 ; find y when x = 7. ^?is. 36. 51. If y = the sum of three quantities, of which the first is constant, the second varies as .x, and the third varies as .x- : also when x = 3, 5, 7, y = 0, —12, —32, respectively ; find y in terms of .x. ^4ns. y — 3 -f- 2x — ar. 52. If y varies as the sum of three quantities, of which the first is constant, the second varies as .x, and the third as x^ ; also when .x a, 2a, 3a, y = 0, a, 4a, respective!}’ ; show that when .x = na, y = (n — l)-a. DEFINITIONS — FORM ULjE. 353 CHAPTER XVII. ARITHMETIC, GEOMETRIC, AND HARMONIC PROGRESSIONS. ARITHMETIC PROGRESSION. 161. Definitions — Formulce. — A number of terms formed according to some law is called a series. Quantities are said to be in Arithmetic Progression* when they increase or decrease by a constant difference, called the common difference. Thus, the following series are each in Arithmetic Progres- sion : 2, 5, 8, 11, 14, 17, 9, 7, 5, 3, 1, -1, -3, -5, a, a + d, a -b 2d, a + 3d, a + 4d, The letters A. P. are often used for shortness instead of the term Arithmetic Progression. The common difference is found by subtracting any term of the series from that which immediately folloios it. In the first series above the common difference is 3 ; in the second it is —2 ; in the third it is d. The series is said to be increasing or decreasing, according as the common difference is positive or negative. Thus, the first series above is increasing, and the second is decreasing. If we examine the third series above, we see tliat the coef- Jicient of d in any term is less by one them the number of the term in the series. Thus the 2d term is a + d, 3d term is a + 2d, 4th term is a + 3d, * Called also Arithmetic Series. 354 DEFINITIONS — FORMULA. and so on. Hence if n be the number of terms, and if I denote the last, or v}^ term, we have I = a {n — \)d (1) Let S denote the sum of n terms of this series ; then we have S' = a + (a + d) + (a + 2d) +...+(? — 2d) + (? — d) +? ; and, by writing the series in the reverse order, we have S = Z + (Z — d) + (Z — 2d) + . . . + (a + 2d) + (a + d) + a. Adding together these two equations, we have 2S = (a + Z) + (a + Z) + (a + Z) + to n terms = n{a + Z). ^ + Z) (2) By (1) and (2) we have S = + {n — l)d] . . (3) We have here three useful formulae, (1), (2), (3), which should be remembered ; in each of these any one of the letters may denote the unknown quantity when the other three are known. For example, in (1), we can write down any term of an A. P. when the first term, the common dif- ference, and the number of the term are given. Thus, if the first term of an A. P. is 5 and the common difference is 3, the 10th term = 5 -|- (10 — 1)3 = 32, and the 20th term = 5 -f- (20 — 1)3 = 62. Also in (2), if we substitute given values for S, Z, we obtain an equation for finding a; and similarly in (3). Thus, 1. Find the sum of 20 terms of the series 1, 3, 5, 7, . . . Here a = 1, d = 2, ?!, = 20 ; therefore by (3) S = 2^oj-2 + 19 X 2] = 10 X 40 = 400. 2. The first term of a series is 5, the last 45, and the sum 400 ; find the number of terms, and the common difference. DEFINITIONS — FORMULA. 355 Here a = 5, I = 45, S — 400 ; therefore by (2) 400 = ^(5 + 45) = 25?j. n — 16. By (1) 45 = 5 + 15cl. cl = 2f. When any two terms of an A. P. are given, the series can be completely determined ; for the data famish two simul- taneous equations, with two unknown quantities, which may he solved by methods previously given. 3. The 10th and 15th terms of an A. P. are 25 and 5 respectively ; find the series. Here 25 = a + 9cZ ; and 5 = a + 14d. By subtraction, 20 = — 5d. .*. d = —4. Then a = 5 — 14cZ = 61. Hence the series is 61, 57, 53, 4. Find the sum of the first n odd integers. Here a = 1, and d — 2 ; therefore by (3) S = ^[2 + (?i — 1)2] = ^ X 2n = Thus the sum of any number of consecutive odd integers beginning with unity, is the square of their number.* Find the last term and sum of the following series : 5. 14, 64, 114, to 20 terms. Ans. 964, 9780. 6. 9, 5, 1, to 100 -terms. —387, —18900. 7. — J, — f, to 21 terms. — Find the sum of the following series : 8. 5, 9, 13, to 19 terms. 779. 9. 12, 9, 6, to 23 terms. —483. Find the series in which 10. The 27th term is 186, and the 45th is 312. yIhs. 4, 11, 18, * This propositiou was known to the Greek geometers. 356 ARITHMETIC MEAN. 11. The 9th term is —11, aud the 102d is —150^. j4.ns. 1 , 2 , 12. The 16th term is 214, and the 51st is 739. Ans. —11, 4, 19, 162. Arithmetic Mean. — When three quantities are in Arithmetic Progression, the middle one is called the Arith- metic Mean of the other two. Thus if a, 5, c are in A. P., 6 is the arithmetic mean of a and c ; and by the definition of A. P. we have h — a = c — b; ••• ^ + c). Thus the arithmetic mean of any two quantities is half their sum. Between any two given quantities any number of terms may be inserted so that the whole series thus formed shall be in A. P. ; the terms thus inserted are called the arithmetic means. For example, to insert four arithmetic means between 10 aud 25. Here we have to find an A. P. with 4 terms between 10 aud 25, so that 10 is the first aud 25 is the sixth term. By (1) of Art. 161, 25 = 10 + 5d; .-. d = 3. Thus the series is 10, 13, 16, 19, 22, 25 ; aud the required arithmetic means between 10 aud 25 are 13, 16, 19, 22. In general. To insert n arithmetic means between a and b. Here we have to find an A. P. with n terms between a aud 5, so that a is the first and b is the {n + 2)“" term. By (1) of Art. 161, 5 = a + (a + 2 — l)fZ = a + (?i + l)d , b — a d = w + 1 ARITHMETIC MEAN. 357 Thus the I’equired means are a + a + 2 h — a a n b - n + 1 ri+1 ' n 1 1. Find the sum of the first p terms of the series whose a*’' term is 3?i — 1. By putting n — and n = p respectively, we obtain first term = 2, last term = 3p — 1. Hence by (2), Art. 161, ^ =|(2 + 3p - 1) = |(3p + l). In an Ai’ithmetic Progression when a, S, and d ai’e given, 71 is to be found by solving the quadratic (3), Art. 161. When both roots are positive and integral, there is no diffi- culty in interpreting the result corresponding to each. 2. How many terms of the series 24, 20, 16, must be taken that the sum may be 72? Here a = 24, d = —4, S = 72. Then from (3), Art. 161, we have 72 = |[2 X 24 -f (n - l)(-4)] = 24?i - 2n(vi - 1). .'. — \3n -p 36 = 0, or (n — 4) (n — 9) = 0. n = 4, or 9. Both of these values satisfy the conditions of the ques- tion ; for if we take the first 4 terms, we get 24, 20, 16, 12 ; and if we take the first 9 terms, we get 24, 20, 16, 12, 8, 4, 0, —4, —8, in either of which the sum is 72 ; the last 5 terms of the last series destroy each other, so that the sum of the first 4 terms is the same as the sum of the first 9 terms. When one of the roots is negative or fractional, it is inap- plicable, for a negative or a fractional nu7nher of tei'ms is, strictly speaking, without meaning. In some cases however a suitable interpretation can be given for a negative value of n. 358 ARITHMETIC MEAN. 3. How many terms of the series —9, —6, —3, must be taken that the sum may be 66 ? Here 66 = |[-18 + {n - 1)3]. 71^ — 7n — 44 = 0 ; or ()i — 11) (ti + 4) = 0. ?i = 11, or —4. If we take 11 terms of the series, we have -9, -6, -3, 0, 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, 21 ; the sum of which is 66. If we begin at the last term and count backwards four terms, the sum is also 66. From this we see that, although the negative solution does not directly answer the question proposed, we are enabled to give it an intelligible meaning as follows ; begin at the last term of the series which is furnished b}' the positive value of ?i, and count backwards for as many terms as the negative value indicates ; then the result will be the given sum. We thus see that the negative value for n answers a question closely connected with that to which the positive value applies. 4. How many terms of the series 26, 21, 16, must be taken that the sum may be 74? Here 74 = ’^[52 + (?i - 1) (-5)]. Solving, we get n = 4, or 7|. Thus, the only applicable value of n is 4. We infer that of the two numbers 7 and 8, one corresponds to a sum greater, and the other to a sum less than 74. 5. Insert 3 arithmetic means between 12 and 20. Ans. 14, 16, 18. 6. Insert 5 arithmetic means between 14 and 16. Hus. 14i, 14f 7. Insert 17 arithmetic means between 93 and 69. Has. 91|, 90^, 70f GEOMETRIC PROGRESSION. 359 How many terms must be taken of the series 8. 42, 39, 36, to make 315 ? Ans. 14, or 15. 9. —16,— 15, —14, to make— 100? 8, or 25. 10. 20, 18J, 17|, to make 162J? 13, or 20. 11. The sum of three numbers in A. P. is 39, and their product is 2184 ; find them. Aus. 12, 13, 14. 12. The sum of 10 terms of an A. P., whose first term is 2, is 155 ; what is the common difference? Ans. 3. GEOMETRIC PROGRESSION. 163. Definition — Formulae. — Quantities are said to be in Geometric Progression when they increase or decrease by a constant factor, called the common ratio. Thus, the following series are each in Geometric Progres- sion (G. P.) : 3, 6, 12, 24, 48, 1 1 i JL_ ^5 3’ 9^275 a, ar, ar^, ar®, ar*, The common ratio is found by dividing any term of the series by that which immediately precedes it. In the first series above the common ratio is 2 ; in the second it is ^ ; in the third it is r. The series is said to be increasing or decreasing., according as the common ratio is greater than 1, or less than 1. Thus, the first series above is increasing., and the second is decreasing. Note 1. — An Arithmetic Progression is formed by repeated addition or subtraction; a Geometric Progression by repeated multiplication or division. If we examine the third series above, we see that the exponent of r in any term is less by one than the number of the term in the series. Thus, the 2d term is ar, 3d term is ar^, 4th term is ar®, 360 GEOMETRIC PROGRESSION. and so on. Hence if n be the number of terms, and if I denote the last, or ?i*'' term, we have I == ( 1 ) Let S denote the sum of n terms of this series ; then we have /S' = a + ar + ar^ + + ; multiplying by r, we have Sr = ar + ar"^ + + ar”~^ + Hence by subtraction, we have Sr — S = ar^ — a ; or (?’ — 1)S' = a(?'" . g ^ «(?" - 1 ) o,. «(1 - ?") r - 1 ’ 1 - r + ar". - 1 ). • . (2) Multiplying (1) by and substituting in (2), we get S = rl — a or a — rl 1 — r’ ( 3 ) a form which is sometimes useful. Note 2. — It will be found convenient to remember both forms given in (2) for S, and to use the first form in all cases when r is positive and > 1, and the second when r is negative or < 1. 1. Find the 8th term of the series — — f, Here a = — = 8, -f- ( — |) - — f : therefore by(l) ; ^ = ^11 = the 8th term. 2. Sum the series 1, 3, 9, to 6 terms. Here a=l,n=6, r = 3; therefore by the first form of (2), S = 3® - 1 729 1 3 1 = 364. 3. Sum the series 81, 54, 36. to 9 terms. Here a = 81,?i = 9, r= 54 -f- 81 = |: therefore by the second form of (2), = 243 - -Vt'- = 236|j. GEOMETRIC MEAN. 361 4. Sum the series 2, —3, f, — to 7 terms. Here a = 2, n = 7, ?• = — f ; therefore by the second form of (2), , _ 2fl - (-l)n ^ 2fl + 1 - (-!) I _ 4 V 2_3 15 — 1 4 15 — 5 ^ — -^^32' 5. Find the 6th term of each of the following series : (1) 9, 3, 1, etc. ; (2) 2, —3, |, etc. ; (3) a‘^ ab, 6^, etc. Ans.{l)i,-, (2)-W-; (3) Sum the following series : 6. 1, 4, 16, ... , Ans. 1365, 7. 25, 10, 4, . . . 40f, 8 ^ -1, f, . . . 463 9 . 3 , -1, 1 3, . . . , . ... to 6 terms. 920 ^8 1 ' 164. Geometric Mean. — When three quantities are in Geometric Progression the middle one is called the Geometric Mean between the other two. Thus if a, 6, c are in G. P., h is the geometric mean between a and c ; and bj’ the definition of G. P., we have & _ c . a b ’ b^ = ac; .-. b = V^. Thus, the geometric mean between any tivo quantities is the square root of their product. Quantities which are in G. P. are in continued proportion, and the geometric mean between two quantities is the same as their mean proportional (Art. 156). Between any two given quantities any number of terms may be inserted so that the whole series thus formed shall be in G. P. ; the terms thus inserted are called the geometric means. For example, to insert three geometric means between 2 and 32. Here we have to find a G. P. with 3 terms between 2 and 32, so that 2 is the first and 32 is the fifth terra. By (1) of Art. 163, 32 = 2r“; r = 2. 362 THE SUM OF AN INFINITE NUMBER OF TERMS. Thus the series is 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, and the required geometric means between 2 and 32 are 4, 8, 16. In general. To insert n geometric means between a and h. Here we have to find a 6. P. with n terms between a and h, so that a is the first and b is the {n + 2)“' term. By (1) of Art. 163, . r.Jl + l _ ^ . . • / , a b — ; _ «+i/6 V a ( 1 ) Thus the required means are ar, ar^, a?"", where r has the value found in (1). 1. Insert 4 geometric means betw'een 160 and .5. Ans. 80, 40, 20, 10. 2. Insert 6 geometric means between 56 and — y’V- Ans. 28, 14, • n , 3. Insert 4 geometric means between 5^ and 40^. Ans. 8, 12, 18, 27. 165. The Sum of an Infinite Number of Terms. — From (2) of Art; 163, we have ^ _ a(l — r'‘) _ a oT 1 — r 1 - r 1 - r 0 ) Now suppose r is a proper fraction., positive or negative : then the greater the value of n the smaller is the absolute value of 7’", and consequently of ar and by taking n 1 — r sulficiently large 7’” can be made as small as ice please. Hence, by taking large enough, the sum of n terms of the a series can be made to differ from by as small a quau- 1 - r tity as we please. Thus, the sum of an infinite number of terms of a decreas- ing Geometric Progression is — ; or more briefly, the sum to infinity is — • THE SUM OF AN INFINITE NUMBER OF TERMS. 363 This quantity, — , which we call the sum of the series, 1 — ?• is the limit to which the sum approaches, but never actually attains ; that is, although no definite number of terms will amount to — ~ — , yet by taking a sufficient number, the sum 1 — r will reach it as near as we please. 1. Sum the series For n terms we have by (2) of Art. 163, From this result it appears that however many terms be taken, the sum of this series is always less than 1. Also we see that by taking n large enough, the fraction — can be 2 ” made as small as we please. Hence bj- taking a sufficient number of terms, the sum can be made to differ from 1 by as little as we please ; and lohen n is made infinitely great we have yiS = 1. This may be illustrated geometrically as follows: A\ 1 1 1 1 \B A A A A Let AB be a line of unit length. Bisect AB in P, ; bisect PiB in p 2 , P^B in P- 3 , PiB in P^, and so on indefinitely, always bisecting the remaining distance. It is evident that by a series of such bisections we can never reach 71, because we shall always have a distance left equal to half the preceding distance ; but by a sufficient number of these bisections we can come nearer to B than any assigned distance, however small, because every bisection carries us over half the remain- ing distance. That is, if we take a sufficient number of terms of the series ^ p p^ ^ ^ p^p^ ^ ^ we shall have a result differing from AB, i.e., from unity, by as little as we please. This is simply a geometric way of saying that -+—+—+ 2 2 ^ 2 ^ to = 1. 364 VALUE OF A REPEATING DECIMAL. Sum the following series to infinity : 2. -4ns. 2. 3. 9, -6, 4, - 5f. 4- 1, -i, i- ^11 X 4 4’ rs"’ IT- 166. Value of a Repeating* Decimal. — Repeating decimals furnish a good illustration of infinite Geometric Progressions. 1. Find the value of .423. .423 = .4232323 4 23 23 10 10 « 10 * 10- 10" 10 io*V' 10 * \ 10^ [by (1) of Art. 165] 4 23 100 _ 4 23 _ 419 10 10* 99 ~ 10 990 ~ 990’ which agrees with the value found by the usual rule in Arithmetic. The value of any repeating decimal may be found by the method employed in the last example; but in practice it may be found more easily by a general rule, which may be proved as follows: Let P denote the figures which do not repeat, and suppose them p in number; let Q denote the repeating period consisting of q figures. Let S denote the value of the repeating decimal ; then S = .PQQQ ; .-. lOPS = P.QQQ ; and 10P+?S = PQ.QQQ ; Called also recurring and circulating. HARMONIC PROGRESSION. 365 by subtracting, (lOP+9 ™ 10P)S = PQ — P; that is, 10P(10® — 1)S = PQ — P; Now 109 — 1 is a number consisting of q nines; therefore the denominator consists of q nines followed by p ciphers. Hence, for finding the value of a rej>eating decimal, we have the following Kule. Subtract the integral number consisting of the non-repeating figures from the integral number consisting of the non-repeating and repeating figures, and divide by a number consisting of as many nines as there are repeating figures followed by as many ciphers as there are non-repeating figures. Find the value of the following repeating decimals : 2. .151515 .... Ans. 4. .16 Ans. 3. .123123123 .... gW 5. .037 HARMONIC PROGRESSION. 167. Definition. — A series of quantities is said to be in Harmonic Progression when their reciprocals are in Arith- metic Progression. Thus, the following series 1 i 1 1 onrl 1 2. 1 ^ 4 ’?> 355 ’ are each in Harmonic Progression (H. P.) because their reciprocals, 1, 3, 5, 7, ..... , and 4, 3^, 3, 2^, are in A. P. The following is therefore a general form for a H. P. because the reciprocals of the terms are in A. P. From the above definition it follows that all problems relating to quantities in H. P. can be solved by taking the 1 1 1 1 a' a d' a -\- 2d' a -p (n — l)d' 366 HARMONIC MEAN. reciprocals of the quantities and using the formulae relating to A. P. This makes it unnecessary to give any special rules for the solution of problems in H. P. If a, 6, c be three consecutive terms of a H. P., then we have by definition, 1 _ 1 ^ 1 _ 1 b a c b a — b _ b — c ah be a — h : b — c : : a : c . . . . (1) Thus, if three quantities are in Harmonic Progression, the difference between the first and the second is to the difference between the second and the third as the first is to the third. Sometimes this relation is taken as the definition of Har- monic Progression. 1. The 12th term of a H. P. is A, and the 19th term is ; find the series. Here the 12th and 19th terms of the corresponding A. P. are 5 and respectively. Therefore by (1), Art. 161, 5 = rt + lid, and ^- = a 18c?. Solving, we get d = i, a = f . Hence the A. P. is f, 2, -I, f, and the H. P. is |i f? i’ ?' Find the last term of the following harmonic series : 2. 4, 2, 1-|, to 6 terms. Has. -§. 3. 21, Ilf, to 21 terms. fj. 4. If, Iff, 2jfj, to 8 terms. —4. 168. Harmonic Mean. — 4413011 three quantities ai’e in Harmonic Progression, the middle one is called the Harmonic Mean between the other two. HARMONIC MEAN. 367 Thus if a, 6, c are in H. P., 6 is the harmonic mean between a and c ; and by the definition of H. P. we have 1 _ 1 ^ 1 _ 1 . b a c b' 2ac a + c Thus, the harmonic mean between any two quantities is twice their product divided by their sum. Between any two given quantities any number of terms may be inserted so that the whole series thus formed shall be in H. P. ; the terms thus inserted are called the harmonic means. For example, to insert 5 harmonic means between and 8 To- Here we have to insert 5 arithmetic means between | and Hence, by (1) of Art. 161, JL5 _ 8 " Thus the A. P. is + 6d ; 3 ^5 25 2 6 TB^> d = 1 T 6 '- 27 28 29 llT’ TW’ TB’’ 1_5 . 8 ' > and therefore the required harmonic means between f and ^ are 16 16 Ij) IJi 16 ■ 5 ?’’ "37’ 28’ Bg- Li general. To insert n harmonic means betioeen a and b. Here we have to insert n arithmetic means between i and a By Art. 162, these will be a 11 b a 1 T’ h + 1 a 2 1 _ 1 b a n + 1 that is. (n 4- l)h 4- (g — h) (?i + 1)^ + 2(g — h) (n + l)g& ’ (ri + l)a6 ’ 368 RELATION BETWEEN TEE THREE MEANS. and therefore the required harmonic means between a and h are the reciprocals of these, that is, (n + l)a& (?t + l)ah {n + 1)5 + (a — 5)’ {n + 1)5 + 2(a — 5)’ 1. Insert 2 harmonic means between 4 and 2. Ans. 3, 2. Insert 3 harmonic means between ^ and 3. Insert 4 harmonic means between 1 and 6. 14, 1^, 2, 3. 169. Relation between Arithmetic, Geometric, and Harmonic Means. (1) If G, II be the arithmetic, geometric, and har- monic means between a and 5, then (Arts. 162, 164, 168), A = (1) G ^\lab (2) 2a5 a -b 5 ( 3 ) Therefore AH = X = ab = G^; 2 a + b that is, G is the geometric mean between A and II. Hence the geometric mean between any two real positive quantities, a and 5, is also the geometric mean between the arithmetic and the harmonic means between a and b. (2) From (1) and (2) we have A — G = — Y Va5 = iWa ~ V^)"! and from (2) and (3), G- 11= s/ab- 2nb a + b sfai) 0 + 5 (V^ - S^b)-. Now if a and 5 are both positive, V^o and V^5 are both real ; therefore (V^o — is positive ; also and a + 5 are both positive. Hence A — G and G — H are positive. Therefore A> G > H. EXAMPLES. 369 That is, the arithmetic., geometric, and harmonic means beticeen any tico real positive quantities are in descending order of magnitude.* Three quantities, a, 6, c, are in A. P., G. P., or H. P., according as a — b a a a , = -, -, or -, respectively. b — c a b c The first follows from the definition of A. P. (Art. 161). In the second, b{a — b) — a(b — c) ; b^ = ac. See Art.^ 164. The third follows from (1) of Art. 167. Harmonic properties are interesting chiefly because of their im- portance in Geometry and in the Theory of Sound. If there be a series of strings of the same substance, the lengths of which are proportional to 1, j, i, and if these strings are stretched tight with equal force, and any two of them are sounded together, the effect is found to be harmonious to the ear. Notwithstanding the comparative simplicity of tlie law of its formation, there is no general formula for the sum of any number of terms in harmonic progression. EXAMPLES. Find the last term and sum of the following series : 1. 1, 1.2, 1.4, . . to 12 terms. Aiis. 3.2, 25.2. 2. 3|^, 1, — 1|^, • to 19 terms. -41|, -361. 3. 64, 96, 128, . to 16 terms. 544, 4864. 5um the following series : 4. 4, 51, 61, . . . . ... to 37 terms. 9801 5. -3, 1, 5, . . . ... to 17 terms. 493, 6. 3a, a, —a, . . . ... to a terms. a^(4 — a). 7 Q1 01 12 . . . . to terms. 5n{9 — n) 12 ♦ These two propositions were known to the Greek geometers. 370 EXAMPLES. 8. 1-^-, l^l-, 2|^, .... to n terms. Ans. 9. —=r^ ,\[2,—=r ^ — , . . . . to 7 terms. 7('V2 4-2') y/2 + 1 V2 - 1 V r y Find the series in which 10. The term is 25, and the 29‘'“ term 46. Ans. 4, 5J, 7, 11. The 15*'’ term is —25, and the 23‘* term —41. Ans. 3, 1, —1, 12. Insert 14 arithmetic means between —74 and —24. /1i)« _nJL3 _n_8_ _9_8_ Ui-Hb. OjTJ? '^1To 5 -lo’ 13. Insert 36 arithmetic means between 8| and 2^. Ans. 8i, 4, 2J-. How many terms must be taken of the series 14. 15|, 15^, 15, to make 129? .4ns. 9, or 86. 15. —10^, —9, — 7|^, ... to make —42? 7, or 8. 16. —64, — 6-|, —6, .... to make —524? 11, or 24. 17. The sum of three numbers in A. P. is 33, and their product is 792 : find them. Ans. 4, 11, 18. 18. An A. P. consists of 21 terms ; the sum of the three terms in the middle is 129, and of the last three is 237 : find the series. Ans. 3, 7, 11, 83. 19. The first term of an A. P. is 5, and the fifth term is 11 : find the sum of 8 terms. Ans. 82. 20. The sum of four terms in A. P. is 44, and the last term is 17 : find the terms. Ans. 5, 9, 13, 17. 21. The seventh term of an A. P. is 12, and the twelfth term is 7 ; the sum of the series is 171 : find the number of terms. Ans. 18, or 19. 22. A sets out from a place and travels 2^ miles an hour. B sets out 3 hours after A, and travels in the same direction, 3 miles the first hour, 3|- miles the second, 4 miles the third, and so on. In how many hours will B overtake A? Ans. 5. 23. In the series, 1, 3, 5, etc., the sum of 2n terms : the sum of n terms : : a; : 1 : find the value of x. Ans. 4. EXAMPLES. 371 24. Find an A. P. such that the sum of the first five terms is one-fourth the sum of the following five terms, the first term being unity. Ans. 1, —2, —5, —26. 25. If the sum of m terms of an A. P. be always to the sum of n terms in the ratio of to ?r, and the first term be unity, find the term. Ans. 2n — 1. 26. If 2« + 1 terms of the series 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, ... . be taken, show that the sum of the alternate terms, 1, 5, 9, will be to the sum of the remaining terms 3, 7, 11, as + 1 to n. 27. On the ground are placed n stones ; the distance between the first and second is one yard, between the second and third three yards, between the third and fourth five yards, and so on : how far will a person have to travel who shall bring them one by one to a basket placed at the first stone ?* . n, ,,,, , Ans. -{n — l){'2n — 1; yards. 3 28. Find a series of arithmetic means between 1 and 21, so that their sum has to the sum of the two greatest of them the ratio of 11 to 4. Ans. 9 means, 3, 5, 7, 19. 29. Find the number of arithmetic means between 1 and 19 when the second mean is to the last as 1 to 6. A«s. 17. 30. If the second term of an A. P. be a mean proportional between the first and the fourth, show that the sixth term will be a mean proportional between the fourth and the ninth. Find the last term of each of the following geometric senes : 31. 2, -6, 18, . . to 8 terms. ^?iS. — 4374. 32. 2, 3, 41 243 33. 3, 32 , 3®, — 3^. Sum the following series : 34. 1, 1 1 2? 4? to 12 terms. Ans. 13 6 5 2 048* 35. 9, -6, 4, to 7 terms. *^81’ * See Art. ITO. 372 EXAMPLES. 36. 2, —4, 8, to 2^5 terms. Ans. -|(1 — 2^^). 37. V2, V^, 3^2, to 12 terms. 364 (v/G + V^). 38. Insert 3 geometric means between 486 and 6. Ans. 162, 54, 18. 39. Insert 4 geometric means between -J- and 128. ^Ins. 4, 2, 8, 32. 40. Insert 3 geometric means between 1 and 256. Ans. 4, 16, 64. 41. Insert 4 geometric means between 3 and —729. Ans. -9, 27, -81, 243. Sum the following series : 42. 3 8’ 1 4’ 1 6 6 5 43. 1, 1 2 ’ 1 4 ? • • • • . ... to infinity. o t- 44. 6, -2, 2 3’ • * • . ... to infinity. 45. 1 3’ 2 9’ 4 ■^75 • • • . ... to infinity. 1. 46. I’ -1, 5 8’ • * • 64 F5- 47. .9, .03, .001, . . . , 2 7 Find the value of the following repeating decimals : 48. .4282828 . . . Ans. f||. 50. .16. Ans. 49. .28131313 . . . 51. .378. ff. 52. The sura of three terms in G. P. is 63, and the difference of the first and third terms is 45 : find the terms. Gas. 3, 12, 48 ; or 36, —54, 81. Let a, ar, ar^ denote tlie numbers. 53. The sum of the first four terms of a G. P. is 40. and the sum of the first eight terms is 3280 : find the series. ^l?is. 1, 3, 9, 54. The sum of three terms in G. P. is 21, and the sum of their squares is 189 : find the terms. G»s. 3, 6, 12. 55. A person who saved every year half as much again as he saved the previous j'ear had in seven years saved 8102.95 : how much did he save the first year? ..4/is. §3.20. EXAMPLES. 373 56. In a G. P. show (1) that the product of any two terms equidistant from a given term is always the same, and (2) that if eacli term be subtracted from the succeeding, the successive differences are also in G. P. 57. Show that the square of the arithmetic mean of two quantities is equal to the arithmetic mean of the arithmetic and geometric means of the squares of the same two quanti- ties. 58. There are four numbers, the first three of which are in G. P. , and the last three in A. P. ; the sum of the first and last is 14, and the sum of the second and third is 12 : find the numbers. Ans. 2, 4, 8, 12. 59. Three numbers whose sum is 15 are in A. P. ; if 1, 4, and 19 be added to them respectively, the results are in G. P. : find the numbers. Ans. 2, 5, 8. Find the last term of the following harmonic series : 60. 6, 3, 2, to 6 terms. Ans. 1. 61. 8, 2, 1^, to 6 terms. 62. Insert three harmonic means between 2| and 12. Ans. 3, 4, 6. 63. The arithmetic mean of two numbers is 9, and the harmonic mean is 8 : find the numbers. Ans. 6, 12. 64. Find two numbers such that the sum of their arith- metic, geometric, and harmonic means is 9^, and the product of these means is 27. A?is. 1,9. 65. The arithmetic mean of two numbers is 3, and the harmonic mean is -| : find the numbers. Ans. 2, 4. 66. There are three numbers in II. P., such that the greatest is the product of the other two, and if one be added to each, the greatest becomes the sum of the other two : find the numbers. Ans. 2, 3, 6. 67. The sum of two consecutive terms in H. P. is and their product is : find the terms. Aas. A. 374 MA THEM A TICAL IND UCTION. CHAPTER XVIII. MATHEMATICAL INDUCTION — CONTINUED FRACTIONS — PERMUTATIONS AND COMBI- NATIONS. 170. Mathematical Induction — General Proofs of Theorems Stated in Art. 51. — Many mathematical form- ulae are not easily demonstrated by a direct mode of proof ; in such cases it is ofteu found convenient to emplo}' a method of proof which is known as Mathematical Induction. This method may be illustrated as follows : 1. Suppose it is required to establish the truth of the following formula : 12 + 2'^ + 3^ -f + -P l)(2n -p 1)^ 6 We can easil}' see bj- trial that this formula is true in simple eases, such as when n = 1, or 2, or 3 ; and from this we might be led to conjecture that the formula was true in all cases. Assume that it is true for n terms. Add (?i -H l)^to both members ; then 12+22+32 -f. . . +n2+(ji + l )2 =!l(A±ll(^A±l) + (^+iyj 6 = (n + 1) ' n(2n 4-1) 6 + R + 1 ] {n -f- l)(?i -j- 2)(2?i -p 3) — ^ which is the same formulct for the sum of ?i -p 1 terms of the series that we assume to be true for n terms, + 1 taking the place of n. In other words, if the formula is true when MATHEMATICAL INDUCTION. 375 we take a certaiu number of terms, whatever that number may be, it is true when we increase that number by one. But we see that it is true when 3 terms are taken ; therefore it is true when 4 terms are taken ; and therefore it is true wlieu 5 terms are taken ; and so on. Hence the formula is true universally. 2. The first theorem stated in Art. 51 may be proved by this method as follows : By division af - .V" ^ ^ X — y X — y hence if — y"“Ms divisible b}’ x — y, then x" — y” is divisible by a; — y. But we know that x^ — y^ is divisible by a; — y ; therefore a;® — y® is divisible by a; — y ; and therefore a;^ — y* is divisible by x — y ; and so on indefi- nitely. Hence a;" — y" is always divisible by a; — y, when n is anj' positive integer. Note. — T he two theorems which we have here proved by the method of induction may be established by other methods. There are many other theorems which are capable of easy proof by the method of induction ; and in the subsequent part of this book we shall some- times have occasion to use this method. The student of Natural Philosophy will find the word induction used in a different sense in that subject from what it has here. There we cannot be sure that the law holds in any cases except those which we have examined. In fact, induction, as used in Natural Philosophy, is never absolutely demonstrative, and often far from it; whereas the method of mathe- matical induction is as rigid as any other process in mathematics. If we change y into — y, x — y becomes x — (— y) = x y ; also x^ — y" becomes x" — ( — y)", which is .t” — y" or .t" + y", according as n is even or odd. Hence, when n is even, .t" — y" is divisible hjx-\-y, and when n is odd, x^ + y" is divisible by x y. Since af“ y" = a;" — y” + 2y”, it follows that when .t" -t- y" is divided by x — y, the remainder is 2y” ; therefore gf. _j_ yu jg divisible by x — y. 376 CONTINUED FRACTIONS. CONTINUED FRACTIONS. 171. Definition. — A Continued Fraction is one whose denominator is a whole number plus a fraction ; the denomi- nator of this last fraction a whole number plus a fraction, and so on. Thus, a + c + e -}- / g + etc. a “f- b -f c + d -f etc. are continued fractions ; but the term is commonly restricted to the latter form, where all the numerators of the partial fractions are 1, and all the denominators, a, &, c, are positive integers. For economy of space the continued fraction is often written in the more compact form ,11 1 a -f” — • 6-t- c-f d + etc. A continued fraction may either terminate with one of the denominators, or it may extend indefinitely. When the number of terms, n, 6, c, is finite, the fraction is said to be terminating ; if the number of terms is unlimited, the fraction is called an infinite continued fraction. A ter- minating continued fraction may be reduced to an ordinary fraction by simplifying the fractious in succession, beginning witli the lowest. 172. To Convert a Given Fraction into a Continued Fraction. Let — be the given fraction ; divide m by ?i, let a be the n quotient and p the remainder ; thus m , p ,1 ~ — a-p-^- — a-] . n n 71 P CONTINUED FRACTIONS. 377 Divide n by p, let h be the quotient aud q the remainder ; thus ^ + 2 i q. 1. p P P (1 Divide p by g, let c be the quotient and r the remainder ; aud so on. Thus m = (X 4- b + 1 c + etc. = a + 1 1 6-f c + etc." If m < n, the first quotient a is zero. It will be seen that the above process is the same as that of finding the greatest common divisor of m aud n. Hence we shall at last arrive at a point where the remainder is zero, and the process terminates. Thus every fraction whose numerator and denominator are positive integers can be converted into a terminating continued fraction. The fractious formed by taking one, two, three, etc., of the quotients of a continued fraction are called the first, second, third, etc., converging fractions, or convergents, because, as will be shown in Art. 176, each successive con- vergent is a nearer approximation to the true value of the fraction than au}^ of the preceding convergents. Thus, the first convergent is a ; the second convergent is formed from a + which is therefore 2^^ ^ • the third convergent is b b ° 1 c formed from a A , which is therefore a -I , i.e. c abc -f- a -p c , ! ! — ; and so on. 6c + 1 173. The Successive Convergents are Alternately Less and Greater than the Continued Fraction.— The first convergent, a, is too small because the part 378 SUCCESSIVE CONVERGENTS. ■ is omitted. The second convergent, a 4- is too b + etc. b great, because the denominator b is too small. The third convergent, a + — , is too small because i + i is too 6 +i c great ; and so on. When the given fraction is a proper fraction, a = 0; if in thifi case zero be considered as the first convergent, the above results may be enunciated as follows ; The convergents of an odd order are all less, and the con- vergents of an even order are all greater, than the continued fraction. 174. To Prove the Law of Formation of the Suc- cessive Convergents. — The first three convergents are (Art. 172) a n6 -f- 1 c{ab + 1) -b . l’ b ' &c + 1 we see that the numerator of the third convergent may be formed by multiplying the numerator of the second conver- gent by the third quotient, and adding the numerator of the first convergent ; also that the denominator of the third convergent may be formed in a similar manner bv multiply- ing the denominator of the second by the third quotient, and adding the denominator of the first. We shall now prove by induction that this law holds universally. Let the numerators of the successive convergents be denoted by g\, p.^, p^, etc., and the denominators by q„, q^, etc.; Oi, ttg, etc., the corresponding quotients; and assume that the law of formation above stated holds for the n*’’ convergent, so that Pn + 9n-2- Since the (n -f 1)“’ convergent differs from the n"' only DIFFEEENCE BETWEEN CONVERGENTS. 379 iu having the quotient + this convergent, or instead of a„, it follows that +1 Pn + l g. + l \ an + J a„ + Pn-l + Pn-2 %-i + g„_2 _ ^n-\r\{^'nPn—\ + Pn - 2 ) +^78 — 1 «n + l («,&-] + g«-2) + g„-l . O-n+lPn + P„-l _ Wi + \(ln + Qn-l Hence if we putp^ + i=a„ + ip„+Pn_i, g„ + i=«n + i?«+?n-o we see that the {n + !)'’' convergent follows the same law that was supposed to hold for the convergent. But the law does hold for the third convergent ; therefore it holds for the fourth^ and so on ; therefore it holds universally. Reduce fff to a continued fraction, and find the successive convergents. By the process of finding the greatest common divisor of 323 and 117, the successive quotients are found to be 2, 1, 3, 5, 1, 1, 2. Thus (Art. 172) m = ^ + 1 + 3 + 5 + 1 + 2 + J_ J_J_ 1 1 1 1+ 3+ 5+ 1+ 1+2 The successive quotients are 2, 1, 3, 5, 1, 1, 2. The successive convergents are f, f , ff, 175. Difference Between Two Consecutive Con- vergents. — The difference between any tioo consecutive con- vergents is a fraction whose numerator is unity, and whose 380 LIMIT OF ERROR IN TAKING ANY CONVERGENT. denominator is the product of the denominators of the con- vergents. This is evident with respect to the first two convergents ; c A4-ir-. ab + 1 a 1 for, Art. 174, — = -. b 1 b Assume the law to hold for any two consecutive conver- gents, ; so that ? 9i Pi _ P ^ Pi1 ~ P^i * ^ J_ ; ?i ~ ’ • • ' ^ ^ then, o, ttj, « 2 , etc., being the corresponding quotients, we have (Art. 174) P^ ^ ~ Ti?2 52 ^ 5i 5 i52 ^ + p)5i ~ («25 i + 5)Ti 5i52 T5i ~ 5Ti 5i52 1 ^ 2 ’ by (1). Hence if the law holds for one pair of consecutive conver- gents, it holds for the next pair. But the law does hold for the first pair, therefore it holds for the second pair, and so on. Hence it is universally true. iN'oTE. — In computing the numerical value of the successive convergents, this theorem furnishes an easy test of the accuracy of the work. All convergents are in their lowest terms; for if p and q had a common divisor it would divide p>.^q ~ unity, which is impossible. 176. Limit of Error in Taking any Convergent. — (1) Every convergent is nearer to the continued fraction than any of the preceding convergents. P P\ P-^ Let X denote the continued fraction, and —1 — 1 — ", three 5 5i 52 The sign ~ means “ the difference between.' LIMIT OF ERROR IN TAKING ANY CONVERGENT. 381 V consecutive convergents ; then x differs from — only in taking the complete quotient + 1 o, + etc. ?2 instead of a„. Denote this complete quotient, which is always greater than unity, by k ; thus _ kp,+ p , Ml + 9 ’ , [Art. 175, (1)] (1) q{Mi + q) q{Mi+q) 9i 9i(^’9i + 9) 9i(^'9i + 9) Now & > 1, and q < q^', hence for both these reasons h 9i X < X P . — ) q .. Pi . p that IS, — IS nearer to x than — is. Hence every convergent is nearer to the continued fraction than the next preceding- convergent is, and therefore than any preceding convergent. Comparing this result wuth that of Art. 173, we see that The convergents of an odd order continucdly increase., but are always less than the continued fraction. The convergents of an even order contimicdly decrease, but are always greater than the continued fraction. (2) To find limits to the error made in taking any conver- gent for the continued fraction. Since A; > 1, we see from (1) that the difference between x <-1, and> (2) 99i 9(9i + q) P Also, since > g, the error in taking — instead of x 382 LIMIT OF ERROR IN TAKING ANY CONVERGENT. Therefore, as the error is less than it follows that in order to find a convergent which will differ from the con- tinued fraction by less than a given quantity we have a only to form the consecutive couvergents until we reach one — , where is not less than a. qt 1 (3) It appears from (2) that the error in taking any Pn convergent, — , instead of the continued fraction, x or +1 (iMn + iqn + g„_i) (Art. 174) ; that is, < 1 Pn Hence the larger + j is, the nearer does — approximate Qn to the continued fraction ; therefore Any convergent which immediately precedes a large quotient is ct near approximation to the continued fraction. (4) Any convergent is nearer to the continued fraction than any other fraction whose denominator is less than that of the convergent. 1? P Let — be two consecutive couvergents, x the continued ? ?i ° fraction, and - a fraction whose denominator s is less than s r p. r If possible, let - be nearer to x than — ; then - must be s (Ji ^ P P nearer to x than bv (1) ; and since x lies between - and q’ - ^ ^ ’ q — , it follows that - must lie between - and — . Hence Si s S Si r P P 1 . . _ that IS < — (Art. 1 / o) . s q qi q’ qqi ^ ^ rq s sp<-\ Si APPROXIMATE VALUE OF A QUADRATIC SURD. 383 that is, an integer less than a proper fraction, which is Pi impossible. Therefore — must be nearer to the continued T fraction than - is. s Find a series of fractions approximating to 3.14159. By the process of finding the greatest common divisor of 314159 and 100000, the successive quotients are 3, 7, 15, 1, 25, 1, 7, 4. Thus 3.14159 = 3 + — i. 7+ 15+ 1+ 25+ 1+ 7+ 4 The successive convergents are -f-, fff, ; this last convergent which precedes the large quotient 25 is a very near approximation, the error being less than , by (3), and therefore less than .000004. 25(113)^ ^ ^ The method of continued fractions thus enables us to find two small integers whose ratio closely approximates to that of two quantities whose exact ratio can only be expressed by large integers. 177. Approximate Value of a Quadratic Surd. — By the properties of continued fractious w'e may approximate to the value of a quadratic surd. Thus, Express Vll as a continued fraction, and find a series of fractions approximating to its value. v/lT = 3 + (V^ll - 3) = 3 + fE+i = 3+ =3 + 2 2 v/n+3 = 6+ V^-3 = 6 + 2 + 3’ 1 . vn + 3’ 2 + 3’ after this the quotients 3, 6, will be repeated indefinitely; hence 1111 V'll = 3 + — — -!^ 3+ 6+ 3+ 6 + etc. 384 PERIODIC CONTINUED FRACTIONS. Explanation. — In each line of the above process we perform the same series of operations. Thus, in the first line we find the greatest integer in 0T, which is .3, and the remainder is — 3. We then rationalize the numerator, so that after inverting the result 2 —— , we begin a new line with a rational denominator. 04+3 The quadratic surd is thus expressed in the form of an infinite contimied fraction (Art. 171). It will be noticed that the quotients begin to recur as soon as we arrive at a quotient which is double of the first. It maj’ be proved that this is alwaj’s the case ; * but the proof is too long and tedious for this work. Any particular example can be solved like the above. Since the quotients are 3, 3, 6, 3, 6, etc., the first five convergents, formed by the rule in Art. 174, are f, ff, 19 9 1 _ 2 _ 5_7 379 '‘ The error in taking the last of these is less than . ° (379)'^ 178. Periodic Continued Fractions. — A continued fraction in which tlie denominators repeat themselves is called a periodic continued fraction. Thus, the continued fraction in Art. 177 is periodic. A p>eriodic continued fraction is equal to one of the roots of a quadratic equation. Let X denote the value of the continued fraction — ^ 3+ 6 + 1 1 3 -|~ 6 “h etc. ; then X I 3 + _J 6 + .T that is, .T = 6 + a; 19 + 3x’ whence x^ + 6.t = 2, a quadratic equation. The continued fraction is equal to the positive root of this equation, and is therefore equal to —3 + s/ll. (See example in Art. 177.) * Todhuutei ’s Algebra, p. 376; also Hall and Knight, p. 297. EXAMPLES. 385 1 . 2 . EXAM PLES. Eeduce each of the following fractions to a continued fraction, and find the fourth convergent to each. 253 .,,1111111 179 2+ 2+ 2+ 1+ 1+ 2+ 2 + 1189 1111111. 3927* 3+ 3+ 3+ 3+ 3+ 3+ 3 ’ 111111 2+ 1+ 2+ 2+ 1+ 3 4_84 1111111 ■ 227 ‘ 2 + 1 + 2 + 2 + 1 + 3 + 2 5. Express \Zl8 as a continued fraction, and find the limits of the error made by taking the fourth convergent. J_ J_ 1 1 577 4+ 8+ 4+ 8 +etc. ’ 136’ 1 1 1 3. .37. Ans. 4 + . n ’ 12 ' 33 1U9* 7 ■ 19' 1_ 19' and the error lies Detween 136 X 1121 and 136 X 1257 (Art. 176, (2)). PERMUTATIONS AND COMBINATIONS. 179. Definitions. — The different orders in which a number of things can be arranged, either by taking some or all of them, are called their Permutations. Thus, the permutations of tlie letters a, 6, c, taken one at a time are three, viz., a, 6, c; taken two a time, are six, viz., ah, ha, ac, ca, be, ch •, and taken three at a time, are also six, viz., abc, ach, bca, hac, cab, cba. The Combinations of things are the different groups or collections which can be made, either by taking a part or all of them, without reference to the order in which the things are placed. Thus, the combinations of the letters a, h, c, taken two at a time are three, viz., ah, ac, be; ab and ba, though differ- ent pe?’m?•— 1 ) 2-1 The numerator is now the product of the natural numbers from 71 to 1, or is |?i (Art. 180); the denominator is the product of the natural numbers from ?• to 1, and from n — r to 1. Hence we have , p .a = ;• 1 71 (2) It will be convenient to use (1) for in all cases where a numerical result is required, and (2) when it is sufficient to leave it in an Algebraic shape. Note 1. — If in (2) we put r = n, we have n c„ \f_ _ \n [0 “ [O’ but nCn = 1, SO that if the formula is to be true for r = n, the symbol [0 must he considered as equivalent to 1. THE NUMBER OF COMBINATIONS. 389 The number of combinations of n things taken r at a time is the same as the number of them taken ?i — r at a tune. For the Dumber taken n — ?• at a time is, from (2), C — n'^n — r ' [n |?i — ?• In — {n — r) \n — r . (3) which = „(7r, from (2). The truth of this proposition is also evident from the consideration that for every different group of r things taken out of n things there is always left a different group of n — r things. Hence the number of groups of r things out of n must be the same as the number of groups of n — r things. Such combinations are called complementary. Note 2. — Put r = n; then from (2) and (3), nCn = nCo = 1- The proposition just proved is useful in enabling us to abridge Arithmetic work. Thus, 1. Required the number of combinations of 20 things taken 18 together. The required number is the same as the number taken 2 together. 20 X 19 1x2 = 190. If we had used the formula jqC'is, we should have had to reduce an expression whose numerator and denominator each contained 18 factors. 2. From 12 books, in how many ways can a selection of 5 be made when one specified book is always excluded? Since the specified book is always to be excluded, we have to select the 5 books out of the remaining 11. Hence 11 ^5 = 11 • 10-9- 8 • 7 1 • 2 • 3 • 1 . 5 462. 3. How many combinations may be made of 10 letters taken 6 at a time? Hns. 210. 4. From 11 books, in how man}' ways can a selection of 4 be made? Ans. 330, 390 TO DIVIDE m + n THINGS INTO TWO CLASSES. 182. To Divide m + n Things into Two Classes. — To find the number of ways in which m -\- n differeid things can be divided into two classes, so that one may contcdn m and the other n things. This is equivalent to finding the number of combinations f m + 71 things m at a time, for every time we select one ,roup of m things, we leave a group of n things behind, lienee by (2) of Art. 181, \m + 71 The required number = . [m In a similar manner it may be shown that the number of ways in which m + n + p different things can be divided into three classes containing 7n, n, p things respectively is + w + p \m In [p 1. There are three bookshelves capable of containing 14, 22, and 24 books ; in how many ways can 60 books be allotted to the shelves? Here we have to divide 60 things into groups of 14, 22, and 24 things. 160 Hence the required number = =- — . |14 |22 ^ 2. From 7 Englishmen and 4 Americans a committee of 6 is to be formed, containing 2 Americans ; in how many ways can this be done? Here we have to choose 2 Americans out of 4, and 4 Englishmen out of 7. The number of ways in which the Americans can be chosen is ; and the number of wa}’s in which the Englishmen can be chosen is Each of the first groups can be associated with each of the second. Hence the required number of waj’S is PERMUTATIONS OF 11 THINGS NOT ALL DIFFERENT. 391 3. In how many ways can the 52 cards in a pack be divided among 4 playmrs, each to have 13? Ans. 183. Permutations of n Things not all Different. — To find the number of permutations of n things taken all (it a time, ivhen they are not all different. Let there be n letters ; and suppose p of them to be a, q of them to be b, r of them to be c, and the rest to be unlike. Let P be the required number of permutations. If in any one of the actual permutations, the p letters a were all changed into p> letters different from each other and from all the rest, then from this single permutation, without alter- ing the position of any of the remaining letters, we could form new pennutations. Hence if this change were made in each of the P permutations, there would be P X [p per- mutations. Similarly, if in any one of these new permutations, the q letters b were changed into q letters different from each other and from all the rest, then from this single permutation we could form [g new permutations. Hence the whole number of permutations would now be P X [p X [g. In like manner, if the r letters c were also changed so that no two were alike, the total number of permutations would be P X [p X [g X [r. But this number must be equal to tlie number of permutations of n different things taken all together, which is [u. Hence P X [p X [g X |r = [n. And similai’l}' any other case may be treated. 1. How many different permutations can be formed out of the letters of the word Mississippi taken all together? |o2 392 EXAMPLES. Here we have 11 letters, of which 4 are i, 4 are s, and 2 are p. Ill P = - = 11-10-9-7-5 = 34650. 2. ITow many different permutations can he made out of the letters of the word assassination taken all together? Ans. 10810800. EXAMPLES. Reduce each of the following fractions to a continued fraction, and find the fourth convergent to each. 1 159‘ 9 2318’ 3. .3029. 4+ 3-(- 2+ 1+ 3 JLJ_J__L 1111 3+ 5+ 1+ 1+ 3+ 2+ 1+ 5 1 1 1 1 3+ 3+ 3+6+1+ 2+ 1+ 10 ’ 1.57 W n 35' 63 208’ 4. A metre is 39.37079 inches; show by the theory of continued fractions that 32 metres is nearly equal to 35 yards. 5. A kilometre is veiy nearly equal to .62138 miles ; show by the theory that the fractious are successive approximations to the ratio of a kilometre to a mile. 6. Two bells begin to ring together; the one rings 12 times in 7 minutes, and the other 17 times in 9 minutes; what strokes most nearly coincide in the first half-hour? A7ts. The 49th of the first with the 54th of the second. 7. Ex])ress 27.321661 days, the average period of the moon’s revolution, by the nearest equivalent fraction whose denominator is less than 1000. Ans. 2744f days. 8. Find a series of fractions converging to .2422642. the excess in days of the true tropical year over 365 days. J „ C 1 7 8 _3 9_ 4 7_ 32 1 pfp EXAMPLES. 393 9. The relative sidereal periods of Venus and the earth are 224700 days and 3G5256 days : find a series of fractions pnTivPTO’i no’ Iri ^247 0 0 1 — -2- ^ 8 pf'p convergiLig lo ^^ 52 5 -b* 1 , 3 ’ 5 ’ i 3 ’ 382 ’ The 5th convergent, which precedes the large quotient 29, is a very near approximation, the error being less than [Art. 176, (3)]. In consequence of this, a transit occurs after a period of 8 years, and then again not till after 235 years have been completed. 10. Express y/l9 as a continued fraction, and find a series of fractions approximating to its value, and show that the 7th convergent will give the true value to at least 4 places of decimals. con- Ans. v/l9 = 4 + — ^ 2+ 1+3+ 1+2+8 + vergents are f, f, ih ih = 11. Show that the 9th convergent to \/S3 will give . the true value to at least 6 places of decimals. 12, Find the limits of the error when is taken for A?is. — — and ^ 44 X 49 44 X 93 13. Find the value of ^ 1 + 2 + 1+2 + Ans. Positive root of + 2.r = 2. 14. Find the value of ^ 3+ 2+ 1+ 3+ 2+ 1 + Ans. Positive root of 7x^ + 8.r = 3. 15. How many different numbers can be formed by using six out of the nine digits, 1, 2, 3, 9? A)is. 60480. 16. Required the number of changes which can be rung upon 12 bells taken all together. H;is. 479001600. 17. Required the number of combinations of 24 different letters taken 4 at a time. Ans. 10626. 18. Out of 14 men, in how many ways can 11 be chosen? A?is. 364. 394 EXAMPLES. 19. How many different products can be formed with any three of the figures 1, 3, .5, 7, 9? Ans. 10. 20. In how many ways can 6 copies of Horace, 4 of Virgil, and 3 of Homer be given to 13 boys, so that each boy may receive a book? Ans. 600G0. 21. Out of 7 consonants and 4 vowels, how many words can be made each containing 3 consonants and 2 vowels? '* Ans. 2.5200. 22. How many parties of 12 men each can be formed from a company of 60 men? |60 _4ns. 23. Out of 12 Republicans and 16 Democrats, how many different committees could be formed, each consisting of 3 Republicans and 4 Democrats ? ^ 14 |12 24. Out of 10 consonants and 4 vowels, how many words can be formed, each containing 3 consonants and 2 vowels? Alls. 86400. 25. There are 10 candidates for 6 vacancies in a commit- tee : in how manj’ ways can a person vote for 6 of the can- didates? H?is. 210. 26. In how many ways can a cricket eleven be chosen out of fourteen players? Ans. 364. 27. In how many ways could 2 ladies and 2 gentlemen be chosen to make a set at tennis from a part}’ of 4 ladies and 6 gentlemen? Ans. 90. 28. In how many ways could 2 ladies and 2 gentlemen be chosen to make a set at tenuis from a party of 6 ladies and 8 gentlemen? Ans. 420. 29. From 6 ladies and 5 gentlemen, in how many ways could you arrange sides for a game of croquet, so that there would be 2 ladies and one gentleman on each side? 30. Out of 6 ladies and 8 Hhs. ^15 or 1800. gentlemen, how many different EXAMPLES. 395 parties can be formed, each consisting of 3 ladies and 4 gentlemen ? 1 6 1 8 X : • ^|4 31. How many different permutations can be made out of the letters of the word Heliopolis? Ans. 453600. 32. How many out of the letters of the words, Ecclesias- tical., Papatoitoi? Ans. 454053600 ; (! 2 )« 33. If the number of permutations of n things taken 4 together is equal to 12 times the number of permutations of n things taken 2 together ; find n. Ans. 6. 34. In how many ways can a party of 6 take their places at a round table? Ans. 60. 35. How many words of two consonants and one vowel can be formed from 6 consonants and 3 vowels, the vowel being the middle letter of each word ? Ans. 90. 36. How many words of 6 letters may be formed with 3 rowels and 3 consonants, the vowels always having the even places? Ans. 36. 37. There are 15 boat-clubs ; 2 of the clubs have each 3 boats on the river, 5 others have 2, and the remaining 8 have one : find the number of ways in which a list can be formed of the order of the 24 boats, observing that the second boat of a club cannot be above the first. 1 24 Hns. --- {isy 38. How many numbers can be formed with the digits 1, 2, 3, 4, 3, 2, 1, so that the odd digits always occupy the odd place? Ans. 18. 39. In how man}' ways can 5 prizes be given away to 4 boys, when each boy is eligible for all the prizes? Ans. 1024. 40. A man has 6 friends ; in how many ways may he invite one or more of them to dinner? Ans. 63. 396 DEFINITIONS. — INDETERMINATE COEFFICIENTS. CHAPTER XIX. INDETERMINATE* COEFFICIENTS— PARTIAL FRACTIONS — BINOMIAL THEOREM. 184. Definitions. — An Algebraic expression is said to be developed, when it is transformed into a series the sum of all the terms of which is equal to the given expression. The series itself is called the development of that expression. When the sum approaches a limit as the number of terms is increased, the series is said to be convergent. When the sum does not approach a limit as the number of terms is increased, the series is said to be divergent. Thus, the series in Art. 165 are convergent series. The series 1 + 2 + 3 + etc. to qo is divergent because there is no limit to the sum of its terms. Any irreducible fraction ma\' be developed into an infinite series by dividing the numerator by the denominator. Thus, by division we find that the fraction ■ — ^ — - = 1 — X- — x^ + .X-® + a-® — a® — etc. 1 — .a + The method which is the most frequently used for devel- oping expressions, is that of Indeterminate Coefficients. It consists in assuming for the required development a series with unknown coefficients, and then finding the values of these coefficients. 185. Indeterminate CoefBcients. — (l) If the infiniie series + cqa + a^x- + a^x^ + is equal to zero for every finite vcdue of x for tchich the series is convergent, then each coefficient must be equal to zero. * Called also U7ideierminate aud undetermined coefficients. DEVELOPMENT BY INDETERMINATE COEFFICIENTS. 397 For since the equation, Oq + a^x + + ajX® + etc. = 0, is true for all values of x which make it convergent, it must be true when x = 0 . Putting a; = 0 , it becomes = 0 . Removing a^, the equation becomes a^x + + a^x^ + etc. = 0. Dividing by a;, ai + + a^x“^ + etc. = 0. This equation is true for all values of x which make it eonvergent ; hence it must be true when a: = 0 . Putting a; = 0, it beeomes Ui = 0. Continuing the process, we find a.^ = 0 , 0.3 = 0 , etc. indefinitely. (2) If tivo infinite series are convergent and equal to each other for every finite value of the vcoriable, the coefficients of the like powers of the variable in the two series are equal. Let the two equal series be «o + aye + affi^ + Oaffi + etc., 60 + hyx + b-iX^ + bffi^ + etc. Subtract the second from the first ; then «o — ^0 + («i — + («2 — b.2)x^ + etc. = 0. Since this equation is true for all values of .c, the coeffi- cients of the different powers of .^• must all be zero by (1); hence «o — &o = 0? ai — bi — 0, a^ — b^ — 0, etc. ; that is, Oo = &05 (-h — <^'2 = ^2? etc. The application of these equations is known under the name of equating coefficients of like powers of x. 186. Development by Indeterminate Coefficients. — The theorem given in Art. 18.5 is sometimes referred to as the Principle * of Indeterminate Coefficients. It is applied * Called also method of indeterminate coefDcieuts. 398 DEVELOPMENT BY INDETERMINATE COEFFICIENTS. to the development of expressions in powers of the variable. The application of the principle is best seen in the following examples.* 2 I - 1. Expand — ^ into a series of ascending powers 1 a. — cc of X as far as the term involving a;®. It is plain that the development is possible, for we have seen (Art. 184) that any fraction may be expanded into a series by dividing the numerator by the denominator. Let us then assume = A + Bx + Ox-2 + + Ex* + Fx^ + etc. , ( 1 ) 1 + X’ — X® where A, B, C, etc. are independent of x, but depend upon the constants of the fraction, and its form. It is now required to find such values for the constants. A, B, C, etc. as will make the assumed development true for all values of X. Clearing (1) of fractious, and collecting the terms with the same powers of x, we have 2+x^ = A + {A + B)x + (-A+B+C)x-+{-B + C+D).v^ + { — C + D + E)x* + { — D + E + F)x^ + etc. Equating the coefficients of the like powers of x (Art. 185), we have A = 2. A + -B = 0, which gives B = —A = — 2. —A + B + C = 1, which gives (7 = 1 + A — B = b. — B+ C + D = 0, which gives D = B — C = — 7. — C+D+E = 0, which gives E = C — D = 12. — D E + F = 0, which gives B = Z) — E = — 19. Ill these applications the series are always regarded as cojivergent- DEVELOPMENT BY INDETERMINATE COEFFICIENTS. 399 Substituting these values of the coefficients in (1), it becomes — — 2 — 2cc -h — 7x^ + 12a;* — 19a:® -i- etc. I -i- X — In applying the method of iiidetermioate coefficients, the form of the given expression will determine what powers of X must be assumed. In the example just solved, we assumed the series to be arranged according to the ascending powers of X beginning with a;® ; but in many series this is not the case, and the error in the assumed series will then appear, either by an absurd result, or by the coefficients of those terms which do not exist in the actual series reducing to zero. By dividing the term of the numerator having the lowest power of x by the term of the denominator having the lowest power of a;, we may always determine the expo- nent of X in the first term of the series. We may then assume a series beginning with this exponent of a;, and arranged according to the ascending powers of x as usual. Thus, 2. Expand — - into a series. 3a: — x^ If we should assume the series to be .4 -f- Bx -t- Cx^ 4- etc. , on clearing of fractious, and proceeding to equate the coeffi- cients of like powers of a:, we would have no term on the right corresponding to 1 on the left ; so that we would have 1 = 0, an absurd result. Hence we infer that the expres- sion cannot be developed according to the ascending powers of X beginning with a:®. But, dividing 1 by 3a:, we get — - for the first term of the 3 quotient ; hence we may assume a series beginning with x *, and the exponents increasing by unity. Thus, 1 3a: — x^ — Ax~'^ B + Cx Dx^ Eof + etc. 400 DEVELOPMENT BY INDETERMINATE COEFFICIENTS. Clearing this of fractions, and collecting the terms with the same powers of a;, we have 1 = 3.4 + (3-B - A)x + (3C - B)x^ + (3i) - + etc. Equating the coefBcients of the like powers of a;, we find A — I B — E (7 _ JL n — JL etc — 9? ^ — 27’ — 81’ tJLC/. 1 ~ 1 1 rj* /T»2 Therefore — - = ? [-- + — + — + etc. 3x - 3 9 27 81 3. Expand VI + a; into a series. Assume Vl + a; = A + Bx + Cx^ + Dx^ + etc. Squaring, 1+ a: = A^+ 2A Bx + (B^+ 2AC)x^+ {2BC + 2AD)x*-\- etc. Equating the coefficients of like powers of x, A^ = 1, 2AB - 1, B- + 2AC = 0, 2BC + -2AD = 0, A = 1. B = h C = -i D = and so on. ^rT-.= i+f-| + ^ + e.c, Note. — Since = 1, A — ±1; we might take the value A = — 1, in which case we would find B = — C — D = — and so on, so that Vl + X Expand the following to four terms : 1 + 2x X 4- 5x + 4- 45.r®. 1 - 3x ^ 1 4- 2x 1 — X — 6. V'l - X. 1 4- 3x 4- 4.x- 4- X ^ ^ ^ ~ 2 ~ ^ 16 ' PARTIAL FRACTIONS. 401 PARTIAL FRACTIONS. 187. Partial Fractions. Case I. — When the factors of the denominator are all unequal. When the denominator of a fraction can be resolved into factors, we may by the principle of indeterminate coefficients decompose the fraction into the sum of two or more simpler fractious, called qjarticd frac- tions., the denominators of which are the factors of the given denominator. AVe shall give a few examples illustrating the decomposition of a rational fraction into partial fractions. For a general discussion of the subject, the student is referred to Treatises on the Theory of Equations, and on the Integral Calculus.* f)X — 11 Resolve into partial fractious. 2x^- + X - 6 Since the denominator 2x^ + x — 6 = (x -{- 2) (2a; we assume 5a; 11 A + B 2x^ + a; — 6 a; + 2 2x — 3 3 ), ( 1 ) where A and B are independent of x, and at present unknown. We have then to find such values for A and B as will make (1) an identity., that is, true whatever may be the value of x. Clearing (1) of fractious, it becomes 5a; - 11 = ^(2a; - 3) + B{x + 2) . . (2) Since (2) is identically true, we may equate the coefficients of like powers of x ; thus, 2A + B ^ b, -3A + 2B = -11 ; whence A = 3, and B — —1, which in (1) gives 5x - 11 ^ _3 1_ 2a;2 + a; - 6 “ a; + 2 2a; - 3’ Second Method. In practice, in this case, there is a simpler method of finding the values of A, B, etc. than by equating * See Todhunter’B Theory of Equations, Chap. XXIV., Integral Calculus, Chap. II., also Serret’s Cours d’Algebre Superieure. 402 CASE II. the coefficients. Since A and B are independent of x, we may give to x any value we please. If in (2) we put a; + 2 = 0, or £c = — 2, then we have immediately — 10 - 11 = -lA, or A = In the same way, putting 2a; — 3 = 0, or a; = f, we get — 11 = (f + 2)iJ, or B = ~\, as before. 188. Case II. — When the factors of the denominator are equal. 2 3a;2 1. Resolve into partial fractions. (a; + 2Y ^ . 2 - 3a;2 Assume {x + 'ly 4- 2 + B ( 'V - 1 _ 9 ^ + ( 1 ) Eem. — All the factors of the given denominator must be taken as denominators of the assumed fractions. Thus, in this example, the denominators of the partial fractions may be (a; + 2), (a: + 2)^, (x + 2)*. It is therefore necessary to assume fractions with each of these denominators, so as to include every ijossible case which can produce the given fraction, although A or R may reduce to zero. Clearing (1) of fractions, it becomes 2 - 3a;2 = A(x + 2y + B{x + 2) + C. Equating the coefficients of like powers of x, AA + 2B + C = 2, 4A + jS = 0, and A — —3. Solving these three equations, we get A = -3, B = 12, C = -10, which in (1) gives 2 - 3.i;2 _ 3 12 10 {X + 2y ~ a- 4- 2 ^ (X + 2y {x + 2)*' Note. — In this case we cannot find the values of A, B, C, etc. by the second method of Case I., hut have to employ the first. When both equal and unequal factors, however, occur in the denominator, both methods may be combined to advantage, as in the following example. CASE III. 403 3 ^ 1 • 2. Resolve — into partial fractions. x^{l + X)- Assume 3x - 1 x^(l + a;)^ = 4 + ^ + D C 1 -f~ ^ (,f 4“ 7 (See Rem.) (1) Clearing (1) of fractions, it becomes 3x-\=^Ax{\-\-xY + B{\+xY+Cx-{l+x) + Dx^ . (.2) Here we may use the second method of Case I. as follows : Putting X = 0, we find B = Putting a; = — 1, we find i) - —4. To find A and (7, equate the coefficients of x^ and x ^ ; thus, equating coefficients of rr‘^, 0 = 2H + R+ C' + Z), or 2H + (7 = 5 (3) Equating coefficients of a;®, A + (7 = 0 (4) Solving (3) and (4), we find A = 5, (7 = -5, which in (1) gives 3a: - 1 ^ 5 _ J_ _ _5 4 a;^(l + x)‘^ X x^ 1 + X (1 + x)^ 189. Case III. — When some of the factors of the denominator are of the second degree. 42 — 19a; 1. Resolve into partial fractions. (a;2 + i)(a; _ 4) ^ Here we have the factor a:" + 1 for the denominator of one of the partial fractions ; the numerator, therefore, may contain the first power of a;, as well as the zero power ; therefore assume 42 - 19.r ^ Ar + R (7 {x- + 1) (a: - 4) “ a;2 + 1 a; -4' 42 - 19x = (Aa; + R) (a; - 4) + C(a;'^ + 1). 404 CASE lit. Putting £c = 4, we find (7 = — 2. Equating coefficients of x^, 0 = A-\-C\ A=2. Equating the absolute terms, 42= —4 ^ — , 42 - 19a; __ 2a; - 11 2 (a;^ -H 1) {x — 4) a;'^ + 1 a: — 4* In each of these four examples the numerator has been of a lower degree than the denominator. When this is not the case we may by division (Art. 81) reduce the fraction to the sum of an integral expression and a fraction whose numerator is of a lower degree than the denominator. 2. Resolve — i^to partial fractions. 3a;' — 2a; — 1 By division, 6a;^ + 5a;" - 7 3a;^ — 2a; — 1 = 2a; + 3 + Resolving this fraction into partial fractions as in (1), Art. 187, 8a; - 4 3a;'^ — 2a; — 1 3a; + 1 + 1 3a;' — 2a; — 1 = 2a; + 3 + 3x + 1 + a; — 1 Resolve into partial fractions : o 8x — 4 ^ 23.r - 11. (2.r - 1)(9 - a;'-^)' g 3;r" + a; - 2 2)^(1 -2.r)' 26.r^ + 208.a; {x‘^ + l){x + 5)‘ Ans. ■ — - — .a; + 2 + 3 .a; — 2 v; ; “v • — 1 o "1“ ^ o — X 1 5 3(1 -2a;) 3(.r-2) (.r-2)-‘ .a; + 5 3.r - 41 x~ -|- 1 6 . .af BINOMIAL THEOREM. 405 BINOMIAL THEOREM. 190. Positive Integral Exponent. — The method of raising a binomial to any power by repeated multiplication has been explained in Art. 109. We shall now prove a formula known as the Binomial Theorem.,* by which any binomial can be raised to any power without the labor of actual multiplication. To prove the Binomial Theorem for a positive integral exponent. By actual multiplication we obtain “{- n) (^x -|- 5^ — - X -{- ^a -f- l)^x ah ^ (x+a) (x+b) (a;+ c) = .x’®+ {a + b + c).r^ + (a6 + ac + bc)x + abc. In these results we see that the following laws hold : 1. The number of terms on the right side is one more than the number of the binomial factors on the left side. 2. The exjwnent of x in the first term is the same as the number of binomial factors, and decreases by o?ie in each successive term. 3. The coefficient of the first term is unity ; of the second term, the sum of the letters a, b, c; of the third term, the sum of the products of the letters a, b, c, taken tivo at a time; and the fourth term is the product of all the letters. We shall now prove by induction (Art. 170) that these laws always hold whatever be the number of binomial factors. Suppose these laws to hold for n — 1 binomial factors, so that {x+a) {x+b) . . (x+k) =af~'^+Ax’‘~'^+B3f~-"+C.v”~*+ . . K, (1) where A — a + b-\-c-\-....-\-k, the sum of the second terms, B = ab ac be +- , the sum of the products of these terms taken two at a time. C = abc + abd + , the sum of the products of these terms taken three at a time. K = abed k, the product of all these terms. This theorem was discovered by Newtou. 406 POSITIVE INTEGRAL EXPONENT. Multiply both sides of (1) by another factor (a; + Z) ; thus, (a;+a)(a;+6) .... {x+k){x+l)=x'^+{A+l)3l'-^ + .... +/tZ ... (2) Now A-\-l = ci-\-bA(^~i~ = the sum of all the terms a, b, c, 1. B + Al = ab+ac+bc+ . . . +al+bl+ cl -\- . . . +kl. = the sum of the products taken two at a time. C + Bl = abc + abd + . . . + abl + acl + bcl + . . . = tlie sum of the products taken three at a time. XI = abed . . . kl — the product of all the tei’ms a, b, c, . . . . 1. Also the exponent of x in the first term is the same as the number of binomial factors, and decreases by 1 in each suc- cessive term. Hence if the laws hold when n — \ factors are multiplied together, they hold when n factors are multiplied together ; but they liave been proved to hold for 3 factors, therefore they hold for 4 factors, and therefore for 5 factors, and so on, generally, for any number whatever. Now let &, c, d, Z, each = a ; then the binomial factors are all equal, and the first member of (2) becomes (.'C-t-a) (x-(-a) . . . = {x+a) taken n times as a factor = (x-pa)" ; and the second member becomes H-fZ = a-t-a-|-a-t-.... = a taken n times = na. B Al = aa aa . . . = taken as many times as there are combinations of n letters taken 2 at a time = ~ ^) (Art. 181). C + Bl = aaa -f aaa -f = a® taken as many times as there are combinations of n letter's taken 3 at a time = z) . gQ lA POSITIVE INTEGRAL EXPONENT. 407 Kl = aaaa . — a taken n times as a factor = a”. Substituting in (2), we obtain {x + (i)" = x" + nax’'~^ + a^af-2 , n(n — l)(n — 2) , „_■> , „ [3 ^ ^ This formula is called the Binomial Theorem; the series in the second member is called the expansion of {x + a)". In this expansion we observe the following Eule. ( 1 ) The exponent of x in the first term is the same as the exponent of the poiver, and decreases by unity in each succeed- ing term; the exponent of 'a begins with one in the second term., and increases by unity in each succeeding term. (2) The coefiicient of the first term is i, that of the second is the exponent of the poiver, and if the coefiicient of any term be multipilied by the exponent of x in that term, and the product be divided by the number of the term, the quotient will be the coefiicient of the next term. By changing re to a and a to re, we have -J) + ^a"”®re® + , . . re" . . (4) (a + re)" = a" + Tia" 're + 111 I If we write —a for a in (3), we obtain (re — a)" = re" — nax^~^ + ^ — . . . . (5) Thus the odd powers of a are negative and the even powers positive, and the last term is positive or negative according as n is even or odd. Suppose a = 1, then (4) becomes (l+re)"=l+nre+ ^ ^ ” (g) |2 [3 which is the simplest form of the binomial theorem. 408 GENERAL TERM OF THE EXPANSION. 1. Expand {x + By the rule, we have (a; + a)® = + 5x'% + 10a;®a- + lOx-a^ + 5xa* + a®. Similarly 2. (a— 2a:)’=a^— 7a®(2a;) + 21a®(2x)2— 35a^(2x)®+35a®(2x)* — 21a'^(2x)®+7a(2x)®— (2x)^. =a’— 1 4a®x+84a®x-— 280aV+560a®x^ — 672a^x®+448ax®— 1 28x’. Expand the following by the Binomial Theorem : 3. (x — 3)®. X® — 15x*+ 90x® — 270x^ + 405x — 243. 4. (3x + 2ijY- 81 x^ + 21G.x®y + 21Gxy + 9Gxy® + IG?/. 5. (x® + x)®. x^“ -f 5x® + lOx® + lOx" + 5x® -}- x®. G. (2-|-x-)b IG -4Sx‘2 + o4x-‘- 27.x® + fix®. The sum of the coefficients in the expansion of (1 -f x)" is 2". For put X = 1 ; then (1 + x)« = (1 + D" = 2" = 1 + n + ~ + etc. = sum of the coefiBcients. Also, by putting x = —1, we have (1 — 1 )'* = 1 — )i + ~ — etc. ; .•. 0 = sum of the odd coefficients — the sum of the even ones; i.e., the sums of the odd and even coefficients are equal, and therefore each = if X 2" = 2"~h 191. The rtJi or General Term of the Expansion. — In the expansion of (.x + a)", we see that the second term is ??.x'*“V(; the third term is ^^x"~^a-; and so on ; the last factor in the denominator of each term being one less than the number of the term to which it applies, one greater than the negative number in the last factor of the numerator, and the same as the exponent of a ; and also ANY EXPONENT 409 that the exponent of x is found by subtracting the exponent of a from n. Hence the ' term = n{n — 1 ) — 2) (n — r + 2)x" — r + 1, r — 1 This is called the general term, because by giving to r different numerical values, any assigned term may be ob- tained. The coefficient of the r”‘ term fropi the beginning is equal to the coefficient of the r'* term from the end. The coefficient of the r'*' term from the beginning is n{n — l)(n — 2) {n — ?• -f- 2) 1 By multiplying both terms by In r + 1 , this becomes r — 1 — ?■ -f 1 See (1) and (2) of Art. 181. The r*’' term from the end is the (n — r + 2)“' term from the beginning, and its coefficient is n(n — 1) r + 1 -, which also = 1 |?i — r + 1 Therefore the coefficients of the latter half of an expansion may be taken from the first half. 1. Find the fifth term of (a 2.c®)^^. Here n = 17, ?• = 5 ; therefore the 5th term = 17 • 16 • 15 • 14 1 • 2 . .3 • 4 X 16.X-1- = 38080a%i-^ 2. Find the 14th term of (3 — a)’®. Ans. — 945n^^. 3. Find the 7th term of (a^ + 3aby. 61236cd='5®. 4. Find the 5th term of (a^ — 495a'®5®. 5. Find the 5th term of (3.r^ — 126 X 2>^xH*y-. 192. Any Exponent. — To prove the Binomial Theorem when the exponent is fractional or negatice. 410 AiiY EXPONENT. Since, by Art. 190, every binomial may be reduced to one common type, (1 + x)", it will be suHicient to confine our attention to binomials of this form. We have seen that when n is a positive integer, (1 + = 1 + na; + We shall now prove that this formula is true when n is frac- tional or negative. In this proof, which has for its object the expansion of (1 + a;)" in the form P + Qx + Axr + -f etc., we shall first find P and Q, and then determine the other coefficients, A, P, etc., in terms of P and Q. (1) To find P and Q. Since (1 + xfi — P + Q-'c -}- Ax~ + for every value of X, the equation must be true when x = 0 ; therefore P = 1 Hence vl + ^Y = 1 + Qa; + Ax~ + P Let n be a positive fraction = -, where ja and q are positive integers. p Assume (1 + ^Y = 1 + Qx + etc. (1 + xY = (1 + Qx + etc.)’, or \ -p px etc. = 1 + qQx + etc. (Art. 190). Q = |(Art. 185). Let n be a negative integer or fraction = —m \ then (1 + x)" = (1 + a--)-"" = ^ = = 1 — mx + etc., by division. 1 + mx + etc. Hence, generally, the numerical coefficient of x in the ANY EXPONENT. 411 second term is the same as the exponent, and the form of the expansion is (1 + a;)" = 1 + nx + A Bx^ + Cx'^ + . (1) ( 2 ) To find the other coefficients. To find A, B, etc., we put x A z for x in ( 1 ), and then expand 1 + a; + 2 in two different ways ; first regarding a- + 2 as one term ; and second regarding 1 + 2 as one term. Thus, [1 +(a; + 2)]”= 1 A n{x A z) A A{x A ^YAB{x A zYA Ac. = 1 + nx A Ax^ + B.A + etc. -f- ?i2 4 - ^Axz + 3Bxh + etc. . . . ( 2 ) + etc. + etc. [(l+2)+a-]" = (l+2)’'^l+^y = (l+2)"(l+^ + Ax'^ - + etc. 1+2 ' (1+2)2 = (1 +2)"+n( 1 + 2 )"'’ x’+^l(l +2)"~2a;2-petc. = 1 +nx+^a;2+etc. +n2 + ?i(n— l)2a;+2l(ri — 2)2x2+etc. . ( 3 ) + etc. + etc. + etc. Now as ( 2 ) and ( 3 ) are the expansions of the same expression in the same form, the coefficients of 2, 2a;, zx'^, etc., must be the same in both. Equating them, w'e get = n, 2.4 = n(?i — 1 ), 3B = A{n — 2 ), etc. . ^ ^ 5 = A{n-2) ^ n(n-l)(n-2) [2 ' 3 ^ where the law is obvious. Substituting these values in ( 1 ), we have (l+a;)"=: l+na;d — ^a;2-| — ^a;®+ etc., (4) \2 [3 which proves the Binomial Theorem for all values of n. 412 ANY EXPONENT. whether fractional or negative. Hence the theorem is com- pletely established. Note. — I f n is a positive integer in the expansion of (1 + .t)", when we form the successive factors, n — 1, n. — 2, etc., the Ji'** factor will be n — n, or 0, and therefore all the coefficients after that of x” will vanish, for they will all have this factor. Hence, the series will end with the (n -f 1)‘'’ term. But if n is negative or fractional, none of the factors, n — 1, n — 2, etc., can become 0, and therefore the series will be infinite. 1. Expand (1 — to four terms. (1-.X)^= l + 3(-a;) + Mz^(-.xO^+ MTlX^ \. • 2, 1. * 2 * ij . 1- 2. Expand (2 + 3x) * to four terms. (2 + .3ar)-“ = 2-4(1 + f-)- (_4)(_o)(-6)/.3.cV 1- 2- 3 (W— j ^ Jl ( 1 _ 6.e + —X- 16 2 13.5 x^ + The Binomial Theorem may also be applied to expand expressions which contain more than two terms. 3. Expand (x~ + 2a; — 1)®. Regarding 2.r — 1 as a single term, the expansion = (x-)^ + 3(.v-)-^(2x - 1) + 3.v^(2x - 1)" + (2.-C - 1)® = x° + 6x^ + 9x* — 4.T® — 9.V- 4- 6.r — 1, by reduction. A root may often be extracted by means of tlie Binomial Theorem. 4. Find the cube root of 126 to 5 places of decimals. 1263 = (5® + 1)^ = 5^1 + / I 1 ^(1-1) 1 i(i-l)(X-2) 1 \ V 3 5® 1-2 5® 1 .2-3 5® 7 5 + i . 1 - i - 35® 95® 81 5' = 5.01329. EXAMPLES. 413 Expand to 4 terms : 5. (1 + 6 '• • Ans. 1 — 2x^ 4- 3a;^ — 4a;®. l+a; + | 54 7. Find to 5 decimal places. 1 8 . Find to 5 decimal places. 9.89949. 0.19842. EXAMPLES. Expand by the Method of Indeterminate Coefficients to 4 terms. - 1 . 1 4 - 2 a Ans. 1 4 - 3a + 4a^ 4 - 7a®. 1 — a — a- 2 . 1 + a 1 _i_ 1 _ 3 ,.2 4. 1 0.3 ^ 4^ 4**' 8‘‘' 4^ ■ 2 + a 4 - 3. 3 4- ic 3 1 5 1 X X I 2 X -)»3 2 — X — a^ 4. . 1 — nx’+a(a + l).r-— (a®+2a^— l)a;®. 1 + «a; — ax^ — x^ 5. Vl 4 - a; 4 - a;^. 1 4 ^a; + fa;^ — -j®^a;®. Resolve into partial fractions : 6 . 7. 8 . 9. 10 . 7a; — 1 1 - 5a; + 6a;2’ 1 4- 3a; 4- 2a;^ (1 — 2 a;)(l — a;^) - 10a- + 13 (a — IXa'^ — 5a 4 - 6 ) Alls. 5 1 — 2 a 3 1 — a 4 a — 3 9 113 (a - l)(a 4- 2)2‘ a - 1 a 4- 2 (a 4- 2)"' 3a®-8a^4-1 0 5 1_ 1 _3_ (a- 1 )"' ' (a- 1 )^ (a- 1 )® (a- 1 )^ a- 1 ‘ 414 EXAMPLES. 11 . _ (1 + a;)(l + x^) 2x^ — llx + 5 3x 1 (x — 3) (x'^ + 2x — 5) X* - 3x^ - 3x" + 10 (x + l)\x — 3) x^ -j- 2x — 5 X — 3 Ans. X — 2 + 11 17 16(a; + 1) 4(a; + 1)^ 16(cc - 3) Expand the following by the Binomial Theorem. 14. {2x — y)®. Ans. 32ic® — 80.r*y + 80a;®y^ — 40.r^y® + 10.ry* — y®. 15. (3a -D®. Ans. 729a^ - 972a® + 540a" - 160a® + ^ ^ 17. (1 + 2a- - a"-)". vlns. l + 8a4-20a®-t-8a®— 26.r"— 8a®+20.a®— 8a'+a®. 18. (3.a®-2aa+3a®)®. ^/is. 27.a®— 54a.a®+ 1 1 7a®r"— 1 16a®a®+ 1 1 7a".r®— 54a®a+27a®. Write down and simplify : 19. The 4th term of (a — 5)"®. Ans. — 35750.r"®. 20. The 10th term of (1 — 2a)"®. — 112640.r-®. 3 27 729 40a"5®. 10500 23. The 5th term of (a'^a ^ — y^6 ^)®. 70a®y"®a-®6~®. EXAMPLES. 415 Expand to 4 terms : 24. (1 - x)i. 25. (1 - 3«)^- 26. (1 - 3a;)-i - ('+ir 28. (1 + 29. (8 + 12a)i 30. (9 - Qx)-^. 31. (4a — 8«)“i. Ans. 1 - fa; - ^x‘^ - 1 — X — x^ — |-x®. 1 + X + 2a;^ + 1 'T* I .2./j-*2 1 0 X ^ 3*^ 2 7 * 1 — 2a 4- |a^ — fa^. 4(1 + a — ia^ + -|a®). ^(1 + X + 1 A X 3 a;^ 5 x^ 2a'i\ + 5 + 1 - ,ttt - - ;TTi> since all the terms disappear by canceling except three at the beginning and three at the end. When n is infinite the sum becomes Find the sum of the following series, (1) to n terras, and (2) to infinity : METHOD OF DIFFERENCES. 421 3. — + — + — + 1 .3 3-5 5-7 - 1)(27i + 1) Ans. (1) - 2n + 1 , ( 2 ) 4. — + — + — + 1 .3 2-4 3-5 + 1 n(n + 2) . 3?i^ + bn Ans. (1) ; ! , (2) i. ^ + 3n + 2) ^ ^ * METHOD OF DIFFERENCES. 197. Definition — To Find Any Term of a Series. — When we have a series whose terms proceed according to any law, if we take the first term from the second, the second from the third, tlie third from the fourth, and so on, the several remainders will form a new series called the Jirst order of differences. If the differences of the terms of this new series be taken in the same manner, we shall obtain another series called the second order of differences ; and so on. Let a, 6, c, d, e, ff be the series ; then the successive orders of differences are, 1st order, h — a., c — b, d — c, e — d, / — e, . . . . 2d order, c — 2b + a, d — 2c + b, e — 2d + c, . . . . 3d order, d — 3c -\- 3b — a., e — 3d + 3c — 6, ... . 4th order, e — 4d + 6c — 46 + a, . . . . and so on, where each difference, though a compound quan- tity, is called a term. If we let di, do, ds, d^^ represent the first terms of the first, second, third, etc. orders of differences, we shall have di = 6— a, dj = c— 26 + a, dj = d — 3c+36 — a, d^ = e— 4d+6c — 46+a, etc. - etc. .-. b—a-\- dp c = a + 2di4- dj. .*. d c£ -f- od^ -|- 3d2“f" dg. .'. c = (£ -f- 4dj-p Gdo-f- 4d3-f- d^. etc. = etc. 422 TO FIND ANY TERM OF A SERIES. We see here that the coefRcieuts of the value of any term, as c for instance, the third term of the series, are the same as the coefficients of the second power of a binomial ; the coeffi- cients of the value of d, t\ie fourth term, are the same as the coefficients of the third power of a binomial ; and so on. Hence we infer that the coefficients of the term of the series are the same as the coefficients of the {n — I)"* power of a binomial.* Thus the term of the series a, Z/, c, d, e, is fl-l- ( ?i — 1 ) di-|- (n— 1 ) (n- [T -l)(n-2)(7i-3) , LI ( 1 ) 1. Find the 10th term of the series 12, 40, 90, 168, 280, 432, The successive orders of differences are 1st order, 28, 50, 78, 112, 152, 2d order, 22, 28, 34, 40, 3d order, 6, 6, 6, 4th order, 0, 0, Then a = 12, d, = 28, do = 22, dg = Q, d^ . . . = 0, n = 10. Hence from (1) we have 10th term = 12 + 9- 28 + — 22 + ^ '^‘ -6 = 12 + 252 + 792-f 504 = 1560. \S_ 2. Find the 12th term of the series 2, 6, 12, 20, 30, . . . 156. 3. Find the ji**' term of the series 1, 3, 6, 10, 15, 21, . . . 2 198. To Find the Sum of n Terms of any Series. — Let the given series be a, b, c, d, e, f, (1) and denote the sum of the first n terms by aS. For a proof of this by induction, see Hall and Knight's Higher Algebra, p.324. TO FIND THE SUM OF n TERMS OF ANY SERIES. 423 Assume the series 0^ U5 Oj 4“ ^5 n “f~ ^ 4“ ^ 4” ^ 4~ ^ 4~ ( 2 ) It is clear that the sum of n terms of the given series is equal to the {n 4 - 1)*'' term of the assumed series ; also the tirst order of differenees of series (2) is the same as series (1); hence the second order of differences of series (2) is the same as the first order of series (1); the third order of series (2) is the same as the second order of (1); and so on. Hence by (1) of Art. 197, we may obtain the value of S by putting a = 0, n = n 4-1? = a, do = f?i, — do, etc. Making these substitutions, we have Note. — It will be seen that this method of summation is exact only when the series is such that in forming the orders of differ- ences, we eventually come to a series in which all the terms are equal. Wlien there are no orders of differences whose terms are equal, we may obtain by (3) approximate results, which will be nearer the truth the greater the number of terms used. 1. Find the sum of n terms of the series 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, . . . Here a = 1, = 2, d.^, = 0. Hence from (3) we have S — na-{- 4 - 4- . . . (See Ex. 4 of Art. 161). Find the sum of the following series : 2. 1, 3, 6, 10, 15, 21, to n terms. Ans. + .!)(» + 2) 6 3. 1 • 2, 2 • 3, 3 • 4, 4 • 5, 5 • 6, to n terms. Ans + 1)(^ + 2) 3 4 . 3, 11, 31, 69, 131 to 20 terms. 44330. 424 PILES OF CANNON-BALLS. 199. Piles of Cannon-Balls. — Cannon-balls are usually piled on a level surface in horizontal courses, in piles of three different forms, triangular pyramids, square q^yramids, and rectangidar piles. TRIANGULAR PYRAMID. SQUARE PYRAMID. RECTANGULAR PILE. (1) In a triangidar pyramid the summit consists of 1 ball, the second course consists of 3 balls, the third course con- sists of 6 balls, the fourth of 10 balls, and so on. Hence the number of Ijalls in a triangular pile of n courses is equal (O the sum of n terms of the series, 1, 3, 6, 10, 1.5, But from Ex. 2 of Art. 198, the sum of n terms of this series _ n{n -b 1) {n -|- 2) 6 in which n is the number of balls in the side of the bottom course, as well as the number of courses. (2) In a square pyramid the summit consists of 1 ball, tlie second course consists of 4 balls, the third course consists of 9 balls, and so on. Hence the number of balls in a square pile of n courses is equal to the sum of n terms of the series l^ 2-, 4S n\ Here o = 1, r?j = 3, d., = 2, c/3, . . . . = 0. Hence by (3) of Art. 198, S=n->r -I- ^ n(?r + l) (2?i4-l) ^ 2 3 6 Here also n is the number of balls in the side of the bottom course, as well as the number of courses. PILES OF CANNON-BALLS. 425 (3) In a rectangular j)ile the summit consists of 1 row, the second course consists of 2 rows, the third of 3 rows, and so on. Let m + 1 denote the number of balls in the top row ; then the length of the second row will be m + 2, of the third m + 3, and so on. Hence the summit will consist of -1- 1 balls, the second course will consist of 2(m + 2) balls, the third course of 3(m + 3) balls ; and the n*'‘ course of n{m + n) balls. Therefore the number of balls in the rectangular pile of n courses is equal to the sum of n terms of the series m + 1, 2(?ft + 2), 3(m + 3), n{m n'). Here C6 = -ni + 1, = m + 3, d., = 2, =0. Hence by (3) of Art. 198, o / p i\ 1 — 1)/ , o\ r — l)(’i — 2) S = n{m + 1) H ’-{m + 3) d 2 3 _ n{n + l)(3m + 2n + 1) ~ 6 If I = the number of balls in the longest row, then Z r= m + n, and therefore 2>m + '2n = 3Z — u, and the formula becomes g _ n(n + 1) (3Z — u + 1) .g. in which I denotes the number in the length, and n the num- ber in the width, of the bottom course. To find the number of balls in an incomplete pile, we must find the number in the pile supposed complete, then the number in the pile which is wanting, and subtract the latter from the former. 1. Find the number of balls in a square pile of 15 courses. Hns. 1240. 2. Find the number of balls in a rectangular pile, the length and breadth of the bottom course containing 60 and 30 balls respectively. Ans. 23405. 426 INTERPOLATION. 3. How many balls in an incomplete triangular pile, the number of balls in each side of the lower course being 44, and in each side of the upper 22 ? Ans. 13409. 200. Interpolation. — The process by which we intro- duce between terms of a series, intermediate terms which conform to the law of the series, is called Interpolation. Its most extensive application is in Astronomy, thougli it is often used for inserting intermediate terms between those given in Logarithmic and other Mathematical tables. To insert or interpolate a term in a series, is practically to find the term of the series by the method of differences (Art. 197). Let p represent the distance of the required term from o, the first term of the series, this distance being measured in terms of the distance between any two consecutive terms. Hence p will be a fraction ; and since it is the distance from a to the n'** term of the series, it is the distance to the {n — I)"' term from a; therefore = ?i — 1. Substituting in (1) of Art. 197, we obtain for the term to be interpolated a + pch + - 1)(P - . (1) LA La 1. The cube roots of 60, 61, 62 are respectively 3.91487, 3.93650, 3.95789 : find the cube root of 60J. 1st order of differences = 0.02163, 0.02139, 2d order of differences = —0.00024, a = 3.91487, d, = 0.02163, d, = -0.00024, = \. Substituting in (1), we have for the required term 3.91487 + J(.02163) + = 3.91487 + .00541 + .00002 = 3.92030. REVERSION OF SERIES. 427 2. The logarithm of radius vector of Jlars 1888, July 7 is 0.1782987. “ “ 11 is 0.1767934. “ “ 15 is 0.1752860. “ “ 19 is 0.1737790. What is it (1) for July 8th ; and (2) for July 10th? ^Ins. (1) 0.1779227; (2) 0.1771700. 3. Given \Jl = 2.23607, V6 = 2.44949, \Tl = 2.64575, V^8 = 2.82843 : find V^5.25, ^5.4, and V5.5. Ans. 2.29129, 2.32379, 2.34521. 4. Given VJ9 = 3.65931, = 3.70843, = 3.75629, = 3.80295 : find \/50, \/52, and Y54. Ans. 3.68403, 3.73251, 3.77976. 201. Reversion of Series. — To Revert a Sej-ies is to express the value of the unknown quantity contained in the series by means of another series involving the powers of some other quantity. Thus, given the series 1. y = ax + bx^ + cx^ + (1) then to revert this series is to express the value of x in another series involving the powers of y. Assume x = Ay + By"^ + Cy^ + (2) Substituting in (2) the value of y from (1), we have X = Aax + Abx- + Ac.v^ + + Ba'^x'^ -h 2Babx^ + . . . . + CaV + .Therefore (Art. 185), Aa = 1 ; A = -. a Ab + Ba^ = 0; .-. B = -~ Ac + 2Bab + Ca« = 0 ; .-. 0 = ~ or which in (2) gives X = M - ^ 4 - (25^ - ac)jf a a® a® 428 EXAMPLES. When the given series contains only the odd powers of x, we may shorten the process by assuming for x another series containing only the odd powers of y. Thus, 2. Eevert the series y = ax + 6x® + cx® + Here we assume x = Ay + By^ + Cif + If we assumed as we did in Ex. 1, the alternate coeflSc’ents would each reduce to zero. Solving this example, we obtain y (36^ — ac)y® ^ ~ a a* cC If the first term of the series to be reverted in any case be independent of x, thus if the series be of the form y = a' ax + bx^ + etc., we must put y — a' = z, and express x in a series involving the powers of z, and Aen replace the value of z. Revert the following series : 3. y = X + x^ + X® + Ans. X = y — y- + y^ — y'^ + 4. y = a;+- + — + Ans. x = y-t + jt^yL+ .. .. 2 ^ [3 [4 ^ 5. y = X — 2x^ + 3.x® — Hhs. X = y + 2y® + 5y® + 14y^ + EXAMPLES. Sum the following ten recurring series to infinity : 1. 1 + 3x + llx® + 43x® + . . . . Ans. — — — -. 1 - ox + 4x® 2. 1 + 2.x + 3.x® + 4:X^ + ox* + 3. 1 + 2x + 8.x® + 28.x® + . . . 1 (1 - .X)®' 1 — X 1 - 3.x - 2x®' 2 -f- X 1 + X — 2x® 4. 2 — X + 5.x® — 7x® -j- EXAMPLES. 429 7 - 20x I - 2x - 3x^' 1 + X 1 — 2x + x^ 1 -j- 2x 1 — X — x^' 2 — 3x 1 — 3x -i~ 2x^ 9. 3 + 6a: + 14a;" + 36a;® + 98a;* + 276a;® + 3 - 12a; + H-x" 1 — 6a: + 11a;" — 6a;® 10. 2 — a; + 2a;" — 5a;® + 10a;* — 17x’® + 5. 7 — 6a; 4- 9a;" + 27a;* 4- • • • • Ans. 6. 1 + 3a; + 5a;" + 7a:® + 7. 1 + 3a: + 4x" + 7.a;® + 8. 2 + 3a: + 5a;" + 9a;® + A?is. Ans. 2 + 5a; + 5x"‘ (1 + a:)® Sum the following six series : _i_+ J_ + _L + J_ 1-52-6 3-7 4-8 11. — ^ — - + - — - + -j — 2 + ... to infinity. A?is. ||. 12. — 1 — H ^ f- (1) to ?i terms, and 3 ■ 8 6 . 12 9 • 16 ^ ^ (2) to infinity. [Multiply by 3 • 4.] ; (2) tV 13. 1 _ 1 + 1 1-3 2-4 3-5 14. 1 + 1 3-4 ^4.5 5 • 6 to infinity. to infinity. A?is. (1) 3(71 + 3) (Vi- 15. — — I ^ 1 ^ ( 1 ) to 71 terms, and (2) 1*3 3»o toMnity. Ans. (1) i(i ~ „4" at I 2 ) ' 4 4 4 4 16. ! 1 1 + ... to infinity. 1. 1 - 5 5 - 9 9 . 13 13 • 17 430 EXAMPLES. Find the term and the sum of n terms of the series : 17. 1, 4, 10, 20, 35, + l)(n + 2) . n(n + l)(n + 2)(7i + 3) 18. 4,14,30,52,80,114, 3n^ + n n{n + ly. 19. 8, 26, 54, 92, 140, 198, Ans. 5?i^ -f- 3n ; •|■n(r^ + l)(5n + 7). 20. 2, 12, 36, 80, 150, 252, Ans. n^{n + 1) ; + 1)(?^ + 2){3n + 1). 21. 8, 16, 0, -64, -200, -432, - Ans. — 4ji^(n — 3) ; —n{n + l)(?r^ — 3?i — 2). 22. 30, 144, 420, 960, 1890, 3360, Ans. n{n+\) (?i+2) (n+4) ; (’^+2) (?i+3) (4n+21). Find the number of balls in 23. A triangular pile of 18 courses. Ans. 1140. 24. A rectangular pile, the length and breadth of the base containing 50 and 28 balls respectively. Ans. 16646. 25. An incomplete triangular pile, a side of the base having 25 balls, and a side of the top 14. Ans. 2470. 26. An incomplete square pile of 27 courses, having 40 balls in each side of the base. Ans. 21321. 27. An incomplete square pile having 169 balls in the top course, and 1089 in the lowest course. Ans. 11879. 28. A complete rectangular pile of 15 courses, having 2U balls in the longer side of its base. Ans. 1840. 29. An incomplete rectangular pile, the number of balls in the sides of its upper course being 11 and 18, and the number in the shorter side of its lowest course being 30. Ans. 11940. 30. An incomplete square pile of 16 courses when the number of balls in the upper course is 1005 less than in the lowest course. Ans. 18296. EXAMPLES. 431 31. The number of balls in a complete rectangular pile is 24395 ; if there are 34 balls in the breadth of the base, how many are there in its length? Ans. 52. 32. The number of balls in a triangular pile is greater by 150 than half the number of balls in a square pile, the number of courses in each being the same : find the number of balls in the lowest course of the triangular pile. Ans. 300. 33. Show that the number of balls in a square pile is one- fourth the number of balls in a triangular pile of double the number of courses. 34. If the number of balls in a triangular pile is to the number of balls in a square pile of double the number of courses as 13 to 175, find the number of balls in each pile. Ans. Triangular 364 ; Square 4900. 35. The square roots of 30, 31, 32, 33 are respectively 5.47723, 5.56776, 5.65685, 5.74456 : interpolate the square roots of 30.3, 30.5, 30.8. Ans. 5.50454, 5.52268, 5.54978. 36. The cube roots of 9, 11, 13, 15 are respectively 2.08008, 2.22398, 2.35133, 2.46621 : interpolate the cube roots of 10, 12, 14. Ans. 2.15443, 2.28943, 2.41014. 37. The reciprocals of 74, 75, 76, 77 are respectively .01351, .01333, .01316, .01299: interpolate the reciprocals of 74.2, 74.4, 74.7. Ans. .01348, .01344, .01339. 38. The logarithms of 232, 233, 234, 235 are respectively 2.365488, 2.367356, 2.369216, 2.371068: interpolate the logarithms of 233.4, 233.6, 233.8. Ans. 2.368101, 2.368473, 2.368845. 39. The right ascension of Jupiter on a certain Monday at noon was 10 h. 5 m. 38.6 s. ; on Tuesday" at noon it was 10 h. 6 m. 18.86 s. ; on Wednesday at noon 10 h. 6 m. 59.41 s. ; on Thursda}' at noon 10 h. 7 m. 40.24 s. Find its right ascension on Tuesday at midnight. Ans. 10 h. 6 m. 39.1 s. 40. The latitude of the moon 1888, March 26, Mondaj’, at noon was 3° 9' 34. "4 ; at midnight 3° 38' i2,"o ; on Tuesday 432 EXAMPLES. at noon 4° 4' 23."5 ; at midnight 4° 26' l."l ; on Wednesdaj' at noon 4° 43' 4. "4. Find its latitude at 9 p.m. on Tuesday. Ans. 4° 21' l."3. Revert the following series : 41. 2/ = £c + 3x’^ + + Ix'^ + Ans. X = y — Zy^ + 13?/® — bZy^ + 42. y = + + + + 2 6 24 43. y = X 1 ‘ — t- ^ 3 5 7 Ans. X = y + ^ + ^y^ + ^y’’ + 44. y — 2x + S.'c® + 4a;® + 5x’ + Ans. X = \y - + x¥&y® 45. x^ . xf y = X -\ h ^ 2 6 x^y + . 46. y — \ — 2x A- — Ans. x = -^{y - l) + |(y - 1)® - -i-^{y - 1)® + /j»2 rt.3 47. 2/ = 1+ a; + I + I + Ans. X = {y - \) - h{y - 1)^ + \{y - 1)® - 48. Given y + ay- + 6?/® + . . . = px + qx^ + ra;® + . . ., to express x in terms of ?/. .4ns. a; + (ap"-g)y- , r^p*-Fr-2g(ap"-g)l?/® _ ^ _ p LOGARITHMS — DEFINITIONS. 433 CHAPTER XXL LOGARITHMS— EXPONENTIAL AND LOGARITHMIC SERIES — INTEREST AND ANNUITIES. LOG A R I T H M S. 202. Definitions. — The Logarithm of a number is the exponent of the power to which another number, called the base, must be raised to equal the given number. Thus, if = N.,x in called the logarithm of N to the base a. This is usually written logniV, so that the same meaning is expressed by the two equations = N\ X — logaN. Examples. (1) Since 3^ = 81, 4 is the logarithm of 81 to the base 3. (2) Since 10^ = 10, 10“ = 100, 10® = 1000, the natural numbers 1, 2, 3, are respectively the loga- rithms of 10, 100, 1000, to the base 10. A System of Logarithms means the logarithms of all positive numbers to a given base. Thus, if we suppose a to remain fixed while N assumes in succession every value from 0 to qo, the corresponding values of x will constitute a system of logarithms to the base a. The base is then called the base of the system. Any number might be taken as the base of the system, and corresponding to any such base a system of logarithms of all numbers could be found. Thus, suppose a = 9 ; then Since 9^ = 9, 1 = logg 9. Since 9^ - 81, 2 = logg 81. Since 9'^ = 729, 3 = logg 729. That is, the natural numbers 1, 2, 3, ... . are respectively 1 134 PROPERTIES OF LOGARITHMS. the logarithms of 9, 81, 729, .... in the system whose base is 9. Note. — When it is understood that a particular system of loga- rithms is in use, the suffix denoting the base is omitted. Thus in Arithmetic calculations in which 10 is the base, we usually write log 2, log 3, instead of logio2, logio3, 203. Properties of Logarithms. — Before discussing the logarithmic systems in common use, we shall prove some general Properties which are true for all logarithms, whatever the base may be. (1) The logarithm of 1 is 0. For a° = 1 for all values of a ; therefore log 1 = 0, what- ever the base may be. (2) The logarithm of the base itself is 1. For = a ; therefore loga« = 1 . (3) The logarithm of 0 in any system whose base is greater than 1 is minus infinity. For a~“ = — = — = 0; therefore logO = — x. n” 00 Also, the logarithm o/ qc is -f- x. ( 4 ) The logarithm of a product is equal to the sum of the logarithms of its factors. For let mn be the product ; let a be the base of the sys- tem, and suppose X = login, y — logn. Then m = a^, n = a^. Therefore the product, mn — a^ x a^ = ; whence, by definition (Art. 202), logmn = .T 4- ?/ = logrn -f logn. Similarly, logmnp = logm + log u -|- logp ; and so on for any number of factors. Thus, log 30 = log (2x3x5) = log 2 + log3 -j- logo. PROPERTIES OF LOGARITHMS. 435 (5) The logarithm of a fraction is equal to the logarithm of the numerator minus the logarithm of the denominator. 7Yl For let — be the fraction, and suppose 11 X = logm, y = logn. Then m = a"', n = a^. Therefore the fraction, ; n a’' whence by definition, log — = X — y = logm — log?r. 11 Thus, log - log 42 — log 5 = log 2 + log 3 + log 7 — log 5. (6) The logarithm of any poiver of a number is equal to the logarithm of the number multiplied by the exponent of the power. For let X - logm ; then m = a*. Therefore m" = {a^^y = a'’^ ; whence by definition, logm'’ = px • plogm. (7) The logarithm of any root of a number is equat to the logarithm of the number divided by the index of the root. For let X = log m ; then m = a"^. I lx Therefore m’’ — (a^Y — a’" ; whence by definition, 1 X 1 logfm'-) = - = - logm. r r It follows from these results that by the use of logarithms, the operations of multiplication and division may be replaced by those of addition and subtraction ; and the operations of involution and evolution by those of multiplication and division. 436 COMPARISON OF TWO SYSTEMS OF LOGARITHMS. EXAMPLES. 1. Express the logarithm of in terms of log a, log&. and log c. log V-T “ log(c«62) = flog a — (logo® + log 6^) = flog a — ologc — 2 log 6. Express the following logarithms in terms of loga, log 6, and log c : 2. log \/(n^&*)®. 3. log X 4. log X 5. log yah' /3 ; Ans. 6 log a + 9 log 6. f log a + I log b. —flog a — flog 6. f logo. 6. log H- V«). -floga. 204. Comparison of Two Systems of Logarithms. Given the logarithm of a number to base a, to find the loga- rithm of the same number to base b. Let m be any number whose logarithm to base b is required. Let a; = logy?i ; then b"^ = m ; log,, (6"^) = log„m; ora;loga& = log„m. 1 a’ = X log„m, loga& or logi,??i = log„7?r log„& 0 .) Hence, to transform the logarithm of a number from base 1 a to ba.se 6, loe multiply it by log- 6 Putting a for m in (1), we have logja = log„a log„6 log„h , by (2) of Art. 203, log(,a X log„& = 1. COMMON SYSTEM OF LOGARITHMS. 437 205. Common System of Logarithms. — Although there may be auy number of systems of logarithms, there are only two in general use, viz., the N'aperian* system and the common system. The Naperian system is used for purely Algebraic pur- poses ; its base is 2.71828f8. The common sj’stem of logarithms is the only system that is used in practical calculations ; f its base is 10. Hence, since 10° = 1, log 1 =: 0. 101 = 10, log 10 = 1. 10^ : 100, log 100 = 2. 10® = 1000, log 1000 = 3. 101 ^ 10000, log 10000 - 4. 10-1 ^ _ .1, log .1 = -1. 10 -- log .01 = -2. = TffVo ’ .001, log .001 — -3. 10 = TuW = -0001, log .0001 = -4. From an inspection of these examples it is evident that, in the common system, the logarithm of any number between 1 and 10 is some number between 0 and 1 ; i.e., 0 -)- a fraction, 10 and 100 is some number between 1 and 2 ; i.e., 1 a fraction, 100 and 1000 is some number between 2 and 3 ; i.e., 2 -f- a fraction, 1 and .1 is some number between 0 and —1 ; i.e., — 1 -f- a fraction, .1 and .01 is some number between —1 and —2; i.e., — 2 -|- a fraction, .01 and .001 is some number between —2 and —3 ; i.e., —3 -4- a fraction. * So called from its inventor, Baron Napier, a Scotch mathematician, t This system was first introduced, in 1615, by Briggs, a contemporary of Napier. 438 COMMON SYSTEM OF LOGARITHMS. It thus appears that in general the common logarithm of a number consists of two parts, an integral part and a decimal part. The integral part is called the characteristic., and the decimal part is called the mantissa. From the above examples we see that if a whole number is expressed by one digit, the characteristic of its logarithm is 0 ; if it is expressed by two digits, the characteristic of its logarithm is 1 ; if it is expressed by three digits, the char- acteristic is 2 ; and so on, the characteristic being always one less than the number of digits in the number. Also the logarithm of any number between 1 and .1 has —1 for its characteristic; the logarithm of an}' number between .1 and .01 has —2 for its characteristic; the logarithm of any num- ber between .01 and .001 has —3 for its characteristic ; and so on, the characteristic being always negative and one greater than the number of ciphers immediately after the decimal point. In general. Let A" be a number whose integral part contains n digits ; then ^ j^Q(n — 1) + a fraction .-. log A = (?i — 1) -1- a fraction. Also, let Z) be a decimal with n ciphers immediately after the decimal point ; then — (71 -f 1) -f a fraction logZ) = — (?i -p 1) -p a fraction. Therefore the characteristic of the common logarithm of rny number may be written down by the following Rule. (1) The characteristic of the logarithm of a number greater than unity is positive., and less by one than the number of digits in its integral part. (2) The characteristic of the logarithm of a decimal fraction is negative, and greater by one than the number of ciphers immediately after the decimal point. Thus, the characteristic of log 2347.3 is 3 ; characteristic of log .000459 is —4. TABLE OF LOGARITHMS. 439 206. Table of Logarithms. — The common logarithms of all integers from 1 to 200000 have been found and tabulated. In most tables they are given to si.x places of decimals ; and tables of logarithms to seven places of deci- mals are in common use for Astronomical and Mathematical calculations. This is the system in practical use, and it has two great advantages : (1) From the rule (Art. 205) the characteristics can be written dowm at once, so that only the mantissas have to be given in the tables. (2) The mantissae are the same for the logarithms of all numbers which have the same significant digits ; so that it is sufficient to tabulate the mantissas of the logarithms of integers. For, since altering the position of the decimal point without clianging the sequence of figures merely multiplies or divides the number by an integral power of 10, it follows tliat its logarithm will be increased or diminished by an biteger, i.e., that the mantissa of the logarithm remains unaltered. In general. If N be any number, and j) and q any in- tegers, it follows that N x 10'’ and N 10'' are numbers whose significant digits are the same as those of N. Then log {N X 10'’) = log A” + p log 10 = log A + p . (1) Also log (A H- 10'') = log N — q log 10 = log N — q . (2) In ( 1 ) the logarithm of A is increased by an integer, and in (2) it is diminished by an integer; that is, the mantissa, or decimal portion of the logarithm, remains unchanged, a property which is true only in the common system. Thus, from a table of logarithms we find the mantissa of the logarithm of 2583 to be 412124 ; therefore, prefixing the characteristic with its appropriate sign according to the rule, we have log 2583 = 3.412124, log 258.3 = 2.412124, log 25.83 = 1.412124, log 2.583 = 0.412124. 440 EXAMPLES. The mantissa is always kept positive. In the case of a negative logarithm the minus sign is written over the charac- teristic, and not before it, to indicate that the characteristic alone is negative, the mantissa being always positive. Thus, 3.30103, the logarithm of .002, is equivalent to — 3 + .30103, and must be distinguished from —3.30103, an expression in which both the integer and the decimal are negative. Sometimes in working with negative logarithms an Arithmetic artifice will be necessary to make the mantissa positive. For example, a result such as —2.69897, in which the whole expression is negative, may be transformed by subtracting 1 from the characteristic, and adding 1 to the mantissa. Thus, -2.G9897 = -3 + (1 - .69897) = 3.30103. XoTE. — When the characteristic of a logarithm is negative, it ia often, for convenience, made positive by the addition of 10; which can lead to no error, if we are careful to subtract 10. Thus, instead of the logarithms 3.603582 and 4.026011, we may write 7.603582 - 10 and 6.026011 — 10. EXAMPLES. The following examples will illustrate the utility of loga- rithms in facilitating Arithmetic calculations. For infor- mation as to the use of Logarithmic Tables the student is referred to works on Trigonometrj' and to the introductions to Tables of Logarithms. 1. Required the logarithm of .0002432. In the tables of logarithms we find that 38.59636 is the mantissa of log 2432 (the decimal point, as well as the char- acteristic, being omitted); and by the rule (Art. 205), the characteristic of the logarithm of the given number is —4. .-. log .0002432 = 4.3859636. 2. Find the value of y. 00000165, given log 165 = 2.2174839, and log 697424 =„5. 8434968. EXAMPLES. 441 Let X = the value required ; then log a- = log (.00000105)^ = 4 log (.00000165) [Art. 203, (7)] 1:^^(6.2174839) = i(rO + 4.2174839) = 2.8434968, and .8434968 is the mantissa of log 697424; hence x is a number consisting of these same digits, but with one cipher after the decimal point, by the rule (Art. 205). a; = .0697424. It will be seen that we subtracted 4 from the characteristic — 6 to make it exactly divisible by the index 5, and there- fore we added the same number 4 to the mantissa, to keep the value of the logarithm unchanged. 3. Given log 3 = . 4771213 ; find log [(2.7)*x(.81)^^(90)?]. The required value = 3 logf J f logxoV ~ f log 90 = 3(log3« - 1) + |(log3^ - 2) - |(log3'^ -p 1) = (9 + ¥-f) log3 - (3 -P I + I) = log3 - m = 4.6280766 - 5.85 = 2.7780766. XoTE. — The logarithm of 5 and its powers can always be obtained from log 2 ; thus log 5 = logJ# — log 10 — log 2 = 1 — log 2. 4. Find the number of digits in 875“, given log 2 = .3010300, and log 7 = .8450980. log (875“) = 16 log (7 X 125) = 16 (log 7 + 3 log 5) = 16 (log 7 -P 3 - 3 log 2) = 47.072128; hence the number of digits is 48 (Art. 205). Given log 2 = . 3010300, log3 = .4771213, log 7 =.8450980 ; find the value of 5. log64. Ans. 1.806 1800. 6. log. 128. 1.1072100. 7. log .0125. 2.0969100. 11. Given log 2 and log 3 ; 8. log 4f. Ans. .6690067. 9. log'Vl2. .3597271. 10. logV-0105. T. 5052973. find log\7^^ 1.1998692. I 442 EXPONENTIAL EQUATIONS — EXAMPLES. 207. Exponential Equations. — An Exponential Equa- tion is one in which the exponent is the unknown quantity. Such equations are easily solved by logarithms. Thus, 1 . Given oE = h \ find the value of x. Taking the logarithms of both members, we have X log a — log b log& X = — 2 _. log a 2. Find the value of x in 2^ = 128. Here a; log 2 = log 128 = log 2’ = 7 log 2. 7 log 2 X = ^ log 2 3. Find the logarithm of 32^4 to base 2y/2. Let X be the required logarithm ; then by definition (Art. 202), (2\/2y = 32 V 4 = 2^-2i. Taking logarithms of both sides, we have a; log 2^ = log 2®", orf.rlog2 = ^^-\og2. ••• = ¥ - I = ¥ = 3.6. 4. Given log 2 and log 3 (Art. 206, Ex. 5) ; find to two places of decimals the value of x from the equation g3-te.4x+5 ^ Taking logarithms of both sides, we have (3 — 4.r) log 6 + {x + 5) log 4 = log 8; (3 — 4a-) (log 2 + log 3) + {x + .5)2 log 2 = 3 log 2; x(— 4 log2 — 41og3 -f- 2 log2)= 3 log 2 — 3 log 2 — 3 log 3 — 10 log 2; 101og2 + 31og3 4.4416639 , 2 log 2 + 4 log 3 2.5105452 Solve the following equations : 6. = cb"^. Ans. , log a — log 6 EXPONENTIAL SERIES. 443 6 . Ans. Slosrc 7. cr = c, 2 log a + 3 log b log (log c) — log (log g) log b Note. — In this example, by a is meant a raised to the power expressed by 6^, and not of’ raised to the x*** power. 8. c”“ = 9. — 2a* = 8. ^?is. log a — log b m log c Find the logarithms of 10. 16 to base V^2, and 1728 to base 2V^ 11. 125 to base 5^5, and .25 to base 4. 12. to base 2V^2, and ^ to base 9. Find the value of 13. logg 128, and logs 11 log h 2 log 2 log a Ans. 8, 6. 2 , - 1 . -¥, -i Ans. 2i -3. Solve the following equations, having given log 2, log 3, log 7 (Art. 206, Ex. 5): 14. 3*-2 = 5. ^?is. 3.46. 16. 5®-®* = 2* + 2. ^ns. 1.206. 15. 5* = iO®. 4.29. 17. 21*=22^ + h5*. 14.206. EXPONENTIAL AND LOG ARITH IVI IC SERIES. 208. Exponential Series. — To expand a* in a series of ascending poivers of x. By the Binomial Theorem we have (l I I I 1 nx(nx-l) (nx-2) f \ nj n ’ 1 1 2 ' 444 LOGARITHMIC SERIES. But '-I CIX'D and therefore series (1) is equal to series (2) however great n may be. Hence if n be iudefiuitely increased, we have fiom (1) and (2) . . . = ^1 + 1+-L+JL+J_+ . . .V. The series in the parenthesis is usually denoted by e ; e- = 1 + r. + ^ ^ ^ + . . . , , , . (3) LA lA lA which is the expansion of e* in powers of x ; to find the expansion of a^, let a = e^, so that c = log^a. Substituting in (3) we have ^ 2/%«2 ^ 8 /)i 3 = e“ = 1 + ca; + ^ ^ ^ + , A A A or X 1 , /I \ , (loge«)^‘'*'‘^ , (log..a)®.r® (logea)^r* a^=l+(log,fl>-+5--s£^! — ^ — +... (4) AAA This result is called the Exponential Theorem. If we put a; = 1, we have from (3) e= 1 + 1 + - + - +_+_ + _ + From this series we may readily compute the approximate value of e to any required degree of accuracy. This con- stant value of e is called the Naperian base (Art. 205). To leu places of decimals it is found to be 2.7182818284. 209. Logarithmic Series. — To expand log^ (1 -f- a;) in a series of ascending powers of x. By the Binomial Theorem we have a- = (1 -p a - 1)^ = 1 -f- a;(a - 1) -b (« - 1)» A 4- ~ ~ (g _ 1)84. , . . = 1 + a;[a - 1 - ^(a - 1 )--t- i(a - 1)«- i(a - 1)^4- . . .] -p terms involving x^, etc. COMPUTATION OF LOGARITHMS. 445 Comparing this value of cH with that given in (4) of Art. 208, and equating the coefficients of a;, we have log,a = a-l-J(a-l)2 + i(d-l)^-|(«-l)^ + . • • Put a = 1 + a- ; then log,(l+a) = a-| + |-~+ (1) This is the Logarithmic Series; but unless x be very small, the terms diminish so slowly that a large number of them will have to be taken ; and hence the series is of very little use for numerical calculations. If x — 1, the series is altogether unsuitable. We may, however, deduce from it other series by the aid of which Tables of Logarithms may be constructed. Changing x into —a, (1) becomes log. (1 — a) = —a — - (2) y 2 3 4 Subtracting (2) from (1), we have loge (1 + a) - loge (1 — X) = 2X + ^ + ^- + . . . . O 0 or , 1 4- a o/ , x^ , a® , a’ , \ +5 + 7 + ) ■ Put ^ and .-. a = ; (3) thus 1 - a n 2n + I ^ becomes 1 ^ + 1 .of 1 , 1 , 1 . 1 ° -n \_2n + \ 3(2?1 + 1)3 ^ 5(2?i + 1)5 J or 210. Computation of Logarithms. — By means of series (4) of Art. 209, the logarithm of either of two con- secutive numbers may be computed to any extent when the logarithm of the other number is known, and thus a table of logarithms can be constructed. Logarithms to the base e 446 NAFERIAN LOGARITHMS. are called Naperian Logarithms (Art. 205). They are also called natural logarithms, because they are the first log- arithms which occur iu the investigation of a method of calculating logarithms. When logarithms are used in theo- retical investigations, the base e is always understood, just as iu practical calculations the base 10 is invariably employed. It is only necessary to compute the logarithms of prime numbers from the series, since the logarithm of a composite number may be obtained by adding together the logarithms of its component factors. The logarithm of 1 is 0. Making 71 = 1, 2, 4, 6, etc. successively in (4) of Art. 209, we obtain the following NAPERIAN LOGARITHMS. loo'' 2 = loo" 1 -l- '2\ — -| — -f- — ^ 1- — ^ — -4- — ^ h ^ 1,3 3 • 33 5 . 3^ 7 • 3’ 9 ■ or, since log^ 1=0, log, 2 = 2 ( .33333333 + .01234568 + .00082305 + .00006532 + .00000565 + .00000051 + .00000005+. . .) = 2(0.34657359) =0.69314718. log,3 = log,2 + 2(^^ + -^ + ^V 5 +;Ar 7 + • • .') = 1.0986T228. log,4 = 21og,2 =1.38629436. log, 5 = log,4 + 2^--| — H — ^+ . . .^ = 1.60943790. se ne -r (^ 9 ^ 3 .93^ 5.95 7 . 9 , J log, 6 = log, 3+ log, 2 =1.79175946. log,7 = log ,6 + 2(l+ + . . .) =1.94590996. log ,8 = 31og,2 =2.07944154. log,9 = 21og,3 log, 10 = log,5 + log,2 = 2.19722456. = 2.30258509. In this way the Naperian logarithms of all numbers may be computed. Where the numbers are large, their logarithms are couaputed more easily than in the case of small numbers. INTEREST AND ANNUITIES — SIMPLE INTEREST. 447 Thus, in computing the logarithm of 101, the first term of the series gives the result true to seven places of decimals. By changing b to 10 and a to e in (1) of Art. 204, we have logioWi log^m _ log,, m logelO 2.30258509 .43429448 log^m, or common logm = Naperian logm X .43429448. The number .43429448 is called the modulus of the common system. Hence, the common logarithm of any number is equal to the Naperian logarithm of the same number multiplied by the modxdus of the common system, .43429448. Conversel}'. Having given the common logarithm of a number, to find its Naperian logarithm ; divide the common logarithm by .43429448. Note. — The base e, the modulus of the common system, and the Naperian logarithms of 2, 3, and 5 have all been calculated to more than 260 places of decimals. See the Proceedings of the Royal Society of London, Vol. XXVII, p. 88. Denoting the modulus by M, and multiplying (4) of Art. 209 by it, we obtain a series by which common logarithms may be computed ; thus, logio(n.+l)=log,on+24/^^^^ ^ 3(2il^3 + 5(2,i+i)a +•■•)> d) 1. Find by means of (1) the common logarithms of 65 and 131 ; given log 2 = .3010300, and M = .43429448. Ans. 1.8129134, 2.1172713. 2. Find the Naperian logarithm of 1325.07. xins. 7.18923. INTEREST AND ANNUITIES. 211. Simple Interest. — To find the interest and amount of a given sum in a given time at simple interest. Interest is money paid for the use of money. The Princi- pal is the sum lent. The Amount is the sum of the Principal and Interest at the end of the time. When interest is paid on the principal alone, it is called Simple Interest. 448 PRESENT VALUE AND DISCOUNT. Let P be the principal in dollars, r the interest of Si for one 3 'ear, n the number of }’ears, I the interest, and M the amount. Since the interest of Si for one year is ?•, the interest of P for one year, is Pr, and therefore for n years it is Pnr ; that is, I = Pnr (1) And for the amount, M = P + 7, or M = P(1 + nr), (2) From (1) and (2), if an}" three of the quantities P, n, r, 7, or P, ?i, r, M, are given, the fourth ma}" be found. 212. Present Value and Discount. — To find the jiresent value and discount of a given sum due at the end of a given time, at simple interest. The Present Value of a sum due at the end of a given time, is the principal which with its interest for the given time will amount to the sum. The Discount is the difference between the sum and its present value. Let 37 be the given sum or amount, r the interest of SI for one year, n the number of years, P the present value, and D the discount. Since P is the sum which will in n years amount to 37, we have from (2) of Art. 211, 3/ = P(1 + nr) ; .-. P = . . (1) 1 + nr And D = M - P = . . (2) 1 + nr Note. — This value of D is called the true discount. In practice, when a sum of money is paid before it is due, it is customary to deduct the interest on the debt instead of the true discount, and the money so deducted is called the banker's discount; thus, Banker’s Discount = Mnr. True Discount (3) 1 + nr 1. Required the rate when S300 in 2 years at simple interest amouuts to S3 18. COMPOUND INTEREST. 449 Here M = 318, P = 300, n = 2. Solving (2) of Art. 211 for r and substituting, we have r = = .03. rate per cent* =3, 300 X 2 '■ 2. The difference between the true discount and the bank discount on $1900 paid 4 months before it is due is 33^ cents : find the rate per cent. Here M = $1900, and n = therefore from (3) we have 1900r 1900r _ 3 ^ 1 3 1 + ir Solving, we get r = .04. .•. rate per cent = 4. 213. Compound Interest. — To find the interest and Amount of a given sum in a given time at compound interest. When interest as soon as it liecomes due is added to the principal, and interest charged upon the whole, it is called Compound Interest. Let P be the principal, R the amount of $1 in one 3 'ear, so that 7? = 1 4- r, 71 the number of ^ ears, I the interest, and M the amount. Since the amount of $1 for one j’ear is 72, the amount of P at the end of the first j^ear is PR ; and since this is the principal for the second year, the amount at the end of the second j'oar is PR X 72 or P72". Similarly the amount of PR- at the end of the third j-ear is P72®, and so on ; hence the amount of P in n j'ears is PR" ; that is, M = PR\ .-. 7=P(72"-1). . . (1) If the interest is pa 3 'able more frequently than once a * It must be borne in mind that r is not the rate per cent, but only the hundredth part of it. 450 PRESENT VALUE AND DISCOUNT. The amount of P in half a year 3 'ear ; for example, if it is payable semi-annually, the V interest for $1 for half a year will be =-p(i + i)- The amount of P in one year =P The amount of P in n years ^ • Similarly if the interest is paA'able quarterly. In )■ The amount of P in n years =P{ \ -\ — And generally, if the interest is pa^mble q times a year at equal intervals, the interest of $1 for each interval will be 9 . • . The amount of P in n years, or qn intervals = P/ 1 + r\f l) If the interest is due, i.e., converted into principal, eveiy moment, then q becomes infinitely great, i.e., the intervals between the payments are infinitely small. To find the value of the amount, put - = i, so that q = rx ; thus the amount q X of P in n years = Pe"" [(2) and (3) of Art. 208], since x is infinite when q is infinite. 214. Present Value and Discount. — To find the present value and discount of a given sum due at the end of a given time, at compound interest. Let M be the given sum or amount. P the present value. D the discount, E the amount of §1 for one year, 7i the number of j’ears. PRESENT VALVE AND DISCOUNT. 451 Since P is the sum which in n years will amount to M, we have (Art. 213) M = PR- D = M - P = ~ . (1) R‘ 1. Find the amount of SI 00 in one year at 5 per cent, when the interest is converted into principal semi-annually. Here P = 100, r = .05, n = 1, and 1 -p - = 1.025. -r 2 .•. Amount = 100(L025)^ = $105.0625. 2. The present value of $672 due in a certain time is $126 ; if compound interest at 4^ per cent be allowed, find the time, having gi\*en log 2 = .30103, and log 3 — .47712. Here r = .04^ = and if = 1 -f ?• = Let n = the number of years; then by (1) of Art. 213, we have 672 = 126(11)"; .-. nlogf|- = log^®. .-. m(logl00 — log 96) = log 16 — log 3. 4 log 2 — log 3 _ .72700 2 — 5 log 2 — log 3 .01773 O O 41, very nearly ; thus the time is very nearly 41 years. 3. At simple interest, the interest on a certain sura of money is $180, and the discount on the same sum for the same time and at the same rate is $150 ; find the sum. Ans. $900. 4. If a sum of money doubles itself in 40 years at simple interest, find the rate of interest. Ans. 2|. 5. Find in how many years $100 will become $1050 at 5 per cent compound interest ; having given log 14 = 1.14613, log 15 = 1.17609, log 16 = 1.20412. Hns. Between 48 and 49, 452 THE AMOUNT OF AN ANNUITY. 215. Annuities. — An annuity is a fixed sum payable at equal intervals of time under certain stated conditions. An annuity certain is one which is payable for a fixed number of years independent of any contingency. A life annuity is one which is payable during the lifetime of a person, or of the survivor of a number of persons. A deferred annuity, or reversion, is an annuity which does not begin until after the lapse of a certain number of years ; and w'hen the annuity is deferred for p years, it is said to com- mence after p years, and the first payment is made at the end of p> + I years. A perpetuity is one wliich is to continue forever ; if it does not commence at once it is called a deferred perpetuity. An anuuit}' left unpaid for a certain number of j'ears is said to be forborne for that number of 3 ’ears. 216 . The Amount of an Annuity. — To find the imount of an annuity left unpaid for a given number of years. {1) At simple interest. Lot A be the annuity, n the number of 3 ’eai-s, r the interest of $1 for one year, M the amount. At the end of tlie first year A becomes due, and the amount of this sum in the remaining — 1 }’ears is A -\- (n — \)Ar\ at the end of the second V’ear another A is due, and the amount of this sum in the remaining n — 2 years is A -|- {n — 2)rA ; and so on to the end of the ?i'*‘ v'ear. Hence, calling M the sum of all these amounts, we have M = A-|-(n-l)rA-l-A-l-(M- 2 )/-A+ ..... +A-f?-A-f— 1 = ?iA + (1 + 2 -b 3 -f- -f- n - l)rA = nA -f- V^^L^-^rA. [(3) of Art. 161] ... ( 1 ) (2) At compound interest. Let R be the amount of 81 for one year. At the end of the first vmar A is due. and the amount of this sum in the remaining n — \ years is Aif"“^ (Art. 213) ; at the end of THE PRESENT VALUE OF AN ANNUITY. 453 the second year another JL is due, and the amount of this sum in the remaining n — 2 years is AR "~^ ; and so on to the last annuity payable at the end of the ri"* year. Hence the entire amount due at the end of n years is the sum of these amounts. -. M= AR’‘-^ + AR-^-^ + AR^ + AR + a = (1 + if + -f- . . . . to n teiTns)^ = [(2) of Art. 163] .... (2) 217. The Present Value of an Annuity. — To find the present value of an annuity to continue for a given number of years, at compound interest. Note. — In finding the present value of annuities, it is always customary to reckon compound interest. Let P be the required present value, A the annuity, R the amount of $1 in one year, n the number of years. Then the amount of P in n years must equal the amount of the annuity in the same time ; that is (Arts. 213, 216), PRn = ^ \a. R - 1 p = 1 - R- R - 1 A. • ( 1 ) If we make n infinite, the annuity becomes a perpetuity (Art. 215). Hence, making n infinite in (1), we have for the present value of a perpetuity, P = = 4 ..... ( 2 ) if — 1 r Rem. — If the present value of an annuity A for any number of years be inA, the annuity is said to be worth m years’ purchase. 4 In the case of a perpetuity, mA = — , by (2). m 1 _ 100 r rate per cent ’ . . (3) that is, the number of years’ purchase of a perpetual annu- ity is obtained by dividing 100 by the rate per cent. 454 THE PRESENT VALUE OF A DEFERRED ANNUITY. 218. The Present Value of a Deferred Annuity. — To find the present value of a deferred annuity, to commence at the end of p years and to continue for n years, at com- pound interest. Let A be the annuity, R the amount of $1 in one year, P he present value. The present value of an annuit}^ to com- mence at the end of p years, and then to continue n j’ears, is found by subtracting the present value of the annuity for p years from the present value of the annuity for p -{■ n years. By (1) of Art. 217, we have \ R"C the present value of the annuity for p years = ^ — A ; 1_J^— (P+n) the present value of the annuity for p-\-n 3 ’ears = — ^ — A. R-l P = R->'- A 1 - R-p R - \ R-l AR-P AR-P-’' A R - 1 R - 1 ( 1 ) The present value of a deferred perpetuity (Art. 215) commence after p jmars is AR-P P = R 1 since 71 becomes infinite. A Fi'eehold Estate is an estate which yields a perpetual annuity called the 7'ent ; and thus the value of the estate is equal to the present value of a perpetuit}’ equal to the rent. If, therefore, we know the number of 3 ’ears’ purchase that a tenant pa^^s to buy his farm, we obtain the rate per cent at which interest is reckoned b}’ dividing 100 by the number of years’ purchase [Art. 217, (3)]. Given the following logarithms for use when required : logl.04 = .017033; logl.05 = .021189; logl.8009 = .255495; log2.1911 = ..340660; logl.980 = .296646; log2.TS.59 = .444969. THE PRESENT VALUE OF A DEFERRED ANNUITY. 455 1. An annuity of S500 was unpaid for 15 j^ears. What was the amount due, at 4 per cent compound interest? By (2) of Art. 216, A/ = ^ ^ == $9983. 2. Find the present value of an annuity of $500 for 20 years, at 4 per cent interest. By (1) of Art. 217, P = x ■ = $6787. ^ ^ ^ .04 (1.04)20 3. Find the present value of an annuity of $1000 to com- mence at the end of 7 years and to continue 14 years, at 5 per cent interest. By (1) of Art. 218, P = A = X ^ = $7030. .05 (1.05)21 4. The reversion after 6 years of a freehold estate is bought for $20000 ; what rent ought the purchaser to receive, at 5 per cent compound imterest? Given log 1.05 = . 0211893, log 1.340096 = .1271358. The rent is equal to the annual value of the perpetuity, deferred for 6 years, which may be purchased for $20000. Let A be the value of the annuity in dollars. Then by (2) of Art. 218, 20000 = .05 ^(1.05)-« = 1000; log A - 6 log 1.05 = 3. log A = 3.1271358 = log 1340.096. A = $1340.096, which is the rent. 456 EXAMPLES. EXAMPLES. 1. Express log y/a“^6® in terms of log a and log 5. Ans. — I log a + -jlogi. 2. Simplify log -5 logo. 3. Simplify log y/729 X 27“^. log3. 4. Simplify logff - 21ogf + log^^^V log 2. 5. Show that log = 7 log 5 - ^ log 2 - ? log 3. yis -sj-I ^ 15 3 Given log 2 = .3010300, log3 = .4771213, log 7 = .8450980 : find the value of 6. log 84. 1- logy/ff Ans. 1.9242793. .0563520. 8. log 14.4. 1.1583626. 9. log[V48(108)l ^ 1.0039238. 10. Given log 2, log 3, log 7; alsolog 44092388 = 7.6443636, and log 194.8445 = 2.2896883: find (1) the 7th root of .00324; and (2) the 11th root of (39.2)-. .Ins. (1) .44092388, (2) 1.948445. 11. Given log 2, log 3, log 7; alsolog9076. 226 = 3. 9579053 : find to 6 decimal places the value of \/[(294 x 125)-=-(42 x 32)]-. Ans. 9.076226. 12. Find the product of 37.203, 3.7203, .0037203, 37203. having given log 37.203 = 1.5705780, and log 1915631 = 6.2823120. -las. 19156.31. 13. Find the number of digits in 3^- X 2®. 9. 14. Determine tlie number of ciphers there are between the decimal point and the first significant digit in .d,)iS. 301. 15. Show that (21 h- 20)^“> 100. EXAMPLES. 457 Solve the following equations : 16. + ^ -H 17. 2a^ + 18. = y'^. 19. = 571®, ^ar . Jj2y _ 20. = a* + ®-5®^ Ans. log a + log 5 2 log c — log a + log ( iog(y/2 + i) _ 2 log a a; = 21 7/ = 3|. 4 log 777 . log 777 a; = . , y = — log a log h log a log 5 — log a 21. (a^-2a%‘^+¥Y-^ = (a-h)^(a + b)-^. Find the logarithms of 22. .0625 to base 2, and 1000 to base .01. ^t 7S. —4, — f. 23. .0001 to base .001, and .i to base 9y/3. f, — |. 24. ^a}^, ^ a ^ to base a. 2 _ X 5’ 25. Find the value of log.^-^^ and logg ^3 49. 4 2 3’ 3’ Solve the following equations, having given log 2, log 3, and log 7 : 26. 2"^ -6^-2 27. 2^ + ^ = 6% 5 ^ . 7 ’ log 3 3^ = 3 • 2^ + 1. 28. 3l-■’^-^=4-^ 22i — 1 _ g3y — X log 3 — log 2 .477S. 4.562. log 2 log 3 — log 2 . 3 log 3 — 2 log 2 Ans. X — 2 • y — 4 (log 3 - log 2) log 3 4 (log 3 - log 2) 29. Given log , 0 2 = .30103; find log,, 200. ■ 1.6465. 30. Given log,Q 2 = .30103, logjg7 = .84509 ; find log_\/2 and log,^- 7 JY&I. - 17S1 . 2 log 7 458 EXAMPLES. 31. Given M = .43429448, and log 2 = .3010300; find the common logarithms of 7, 11, 17, and 31 by (1) of Art. 210. Ans. .8450980; 1.0413927; 1.2304489; 1.4913617. 32. Given M and lognj2 : find logj,jl025. Ans. 3.0107239. When required, the following logarithms may be used : log 2, log 3, log 7 (See Ex. 6) ; also log 11 = 1 .0413927. 33. At simple interest, the interest on a certain sum is $90, and the discount on the same sum for the same time and at the same rate is $80 : find the sum. Ans. 720. 34. A tradesman marks his goods with two prices, one for ready money, and the other for a credit of 6 months : find w'hat ratio the tw'o prices ought to bear to each other, at 5 per cent simple interest. Ans. 40 : 41. 35. Find the amount of $100 in 50 years at 5 per cent compound interest ; given log 114.674 = 2.0594650. Ans. $1146.74. 36. In how many years will a sum of money double itself at 5 per cent compound interest? Aas. 14.2. 37. Find the present value of $10000 due 8 years hence at 5 per cent compound interest ; given log 67683.94 = 4.8304856. Ans. $6768. 39|. 38. In how many years will $1000 become $2500 at 10 per cent compound interest? A?!S. 9.6 years. 39. Show" that money wall increase more than a hundred- fold in a century, at 5 per cent compound interest. 40. What sum of money at 6 per cent compound interest will amount to $1000 in 12 years? Given log 106 = 2.0253059, log 49697 = 4.6963292. A?is. $496.97. 41. In how many 3'ears will a sum of mone}' treble itself at 3i per cent compound interest? Given log 10350 = 4.01494. Ans. Nearly 32. 42. A person borrows $672 to be repaid in 5 years by annual instalments of $120: find the rate of interest at simple interest. 6 per cent. EXAMPLES. 459 43. A person borrows $600.25 : find how much he must pay annually that the whole debt may be discharged in 35 years, allowing simple interest at 4 per cent. Ans. $24.50. 44. Find the amount of an annuity of $100 in 20 years, at 4| per cent compound interest. Ajis. $3137.11. 45. A freehold estate worth $100 a year is sold for $2500 : find the rate of interest.* Ans. 4 per cent. 46. The reversion, after 2 years, of a freehold worth $168.10 a year is to be sold : find its present value at 2^ per cent. Ans. $6400. 47. If 20 years’ purchase must be paid for an annuity to continue a certain number of years, and 26 years’ purchase for an annuity to continue twice as long ; find the rate per cent. Ans. 3^. 48. "When 4 per cent is the rate of interest, find what sum must be paid now to receive a freehold estate of $400 a year 10 jmars hence; having given log 104 = 2.0170333, log 6.75565 = .8296670. Ans. $6755.65. 49. If a perpetual annuity is worth 20 jmars’ purchase, find the annuity to coutiuue for 3 years which can be pur- chased for $2522. Ans. $800. 50. If a perpetual annuity is worth 25 years’ purchase, find the amount of an annuity of $625 to continue for 2 years. A7is. $1275. * Id these examples the interest is compound unless otherwise stated. 460 IMA GINAR Y Q U ANTITIES — DEFINITIONS. CHAPTER XXII. IMAGINARY QUANTITIES. — INDETERMINATE EQUATIONS. — THEORY OF NUMBERS. IMAGINARY QUANTITIES. 219. Definitions. — Xi\ Imaginary Quantity is an indi- cated even root of a )>egative quantity.* Thus, y/ — «, — 2 + \/ — 4, 3 — V~E etc. are imaginary quantities. They are also called impossible or unrecd quantities. Since no number whatever can have a negative square, it follows that if we have to extract the square root of a nega- tive quantity, no answer is possible, in ordinary positive or negative numbers (Art. 107). But altliough the square root of a negative quantity is thus the symbol of an im^wssible operation, yet tliese squai’e roots frequently occur in mathe- matical investigations, and it becomes important to explain in what sense such roots are to be regarded, and how to deal with them. Every imaginary qucaitity may be reduced to one co7umon form., ivh ich i s a reed qua^itity multiplied by the imaginary quantity V— 1. Thus, = y/a’T-i) = X = nyTTi . ImagiuaiT quantities may be added, subtracted, and di- vided, the same as other surds ; but when we attempt to multiply them together there occurs one point of importance which deserves notice. Thus, by the ride for multiphdng surds together (Art. 1 28), we have V— a X V — a — v/(~a)(— a) = = ±a. Ail other quantities, whether ratioual or irraltoual, are called real quantities. F UNDA M F.NTAL P RIN Cl PL ES. 461 But since the square root of any number multiplied by itself must, by the delinition, give the original number; therefore X \! — a = —a. Similarly, = Vu- = \fab{^~iy = -Vob. The surd V — 1 is called the imaginary unit. The imaginary unit is often expressed by the letter i ; but until the student has had a little practice in the use of imaginary quantities, he will find it easier to retain the symbol V— 1. It is useful to notice the successive powers of V^— 1 or i. Thus, since the imaginary unit is such a quantity as when squared, the result is —1, therefore i = V^l, = - 1 , = (v^^)2-v^i = -sTTi, (V^)" = (-1)(-1) = 1, and so on, repeating tlie results, V^— 1, —1, — V— 1, 1. The sum of a i-eal and an imaginary quantity is called a Complex Quantity. It is usual to apply the term imaginary to all expressions which are not wholly real. Thus, a + — 1 may be taken as tlie general type of all imaginary expressions. Here a itnd b are real quantities, but not necessarily rational. 220. Fundamental Principles. — ( 1 ) If a+ by^H = 0, then a = 0, and 6 = 0. For, if o + 1 = 0, then 6V^— 1 = —a ; —b^ = a'^; .•. + b'^ — 0. Now and b^ are both positive ; therefore their sum cannot be zero unless each of them is separately zero ; i.e., a - 0, and 6 0. 462 FUNDAMENTAL PRINCIPLES. (2) If a + 6\/ — 1 = c + cZV — 1 , then a — c, and b = d. For, by transposition, a — c + (b — d)^—l = 0 ; therefore by (1), a — c = 0, and b — d = 0 ; i.e., a = c. and b = d. Thus, in order that tioo imaginary expressions may be equal it is necessary and sufficient that the real parts should be equal, and the imaginary parts should be equal. AVhen two imaginary expressions differ only in the sign of the imaginary part, they are said to be conjugate. Thus, a — 1 is conjugate to a + W— 1. The sum and the product of two conjugate imaginary expressions are both real. For, o + W— 1 + f( — = 2a . . . . (1) Also, (a + 6V^^)(a — 1) = a“^ + b~ . . (2) The use of imaginar}’ units enables us to factor expressions which are prime when onl}- real factors are admitted. Thus, (2) shows that the sum of two squares can alwa 3 ’S be expressed as the product of two complex factors. The positive value of the square root of a- + b~ is called the modidus of each of the conjugate expressions, a + bsj —I and a — b^—\. Divide s' — (d by — b’’. IT J — V— a- «V — 1 a Here V— cr -h S/ — b- = = — ;= = -. Hence imaginaiy expressions are divided the same as other surds. 221. Geometric Meaning of the Imaginary Unit. — It is clear that >J—1, or i, cannot represent a number, or anj' reed quantity such as the s}anbols a, h, c, etc. represent; it must signifj’ something which a real quantity does not take account of. As it occurs only as a multiplier of one of these other symbols, it must denote some operation performed on the real quantity denoted by these symbols; and the result of operating with it must he entirelj’ different from that of operating with a real quantity. EXAMPLES. 463 All real numbers may be represented in magnitude and direction by a horizontal line, the positive numbers increasing in one direction from zero, and tlie negative ones in the opposite direction from the same point (Art. 20). Now ia must denote the result of some operation performed on a, and i^a must similarly denote the result of performing this operation twice. But i^a = —a (Art. 219). Hence, to multiply the line +ct twice by the imaginary unit i reverses the sign of a. We have seen that if a denote a line measured in one direction, —a denotes a line of equal length measured in the opposite direction, a line which could be obtained by rotating the ftrst line in any plane through two right angles. Hence, Multiplying by the imaginary unit i may be taken to denote the operation of turning the line a through one right angle, in any plane which contains Us original 2 )Osition. Thus, let BB' be drawn perpendicular to A A' at its middle point 0. Denote OA by the symbol a ; then multiplying a by the imaginary unit i turns the line OA through the right angle into the position OB. Multiplying again by i turns the line through the second right angle into the position OA', opposite OA. Multiplying a third time by i brings the line into the position OB’, opposite OB. Multii^lying by f a foiu'th time restores the line to its original position OA. That is, OA = a; OB = ia; OA’ = Pa — —a; B' OB’ = Pa -ia; OA a; which corresponds to the law' governing the pow'ers of i (Art. 219). Note. — This is but a brief sketch of Imaginary Quantities. The subject might be extended to great length, but this would clearly be beyond the limits of this work. The student who wishes to pur- sue the subject further is referred to Peacock’s Algebra, Warren’s Treatise on the square root of negative quantities. Price’s Calculus, Vol. I. etc. EXAMPLES. Multiply the following : 1. 2^—9 and sV — 4. 2. 24 + V-49 and 24 - \/-49". 3. 2\/3 - and 4\/3 - ^/^ 5 . 4. Divide by 2^ — 4, M?is. — 36. 625. -6 -26V-15. |V3. 464 INDETERMINATE EQUATIONS. Express with rational denominator ; 1 5. 7=- 3 - 3y/^ + 2V^ 3V^ - 2y/^ r~ 3 4~ 2 - 3i‘ ^?is. 3 + V^2 11 -19 - 6V^. -9 + 19t 13 INDETERMINATE EQUATIONS. 222. Indeterminate Equations. — We have seen (Art. 93), that the detinite determination of the values of two unknown quantities requires two independent equations, and that when only one equation is given involving tico unknown quantities, there will generally be an infinite number of solu- tions ; also, if there be any number of independent equa- tions involving more than the same number of unknown quantities, there will in general be an unlimited number of solutions. Such equations are called indeterminate equations. If however the conditions of the problem be such as to exclude all solutions except positive integers, the number of solutions may be limited. W e shall discuss only the simplest kinds of indeterminate equations, confining our attention to positive integral values of the unknown quantities ; the others being more tedious than elegant, and of not much practical use. Any equation of the first degree involving two unknowns, X and y, can be reduced to the form ax ± by = ±c, where a, h, c are positive integers. It is clear that the equation ax by — — c has no positive integral solution ; and that the equation ax — by = —c equivalent to by — ax = c\ hence it will be sufficient to consider the equations ax±by=c. Neither of the equations ax ± by = c can be satisfied by integral values of x and y if a and b have a factor tchich does not divide c. IN DETERM IN A TE E Cl HAT IONS. 465 For, if either equation has such a solution, then, dividing both members by the common factor, the first member is integral and the second fractional, which is impossible. Thus, neither of the equations 6a; ± 9y = 11 can be solved in integers, because the sum or difference of 6.a; and 'niust be divisible by 3 whatever values x and y have. If c(, 6, c have a common factor, it can be removed by division, so that in the examples of this Article we shall suppose that a and b are prime to each other. 1. Solve 7x + 12y = 220 in positive integers. . . (1) Divide by 7, the smaller coefficient ; thus, a; + y + Y = 3 i + f; X + y + - 3 ^ Since x and y are to be integers. 5y - 3 _ . - integer. • • ( 2 ) Multiplying (2) by 3 in order to make tiie coefficient of y differ by unity from a multiple of 7, we have 15y — 9 c , y — 2 , 7 1 ® ^ = integer = p, suppose. • •• 1/ - 2 = or y = 7p + 2. . . (3) Substituting in (1), x — 28 — 12p. . (4) This is called the general solution of the equation ; and by giving to any integral value, we obtain from (3) and (4) corresponding integral values of x and y ; but if p > 2, we see from (4) that x is negative ; and if x> is a negative inte- ger, we see from (3) that y is negative. Thus, the only 466 INDETERMINATE EQUATIONS. positive integral values of x and y are obtained by putting p = 0, 1, 2. Thus we have p = 0, 1, 2 X = 28, 16, 4 • • y = 2, 9, 16 Note. — An artifice similar to the one used with (2) should always be employed before introducing a symbol to denote the integer. 2. Solve 5a; — 7y = 29 in positive integers. . . • (1) Divide by 5, the smaller coefficient ; thus, ^ - y - ilf = ^ + i r ~y "b 4 . , X — y — o = — = integer. Multiplying by 3, Gy + 12 _ !/ + 2 + 2/4-2 = integer. y = integer = p, suppose, 5 2/ = 5p - 2 1 and from ( 1 ) , .a; = 7p + 3 ) By giving to 2^ ^,113' positive integral value we obtain posi- tive integral values of x and y ; thus we have p = 1, 2, 3, 4, a; = 10, 17, 24, 31, y = 3, 8, 13, 18, the number of solutions being infinite. 3. In how many ways can £500 be paid in guineas and five-pound notes? Let X = the number of guineas, and y = the number of five-pound notes. Then, expressing all in shillings, we have 21a; + lOOy = 10000. INDF.TERMINA TE E QUA TIONS. 4G7 Dividing by 21, a; + 4y + = 47G + /j. cc + 4y — 47G - ~ integer. IG — G4y Q I 16 — V ■ <. = — 3y H = integer. 21 ^ 21 16 — y . , — 21~^ ~ integer = ji, suppose. y = IG — 212^ ; and x = 400 + lOOp. "We thus see that y is negative for all positive values of p, and that if 2? is negative and > 4, a; is negative. Thus the only positive integral values of x and y are obtained by putting 23 = 0, —1, —2, —3 ; therefore the number of ways is 4. If, however, the sum may be paid either in guineas or five-pound notes, p may also have the value —4. If p — —4. then .r = 0 and y = 100, and the sum is paid entirely in five- pound notes. Thus, if the zero value of x is admissible, the number of wa}’S is 5. 4. The expenses of a party numbering 43 were §114.50; if each man paid §5, each woman §2.50, and each child §1, how many were there of each? Let ai, y, z denote the number of men, women, and children, respectively ; then we have 33 -f y + 2 = 43 . . . . . . (1) 5a; 2..5y + z = 114.5. Eliminating z, we obtain 8x -f- 3y = 143. The general solution of this equation is X =r 323 -T 1 ; y = 45 — 8p. Substituting in (1), we obtain z = bp — 3. Hence p cannot be negative or zero, but may have positive integral Amines from 1 to 5. Thus we have 23= 1, 2, 3, 4, 5; a- = 4, 7, 10, 13, 16 ; y = 37, 29, 21, 13, 5; 2 = 2, 7, 12, 17, 22. 468 THEORY OF NUMBERS. Solve in positive integers : 5. 3a;+82/=103. ^ns. a: = 29, 21, 13, 5 ;?/= 2, 5, 8, li. 6. bx+ 2y = 53. a; = 1, 3, 5, 7, 9 ; y = 24, 19, 14, 9, 4. 7. 8a; + Q>by = 81. x = 2 \ y = 8. A farmer spends $3760 in bu^nng horses and cows ; if each horse costs $185 and each cow $115, how many of each does he buy? Ans. 11 horses, 15 cows. 9. In how many ways can $100 be paid in $1 pieces and half-dollar pieces, including zero solutions ? Ans. 101. THEORY OF NUMBERS. 223. Scales of Notation. — In the ordinary method of expressing numbers * by figures, the number represented by each figure is always a multiple of some power of ten. For instance, in 256 the 2 represents 2 hundreds, i.e., 2 times 10^; the 5 represents 5 tens, i.e., 5 times 10^; and the 6 represents 6 units, i.e., 6 times 10®. Thus, 4639 is an abbreviated waj’ of writing 4 X 10® + 6 X 10" + 3 X 10^ + 9. This method of representing numbers is called the common scale of notation., and 10 is said to be the base or the radix of the scale. The figures by means of which a number is expressed are called digits. The s 3 ’inbols employed in this system of notation are the nine digits and zero. In like manner an}' other number than ten may be taken as the radix of a scale of notation ; thus if 7 is the radix, a number expressed b}' 3256 represents 3x7*-}-2x7"-|-5x7-t-6; and in this scale no digit higher than 6 can occur. In a scale whose radix is denoted b}’ r the above number 3256 represents 3r® + 2r~ -f- br -f- 6. And generally, if in a scale whose radix is r the digits, beginning with that in the The word number in this subject is used ns an abbreviation for posiiite integer. SCALES OF NOTATION. 469 units’ place, be denoted by Oj, then the numbei’ so formed will be represented by + + «2’’^ + + «o-' The digits a„, «„_i, are integers, each is less than ?•, and any one or more of them after the first may be zero. Hence in this scale the number of digits, including 0, is equal to ?•, and their values range from 0 to r — 1. When the radix is 2 tlie scale is called Binary; when 3, Ternary ; when 10, Denary., or Decimal ; when 12, Duoden- ary or Duodecimal ; etc. The most useful scale after the common or denary is the duodenary . Hence it is necessary to have new symbols to represent the digits which are greater than ten. Usually the symbols, t, e, T, are emplo 5 ^ed as digits to denote “ten,” “eleven,” and “twelve.” Thus the number 6 f 7 e 4 in the scale of twelve means 6 X 12" + 10 X 123 + 7 X 1-22 _|_ n x 12 + 4. It is not usual to consider any scale higher than the duo- denary. Note. — The ordinary operations of Arithmetic may be performed in any other scale on the same principle as in the common scale. In the following examples, the student must bear in mind that the suc- cessive powers of the radi.x are no longer powers of ten, and therefore, in determining the carnjing figures^ he must not divide by ten, but by the radix of the scale in use. 1. In the scale of eight subtract 1732765 from 3673124. and multiply the result by 46. 1740137 3673124 ‘ ^ 1732765 13501072 1740137 7600574 111507032 Explanation. — Since we cannot take 5 from 4 we add 8 which makes 12; then 5 from 12 leaves 7; then 7 from 10, which leaves 3; then 8 from 9, which leaves 1; and so on. 470 TO EXPRESS A NUMBER IN ANY PROPOSED SCALE. In multiplying by 6, we have 6x7= forty-two = 5 x 8 -|- 2; we therefore set down 2 and carry 5. iS'ext 6 X 3 -f 5 = twenty-three = 2 x 8 7 set down 7 and carry 2; and so on till the multiplication is completed. In the addition, 4 -p 7 = eleven =1 x 8 -f 3; we therefore set down 3 and carry 1. Next 1 -f 7 = eight = 1 x 8 -f 0; set down 0 and carry 1; and so on. 2. Divide 15 e ^ 20 by 9 in the duodenary scale. 9)15 e i 20 1 e e96 6 Explanation. — Since 15 = 1 x T -j- 5 = seventeen = 1 x 9 -f 8, we set down 1 and carry 8. Next 8 X r -p e = one hundred and seven = e x 9 -|- 8; we there- fore set down e and carry 8; and so on. 3. Find the square root of 300114 in the scale of 5. 300il4(342 14 114 1101 1021 1232 3014 3014 4. Add 23241, 4032, 300421 in the scale of five. Ans. 333244. 5. From 2> t e 756 take 2 e 46 t 2 in the duodenary scale. xlns. e 7074. 6. Multiply 6431 by 35 in the scale of seven. 334345. 7. Find the square root of 442641 in the scale of seven. Ans. 546. 224. To Express a Whole Number in Any Pro- posed Scale. — Let N be the given number, r the radix of the scale in which it is to be expressed, and EXAMPLES. 471 required digits by which N is to be expressed in the new scale, beginning with that in the units’ place ; then N = + + + ap- + a^; we have now to find the values of the digits a^, rq, a^, . . . a„. Divide ^ by ?• ; then the remainder is and the quotient is + + ap’ + a^. If this quotient be divided by r the remainder is Uj. If the next quotient be divided by r the remainder is ; and so on, until there is no further quotient. Hence, to express a given whole number in any proposed scale. Divide the number by the radix, then the quotient by the radix, and so on until there is no further quotient ; the suc- cessive remainders will be the successive digits beginning ivith the one in the unUs' place. 1. Express the denary number 5213 in the scale of seven, and transform 21125 from scale seven to scale eleven. (1) 7 )5213 7 )744 .... 5 7 )106 .... 2 7 ^ . . . . 1 2 .... 1 (2) 6 )21125 e )1244 . . . .t c)61 . . . , o 3 .... « Explanation. — In (1), 5213 = 2 x 7*+ 1 X 7®+ 1 X 7^+2 x 7 + 5; and the number expressed in the new scale is 21125. In (2), 21 = 2x7 + 1 = fifteen = 1 X e + 4; therefore on dividing by e we set down 1 and carry 4. Next, 4x7 + 1= twenty-nine = 2 x e + 7 ; therefore we set down 2 and carry 7 ; and so on. 2. Tlednce 721.5 from scale twelve to scale ten by working 472 NUMBERS IN THE COMMON SYSTEM. Ill scale ten, and t347e from scale twelve to scale eleven by working in scale twelve. 7215 e)<347e 12 e)e273 . . . . 2 (1) 86 e)102« . . . . 1 (2) In scale 12 e)114 . . . . 2 In scale of ten 1033 e)12 . . . . 6 of twelve 12 1 . . . . 3 12401 Result is 12401, in scale of ten. Result is 136212, in scale of eleven. Explanatiox. — (1) 7215 in the scale of twelve means 7 x 12® + 2 X 12® -)- 1 X 12 + 5 in scale ten. The calculation is most easily made by writing this expression in the form ^ (7 x 12 + 2) x 12 1 ^ X 12 -)- 5. (2) Since tS = t x T + 3 = one hundred and twenty-three = e X c -|- 2, we set down e and carry 2. Also 2 X T + 4 = twentj'-eight — 2 x e -f 6; we set down 2 and carry 6 ; and so on. We may also express fractions in any scale of notation; thus, .356 in scale of ten denotes A a- _5_ j- JL; 10 10 ® 10 ® .3.56 in scale of seven denotes - -p A -p ® • 7 7® 7® .3.56 in scale of r denotes 3 -p — — . r r® r* 3. Expres.s 49.54 in the scale of seven. Ans. 20305. Transform 4. 2T2231 from scale four to scale five. 34402. 5. 238G1 from scale nine to scale eight. 37214. 0. CCS310 from scale ten to scale eleven. 20S46f. 7. 64520 from scale seven to scale eleven. 1105f. 225. Properties of Numbers in the Common System. — A number which has no factors except itself and unity is called a prime number, or a jirime; a number which has factors besides itself and unit}" is ealled a composite number; thus. 31 is a prime number, and 15 is a coniDosite number. Two numbers whieli have no common NUMBERS IN THE COMMON SYSTEM. 473 factor except unity are said to he prime to each other ; thus, 12 and 35 are prime to each other. (1) If a number p divides a product and is prime to one factor a, it must divide the other factor b. For, since p divides ab, every factor of p is found m ab ; but since p is prime to a, no factor of p is found m a ; therefore all the factors of p are found in b ; that is, p divides b. (2) If a prime number p divides a product abed it must divide one of the factors of that product. For since ^ is a prime number, if p does not divide a it is prime to a, and therefore it must divide bed .... by (1). Similarly, if p does not divide b it is prime to 5, and therefore it must divide cd By thus proceeding we shall prove that p must divide one of the factors of the product. (3) If a prime number p divides a", where n is any positive integer., it must divide a. This follows directly from (2) by supposing all the factors equal. (4) If p is prime to each of the numbers a and 5, it is prime to their prodiict. For since p is prime to a and 5, no factor of p can divide a and b ; therefore the product ab is not divisible by any factor of p ; that is, p is prime to ab. Conversely, if p is prime to o5, it is prime to each of the numbers a and b. (5) If a and b are prime to each other., o”‘ rxnd b" are prime to each other ; m and n being any positive integers. This follows at once from (4) ; hence the fractions - and o,”‘ — are in their lowest terms. (6) If a and b are prime to each other., and - = then b cl c and d must be ecjainmltiples of a and b respectively. 474 THEOREMS IN RELATION TO NUMBERS. For, if - = we have — = c ; and since c is integral, bah is integral; but h is prime to a, therefore h divides d\ b hence d = where n is some integer : therefore c = na. 226. Theorems in Relation to Numbers. — The following are seven theorems of some importance in relation to numbers : (1) No rational Algebraic formula can repreaent prime numbers only. For, if possible, let the formula a + bx + cx^ + d.r®+ . . . represent prime numbers only, and suppose that when x = m the value of tire expression is p, so that p = a -t bm + C7H^ -h dm® + . . , Now let X = m + rqi, and suppose the value then to be p'\ that is, p' = a + &(m + np) + c(m + 7ip)^ + d(m + + — a + bm + cm^ + dm^ + + a multiple of p = p + a multiple of j ) ; thus the expression p' is divisible by p, and is therefore not a prime number. (2) The number of primes is infinite. For, if not, let p be the greatest prime number ; then the product 2 • 3 • 5 • 7 • 11 • • p of all the prime numbers up to p, is divisible by each of these prime factors. It follows that the number formed by adding unity to this product is not divisible b}' aii}^ of these factors ; hence this number is either itself a prime number, or it is divisible by some prime number greater than p : thus in either ease p is not the greatest prime number. Therefore the number of primes is infinite. (3) A number can be 7-esolved into 2 Miine factors in only one xvay. Let N denote the number; suppose N" = abed . ... , where «, b, c, d, are prime numbers, equal or THEOREMS IN RELATION TO NUMBERS. 475 unequal. Suppose also that iV = cq&jC/Zj , where tq, c^, rfj, are other prime numbers. Then abed . . . = . . . ; hence must divide abed . . . ; but each of the factors of this product is a prime ; hence must be equal to one of them, a suppose. Divide by or a ; then bed . . . . = . . . . ; as before, we can prove that bj^ must be equal to one of the factors of bed ; and so on. Hence the factors in abed .... cannot be different from those in , and therefore JV can be resolved into prime factors in only one way. (4) To find the number of divisor's of a composite number. Let N denote the number, and suppose N = a^b'‘c^ • • • ? where a, b, c, are different prime numbers, and 2^1 9, r, .... are positive integers. Tlien it is clear that the composite number is divisible by each of the numbers 1, a, a^, l,b,b^, 6'', 1, c, c^, c”", , and also by the product of any two or more of them, that is, by each term of the product, (l+a+a'^+ . . +aP)(l+&+&^+ . . +6'')(l+c+cV • • +c’’) . . , and that no other number is a divisor ; hence the number of divisors is the number of terms in this product, that is, (P + 1) (9 + !)('■+ 1) This includes among the divisors both unity and the number itself. (5) To find the number of ways in ivhich a comjwsite num- ber can be resolved into two factors. Let JSf denote the number, and suppose N = cPh'^c’’ . . . . , where a, b, c, are different prime numbers, and j)^ 9? r, are positive integers. First ; suppose N not a perfect square, so that one at least of the exponents p, q, r, . . . . is an odd number ; then the number of divisors, by (4), is . (p -h 1)(9 + l)(r + 1) 476 THEOREMS IN RELATION TO NUMBERS. But there are two divisors of N corresponding to each way in which N can be resolved into two factors ; hence the required number is \{P + 1)(? + 1)(J- + 1) Second ; suppose N a perfect square, so that all the expo* neuts 2h • • • ■ even. In this case, one way of resolution into factors is ^JSf x V^, and to this way there corresponds only one divisor, If we exclude this, the number of ways of resolution is + 1 )(^ + + 1 ) ~ 1 ]> if to this we add the one way of resolution, X V^, we obtain for the required number, ilip + 1)(9 + IK?- +1) + !]• In this proposition TV X 1 is counted as one of the wa}-s of resolving N into two factors. (6) To find the sum of the divisors of a number. Let the number be denoted by as before. Then each term of the product (1+a+aH . . +aP)(l+6+&'H . . +6«Xl+c+c^+ . . +c’') . . . is a divisor, and therefore the sum of the divisors is equal to this product; that is (Art. 163), the sum required _ + ^ — 1 + ^ — 1 c*"^^ — 1 a— 1 & — 1 c— 1 (7) To find the number of ways in which a composite num- ber can be resolved into two factors tchich are prime to each other. THEOREMS IN RELATION TO NUMBERS. 477 Let the number N = aPlP(f as before. Since the two factors are to be prime to each other, we cannot have some power of o in one factor, and some power of a in the other factor, but o’’ must occur in one of the factors. Simi- larly b'’ must occur in one of the factors only ; and so on. Hence the required number is equal to the number of ways in which the product abc can be resolved into two factors ; and is therefore, by (5), i(l + 1)(1 + 1)(1 + 1) , or 2''-!, where ?i is the number of different prime factors in N. 1. Given the number 21G00, find (1) Jthe number of divisors, (2) the sum of the divisors, and (3) the number of ways in which it can be resolved into two factors prime to eacli other. Since 21600 = 6® • 10'^ = 2^ • 3® • 5", therefore by (4), the number of divisors = (5+l)(3 + l)(2+l) = 72; 96 1 Q 4 1 ns 1 6y (6), the sum of the divisors = . . ^ ^ ’ 2-13-15-1 = 63 X 40 X 31 = 78120; by (7), the number of waj's = 2®~^ = 4. 2. If n is odd show that n(?i^ — 1) is divisible by 24. We have — 1) = n{n — l)(n + 1). Here « — 1, n, ?i + 1 are three consecutive numbers; hence one of them is divisible by 3 ; and since n is odd, n — 1 and n + 1 are two consecutive even numbers ; hence one of them is divisible by 2 and the other by 4. Thus the given expression is divisible by the product of 2, 3, and 4, i.e., by 24. 3. Find the least multiplier of 3675 which will make the product a perfect square. Ans. 3. 4. Find the least multiplier of 1845 whicli will make the product a perfect cube. Hns. 3 • 5^ • 41'-^. 5. Find the numlier of divisors of 140. Ans. 12. 478 EXAMPLES. Multiply EXAMPLES. 1 . 2 . 3. 4. 2V^ + 3V^ by 4\/-3 - 5V^. 3^37 _ 5^/32 by 3V^ + 5V^. e*^ + e by ^ b * _ liVE? by - L=i£1. Ans. 6 — 2^6. -13. g2tCi _ g-2/T]_ - a; + 1. Express with rational denominator 2\l^ 3 + 2V^ ^ 3 2 - 5V-1 (X + X - s/-l (g + \T^y 2 + 5\/-l _ (X - X + \!-i - (g - 10 . (g + (1 + 3 - i ■ V3 - N2 2sjl - isj2 1 + i (a — V— 1)^ Ans. — — . 29 2(3x" - 1)V^ x^ + 1 3a^ - 1 . 2a -1 + 3t 5 8 - ?V6 14 1 — i 11. Find the value of (— V — 1)^" + ®, when n is a positive teger. xl?is. V^ — 1. 12. Find the square of \'^9+40 v/—1 + V9 — 40n/—1. 100. Solve in positive integers : 13. 7x + 12y = 152. 14. 13x + lly = 414. 15. 23x + 2by = 915. 16. 41x + 47y = 2191. 17. 17x + 23y = 183. 18. 19x -f- 5y = 119. Ans. X — 20, 8 ; y = 1,8. X = 9, 20, 31 ; y = 27, 14, 1. a; = 30, 5 ; y = 9, 32. X = 50, 3 ; y = 3, 44. X = 4 ; y = 5. X = 1, 6 ; y = 20, 1. EXAMPLES. 479 19- In how many ways can S2000 be paid in S21 bills and $5 bills, supposing there to be such bills? 19, or 2D. 20. In how many ways can S4000 be paid in S21 and $40 bills ? .das. 4, or 5. 21. In how many ways can $39 be paid in $4 and $5 bills? dl?ts. 2. 22. Find how many dollars and half-dollars, whose diam- eters are respectively .81 and .666 of an inch, may be placed in a row together, so as to make a yard in length. Ans. 28, 20. 23. A farmer buys oxen, sheep, and ducks. The whole number bought is 100, and the whole sum paid is £100. Supposing the oxen to cost £5, the sheep £1, and the ducks Is. per head, find the number he bought of each. Ans. 19 oxen, 1 sheep, 80 ducks. 24. 1 buy 40 animals consisting of sheep at $20, pigs at $10, and oxen at $85 ; if I spend $1505, how many of each do I buy ? yIhs. 28 sheep, 1 pig, 11 oxen ; or 13 sheep, 14 pigs, 13 oxen. 25. Add 303478, 150732, 264305 in the scale of nine. Ans. 728626. 26. Find the product of 4685 and 3483 in the scale of nine. Ans. 17832126. 27. Divide 14332216 b}’ 6541 in the scale of seven. Aas. 1456. 28. Divide the diffei-ence between 121012 and 11022201 by 1201 in the scale of three. Ans. 2012. 29. Divide 102432 by 36 in the scale of seven. yl»s. 1625. 30. Divide 17832126 by 4685 in the scale of nine. Ans. 3483. 31. Extract the square root of 33224 in the scale of six. ylns. 152. 32. Extract the square root of 11000000100001 in the scale of two. Ans. 1101111. 33. Extract the square root of 67556^21 in the scale of twelve. Ans. 8te7. 480 EXAMPLES. 34. Extract the square root of ce^OOl in the scale of twelve. 35. Express G24 in the scale of five. 36. Express 1458 in the scale of three. Transform 37. 213014 from scale six to scale nine. 400803 from scale nine to scale five. 123456 from scale ten to scale seven 1357531 from scale ten to scale five. 15951 from scale eleven to scale ten. Ans. eee. 4444. 2000000. Ans. 26011. 30034342. 10226.34. 321420111. 22441. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. Find the least multiplier of 3234 which will make the product a perfect square. Ans. 66. 43. Find the least multiplier of 6480 wiiich will make the product a perfect cube. Ans. 2- • 3^ • 5'-. 44. Find the least multiplier of 13168 which will make the product a perfect cube. 2- • (823)“. 45. Find the least multipliers of the numbers 4374. 18375. 74088, respectively, which will make the products perfect squares. Ans. 6, 15, 42. 46. Find the least multipliers of the numbers 7623, 109350, 539539, respectively, which will make the products perfect cubes. yl)(s. 1617, 180, 1859. 47. Find the number of divisors of 8064. Ans. 48. 48. In how many ways can the number 7056 be resolved into tw'o factors? Ans. 22. 49. Find the number of divisors of 1845 ; and the num- ber of ways in which it can be resolved into two factois. Ans. 12: 6. 50. Find the number of divisors there are in [9_. and the sum of these divisors. 160; 1481040. 51. Find the number of divisors of 1000, 3600, and 14553. .Tas. 16, 45. 24. 52. In how many waj’S can a line 100800 inches long be divided into equal parts, each some multiple of an inch? 126 . PROBABILITY {CHANGE) — DEFINITION. 481 CHAPTER XXIII. PROBABILITY (CHANCE). 227. Definition. — If an event can happen in a ways and fail in b ways, and if each of these ways is equally likely, the probability or chance of its happening is — - — ; a b and the probability or chance of its failing is — ^ — . a b Otherivise, thus : If an event can happen in a ways and fail in b ways, and each of these ways is equally likely to happen, we can assert that the chance of its happening is to the chance of its failing as a to 6 ; therefore the chance of its happening is to the sum of the chances of its happen- ing and failing as a to a -f- 6. But the event must either happen or fail, hence the sum of the chances of its happen- ing and failing must represent certainty. Therefore the chance of its happening is to certainty as a to a b. If then we represent certainty by unity, we have the chance that the event will happen is — - — ; a -f- h 1 ^ and the chance that the event will not happen is — ^ — . a -\- b Hence we have the following definition : The probability of an event happening is the ratio of the number of favorable cases to the whole number of cases both favorable and unfavorable. Thus, if a bag contain 5 white and 12 black balls, and one of them be drawn at random from the bag, the chance of this being a white ball is of its being a black ball 482 PROBABILITY {CHANCE) — DEFINITION. If is the chauce of the happeniug of an event, the chance of its not happening is 1 — Note. — When the chance of the happening of an event is to the chance of its failing as a to h, it is sometimes expressed in popular language thus : the odds are a to h in favor of the event, or h to a against the event. If the chances for and against an event are even, the chance of the event is h. 1. From a bag containing 3 white and 9 black balls a man dravs's one at random ; what is the chance that this will be a white ball? There are here 3 ways of drawing a white ball and 12 ways of drawing either a white or a black ball. Hence the required chance =r ^ = J. 2. From a bag containing 4 white and 5 black balls a man draws 3 at random : what is the chance of these being all black? The total number of ways in which 3 balls can be drawn from 9 balls is gCg (Art. 181), and the number of ways of drawing 3 black balls from o is 5 C 3 ; therefore the chance of drawing 3 black balls = & ^ 5-4-3 ^ ^ gCg 9 . 8:7 42' 3. Find the chance of throwing at least one ace in a single throw with two dice. As a common die has 6 s^'inmetric faces, it may fall in any one of 6 ways ; and each of these 6 ways ma}’ unite with each of the six ways of the second die, giving 36 different cases in all. An ace on one die may be associated with an}' of the 6 numbers on the other die, and the remaining 5 numbers on the first die may each be associated with the ace on the second die ; thus the number of favorable cases is 11 . Hence the required chauce = SIMPLE EVENTS. 483 Otherwise thus: There are 5 v/ays in which each die can be thrown so as not to give an ace ; hence 25 throws of the two dice will exclude aces, so that the chance of not throwing one or more aces is Hence the chance of throwing at least one ace = 1 — 1 — 3'B‘' 4. Find the chance of throwing more than 15 in one throw with 3 dice. A throw amounting to 18 must be made up of 6, 6, 6, and this can occur in 1 way; 17 can be made up of 6, 6, 5, and this can occur in 3 ways ; 16 can be made up of 6, 6, 4, and 6, 5, 5, and these can each occur in 3 ways. There- fore the number of favorable cases is • 1 4- 3 -f 3 + 3, or 10. And the whole number of cases is 6®, or 216. Hence the required chance = = yfg. 228. Simple Events. — Suppose there to be a number of events, A, B, C, of which one must, and only one can, occur; and suppose a, 5, c, to be the numbers of ways respectively in which these events can occur, and that each of these ways is equally likely to happen. Then, since A can occur in a ways, out of a 6 -f c + ways, therefore by Art. 227, the chance that A will happen is . CL 4“ t) 4“ c . . . Similarly, the chance that B will happen is ^ ; CL 4“ h 4“ c . . . and so on. 1. From a bag containing 3 white, 4 black, and 5 red balls a man draws 2 at random : what are the probabilities of the different cases ? The number of pairs that can be formed out of 12 things 484 SIMPLE EVENTS. is (Art. 181), or 66. The miinbor of pairs that can be formed out of the three white balls is or 3 ; hence the chance of drawing two white balls = Similarly, the chance of drawing two black balls = ; and the chance of drawing two red balls = Also, as each of the 3 loMte balls might be associated with each of the 4 black balls, the number of pairs consisting of one white and one black ball is 3 X 4, or 12 ; hence the chance of drawing a white and a black ball = Similarly, the chance of drawing a black and a red ball = ; and the chance of drawing a red and a white ball = The sum of these six chances is unity, as it should be (Art. 227). 2. A has 3 shares in a lottery in which there are 3 prizes and 6 blanks ; B has 1 share in a lottery in which there are 1 prize and 2 blanks : show that A’s chance of success is to B’s as 16 to 7. A may draw three prizes in one way ; he may draw 2 prizes and 1 blank in X 6, or 18 ways; he may draw 1 prize and 2 blanks in 3 X gCo, or 45 ways : the sum of these numbers is 64, which is the number of ways in which A can draw a prize. Also he can draw 3 tickets in gCg, or 84 ways ; .-. A’s chance of drawing a prize = and clearly B’s chance of drawing a prize • therefore A’s chance : B’s chance : : 16 : 7. Or ice might have reasoned lines: A may draw 3 blanks in gCg, or 20 ways. .-. A’s chance of drawing a blank = ; .-. A’s chance of drawing a prize = 1 — (Art. 227) . 3. In a single throw with two dice find the chance (1) of throwing five, and (2) of throwing six. Aas. (1) (2) COMPOUND EVENTS. 485 4. From a pack of 52 cards two are drawn at random : find the chance that one is a knave and the other a rpieen. 5. Find the chance of drawing two black balls and one red ball from a bag containing 5 black, 3 red, and 2 white 229. Compound Events. — Hitherto we have consid- ered only those occurrences which in the language of Proba- bility are called Simple events. When two or more of these simple events occur in connection with each other, the joint occurrence is called a Compound event. Events are said to be dependent or indejjendent according as the occurrence of one does or does not affect the occurrence of the other. Dependent events are sometimes said to be contingent. (1) If there are two iyidependent events of ivhicli the re- spective prohahilities are knoion, to find the prohahility that both ivill happen. Suppose that the first event may happen in a ways and fail in b ways, all these ways being equally likely to occur; and suppose that the second event may happen in a' ways and fail in b' ways, all these ways being equally likely to occur. Each of the a -f b eases may be associated wdth each of the a' -f b' cases, thus forming (a + b) {a' -f- b') compound cases all equally likely to occur. In aa' of these compound eases both events happen, in W of them both events fail, in ab' of them the first event hap- pens and the second fails, and in a'b of them the first event fails and the second happens. Thus, Ans. balls. aa' — is the chance that both events happen ; (ft -p b) {cif + U) bb' is the chance that both events fail ; (ft + b) {a' + b') ah' — is tb«i chance that the first happens and (ft + b) {a' + 5 ) the second fails. 486 COMPOUND EVENTS. ; — is the chance that the first fails and the (a + &) (a + & ) second happens. Hence, If tivo events he independent of each other., the probability that they will both happen is equal to the product of their separate probabilities. Thus, if p and p' are the respeetive chances of two in- dependent events, pp' is the chance that both events will happen. Similar reasoning will apply in the case of an}’ number of independent events. For example, suppose there are three independent events, and that p., j)\ p" are the re- spective chances of their happening separately. From the above rule, the chance that the first two will happen is pp ' ; then in the same w’ay the chance that the first three will happen is pp' X p" . or pp'p" ; and so on for any number. Similarly, the chance that all the events will fail is (1 — p)(l — T )(1 ~ P")- The chanee that the first two events will happen and the other fail is pp' {I — p") ; and so on. Hence, If there be any number of independent events, the probability that they ivill all happen is equal to the product of their separate probabilities. If p is the chanee that an event will happen in one trial, the chance that it will happen in any assigned succession of r trials is pT ; this follows at once by supposing that p, p' , 2 >", are each equal to 79. 1 . Find the chance of throwing an ace in the first only of two successive throws with a single die. Here we require the ace to appear at the first throw, and at the second throw it is not to appear. The chance of throwing the ace at the first trial = ^ ; and the chance of not throwing the aee at the second trial = f. .’. the chance of the compound event = x f 2. Suppose 5 white and 8 black balls to be placed in a bag ; find the chance that in two successive drawings of 3 COMPOUND EVENTS. 487 balls each, the first will give 3 white and the second 3 black balls, the balls first draicn being replaced before the second trial. The number of ways in which 3 balls may be drawn is 13^8 > The number of ways in which 3 white may be drawn is ; The number of ways in which 3 black may be drawn is the chance of 3 white at the first trial ; and the chance of 3 black at the second trial=gC'g-7- J3(73= . • . the chance of the compound event = X xW = 2 “o' 4 ¥^- Note. — To find the chance that some one at least of the events will happen we proceed thus: the chance that all the events fail is (1 _p)(i — p')(l — V") ) and except in this case some one of the events must happen ; hence the required chance is 1 — (1 — p)(l — p0(1 — P”) 3. Suppose that it is 9 to 7 against a person A who is now 35 years of age living till he is 65, and 3 to 2 against a person B now 45 living till he is 75 : find the chance that one at least of these persons will be alive 30 years hence. The chance that A will die within 30 years = ; and the chance that B will die within 30 years = f ; the chance that both will die within 30 3 'ears= f X Therefore the chance that both will not be dead, that is, that one at least will be alive, is 1 — |^ = . (2) The probability of the concurrence of two dependent events is the product of the probability of the first into the probability that when that has happened the second will follow. This is only a slight modification of the principle estab- lished in (1), and is proved in the same way. Thus, suppose that when the first event has happened, a' denotes the number of ways in which the second event will follow^, and b' the number of ways in which it will not follow ; then the number 488 MUTUALLY EXCLUSIVE EVENTS. of ways in which the two events can happen together is act', and the probability of their concurrence is aa' {q. -j- h) (ci' + b') Thus, if p is the probability of the first event, and p' the contingent probability that the second will follow, the prob- ability of the concurrence of the two events is pp'. 4. In a hand at whist find the chance that a specified player holds both the king and queen of trumps. Denote the player by A ; tlien the chance that A has the king is clearly 13 -f- 52 ; for this particular card can be dealt in 52 different ways, 13 of which fall to A. The chance that, when A has the king, he can also hold the queen is then 12 -r- 51 ; for the queen can be dealt in 51 ways, 12 of which fall to A. Therefore the chance required = x 4| = 5. Suppose 5 white and 8 black balls to be placed in a bag : find the chance that in two successive drawings of 3 balls each, the first will give 3 white and the second 3 black balls, the halls first draton not being replaced before the seconh tried. At the first trial, 3 balls may be drawn in wa}’S ; and 3 white balls may be drawn in ways. At the second trial, 3 balls may be drawn in j^Cg ways ; and 3 black balls may be drawn in g(7g ways. .• . the chance of 3 white at first trial = g(7g jgCg = jfj : and the chance of 3 black at second trial = g(7g -h jgCg = the chance of the compound event = yf 3 tV = The student should compare this solution with that in Ex. 2. 230. Mutually Exclusive Events. — TjT an event can Im^ipen in two or more different ways ichich are nudnedly exclusive., the chance that it n-ill happen is the sum of the chances of its happening in these different ways. MUTUALLY EXCLUSIVE EVENTS. 48‘J If the different ways of happening are all equally probable, this proposition is merely a repetition of the definition of probability (Art. 227) ; and if they are not equally probable, the proposition seems to follow so naturall}' from that defi- nition that it is often assumed as self-evident. It may, however, be proved as follows : Suppose the event can happen in two ways which cannot concur ; and let % be the chances of the happening of b b m » the event in these two ways, respective!}'. Then out of bb' cases there are ab' in which the event may happen in the first way, and a'b in which the event may happen in the second way ; and these ways cannot concur. Therefore, out of the whole bb' cases there are ab' -|- a'b cases favorable to the event ; hence the chance that the event will happen in one or the other of the two ways is ab' + a'b _ « . bU ~ b'^ V Similarly for any number of exclusive ways in which the event can happen. Hence if an event can happen in n ways which are mutu- ally exclusive, and if p.,, Pg, p„ are the proba- bilities that the event will happen in these different ways, respectively, the probability that it will happen in some one of these ways is Pi + P-2 + P 3 + + P«- 1. Suppose two urns, A and B; let A contain 2 white and 3 black balls, and let B contain 3 white .and 4 black balls ; find the chance of obtaining a white ball by a single drawing from one of the urns taken at random. Since each urn is equally likely to be taken, the chance of selecting the urn A is | ; and the chance then of drawing a white ball from it is | ; hence the chance of obtaining a white ball so far as it depends on A is ^ X |, or Simi- 490 MUTUALLY EXCLUSIVE EVENTS. larly, the chance of obtaining a white ball so far as it depends on B is x f , or the required chance = 4 + = -|§. 2. Find the chance of throwing 9 at least in a single throw with two dice. There are 36 cases in all ; 9 can be made up in 4 waj's, 10 in 3 ways, 11 in 2 ways, and 12 in 1 way. .-. the chance of throwing 9 = 4 ^ 36 ; the chance of throwing 10 = 3 ^ 36 ; the chance of throwing 11 = 2 36 ; and the chance of throwing 12 = 1 36. Now the chance of throwing a number not less than 9 is the sum of these separate chances. .•. the required chance = 4 + 3 + 2 + 1 36 18' Note 1. — In each of these two examples the probability of the event is the sum of the probabilities of the separate events. It is important, however, to notice that the probability of one or other of a series of events is the sum of the probabilities of the separate events, only iMien the events are mutually exclusive, i.e., when the occuiTence of any one is incompatible with the occurrence of any of the others. 3. From 20 tickets marked with the first 20 numerals, one is drawn at random : find the chance that it is a multiple of 3 or of 7. The chance that the number is a multiple of 3 is and the chance that it is a multiple of 7 is ; and these events are mutually exclusive. .-. the required chance = = f. But if the question had been : Jind the chance that the number is a multiple of 3 or of 4, it would have been incorrect to reason as follows : Because the chance that the number is a multiple of 3 is • 5 ®(y, and the chance that the number is a multiple of 4 is therefore the chance that it is a multiple of 3 or 4 is + - 5 %? MUTUALLY EXCLUSIVE EVENTS. 491 or |-J-. For the number on the ticket might be a multiple hotli of 3 and of 4, so that the two events considered are not mutually exclusive. Note 2. — The distinction between simple and compound events is, in many cases, purely an artificial one; it often amounts to nothing more than a distinction between two different ways of viewing the same occurrence. 4. A bag contains 3 white and 4 black balls ; if 2 balls are drawn what is the chance that one is white and the other black ? (1) Regarding the occurrence as a simple event, the chance =3x4-=- — -f. (2) Regarding the occurrence as the happening of one or other of the two following compound events : (а) drawing a white and then a black ball, the chance of which is 3 V 4 _ _4_ . 7 ^ U — 14 ’ ( б ) drawing a black and then a white ball, the chance of which is X i 3 « — _4_ 14‘ And since these events are mutually exclusive, the required chance = -|- ^ a. 5. What is the chance of throwing an ace in the first only of two successive throws with an ordinary die? Ans. 6 . Three cards are drawn at random from an ordinary pack ; find the chance that they will consist of a knave, a queen, and a king. Ans. - 5 ^- 5 . 7. Find the chance of throwing an ace and only one in two successive trials with one die. Ans. . 8 . In one throw with a pair of dice find the chance that there is neither an ace nor doublets. A?is. f . 9. When 6 coins are tossed what is the chance that one, and one only, will fall with the head up ? A?is. 10. The odds against a certain event are 5 to 2, and the odds in favor of another event independent of the former are 6 to 5 : find the chance that one at least of the events will happen. . . ' Ans. . 192 EXPECTATION — GENERAL PROBLEM. 231. Expectation. — The value of a given chance of obtaining a given sum of money is called the expectation. Suppose that there are a + 6 tickets in a lottery for a prize M ; then since each ticket is equally likely to win the prize, and a person who possesses all the tickets must win, the money value of each ticket is M (a + 6) ; in other words this would be a fair sum to pay for each ticket ; hence > a person who held a tickets might I’easonably expect aM H- (a + h) as the price to be paid for his tickets ; that is, he w'ould estimate this amount as the value of his chance, or expectation. Therefore, if E be the expectation, we have ^ a ^ a + & Thus, the expectation is the sum ivhich may he won muUipnied by the chance of icinnivg it. 1 . A bag contains 3 white and 7 black balls. Find the expectation of a man who is allowed to draw a ball from Ihe bag, and w'ho is to receive §1 if he draws a black ball, and $5 if he draws a white one. Tlie chance of drawing a black ball is ; and therefore the expectation from drawing a black ball is SO. 70. The chance of drawing a white ball is ; and therefore the expectation from drawing a white ball is $1.30. Hence, as these events are exclusive, the whole expectation is 82.20. 2. A purse contains 2 sovereigns, 3 half-crowns, and 7 shillings. AVhat should l)e paid for permission to draw (1) one coin, and (2) two coins? H?is. (1) 4s. G^d. ; (2) 9s. IcL 3. Two persons toss a dollar alternateh^ on condition that the first W'ho gets “heads” wdn the dollar: find their ex- pectations. H?is. O.G6| ; 0.33J. 232. General Problem. — The probability of the hap- p)ening of an event in one trial being hnowii. required the probability of its happening once, twice., three times, etc., exactly in n trials. Let p> be the probability of the happening of the event in one trial, and q the probability' of its failing, so that q—l—p>. GENERAL PROBLEM. 493 Then the probabilitj’ that in n trials the event will happen in one particular trial, and fail in the other — 1 trials is (Art. 229) ; and since there are n trials, the proba- bility of its happening in some one of these and failing in the rest is npq’^~^. The probability that in n trials the event will happen in two particular trials, and fail in the other n — 2 trials, is p^q ’^~^ ; and there are ways in which the event may happen twice and fail n — 2 times in n trials ; therefore the probability that it will happen exactly twice in n trials is In general, the probability that in n trials the event will happen in any particular set of r trials and fail in the other n — r trials is and as a set of r trials can be selected in „C(. ways, all of which are equally probable and are mutually exclusive, the required probability of the event happening exactly r times in n trials is . Thus, if {p -f- g)" be expanded by the binomial theorem, the successive terms will be the probability of the happening of the event exactly n times, n — 1 times, n — 2 times, etc., in n trials. If the event happens n times, or fails only once, twice, . ... (n — r) times, it ha[)pens r times or more ; therefore the chance that it happens at least r times in n trials is P" + nC\lP-'q + „C.,2P-Y + . . . + „C„_rP’Y~’', ( 1 ) Dr the sum of the first n — ?■ + 1 terms of the expansion of (p + qy. 1. In four throws with a pair of dice, what is the chance of throwing doublets twice at least? In a single throw the chance of doublets is or A ; and the chance of failing to throw doublets is f ; therefore P ^ (1 n = 4, r = 2. The required event follows if doublets are thrown four times, three times, or twice ; hence tlie required chance is the sum of the first three terms of (1). Thus the chance = —(1 + 4 • 5 -f- 6 • 5^) = 6'* 494 GENERAL PROBLEM — EXAMPLES. 2. In five throws with a single die, what is the chance (1) of throwing exactly three aces? and (2) of throwing at least three aces ? Herep = g = |^, n = 5, r — 3. Hence (1) the chance = (2) the chance = (1)^+ 5(^)Xf) + 3. Find the chance that a person with two dice wdl throw aces at least four times in six trials. Ans. (36)« 4. Find the chance of throwing an ace with a single die once at least in six trials. Ans. 31031 6 « Note. — The subject of Probability is so extensive that, in an elementary work on Algebra, it is imimssible to give more than a very brief sketch. The student who wishes to investigate this subject further, is referred to Todhunter’s Algebra, and Hall and Knight’s Higher Algebra; also to Whitworth’s Choice and Chance, an admira- ble English work; and when he becomes acquainted with the Integral Calculus he may consult Professor Crofton’s article Prohability, in the Encyclopaedia Britannica. For a complete account of the origin and development of the subject, see Todhunter’s nistonj of the Theory of Prohability from the time of Pascal to that of Laplace; in this work the reader is introduced to almost every process and every species of problem which the literature of the subject can furnish. For the practical applications of the theory of Probability to commercial transactions, we may refer to the articles, Annuities and Insurance in the Encyclopaedia Britannica. EXAMPLES. 1. Find the chance of drawing a red ball from a hag which contains 5 white and 7 red balls. Hitts. 2. Two balls are to be drawn from a bag containing 5 red and 7 white balls : find the chance that they will both be white. ^?is. 3. Show that the odds are 7 to 3 against drawing 2 red balls from a bag containing 3 red and 2 white balls. EXAMPLES. 495 4. A bag contains 5 white, 7 black, and 4 red balls : find the chance that 3 balls drawn at random are all white. Ans. 5'^. 5. If 4 coins are tossed, find the chance that there will be 2 heads and 2 tails. Ans. |. O 6. If from a pack 4 cards are drawn, find the chance that they will be the 4 honors of the same suit. Ans. 7. In shuffling a pack of cards, 4 are accidentally dropped : find the chance that the missing cards should be one from each suit. Ajis. 8. A has 3 shares in a lottery containing 3 prizes and 9 blanks ; B has 2 shares in a lottery containing 2 prizes and 6 blanks : compare their chances of success. Ans. 952 to 715. 9. Find the odds against throwing one of the two numbers 7 or 11 in a single throw with two dice. Ans. 7 to 2. 10. If from a lottery of 30 tickets marked 1, 2, 3, ... . four tickets be drawn, find the chance that 1 and 2 will be among them. Ans. 11. Supposing that it is 8 to 7 against a person who is now 30 years of age living till he is 60, and 2 to 1 against a person who is now 40 living till he is 70 : find the chance that one at least of these persons will be alive 30 j'ears heuce. Ans. 12. A party of 13 persons take their seats at a round table ; show that it is 5 to 1 against two particular persons sitting together. 13. The chance that A can solve a certain problem is one- fourth ; and the chance that B can solve it is two-thirds : find the chance that the problem will be solved if they both try. Ans. f. 14. The odds against A solving a certain problem are 4 to 3, and the odds in favor of B solving the same problem are 7 to 5 : what is the chance that the problem will be solved if they both try ? Ans. -If. 15. A lottery has 1 prize of $50, 2 prizes of $5 each, 496 EXAMPLES. 4 prizes of $1 each, and 13 blanks: find the expectation of the holder of 1 ticket. Ans. .S3. 20. 16. In three throws with a pair of dice, find the chance of having doublets one or more times. Ans. 1 — (f)®. 17. Find the chance of throwing double sixes once or oftener in 3 throw's with a pair of dice. Ans. 1 — 18. If on an average 9 ships out of 10 return safe to port, find the chance that out of 5 ships expected at least 3 will arrive. Ans. 19. If four cards be drawn from a pack, find the chance that they will be marked one, two, three, four, of the same 4 . 14 suit. ^1/lS. == . 52 • 51 • 50 • 49 20. Two persons, A and B, engage in a game in which A’s skill is to B’s as 2 to 3. Find the chance of A’s win- ning at least 2 games out of 5. Ans. 2072 21. A s chance of winning a single game against B is f : find the chance of his winning at least 2 games out of 3. ^ns. 22, What is the chance of throwing at least 2 sixes in 6 throws with a die? 23. A person goes on throwing a single die until it turns up ace. What is the chance (1) that he will have to make at least ten throws ; (2) that he will have to make exactly ten throws? Ans. (1) (f)®; (2) o'* 24. A die is to be thrown once by each of four persons, A, B, C, D, in order, and the first of them who throws an ace is to receive a prize. Find their respective chances, and (5) the chance that the prize will not be won at all. ^Ins. A’s chance B’s 3%, C’s D’s (5) 25. What is the chance that a person with two dice will throw aces exactly four times in six trials? ^-1/is. 497 GENERAL EQUATION OF THE DEGREE. CHAPTER XXIV. THEORY OF EQUATIONS. 233. General Equation of the Degree. — The general form of an equation of the li"' degree with one unknown quantity is a;" + + + X)„_pc + p„ = 0, (I) where n is a positive integer, and the coeflicients jjq, ^ 2 , Pn are either positive or negative, integral or fractional. The coefficient of a;" may always be made unity, as above, by dividing the equation by the coefficient of a;”. The term p^ may be considered as the coefficient of a;®, and is called the absolute term. This equation is called the General Equation of the Degree, because it is the form to which every Algebraic equation can be reduced. Unless the contrary is specified, the n coefficients p. 2 , p>n ■''’ill always be supposed rational. When one quantity is so connected with another that no change can take place in the latter without producing a corresponding change in the former, the former is called a function of the latter. Any Algebraic expression which contains x is an Algebraic function of x, and maj' be denoted by f(x).* Thus, the first member of (1) is a function of x, and may be denoted by f(x) ; then we may represent the general equation of the ?i*'' degree by f{x) = 0. Any value of x which, being substituted for x, satisfies the equation, i.e., makes f(x) equal to 0, is called a root of the equation (Art. 53). We shall assume that every equation of the form f(x) = 0 has a root, real or imaginary. The proof of this theorem is * This is read “ a fuuctiou of x,” or “ the / functiou of x,” or more briefly, “ the / of X.” 498 DIVISIBILITY OF EQUATIONS. given in special treatises on the Theory of Equations; but it is beyond the range of the present work. An equation of the third degree with one unknown quan- tit}’ is called a cubic equation. An equation of the fourth degree with one unknown quantity is called a biquadratic equation. 234. Divisibility of Equations. — ( 1 ) If a is a root of the equation f{x) = 0, then f{x) is exactly divisible by X — a. For, divide f{x) by x — a until a remainder is obtained which does not contain a: ; let Q Ije the quotient, and R the remainder if there be one. Then, since the dividend is equal to the product of the divisor and the quotient, added to the rernander, (x — a)Q + R = 0. But X = a \ therefore {x — a) Q = 0, and .•. R = 0. That is, x — a divides f{x) without a remainder. (2) Conversely, if f{x) is e.xactly divisible by x — a, then a is a root of the equation f{x) — 0. For, let Q be the quotient when f{x) is divided by x — a\ then {x — a)Q = 0. This equation is satisfied when x = a, and therefore a is a root of the equation f(x) = 0. 1. Prove by this method tliat 2, 3, and 4 are roots of the equation .a;® — dx^ + 26.r — 24 = 0. 2. Prove that 4 is a root of the equation a;3 + — 14.1; - 24 = 0. 3. Prove that —1 is a root of the equation _ 38.x’ 3 + 210x- + 538.i; + 289 = 0. (3) To find the remainder tvhen any rational function of X is divided by x — a, where a is any constant. NUMBER OF ROOTS. 499 Let f{x) denote any rational function of x ; divide f{x) by a; — a until the remainder is independent of x\ let Q denote the quotient, and R the remainder ; then f{x) = {x — a) Q + R. Since R does not involve x it will remain unaltered whatever value we give to x ; put x = «, then /(a) * = 0 X Q + J? ; now Q is finite for finite values of x ; hence R = f(a) . 235. Number of Roots. — Every equation of the n"' degree has n roots., and no more. We have seen (Art. 140) that a quadratic equation has two roots. In the same way, a cubic equation has three roots, and so on. Denote the given equation by f(x) - 0, where (Art. 233) f{x) = of + + . . . + Pn--jX + p„ = 0. (1) The equation f(x) — 0 has a root, real or imaginary ; let this be denoted by a; then, by (1) of Art. 234, f(x) is divisible by cc — a, so that (1) becomes f(x) = (X - a) ffx) = 0 . . . . (2) where /j (a’) is a rational function of (n — 1) dimensions. Now (2) may be satisfied by making either factor equal to 0; hence (a) = 0; and the equation /^(.a’) = 0 must have a root, real or imaginary ; let this be denoted by b ; then f(x) is divisible by a; — 6, so that (2) becomes . /(•'«) = - a) {x - b)ffx) = 0, . . . (3) where / 2 (a) is a rational function of (n — 2) dimensions. Continuing in this way, the equation f{x) = 0 will ulti- mately be resolved into n binomial factors of the form x — a, X — b, X — c, etc. Hence, calling the last root Z, (1) may be written in the form f{x) — (^x — a) (x — b){x — c) (a — Z) = 0 . (4) /(a) is the expression obtained by substituting a for x in fix). 500 RELATIONS BETWEEN COEFFICIENTS AND ROOTS. Therefore the equation f{x) = 0 has n roots, since /(.r) is equal to 0 wlieu x has any of the values a, b, c, 1. And the equation cannot have more than n roots, for if we give to X a value different from any of the n values a, 6, c. Z, all the factors of (4) are different from zero, and therefore f{x) cannot be zero. In the above investigation some of the quantities, «, 5, c, .... may be equal ; in this case, however, we shall suppose that the equation still lias n roots, although two or more of them are equal. Thus, factoring the equation 3.3 _ aj 2 _ 8 a; 12 = 0 , it becomes {x — 2) (x — 2) (x + 3) = 0, and hence the three roots are 2, 2, —3; and the equation has two equal roots. It follows from this theorem that if we know one root of an equation, we may by division reduce it to another equation of the next lower degree, which contains the remaining roots. Hence, when all the roots of an equation but two are known, it may be reduced to a quadratic by division, and the remain- ing roots found by the rules for quadratics. 1. One root of the equation .r® — 9.r® -b 26x — 24 = 0 is 3 : find the other roots. 2, 4. 2. Two roots of the equation .r*— 12.r'®-f-48.r®— 68.r-l-15 = 0 are 3 and 5 : find the other roots. Ans. 2 ± \ 3. 3. Three roots of lO.r®— 112.r® — 207a; — 110 = 0 are —1, —2, —5: find the other roots. Ans. 1 ± \T2. 236. Relations between Coefficients and Roots. — To investigate the relations hetioeen the coefficients and the roots of any given equation. If we form an equation with the two roots, a and 5, we have (Art. 235) {x — a) (x — b) = 0 ; and performing the multiplication indicated, this becomes a;® — (a -j- b)x + ab = 0. RELATIONS BETWEEN COEFFICIENTS AND ROOTS. 501 Similarly, if we form an equation with the three roots, a, 5, and c, we have — (a + 6 + c)x‘^ -f {ah + nc + bc)x — ahc = 0 ; and so on. Comparing this with the general form (see (1) of Art. 233), we see that — (a + 5 + c) ; p .2 — {ah + ac + be ) ; = —abc. If we add another root, fZ, we find the result to be Pi = — {a + b + c + d); p .2 = {ab + ac d- ad + be + bd cd ) ; ^3 = — {abc + abd + acd + bed) ; 21 ^ = abed. Hence, generally, we have the following Rule. Tlie coefficient of the second term of the genered equation is the sum of cdl the roots idth their signs changed. The coefficient of the third term is the sum of the products jf cdl the roots, taken tioo and two. The coefficient of the fourth term is the sum of the products of all the roots, taken three and three, luith their signs changed, etc. The last term is the product of cdl the roots with their signs changed. Note. — It will be seen that these relations include those of quadratics given in Art. 140. If the second terra of an equation is wanting, the sura of the roots will be 0. The absolute terra of an equation is divisible by every rational root. If the absolute term is wanting, one root at least will be 0. Form the equation whose roots are 1. 3, 4, -5. Has. a;® - 2x^ - 23a: + 60 = 0. 2. 3, -2, 7. a;® - 8a:® + a; + 42 = 0. 3. 2, 3, 5, -G. X* - 4x® - 29 .t® + 156a: - 180 = 0. 502 FRACTIONAL ROOTS — IMAGINARY ROOTS. 237. Fractional Roots. — An equation having unity for the coefficient of the first term., and all the other coefficients integers, cannot have a root which is a rational fraction. If possible, let a rational fraction in its lowest teims, be a root of X” + + + Pn-\X + = 0, (1) where all the coefficients are integers. ct Substituting - fora; in (1), multiplying by 6"“^, and trans- posing, we have ^ = — + p./C~‘‘b + p^aT~^h‘^ -f -f That is, we have a fraction in its lowest terms (Art. 225) equal to the sum of a number of integers, which is impossi- ble. Therefore (1) cannot have a root which is a rational fraction. Note. — This proposition oniy proves that the rational roots of the equation nmst be integers. Tiie equation may, however, have irra- tional fractions as roots. Thus, in the equation x-— 11a; -f 10 = 0, 3 ± one of tiie roots is 2, and the other two are f ~ . Such roots as tiiese, whose values cannot be exactly expressed, are called incom- mensurable. 238. Imaginary Roots. — In an equation with real coefficients imaginary roots occur in pairs. Denote one of the imaginaiy roots of such an equation by a + bi (Art. 219) ; then if a + bi be a root of the equation, a — bi will also be a root. For, if a -f bi be substituted for x in the equation, the result will consist, (1) of real terms which involve the odd and even powers of a and the even powers of bi, and (2) of imaginary terms which involve the odd powers of bi. DESCARTES' RULE OF SIGNS. 503 Representing the sum of all the real terms by A, and the sum of all the imaginary terms by Bi, we have A A Bi = 0. But in order that this equation may be true, we must have A = 0 and B — 0 (Art. 220) . If we now substitute a — bi for x in the given equation, the result will differ from the preceding only in the signs of the imaginary terms. Hence we obtain A — Bi. But since A — 0 and B = 0, we have A ~ Bi = 0. Thus, a — bi satisfies the equation, and therefore it is also a root. In like manner it may be shown that in an equation with rational coefficients, surd roots enter in pairs ; i.e., if n + is a root, then ci — is also a root. Hence, every equation of an odd degree with real coefficients has at least one real root. Since the product of a pair of conjugate imaginary factors is a real quadratic factor {Art. 220) , it follows that., in an equation of an even degree, all the roots may be imaginary. 1. One root of the equation x^ — 15a’ + 4 = 0 is 2 + ^3 : find the other roots. Ans. 2 — y/s, —4. 2. One root of — 3.a- — 42.a— 40 = 0 is — 4(3— V— 31) : find the other roots. Ans. — i(3 + V— 31), 4, — 1. 3. One root of 6.r^ — 13a^ — 35.a^ — .a + 3 = 0 is 2 — V^3 : find the other roots. Ans. 2 + \[%, — i, — 239. Descartes’ Rule of Signs. — An equation f(x)=0 cannot have more positive roots than there are variations of sign in f{x ) , or more negative roots than there are variations of sign in /(-a). A varicdion of sign is said to occur when the signs of two successive terms of a series are unlike; and a permanence, when the signs are cdike. 504 DESCARTES' RULE OF SIGNS. (1) Suppose that the signs of the terms in any equation are + H 1 1 ] — , in which there are four per- manences and seven variations. We shall show that if we introduce a new positive root a into this equation, which we do by multiplying it by x — a (Art. 235) , whose signs are -| — , there will be at least one more variation of sign in the product than in the original equation. Writing down only the signs of the terms in the multiplication, we have + + -- + + - + - + - + + -- + + - + - -- + + - + + -b--f- + + ±-t + -tth 1 1- A double sign is placed where the sign of any term in the product is ambiguous. It will be seen by inspection (1) that each permanence in the multiplica'nd is replaced by an ambi- guity in the product, (2) that the signs before and after an ambiguity or a set of ambiguities are unlike, and (3) that a variation is introduced at the end. Hence, taking the ambiguous sign either way, the intro- duction of the positive root -+- a has not increased the num- ber of permanences, while it has added at least one variation.* Therefore as each factor, corresponding to a positive root, must introduce at least one neiv variation, the whole number of positive roots cannot exceed the number of variations of sign of f(x) . (2) To prove the second part of the rule, put —x for .r; then the variations in f{x) become permanences in f(—x). and the negative roots of the equation f{x) = 0 are the positive roots of the equation /( —,x) = 0 (see Art. 242) . But from (1) the number of positive roots of f(—x) = 0 cannot * If the original polynomial ends with a permanence, an ambiguity will resnlt in the final polynomial. This ambiguity furnishes a variation either with the preceding or with the final sign just added. So that, taking the most unfavorable case, there is one variation added. DERIVED FUNCTIONS. 505 exceed the number of variations in f{ — x). Therefore the whole miraber of negative roots of the given equation f(x)—0 cannot exceed the number of variations in f(—x) = 0. The following results follow from Descai’tes’ Rule of Signs : (I) Since in a complete equation the number of variations and permanences is equal to the degree of the equation, therefore, lohen the roots are all real, the number of positive roots is equal to the number of variations, and the number of negative roots is equal to the number of permanences. (II) If the coefficients of a complete equation are cdl posi- tive, the equation has no positive root; thus, + 6x~ + 11a; + 6 = 0 cannot have a positive root. (III) If the coefficients of a complete equation are alter- nately positive and negative, the equation has no negative root : thus the equation x^ - 5x^ + 9a;2 - 7.r + 2 = 0 cannot have a negative root. (IV) In an incomplete equcdion, imaginary roots may sometimes be discovered. Tims in the equation 3a;* + 12x^ + 5x - A = 0. there is one variation, and therefore there is but one positive root. Again f{—x) — 3a;* + 12a;- — 5a; — 4 = 0 ; here there is but one variation, and therefore but one negative root. Therefore the other two roots must be imaginary. 1. Show that the equation 2x~ — a;* + — 5 = 0 has at least four imaginary roots. 2. Show that the equation a;® + 5.r® — a;® + 7a; + 2 = 0 has at least four imaginary roots. 240. Derived Functions. — To find the value of fix ->t-h), when fix) is a rationed integral function of x. Let /(a;) represent the general equation of the ?i‘'' degree (Art. 233) , so that fix) = a;" + -h + + Pn (1) 506 DERIVED FUNCTIONS. If we substitute x h for a; (1) becomes f{x+h) = {x+hy+ pi(x+h)’‘-'^+ . . +Pn-i{x+h)+p^ (2) Expanding each terra of the second member by the bino- mial theorem and arranging the result in ascending powers of h, we have f{x + h) = a;” + ppf-^ + PiX’' + p„_jX + p„ -)- + (n — l)piOf‘~'^ + (n — 2)pjpf~^ + . . .] + —\ii{n — l)x’‘"^ -b {n — l)(w — 2)ppf‘~^ -b . . .] LA + We see that the first line of this expansion is the original function f{x), and if we denote the coefficient of h in the second line b3’/'(x) ; the coefficient of — in the third line by LA /"(x), etc., we have /(x-b/^) -/(a-) + hfix) +^f'{x) + ^f"(x) + . . +^/»(x) . LA LA Lii The functions f'{x), f"{x), f'"{x) are called the j^rsi, second, third, .... derived functions* of f(x) ; the given function /(x) is sometimes called the primitive function. Examining the coefficients of ''"®see that each derived function is obtained from the preceding by the following rule : Multiply each term by the exponent of x in that term and then diminish the exponent by unity. * Note. — When the student becomes acquainted with the elements of the Differential Calculus he will see that each derived function is the differential coefficient with respect to .r of the immediately preced- ing derived function, and that the above development of }(.t + h) is only a particular case of Taylor's Theorem. Called also derived polynomials, or simply derivatives. EQUAL ROOTS. 507 Find the successive derived functious of the following : 1. 2x* — — 2x‘^ -h 5x — 1 . Ayis. 1st 8x^ — Saf — 4x + 5, 2d 24a;® — 6a; — 4, 3d 48a; — 6, 4th 48. 2. x'^ — 8x^ + 14.a;^ + 4a; — 8. 1st 4a;® - 24a;® + 28a; + 4, 2d 12a:® - 48a; + 28, 3d 24a; — 48, 4th 24. 241. Equal Roots. — If an equation has r roots equal to a, then the first derived function will have r — 1 roots equal to a. Let f{x) and f'{x) denote the equation and its derived function respectively, and let <^{x) be the quotient when /(a;) is divided by (a; — a)'"; then/(x’) = (a; — a)’’<^(a;). Substitute x + li for a; ; thus, f{x + h) = {x — a + IiY(x 4- h). Expanding both members and neglecting powers of h above the first, we have (Art. 240) f(x)+7if{x)+ . . = l{x—aY+r{x-ay-yi^l{x) + — a)’’^'(a;). Thus f'{x) contains the factor x — a repeated r — 1 times ; i.e., the equation f'{x) = 0 has r — 1 roots equal to a. Similarly, it may be shown that if the equation f{x) = 0 has s roots equal to 6, the equation f'{x) — 0 has s — 1 roots equal to h ; and so on. From the above proof we see that if f{x) contains a factor (a: — a)’’, then f'{x') contains a factor {x — a)'"' ; and thus f{x') and f\x) have a common factor (a; — a)''"'. Therefore if f{x) and f {x) have no common factor, no factor in/(x) 508 equal roots. will be repeated ; hence the equation f(x) = 0 has or has not equal roots., according as f{x) and f'{x) have or have not a common factor involving x. Hence, to obtain the equal roots of an equation, we have the following Rule. Find the greatest common divisor of the given equation and its first derived function. If there is no common divisor the equation has no equcd roots. If there is a common divisor place it equal to zero., and solve the resulting equation. If f{x) be divided b}" the G. C. D. of f{x) and f'{x), the depressed equation will contain the remaining roots of fix) = 0. Note. — Since f"{x) is the first derived function of f'{x), f'"{x) the first derived function of f"{x), and so on, we see that, if the equa- tion /( t) = 0 has r roots equal to a, the equation f '(x) = 0 must have r — 1 I’oots = a, the equation f"(x) = 0 must have r — 2 roots equal to a, and so on. By means of this principle we may sometimes dis- cover the equal roots of an equation with less trouble than by the rule above given. 1. Solve the equation x* — ll-r® + 44.r^ — 76.r -|- 48 = 0, which has equal roots. Here f{x) = x* — 11a;® -f 44x^ — 76x + 48, fix) = 4.x® - 33.x® + 88.x - 76 ; and by the rule (Art. 74) we find that the G. C. D. of /(.r) and fix) is (x — 2) ; hence (x — 2)® is a factor of /(.x) ; and .-. /(.x) = (x-2)®(.x®-7x+12) = (x-2)®(x-3)(x-4) ; thus the four roots are 2, 2, 3,' 4. Solve the following equations which have equal roots : 2. X® — 2.x® — 15x + 36 = 0. Hns. 3, 3, —4 3. x^ - 9.x® + ix + 12 = 0. 2, 2, -1, -3. 4. .x^ - 6x® + 12x® - lOx + 3 = 0. 1, 1, 1, 3. TRANSFORMATION OF E Q NATIONS — DEFIN ITION . 509 TRANSFORMATION OF EQUATIONS. 242. Definition. — Au equation is said to be transformed when it is changed into another equation whose roots bear some assigned relation to those of the given equation. Eem. — Various transformations of this kind can he effected with- out knowing the roots of the given equation ; and examples occur in whicli a root of the transformed equation, and hence the correspond- ing root of the given equation is more easily found than by solving the given equation directly. Such transformations arc especially useful in the solution of cubic equations. Problem l.— To transform an equation into another whose roots are those of the gioen equation with contrary signs. Let f{x) = 0 be the given equation. Pnt —y for x, so that when x has an}’ particular value, y has numericall}’ the same value but with the contrary sign ; then the required equation is f{—y) - 0. Thus, iff{x)=x^-\-p^sf^-'^+p.^xF-^+ . . +Pn-iX+p„=0, then f{-y)^{-yf+Pi{-yy~'+P 2 {-yY~‘'--\- • • ; and since the even powers of —y are positive and the odd powers negative, the above equation becomes yn _ p^yn-\ -I- .... ± T Pn- Hence the transformed equation may be obtained from the given equation by changing the sign of every alternate term beginning with the second. Note. — The above rule assumes that the given equation is com- plete (Art. 34) ; if any terms are wanting, the equation may be ren- dered complete by introducing the missing terms wdth zero for the coefficient of each of them. 1 . Transform the equation — 4 .t® — 4.x 4- 7 = 0 into another whose roots are numerically the same with contrary signs. 510 PROBLEM II. AVe may write the equation thus, 3a;^ — 4a;^ + Ox^ — 4x 7 = 0, then the transformed equation by the rule is 3ic^ + 4a;® + Oa;® + 4a; + 7 = 0, or 3a;^ + 4a.-® + 4a; + 7 = 0. 243. Problem II. — To transform, an equation into an- other whose roots are equal to those of the proposed equation niidtipdied by a given factor. Let m denote the given factor ; put y = mx, so that when X has any particular value, the value of y is m times as large ; then X — m Substituting this in the general equation (Art. 233) we have + = 0 . Multiplying by m", we have y" + Pimy''~^ + p.,m‘^y^~'^ + • • + = 0. Hence we have the following rule : Midtiqdy the second term by the given factor, the third term by this factor squared, and so on to the last term. The chief use of this transformation is to clear an equa- tion of fractional coefficients. 1. Remove fractional coefficients from the equation 2a;® - - ^a; + = «• Multipljung the second term b}’ m, the third b}’ nv, etc., by the rule, we get 2.r® — ^mx- — ^m~x -f- y®^«i® = 0. By properly assuming m we may make the coefficients of the transformed equation all integers. Thus, if m = 4, all the terms become integral, and on dividing by 2 we obtain a’® — 3.r® — .r + 6 = 0, in which the roots are four times as great as those of the given equation. PROBLEMS III. AND IV. 511 If the roots are to be divided bj’ any number, we obtain the transformed equation by dividing the second term by the given number, the third term by its square, and so on. 2. Find the equation whose roots are three times as great as those of x* + 7a;^ — 4a; + 3 = 0. Ans. y* + G3y^ — 108y + 243 = 0. 3. Find the equation whose roots are one-half those of X- — 2x 4-3 = 0. ./ + p./)y = pfy^ + 2p^p.jj + p^^. y^ + (2^2 - p^^)y^ + {pi - 2pipi)y - pi = 0. 2. Find the equation whose roots are the squares of the roots of the equation x^+5x— 7 = 0. Ans. 39^+49 = 0. 246. Problem V. — To transform an equation into another whose roots are less than those of the proposed equa- tion by a given quantity. Let the given equation be f{x) = 0, or Po*" + PiX-""' + px"'^ + ....+ p„_ix + = 0, (1) and let h be the given quantity. Put y = x — h, so that when X has any particular value, the value of y is less by h\ then X — y h, and the required equation is p«{y + ^0" + Pi{y + ^0”"' + p- 2 {y + ^0"“^ + . . + = o, which, when arranged in descending powers of y, beeomes by (3) of Art. 240 l)o2/"+(Pi |^?'2 + {n— • =0> (2) whose roots are less by h than those of (1). If n is small, the transformation b}^ this method is easily effected ; but for equations of liigher degrees it is quite tedious. The following method is simpler. Denoting the coefficients of tlie terms of (2) by q^. q.,. . . . g„, it may be written 9o2/” + + . . . + g„_i.g + g« = o, (3) in which the coefficients g,, • • • g« unknown, whose values are to be determined. HORN EM'S METHOD OF SYNTHETIC DIVISION. 513 For y substitute its value x — li, and (3 ; becomes go(x — ky+ q^x — . • • + qn-i{x - li) + g„ = 0, (4) which is identical with (1), since the values of x are the same in (1) and (4). Dividing (4) by {x — li) we obtain the quotient q^x - ny-^ + qyx - Zi)”-" + • • • • g„_i, • (5) with a remainder Similarly, q„_i is the remainder found by dividing (5) by x — Zi, and the quotient arising from the division is qyx — Zi)"“^ 4- qi{0' — hy-^ + . . . + and so on, until all the coefficients of (3) are obtained. The last quotient is q^, and is obviously equal to j)„. Hence we have the following rule : Divide f{x) by x — Zi, and the remainder loill he the absolute term of the transformed equation. Divide the quotient thus found by X — Zi, and the remainder will be the coefficient of the last term but one of the transformed equation; and so on. By dividing f{x) by a; + Zi we shall transform f{x) = 0 into an equation whose roots are greater by h. 247. Horner’s Method of Synthetic Division. — This is an abridged method of dividing by detached coeffi- cients. The work of transforming an equation may be abridged by writing down only the coefficients of the several terms, zero coefficients being used to represent terms corre- sponding to powers of x which are absent. In writing down the divisor, the sign of the last term may be changed ; this enables us to replace the process of subtraction by that of addition at each successive stage of the work. The first term of the divisor is usually omitted. The following example is an illustration. 1. Find the quotient and remainder when Zx' — a:® -f- 31.x'' -f 21x + 5 is divided by x + 2. 514 HORNER'S METHOD OF SYNTHETIC DIVISION. The work stands as follows : Coefficients. 3 — 1 0 + 31 0 0 + 21+ 5 [ — 2 - 6 + 14 - 28 - 6 + 12 - 24 + 6 3-7 + 14+ 3-6+12- 3 + 11 Explanation. — In this work, 3 is the first tenn of the quotient ; —6 is the product of —2 and 3; the sum of —1 and —6 is —7, the second terra of the quotient; 14 is the product of —2 and —7 ; the sum of 14 and 0 is 14, the third term of the quotient, and so on. The last term 11 is the remainder. Thus, supplying the powers of x, the quotient is 3t® — 7t® + 14+ + 3+ — 6+ + 12.C — 3, and the remainder is 11. We shall now illustrate the use of Horner’s method in the following transformation. 2. l^ind the equation whose roots are less by 3 than those of the equation 2.+ — .t® — 2+ + bx —1=0. To effect this transformation we divide successively by - 3, (Art. 246). Changing the sign of —3, the operation is as follows: 2 - 1 - 2 + 5 - 1 I +3 6 + 15 + 39 + 132 5 + 13 + 44 + 131. .-. ry, = 131. 6 + 33 + 138 I 11 + 46 + 182. .-. = 182. 6 + 51 I 17 + 97. .’. = 97. 23 = 5fi. Hence the required equation is 2y^ + 23y^ + 97/ + 182y + 131 = 0. Note. — Horner’s method is chiefly useful in numerical work. 3. Find the equation whose roots are less by 5 than the roots of + — 4.T® — lx? + 22.r + 24 = 0. Ans. / + 16/ + 83/ + 152y + 84 = 0. LIMITS OF THE REAL ROOTS OF AN EQUATION. 515 4. Find the equation whose roots are greater by 2 than the roots of + 28a;® + 51a:® + 32a; —1 = 0. Ans. by^ — 12y® + 3y® 4y — 5 = 0. 248. Problem VI. — To remove any give7i term frojn an equation. B}' means af the transformation in Art. 246 we may remove any assigned term after the first from an equation. Thus if the term to be removed is the second we choose li so that the second term in (2) of Art. 246 shall vanish ; that is, = 0 ; or 7i = — npo If the term to be removed is the third, we put (n - l)p,7; + = 0, lA and so obtain a quadratic to find h. Similarly we may remove any other term. 1. Remove the second term from a;® — 6.r® + 8.r — 2=0. Here = 1, = —6, y. = 3 •, then (Art. 246), a; = 2 / + 7i = y + 2. Making this substitution the given equation becomes, (y+2)®-6(y+2)®+8(y+2) — 2 = 0; or y®— 4y— 2 = 0. Remove the second term from the equations : 2. a;® — 6.r® — 8a; — 2 = 0. Ans. — 2Qy — 34 = 0. 3. a;^ + 4a;® + 2.r® — 4x — 2 = 0. y* — ^y^ +1 = 0. LIMITS OF THE REAL ROOTS OF AN EQUATION. 249. Definition. — The Limits of a root of an equation are any two numbers between which that root lies. When we say that a certain number is a superior limit of the positive roots of an equation, we mean that no positive root can be numerically greater than that number ; and when we say that a certain number is an inferior limit of the negative roots we mean that no negative root can be numerically greater than that number. In the following three Articles 516 SUPERIOR LIMIT. we shall find the limits of all the real roots, and also discover to some extent the limits between which the real roots separately lie. 250. Superior Limit. — (1) The numerically greatest negative coefficient increased by unity is a superior limit of the positive roots of an equation which is in the simplest form. Take the general equation of the degree /(a-) = 0 (Art. 233). Let p be the numericall}- greatest negative coefficient which occurs in f{x). Then if such a value be found for x that f{x) is positive for that value of x and for all greater values, that value is a superior limit of the positive roots of the equation f{x) = 0. It is evident that any positive value of x which makes a" — + . . . + .a + 1) . (1) positive, will make f{x) positive. That is, f{x) is positive for a positive value of x if x” — pi— ^ is positive (Art. ^ I 163), and therefore if x" — 1 — p‘— j is positive, that is, if (af — 1)^1 — ^ ^ is positive ; and this last expression is positive if x — 1 >p. Thus/(x) is positive if x = or >^j + l. Therefore p + 1, or an}" number greater, when substituted lor X in (1), will make the first term numerically greater than the sum of all the others, and thus make (1) positive; that is, p + 1 is a superior limit of the positive roots of the equation f{x) = 0. (2) In an equation of the n"* degree in its simplest form if p he the numerical value of the greatest negative coefficient, and x"~’‘ the highest poiver of x lohich has a negative coeffi- cient, 1 + ^p is a superior limit of the positive roots. Let /(x) = 0 be the given equation ; since all the terms which precede x""’' have positive coefficients, it is evident that any value of x which makes x" - p(x"-’' 4- x"-”-^ + . . , + x^ + ic + 1) INFERIOR LIMIT. 517 positive will make f{x) positive. That is, f{x) is positive — » + 1 2 _ for a positive value of x if x" — p ' — ^ — is positive, (Art. 163). But if a; > 1 af _ p_ X — 1 1 a;' — > xT — p a’ — 1 Hence f{x) will be positive when this second member is positive ; or when xf{x — 1) — px^~'~^'^ is positive ; or when x^~'^{x — 1) — is positive; or when (.a — I)’’ = ov > p. Thus, /(a') is positive if a = or > 1 + \Jp ; therefore 1 + '"•^p is a superior limit of the positive roots of the equation f{x) = 0. 251- Inferior Limit. — To find the inferior limit of the negative roots of an equation, change the sign of every alternate term beginning with the second ; this will change the signs of all the roots of the given equation (Art. 242) . Then the superior limit of the positive roots of this trans- formed equation, with its sign changed, will be the inferior limit of the negative roots of the given equation. 1. Find the superior limit of the positive roots of a® -b 8a^ — 14.a® — 53a^ -j- 56a — 18 = 0. (1) By (1) of Art. 250 we have 53 -j- 1 = 54, as a superior limit. (2) By (2) of Art. 250 we have n = 5, n — r = 3, and .-. r - 2. .•. 1 + or 9 in whole numbers ; so that 9 is a superior limit. We see that (2) of Art. 250 gives us the smallest superior limit, and it is evident that (2) always gives a smaller limit than (1), except when ?• = 1. Find the superior limits of the positive roots of 2. X* - 5a® + S7x^ - 3a -f 39 ^ 0. 3. a" + ILa^ - 25a - 67 = 0. Ans. 6. 6 . 518 LIMITS OF SEPARATE ROOTS. 252. Limits between which the Roots Separately Lie. — If two numbers, when substituted for the unknown quantity in an equation, give results with contrary signs, one root at least must lie between these numbers. Let all the real roots of the equation f{x) = 0 be denoted by a, b, c, . . . I, arranged in the order of their magnitude, t being Algebraically the smallest ; and let X be the product of the quadratic factors, containing the imaginary roots (Art. 238), which can never change their sign. Then (Art. 235) f(^x) = (x — a){x — b)(x — c) . . . {x — l)X . (1) Now suppose X to increase gradually from a quantity less than a up to some quantity greater than I, assuming in suc- cession every intermediate value. As long as x is less than a, each simple factor a; — a, x — b, . . . of f{x) is negative, and hence the product is positive or negative according as the number of simple factors is even or odd. When X becomes a, f{x) becomes 0. When x becomes greater than a and less than b, the first factor x — a becomes positive w’hile all the other factors remain negative. Hence as X changes from a value less than o to a value greater than a and less than b, the function f{x) changes its sign. Also when X becomes b, f{x) becomes 0 ; when x becomes greater than b and less than c, the second factor x — b becomes positive while the signs of all the other factors remain unchanged. Hence as x changes from a value less than b to a value greater than b and less than c, the function f(.v) again changes its sign : and so on for each real root. When the numbers wdiich give results with contrary signs differ b}' unity, it is evident that the integral part of a root has been found. Some limits between which the roots must lie may be found by the folloiving rules : I. If tioo numbers, substituted for x in f{x), give results ivith contrary signs, there must be one or some odd number of roots between these numbers. EXAMPLES. 519 II. If two numbers., suhstitxited for x in f(x ) , give results with the same sign, there 7mist he either no root or an even number of roots between these numbers. These two rules follow from the above demorfstration. III. If the coefficients including the absolute term are all positive, the equation cannot have a positive root. For the sum of positive quantities cauuot be zero. rV. Every equation of an odd degree has at least one real root ivhose sign is opposite to that of its last term. For, in the function f{x) substitute for x the values + oc, 0, — 00 successively; then /(-f-cc) = +CO, /(0)=p„, /( — Co) = — 00. Therefore if p„ is positive f{x) = 0 has a root between 0 and — 00 , and if p„ is negative f{x) = 0 has a root between 0 and + 00 . V. Every equation of an even degree having its last term neg- ative has at least tivo real roots, one p>ositive and one negative. For in this case, /( + Qc) - +=o, /(O) = Pni f{ — ^) = but Pn is negative ; hence f{x) = 0 has a root between 0 and + 00 , and a root between 0 and — oo. EXAPd PLES. 1. Prove that 4 is a root of the equation a;3 ^ a;'2 - 34.r + 56 = 0 (Art. 234). Use Horner’s method. 2. Find the remainder when x^ — 4a;* + 7x^ — 2x + 47 is divided by x — 5. Use Horner’s method. A?is. 837. Solve the equations : 3. X* + 2.r® — 41a;^ — 42.^• + 360 = 0, two roots being 5 and —6. Ans. 3, 5, — 4, —6. 4. X* — 16.r^ + 86.r^ — 176a; + 105 = 0, two roots being 1 and 7. Ans. 1, 3, 5, 7. 520 EXAMPLES. 5. + 16x^ — 9aj — 36 = 0, the sum of two of the roots being zero. Ans. f, — f, —4. 6. 4a;® + 20a;® — 23a; + 6 = 0, the sum of two of the roots being 1. Ans. —6. 7. a;® — 7a; + 6 = 0, the sum of two of the roots being 3. Ans. 1, 2, -3. 8. X* — 2a;® — 21a;® + 22a; + 40 = 0, two roots being — 4 aud —1. Ans. 2, 5, —1, —4. 9. 6a;^ — 29.a;® + 40a;® — 7a; — 12 = 0, two roots being and f. Ans. f , |, 1 ± V^. Form the equations whose roots are 10. 2, 3, -5. Ans. a;® — 19a; + 30 = 0. 11. -2, 4, 4. a;® - 6a;® + 32 = 0. 12. 3, -4, 2 ±S/S. - 3.a;® - 15a;® + 49.a; - 12 = 0. 13. I, ±V^. 6x« - 13.x® - 12.x® + 39x - 18 = 0. 14. 0, 0, 2, 2,- 3,- 3. X® + 2a.-®- llx^- 12.x®+ 36.x® = 0. 15. 2, -2, -2, -2, 0, 5. Ans. X® — 5x® — 8.x^ + 40x-® + 16x® — 80x = 0. 16. ±4\/3, 5 ± 2\Ta. Ans. .X* — 10.x® — 19.x® + 480x — 1392 = 0. 17. 1 ± V — 2, 2 ± V — 3. ^las. X* - 6x® + 18.x® - 26.x + 21 = 0. Solve the equations : IS. 3.x^-10.x-®+4.x®- X - 6 = 0, one root being A)is. 3, — |, 1+V^ 2 1 ±V^ 2 19. 6x^ — 13.x®— 35.x® — .X + 3 = 0, one root being 2— VS. ^ns. -I, -i, 2 ± Vs. 20. .x^+4x®+5x®+2.x— 2 = 0, one root being —1 +V — 1 . .4«s. — 1±V2, -1±V^. EXAMPLES. 521 21. x'^ + + 4a; + 5 = 0, one root being V^— 1. Ans. ±V^^, -2 ± 22. x^ — + 8x^ — 9a; — 15 = 0, two roots being V^3, and 1 — 2^^. Ans. -1, ±\/3, 1 ± 2^^. 23. Find the least possible nnmber of imaginary roots of the equations (1) a;^+3a;^+5a;— 7 = 0, (2)a;^“— 4a;®4-a;^— 2a’— 3 = 0, and (3) a;®— a;®+a^+a’^+l = 0. ^ns. (1) Two, (2) Four, (3) Six. 24. Find the fourth derived function of x* — 8x^ + 14a;^. Ans. 24. 25. If /(x) — x^ — 12a;® + 17a:® — 9.a’ + 7, find the value of /(x + 3). Ans. .X* — 37a;® — 123a; — 110. 26. If /(x) — x^+ 10a;® + 39.a® + 88a + 113, find the value of /(x — 4). A71S. X* — 6a3® + 15a;® + 1. Solve the following equations which have equal roots. 27. a;^ - 9.a® + 4a; + 12 = 0. A?is. 2, 2, -1, -3. 28. + 2a;® - 3a;® - 4a; + 4 = 0. -2, -2, 1, 1. 29. a;® - 13a;^ + 67a;® - 171a;® + 216a; - 108 = 0. Ans. 3, 3, 3, 2, 2. 30. a;5_a;®+4a;®-3a’+2 = 0. Ans. -2, 2 2 31. 8x^ + 4a;® - 18.a;® + lla -2 = 0. l, i, -2. 32. a;® - 2a;® - 4a;^ + 12a;® - 3a;® - 18a; + 18 = 0. Ans. ±VS, ±\^, 1 ± 33. Transform (1) a® — 4a;® + Ja; — | = 0 and (2) 3a;^ — 5.r® +'a:® — a; + 1 = 0 into equations with integral coefficients, and unity for the coefficient of the first term. A>is. (1) ?/® — 24y® 4- 9y — 24 = 0, (2) - 5y® + 3y® - 9y + 27 = 0. 34. Transform (1) .a® + 3a;® + a; — -|^ = 0 and (2) a;® — 9a;® + ^x — = 0 into others whose roots are the reciprocals of the roots of the given equations. Ans. (1) a;®-3a;®-9»-3 = 0, (2) a;®-42a;®+441x-49 = 0. 522 EXAMPLES. 35. Find the equation whose roots are the squares of the roots of X* of + 2x^ + a; + 1 = 0. Ans, y‘^ + 3t/® + Ai/ + 3?/ + 1 = 0. 36. Find the equation whose roots are the cubes of the roots of + 3a;^ +2 = 0. Ans. + SSy"^ + 12y + 8 = 0. Find the equations whose roots are each less by 3 than the roots of 37. a;® — 27a; — 36 = 0. Ans. y® + — 90 = 0. 38. x^-27x‘^-Ux+120 = 0. y^+l2y®+27/-68y=84. 39. of — + 3.a:® — 4a; + 6 = 0. Ans. y^ + lly^ + 42y® + 57y^ — 13y = 60. 40. Increase by unity the roots of the equation x? — 5x* + 6a; — 3 = 0. Ans. y® — 8y® + 19y — 15 = 0. Remove the second term from the equations : 41. a;® — 6a;^ + 10.a; — 3 = 0. ^Ins. y® — 2y + 1 = 0. 42. .r®+5a;^+3a;®+a;^+.a’— 1=0. y®— 7y®+12y®— 7y=0. 43. x^ — 12a;® + 3.r® — 17.a; + 300 = 0. Ans. y® — 60y^ — 320y^ — 717y® — 773y — 42 = 0. Find the superior limits of the positive roots of 44. X* — 15x^ + 10a; + 24 = 0. Ans. 5. 45. a:® + 7.A — 12a-® - 49.a;® + 52.a: - 13 = 0. 8. 46. X* + 11a.-® — 25.r® — 67 = 0. 6. Find the inferior limits of the negative roots of 47. 3a® + 2.a® - 11a - 4 = 0. Ans. -5. 48. a^ - 4a® - 19a® + 46a + 120 = 0. -8. SOLUTION OF HIGHER NUMERICAL EQUATIONS. 523 CHAPTER XXV. SOLUTION OF HIGHER NUMERICAL EQUATIONS. 253. Commensurable Roots. — It is always possible to obtain solutions of cubic and biquadratic equations, but their general solutions are complicated and only of limited application. The general Algebraic solution of equations of a degree higher than the fourth has never been obtained ; and Abel’s demonstration in 1825 of the impossibility of such a solution is generally accepted by Mathematicians. If, however, the equations are mimericcd, that is, if they have numerical coefficients, the value of any real root may be found to any required degree of accuracy. By a commensurable root is meant a root which can be exactly expressed as an integer or fraction without involv- ing irrational quantities. If the root cannot be exactly expressed without involving irrational quantities, it is called an incommensurable root. We have seen (Art. 243) that any equation having frac- tional coefficients may be transformed into another which has all its coefficients integers and the coefficient of the first term unity ; and such an equation cannot have a root which is a rational fraction (Art. 237) ; thus we have 011I3' to find the integral commensurable roots ; and every such root is a divisor of the last term (Art. 236). Hence, to find the commensurable roots, we have only to determine all the divisors of the absohite term, and learn by tried which of them are roots of the equation. If we first find the superior and inferior limits of the roots (Art. 249), the work will often be lessened, as no integer need be tried which does not fall within these limits. The 524 COMMENSURABLE ROOTS. trial may lie made by dividing f{x) by x — a, where a is a supposed root [Art. 234 (2)] ; and this division is most easily made by Horner’s method (Art. 247). It is usual to omit +1 and —1 from the divisors to be tried, as it is simpler to test whether these values are roots by substituting them for x in the given equation. 1. Find the roots of x^ — 3x^ — 8a; — 10 = 0. Here by Arts. 250 and 251, 1 + 10 is a superior limit, and —3 is an inferior limit ; hence all the roots of the given equation lie between 11 and —3. The divisors of —10 which fall between these limits are 10, 5, 2, 1, —1, —2. It is found by substitution that +1 and —1 are not roots. We then arrange the work of division as follows : Coefficients. 1-3-8 - 10 |10 For X = 10. 10 +70 + 620 + 7 +62 + 610 Hence 10 is not a root. We then try 5. 1-3-8 -10 For a; = 5. 5 +10 + 10 + 2 + 2 0 Hence 5 is a root. Next try 2. 1-3-8 -10(1 For X — 2. 2-2 -20 -1 -10 -30. Hence 2 is not a root. A trial of —2 also fails. Thus the onl}' commensurable root is 5. The depressed equation found by dividing by x — o above, is x"-\- 2 . 1 ; + 2 = 0 ; solving this, we find —1 ± V^ — 1 for the remaining roots (Art. 235). Hence the three roots are 5, — 1 ± V— !• RECIPROCAL E Q CATIONS. 525 Find the roots of the following equations : 2 . a;® — 6 a;® + ILt ■ -6 = 0 . Has. 1 , 2, 3. 3. a;® + 05 1 ■4:X — - 12 = 0 . 2 , - .0 , -3. 4. a;^ + a;® — 29.T® - - 9a; + 180 = 0 . 3, 4, - -3, , —5. 5. a;® + 6 a;^ - 10 .r® - 112 a;® - : 207a: - 110 = 0 . Ans. - 1 , -2, -5, 1 ± V^. 254. Reciprocal ! Equations. — A reciproccd equation is one which is not changed when the unknown quantity is changed into its reciprocal. Hence, if a be a root of such an equation, the reciprocal of a is also a root. It follows from Art. 244 that, in a reciprocal equation, the coefficients are the same in order lohether read forioards or backivards. For this reason reciprocal equations are also called recurring equations from the forms of their coefficients. Thus the following are examples of reciproccd or recurring equations : ^4 _ - lO.r + 1 = 0 . a;® — II.t;"* + 17a;® + 17a;® — ll.x' + 1 = 0. — 6 .r® + cx* — cx" + hx — o = 0 . Note. — It is evident from the second definition of a reciprocal equation that, when the degree is even and the equal coefficients have unlike signs, the middle term is wanting. Theorem I. — A recqmoccd equation of cm odd degree has a root —1 tohen the equcd coefficients have the same sign, and +1 ivhen they have opqwsite signs. Let a.i;” + 6 a;"“® + + . . . ± ca;® ± 5a; ± a = 0 (1) be a reciprocal equation of an odd degree. The number of terms is even, and the equation may be written in the form, a{x’' ± 1) + 5(a-’‘-® ± l)a; + c(a;"-^ ± l)a;®+ . . . = 0, (2) in which each exponent of x in the parentheses is odd. When we take the upper signs the equation is divisible by a; + 1 ; hence — 1 is a root : when we take the lower signs the equation is divisible by a; — 1 ; hence -t -1 is a root. That is, —1 or +1 is a root according as the equal coeffi- cients have the same or opposite signs. 526 RECIPROCAL EQUATIONS. Theorem II. — A reciprocal equation of an even degree has a root +1 ancZ a root —1 when the equcd coefficients have opposite signs. Taking the lower signs of (2), and regarding n as even, we have a{af — 1) + b(af~^ — \)x + — l)a:* + . . . = 0, (3) which is an equation of the specified form. As each expo- nent of X in the parentheses is even, (3) is divisible by x^ — I ; hence -h 1 and — 1 are roots. Therefore by division an equation of this form may be depressed two degrees, and become a reciprocal equation of an even degree, with the equal coefficients having like signs (Art. 51). Theorem III. — A reciprocal equation of an even degree with its Iccst term positive can be reduced to an equation of half that degree. Let the equation be -h b.r^"~^ cx‘^~^+ . . . Jc.v"+ . . . -f C.T--1- 6.t a = 0 ; (4) dividing by x”- and collecting the terms, we have — 0. (5 af— 7 Put X A - = z •, then -f -?- = 2 ^ — 2 ; 2 ® — 3z ; -f ^ = (x^ 4- — 2 = 2 ^ - 42® -f- 2 ; and generally, of -f- -- = 2 " — 9i2"”® Hence, each of the binomials ma 3 ' be expressed in terms of 2 , and by substituting in (5) we haAm an equation in 2 of the degree, i.e., of half the degree of (4), the given equation. BINOMIAL E Q NATIONS. 527 1. Given 2x® — ISx* + 13a;^ ~ a; — 2 = 0. Here +1 and —1 are roots by inspection, also see Theorem II. Dividing the first member by a;® ~ 1, we obtain 2a;^ -fa;® — lla;^ -f a; + 2 = 0. 1 Divide by 2a;^, put a; -| — — z, and we have X z 5 o - or —3. 2 1 5 Hence x — = - or —3 ; a; 2 a; = 2 or or |( — 3 ± V^). Solve the following equations : 2. x^-5x^+6x‘^-5x + l==0. Ans. 2 ± ^3, 3. a;® — a;® -f — a;^ -f a; — 1 = 0. ±1, ^ 2 255. Binomial Equations. — The general form of a binomial equation is a;” ± = 0, where Ti is a known quan- tity. The roots of this equation are all different, because xf- ±k and the first derived function nxT~'^ evidently have no common divisor. See Art. 241. If .af — fc = 0 we have x = ’y/h ; i.e., x is equal to an root of 7c. But x^ — Tc = Q has n roots (Art. 235). There- fore any Algebraic quantity * has n different ti'® roots. Let a denote one of the n'® roots of Z;, so that Tc = a”. Assume x — az; then xl‘ — Jc = 0 becomes a"z" — a" = 0 ; or 2 " — 1 = 0. Hence z = y/l, i.e., z is equal to an n'^ root of unity. And since X = az = a VT - fi’om above, we have \Jc = a YT. * By an Algetrftie quantity here je meant either a real er an iirngimi'i quantity, 528 BINOMIAL EQUATIONS. Thus all the n'* roots of any Algebraic quantity may le found by multiplying any one of them in succession by th^ values of the n'* roots of unity. (1) If n is odd, the equation af ± 1 = 0 has a root —1 or +1 aecording as we take the upper or lower sign, Art. 254, Theo. I. If af® ± 1 be divided by a* ± 1 it will be depressed one degree, and the resulting reciprocal equation will contain the remaining n — \ roots. (2) If n is even, the equation a" — 1 = 0 has two real roots +1 and —1, Art. 254 Theo. II. If af — 1 be divided by a;^ — 1, it will be depressed two degrees, and the resulting reciprocal equation will contain the remaining n — 2 roots. (3) If 11 is even, the equation a" + 1 = 0 has no real root, since V ~ ^ then impossible. Hence all the roots of this equation are imaginary. The following are some of the cases of binomial equations which can be solved by methods alread}' given. For the general case, De Moivre’s theorem in Trigonometry must be employed. 1 . Solve a® — 1 = 0. Since a® — 1 = {x — 1) (a* + .a* + .a^ + a + 1), we have a — 1 = 0 ; or else .a^ + + 1 = 0. Therefore a = 1 ; and dividing the latter equation by .c and putting a + i = 2 we have Replacing the value of z and solving for a, we have a 2^ + X = 1 ; a; = ~j ± lyZ-lO - 2\Jo, or a = 1 for the 5 roots. CARDAN'S SOLUTION OF A CUBIC EQUATION. 529 2. Solve — 1 = 0. Ans. 1, —1, \/ — 1, — y/ — 1. 3. Solve X* + 1 = 0. sj2 256. Cardan’s Solution of a Cubic Equation. — The general form of a cubic equation is + ax^ + 5x’ + c = 0 ; but as we can always remove the second term from an equa- tion (Art. 248), we shall suppose the cubic reduced to the simple form, . (x^ + px + q = 0.) (1) Put X = y z; then substituting in (1) we have + {3yz + 2^) {■!/ + ^) + q = 0. Now since y and z are any two quantities subject only to the condition that their sum is equal to one .of the roots of the given equation, we are at liberty to suppose further that they satisfy the equation 3yz + p = 0. Thus we obtain ^3 + 2.3 ^ ^ _ 0 ; . . (2) 3yz ^ -p . . (3) Substituting in (2) the value of z in terms of y from (3), we obtain the quadratic + qxf = Solving, we have xf = -| + v^ 4 27 • ( 4 ) • ( 5 ) = -2 - Jt + p ! . . . 2 V 4 27 Since a; = ?/ + 2 , we have Thus the expression for x is the sum of two cube roots, and as every quantit}' has three cube roots, it would appear that by combining each of the three cube roots in the value of y, with each of the three cube roots in the value of 3 , 530 CARDAN'S SOLUTION OF A CUBIC EQUATION. we should obtain on the whole nine values of x. But a cubic equation can have only three roots (Art. 235), so that we are led to conclude that only three values will be admissible for a;, which may also be shown as follows : From (3) we see that the cube roots are to be taken in pairs so that the product of each pair is rational. Hence if y, z denote the values of au}’ pair of cube roots which fulfil this condition, and w, the imaginary cube roots of unity, then the only admissible pairs will be y and 2 , uy and «- 2 , and « 2 , since the product of each of these three pairs and of no other pair is rational. Hence the roots of (1) are y + 2 , «y + a^ 2 , ahj + az. When the real root has been found from (6), instead of expressing the other two roots by the same method, it is preferable to divide (1) by x minus the root and thus depress the equation to a quadratic (Art. 235). Note. — The above solution is commonly known by the name of Cardanos Solution, because it was first published by him in 1.54.5. Cardan, however, was not the inventor; be obtained it from Nicholas Tartalea. The solution ought to be attributed to Nicholas Tartalea and Scipio Ferreus, who seem to have discovered it about the same time, about 1505, and independently of each other. (See historical note in Burnside and Panton’s Theory of Equations). 1. Solve the equation x^ — lox = 126. Put X = y 2 , then y® + 2 ^ + (3y2 — 15) (y + 2 ) = 126 ; put 3y2 — 15 = 0, then y® + 2 * = 126. Substituting for 2 its value, we have the quadratic y8 - 126y« + 125 = 0 y® = 125, 2 ® = 1 ; .-. y = 5, 2 = 1. Thus a: = y + 2 = 5 + l = 6. Dividing the given equation by a; — 6 we get + 6a; + 21 = 0, the roots, of which are —3 ± 2V^ — 3. Hence the three roots are 6, —3 + 2^—3, —3 — 2^—3. CARDAN'S SOLUTION OF A CUBIC EQUATION. 531 If ^ ^ is negative the expressions for and 2 ® are imaginary, but when this is the case it may be shown that the roots of the cubic are all real and unequal. As there is no general Arithmetic or Algebraic method of finding the exact value of the cube root of imaginary quantities, Car- dan’s solution of a cubic equation is of little practical use when the roots of the cubic are all real and unequal. This case is sometimes called the Irreducible Case of Car- dan’s solution. The process by which we may obtain the roots of a cubic equation, in the irreducible case, is given in works on Trigonometry. This is a matter however of very little practical value. 2. Solve 3a;- -f 9a; — 13 = 0. To remove the second term, we have /« = —!, (Art. 248). .-. X = y — 1 (Art. 246). Substituting this value of x and reducing, the transformed equation becomes = 20. Here p = Q, q = — 20 ; hence, substituting in (6) we get ?/ = (10 + Vl08) j + (10 - V^)^ = 2.732 - .732 = 2. By division, we find for the depressed equation 2/2 + 2y + 10 = 0 ; therefore the other two values of y are — 1 ± V — 9 ; and since X = y — 1, the corresponding values of x are 1, — 2-(-3V— 1, -2 - 3V^~. 3. Solve x^ — 9x -f- 28 = 0. Ans. 4, 2 ± V — 3. 4. Solve .a;*" - 18a; = 35. 5, ^ 2 5. Solve x^ + 72a; — 1720 = 0. 10, —5 ± 7^—3. Rem. — It is not thought worth while to introduce into an element- ary treatise like this any of the solutions of biquadratic equations which have been obtained by Ferrari, Descartes, Waring, Simpson, 532 incommensurable roots. Euler, and others. In each of these methods we have first to solve an auxiliary cubic equation ; and as in the case of the cubic, the general solution is not adapted for writing down the solution of a given numerical equation. Practically the methods are wmrth but little, as the value of any real root in a numerical equation may be found to any required degree of accuracy by Horner’s method of approximation. 257. Incommensurable Roots. — If a numerical equa- tion is found to contain no commensurable roots, or, if after the commensurable roots are removed the depressed equation is still of a higher degree than the second, the incommen- surable roots must then be found. The first operation is to find the integral parts of these roots. There are several wa^’s of doing this, the most celebrated of which is by Sturm’s Theorem; but all of them are so laborious in practice, that, iu ordinary cases, it is geueially easiest to proceed b}^ trial, substituting entire numbers for x in the equation, until two consecutive numbers are found between which one or more roots must lie (Art. 252, I.). The decimal parts of the roots must then be found b}' methods of approximation. Of these the most convenient is Horner’s, by which we can always determine the numerical values of the real roots to any required degree of accuracy. 258. Homer’s Method of Approximation. — This method depends on the successive transformation of the given equation, so as to diminish its roots at each transfor- mation (Art. 246). Let a;” + + ••••+ = 0 . (1) be the given equation, one of whose roots is required; and suppose we have found a to be the integral part of this root so that the required root lies between a and a -f- 1 ; and let a\ a", a'", ... be the decimal digits taken in order, so that a; = o -f n' -t- a" -|- . . . Transform this equation into another whose roots are less by a (Art. 246), and let ?/" -f + qpf’-- + . . . + q„-iX + q„ = 0 . (2) HORNER'S METHOD OF APPROXIMATION. 533 be the transformed equation ; then one root of this equation is between 0 and 1, and by trial we may easily find its first decimal digit a'. Transform (2) into another equation whose roots are less by a', and let 2" + 4- . . . + r„_i2 + }•„ = 0 . (3) be the transformed equation. Then one root of this equation is between .00 and .1 ; i.e., it is either .00, .01, .02, ... or .09, and its first digit may easily be found. Transform (3) into another equation whose roots are less by a" ; and so on. As o', o", etc. are fractions, their higher powers are com- paratively small, and therefore approximate values of o', o", . . . may generally be found by considering only the last two terms of (2) and (3) ; thus nearly; and a"= nearly. (4) Having found o, o', o", we next transform (3) into another equation, and from the last two terms of the result- ing equation, find o'", the next decimal figure, and so on. The absolute term of the equation is sometimes called the- dividend, and the coefficient of the first power of the unknown quantity, the trial divisor. The approximate values of the succeeding decimals o', o", . . . increase in accuracy the smaller they become. In general, after three or four decimal figures have been found, the next three or four figures may be obtained aecurately by division. Hence, to find a positive incommensurable root of a numerical equation, we have the following Rule. Find by trial the integral paH of the root, and transform the given equation into another tohose roots are less than those of the given equation by this integral part. 534 HORNER'S METHOD OF APPROXIMATION. Divide the absolute term of the transformed equation by the coefficient of the first power of x for the first decimal figure of the root, and transform this last equation into another whose roots are less than those of the second equation by the figure of the root last found. Divide as before for the next figure of the root, and con- tinue this process until the root is found to the required degree of accuracy. Note 1. — To find a negative root of the given equation, change the signs of the alternate terms beginning with the second, and find the corresponding positive root of the transformed equation. This by a change of sign will be the required negative root of the given equation. (Art. 242.) Note 2. — It may happen that, in obtaining the first or second decimal figure from the last two terms of the equation, we get a result too large. In such case the error will always be made manifest by observing the signs of the last two terms in the ne.Kt transformed equation; for, as a', a", . . . are to be positive numbers, the last two terms of the transformed equation must have opposite signs. 1. Let it be required to find a positive root of the equa- tion X® — 3x~ — 2.T -f- 5 — 0. By trial vve find that /(I) = 1, /(2) = -3, /(3) = -1, /(^) = 13 ; therefore (Art. 252) one root of this equation lies between I and 2, and one root lies between 3 and 4 ; we shall find the latter root. Since 3 is the integral part of this root, we first transform the equation into another whose roots are less bj' 3. The successive transformations are usually written in connection, the divisions being made by Horner’s Method of Synthetic Division (Art. 247). The following is the solution for approximating to this root as far as three places of decimals, the coefliciouts of the different transformed equa- HORNER'S METHOD OF APPROXIMATION. 535 tions being indicated by the figures (1), (2), (3), . . . The whole operation is usually exhibited thus : -3 —2 -f5 13.128 +3 0 -6 0 -2 -1^ 3 9 .761 3 7 ( 1 ) .239'^> 3 .61 .167128 6(1) 7.61 - .071872'®> .1 .62 .068273152 6.1 8.23<^> - .003598848'^> .1 .1264 6.2 8.3564 .1 .1268 6.3‘2J 8.4832'^) .02 .050944 6.32 8.534144 .02 .051008 6.34 .02 6.36'®> 8.5851 52<« .008 6.368 .008 6.376 .008 6.384'« Here the figure (1) shows where the first transformation ends, and the figure (2) shows where the second transform- ation ends, and so on. By thus marking the coefficients in each transformed equation, it is not necessary to rewrite it.* * The successive transformed equations, (1), (2), (3). . . written out would be (1) j/3+6y2+7y-l=0, ( 2 ) s 3+6.322+8.232-.239=0, (3) U)3+6.36«)2+8.4832to-.071872=0 . . . 53G NEWTON'S METHOD OF APPROXIMATION. To find the second figure of the root we have — ( — 1) -r-7, so that .1 is the nearest number to be tried. To find the third figure of the root we have —( — .239) At 8.23, so that .02 is the nearest number to be tried. To find the fourth figure of the root we have —( — .071872) h- 8.4832, so that .008 is the nearest number to be tried. In each of these cases the number tried is found to be correct. After obtaining three decimal figures of the root the next tliree may be obtained by dividing the absolute term by the coefficient of x. If the coefficient of x in any of the transformed equations is zero, the next figure of the root in this case may be found by dividing the absolute term by the coefficient of a;-, and extracting the square root of the quotient. Rem. — V arious suggestions have been offered with the view of shortening the work in the use of Horner’s method. With respect to sucfi suggestions, it may be well to quote the following which occurs in connection with one of them. ‘But considering that the process is one which no person will very often perform, we doubt whether to recommend even this abridgment. All such simplifica- tions tend to make the computer lose sight of the uniformity of method which runs through the whole; and we have always found them, in rules which occur only now and then, to afford greater • assistance h\ for (jetting the method than in abbreviating it.” Penny Cyclopaedia, article Involution. Find a root in each of the following equations : 259. Newton’s Method of Approximation. — Find In’ trial two numbers a and b, one loss and the other greater than a root of the equation f(x) = 0 and very nearly equal to it ; then at least one real root lies between these numbers (Art. 252), and suppose a to be nearer the root than h ; let a + h denote the exact value of the root, so that h is a 2. + 4x^ - 5x - 20 = 0. 3. x^ + - 9x - 57.623G25 = 0. 4. a;-* - 4.'«3 - 3.r -f 27 = 0. ^?is. 2.23G08. 3.45. 3.679G. APPROXIMATION BY DOUBLE POSITION. 537 small fractiou which is to be determined. Substituting a+li for X in the given equation, we have, by Art. 240, /(a + h) = f{a) + hf{a) + + = 0. Now since li is supposed to be a small fraction, 7i®, . . . will be small compared with /< ; if we neglect the squares and higher powers of U in the above equation, we shall have approximately h =-f{a) Appljung this approximate value of h to the assumed root a gives us « - /(a) as a new approximation to the roots of the given equation. Denote this new approximation by rq, and then proceeding as before we obtain «i - /(«i) as a new approximation ; and so on. (See Todhunter’s Theory of Equations) . The following example of Newton’s method was selected by Newton himself : Find the value of x in the equation, x^ — 2x — 5 = 0. yliis. 2.09455148 nearly. 260. Approximation by Double Position. — Find by trial two numbers a and 5, one less and the other greater than a root of the equation /(x) = 0, and very nearly equal to it ; then at least one root lies between these numbers (Art. 252), and suppose a to be nearer the root than b. Let A and B denote the results when a and b are separately substituted for x in f{x) ; and assume that the results, which may also be considered as the errors of the results, are pro- portional to the errors of the assumed numbers. Although this assumption is not strictly' correct, yet if the numbers a and b are nearl}' equal to the root, the error of the assump- 538 APPROXIMATION BY DOUBLE POSITION. tiou is small, and becomes less and less the further the approximation is continued. Thus we have A: B : : x — a : x — h. A — B-.h — a :: A : X — a. Hence we have approximately the following Rule. — As the difference of the errors is to the difference of the two assumed nitmbers, so is either error to the correc- tion of the corresponding number. This correction is to be added to the corresponding num- ber when it is too small, and subtracted when it is too great, and the result will be a nearer approximation to the true root. This result and another assumed number such that the root may lie between them, may now be used, for obtain- ing a second approximate value ; and so on. It is generally best to begin with two numbers which differ from each other only by unity ; and it is also best to use the smaller error. This method of approximation is applicable whether the equation is fractional, radical, or exponential; it may there- fore be applied to many equations which cannot be solved by either of the preceding methods. 1. Find a root of the equation a? x'^ x — 100 = 0. When 4 and 5 are substituted for x in the equation, the results are —16 and -f-55. Hence we have 16 -t- 55:5 - 4 :: 16:x - 4; .x- = 4.22. As the root is greater than 4.2, we now assume 4.2 and 4.3 ; substituting these for x in the given equation, and proceeding as before, we obtain for a second approximation x = 4.264. Assuming 4.264 and 4.265 for x, and repeating the opera- ation, we obtain for a third approximation x = 4.2644299 nearl3L 2. Find a root of x^ + 30x — 420 = 0. H?is. 6.170103. EXAMPLES. 539 EXAMPLES. Solve the following equations : 1. a® - 3a® - 46a — 72 = 0. Ans. 9. ) -2, - ■4. 2. a® - 2a® - 4a + 8 = 0< 2 , 2, - -2. 3. X* + 4a® — a® — 16a — 12 = 0. 2, -1, » _9 _ — 9 •3. 4. X* — 27a® + 14a + 120 = 0. 3, 4, ) -2, - ■5. 5. x^ - 12a® 4- 47a® - 72a + 36 = = 0. 1, , 2, 3, 6. 6 . x^ — 9a® + 17a® + 27a ■ - 60 = 0. 4, 5, ±V3. 7. a® + 5a^ + a® — 16a® — 20a — 16 == 0. Ans. 2, — 2, -4, = 1 1 3. Solve the following reciprocal equations : 8 . x*+5x^+2x^+5x+l = 0. Ans.^(-5±\/21)*, 9. x‘^ - 3x^ + 3x - 1 = 0. ±1, i(3 ± V^5). 10. £C* - 10a;=* + 26a;2 - lOx + 1 = 0. 3 ±2^2, 2±V^. 11. 4x^ - 4x^ - 7x‘^ - 4:X + i = 0. 2, I, |(-3±V'^). 12. 9x'^- 24a;3 - 2^2- 24a- + 9 = 0. 3, i, -i(-l±V^. 13. a;® — llx* + 17a;® + 17a;® — 11a* + 1 = 0. Ans. —1, ^(9 ± n/T7), -^(3 ± ^5). 14. a® — 5x* + 9a® — 9a® + 5a — 1 = 0. Ans. 1, 1(1 ± V^), 4(3 ± s/5). 15. 4a® - 24a® + 57a^ - 73a® + 57a® - 24a + 4 = 0. Ans. 2, 2, 4) i'(l i V — 3) . 16. a® + 1 = 0. Ans. -1, i[l+\/5±V(+2V5-10)], i[l-v/5±V(-2V5-10)]. 17. a® - 1 = 0. ±1) ±V^, ± V^* Solve the following cubic equations : 18. .a® + 63a - 316 = 0. Ans. 4, -2 ± 5\^. 19. a® + 21a + 342 = 0. -6, 3 ± 4V^. 540 EXAMPLES. 20. X® - 6x2 + 13^ _ 10 = 0. 21. X® + 6x® - 32 = 0. 22. X® - 6x® + 3x - 18 = 0. 23. X® - 15x® - 33x + 847 = 0. 24. 28x® - 9x® + 1 = 0. 25. 2x® + 25x® + 56x — 147 = 0. Ans. 2, 2 ± V—1. 2, -4, -4. 6, +V^, -V^. 11 , 12 ^ 7 . -hi(2 ± V-3). /, i , 1 j. Find a root by Horner’s method in the following equations : 26. X® 4- 3x® + 5x — 178 = 0. 27. X® + llx® - 102x + 181 = 0. 28. X® -W x2 - 500 = 0. 29. X® 4- X® + X — 100 = 0. 30. X® 4- lOx® 4- 6x - 120 = 0. 31. x"*- 8x® 4- 20x® - 15x 4- .5 = 0. 32. .x^ + — 8x - 15 = 0. Ans. 4.5388. 3.21312. 7.61728. 4.26443. 2.8330665. 1.284724. 2.302775. 33. X® 4- 4x^ - 3x® 4- lOx® - 2x - 962 = 0. 3.385777. 34. x^ - 2x® 4- 21x - 23 = 0. 1.1574515. 35. x^ — 5x® 4- 3x® 4- 35x — 70 = 0. 2.6457513. Find a root by Newton’s method in the following equa- tions : 36. X® 4- 12.x® - 18x - 216 = 0. 4.2426407. 37. X® 4- - 3 = 0. 1.21341166. Find a root b}’ the method of Double Position in the fol- lowing equations : 38. X® 4- 2x - 20 = 0. 39. X* 4- lOx® 4- 8x - 120 = 0. 2.46954565. 2.76834546. \ N .i 513.02 B788C 5478